Skip to main content
#
Full text of "Elementary synthetic geometry of the point, line and circle in the plane"

##
See other formats

l^.^^' '(O^ <^^^ Digitized by tine Internet Arciiive in 2008 witii funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation littp://www.arcliive.org/details/elementarysyntlieOOdupuricli ELEMENTARY SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. ELEMENTARY SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY OF THE POINT, LINE AND CIRCLE IN THE PLANE BY N. F. DUPUIS, M.A, F.R.S.C. PROFESSOR OF PURE MATHEMATICS IN THE UNIVERSITY OF QUEEN's COLLEGE, KINGSTON, CANADA. MACMILLAN AND CO. AND NEW YORK. 1889. [Aii rights reset fed] CAJORl PREFACE. The present work is a result of the Author's experience in teaching Geometry to Junior Classes in the University for a series of years. It is not an edition of " Euclid's Elements," and has in fact little relation to that cele- brated ancient work except in the subject matter. The work differs also from the majority of modern treatises on Geometry in several respects. The point, the line, and the curve lying in a common plane are taken as the geometric elements of Plane Geometry, and any one of these or any combination of them is defined as a geometric plane figure. Thus a triangle is not the three-cornered portion of the plane inclosed within its sides, but the combination of the three points and three lines forming what are usually termed its vertices and its sides and sides produced. This mode of considering geometric figures leads 911298 VI PREFACE. naturally to the idea of a figure as a locus, and con- sequently prepares the way for the study of Cartesian Geometry. It requires, however, that a careful distinction be drawn between figures which are capable of super- position and those which are equal merely in area. The properties of congruence and equality are accord- ingly carefully distinguished. The principle of motion in the transformation of geometric figures, as recommended by Dr. Sylvester, and as a consequence the principle of continuity are freely employed, and an attempt is made to generalize all theorems which admit of generalization. An endeavour is made to connect Geometry with Algebraic forms and symbols., (i) by an elementary study of the modes of representing geometric ideas in the symbols of Algebra, and (2) by determining the consequent geometric interpretation which is to be given to each interpretable algebraic form. The use of such forms and symbols not only shortens the statements of geometric relations but also conduces to greater generality. In dealing with proportion the method of measures is employed in preference to that of multiples as being PREFACE. Vll equally accurate, easier of comprehension, and more in line with elementary mathematical study. In dealing with ratio I have ventured, when comparing two finite lines, to introduce Hamilton's word tensor as seeming to me to express most clearly what is meant. After treating of proportion I have not hesitated to employ those special ratios known as trigonometric func- tions in deducing geometric relations. In the earlier parts of the work Constructive Geometry is separated from Descriptive Geometry, and short descriptions are given of the more important geometric drawing-instruments, having special reference to the geometric principles of their actions. Parts IV. and V. contain a synthetic treatment of the theories of the mean centre, of inverse figures, of pole and polar, of harmonic division, etc., as applied to the line and circle ; and it is believed that a student who becomes acquainted with these geometric extensions in this their simpler form will be greatly assisted in the wider discussion of them in analytical conies. Through- out the whole work modern terminology and modern processes have been used with the greatest freedom, regard being had in all cases to perspicuity. viii PREFACE. As is evident from what has been said, the whole intention in preparing the work has been to furnish the student with that kind of geometric knowledge which may enable him to take up most successfully the modern works on Analytical Geometry. N. F. D Queen's Coli.k;ge, Kingston, Canada. CONTENTS. PART I. I'AGE Section L— The Line and Point. Section II.— Two Lines — Angles. Section III. — Three or more Lines and Determined Points — The Triangle. Section IV.— Parallels. Section V.— The Circle. Section VI. — Constructive Geometry, . . . i PART II. Section I.-— Comparison of Areas. Section II.-- iVIeasurement of Lengths and Areas. Section 111. — Geometric Interpretation of Algebraic Forms. Section IV. — Areal Relations — Squares and Rect- angles. Section V. — Constructive Geometry, . 91 PART III. Section I. — Proportion amongst Line - Segments. Section II. — Functions of Angles and their Applications in Geometry, 147 X CONTENTS. PART IV. PAGE Section I. — Geometric Extensions. Section II. — Centre of Mean Position. Section III.— Col- linearity and Concurrence. Section IV.— Inver- sion and Inverse Figures. Section V. — Pole and Polar. Section VI.— The Radical Axis. Sec- tion VII. — Centres and Axes of Perspective or Similitude, 178 PART V. Section I.— Anharmonic Division. Section II. — Harmonic Ratio. Section III. — Anharmonic Properties. Section IV.— Polar Reciprocals and Reciprocation. Section V. — Homography and Involution, 252 ELEMENTARY SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. PART I GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. 1°. A statement which explains the sense in which some word or phrase is employed is 2i definition. A definition may select some one meaning out of several attached to a common word, or it may introduce some technical term to be used in a particular sense. Some terms, such as space, straight, direction, etc., which express elementary ideas cannot be defined. 2°. Def. — A Theorem is the formal statement of some mathematical relation. A theorem may be stated for the purpose of being sub- sequently proved, or it may be deduced from some previous course of reasoning. In the former case it is called a Proposition^ that is, some- thing proposed, and consists of {a) the statement or enuncia- tion of the theorem, and {b) the argument or proof. The purpose of the argument is to show that the truth of the theorem depends upon that of some preceding theorem whose truth has already been established or admitted. Ex. " The sum of two odd numbers is an even number " is a theorem. 3°. A theorem so elementary as to be generally accepted as true without any formal proof, is an axiom. « A 2 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Mathematical axioms are general or particular, that is, they apply to the whole science of mathematics, or have special applications to some department. The principal general axioms are : — i. The whole is equal to the sum of all its parts, and therefore greater than any one of its parts. ii. Things equal to the same thing are equal to one another, iii. If equals be added to equals the sums are equal, iv. If equals be taken from equals the remainders are equal. V. If equals be added to or taken from unequals the results are unequal, vi. If unequals be taken from equals the remainders are unequal, vii. Equal multiples of equals are equal ; so also equal submultiples of equals are equal. The axioms which belong particularly to geometry will occur in the sequel. 4°. The statement of any theorem may be put into the hypothetical form, of which the type is— If A is B then C is D. The first part " if A is B " is called the hypothesis^ and the second part " then C is D " is the conclusion. Ex. The theorem " The product of two odd numbers is an odd number " can be arranged thus : — Hyp. If two numbers are each an odd number. Concl. Then their product is an odd number. 5°. The statement " If A is B then C is D " may be im- mediately put into the form — If C is not D then A is not B, which is called the contrapositive of the former. The truth of a theorem establishes the truth of its contra- GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. 3 positive, and vice versa, and hence if either is proved the other is proved also. 6°. Two theorems are converse to one another when the hypothesis and conclusion of the one are respectively the conclusion and hypothesis of the other. Ex. If an animal is a horse it has four legs. Converse. If an animal has four legs it is a horse. As is readily seen from the foregoing example, the truth of a theorem does not necessarily establish the truth of its con- verse, and hence a theorem and its converse have in general to be proved separately. But on account of the peculiar relation existing between the two, a relation exists also between the modes of proof for the two. These are known as the direct and indirect modes of proof. And if any theorem which admits of a converse can be proved directly its converse can usually be proved indirectly. Examples will occur hereafter. 7°. Many geometric theorems are so connected with their converses that the truth of the theorems establishes that of the converses, and vice versa. The necessary connection is expressed in the Rule of Identity i its statement being : — If there is but 07ie X and one V, and if it is proved that X is V, then it follows that V is X. Where X and Y stand for phrases such as may form the hypotheses or conclusions of theorems, and the " is " between them is to be variously interpreted as " equal to," " corre- sponds to," etc. Ex. Of two sides of a triangle only one can be the greater, and of the two angles opposite these sides only one can be the greater. Then, if it is proved that the greater side is opposite the greater angle it follows that the greater angle is opposite the greater side. 4 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. In this example there is but one X (the greater side) and one Y (the greater angle), and as X is (corresponds to or is opposite) Y, therefore Y is (corresponds to or is opposite) X. 8°. A Corollary is a theorem deduced from some other theorem, usually by some qualification or restriction, and occasionally by some amplification of the hypothesis. Or a corollary may be derived directly from an axiom or from a definition. As a matter of course no sharp distinction can be drawn between theorems and corollaries. Ex. From the theorem, " The product of two odd numbers is an odd number," by making the two numbers equal we obtain as a corollary, " The square of an odd number is an odd number." Exercises. State the contrapositives and the converses of the follow- ing theorems : — 1. The sum of two odd numbers is an even number. 2. A diameter is the longest chord in a circle. 3. Parallel lines never meet. 4. Every point equidistant from the end-points of a line- segment is on the right bisector of that segment. SECTION I. THE LINE AND POINT. 9°. Space may be defined to be that which admits of length or distance in every direction ; so that length and direction are fundamental ideas in studying the geometric properties of space. THE LINE AND POINT. 5 Every material object exists in, and is surrounded by space. The limit which separates a material object from the space which surrounds it, or which separates the space occupied by the object from the space not occupied by it, is a surface. The surface of a black-board is the limit which separates the black-board from the space lying without it. This surface can have no thickness, as in such a case it would include a part of the board or of the space without or of both, and would not be the dividing Hmit. io°. A flat surface, as that of a black-board, is a plane surface, or a Plaiie, Pictures of geometric relations drawn on a plane surface as that of a black-board are usually called Plane Geometric Figures^ because these figures lie in or on a plane. Some such figures are known to every person under such names as " triangle," " square," " circle," etc. 11°. That part of mathematics which treats of the properties and relations of plane geometric figures is Plane Geometry. Such is the subject of this work. The plane upon which the figures are supposed to lie will be referred to as the plane, and unless otherwise stated all figures will be supposed to lie in or on the same plane. 12°. The Line. When the crayon is drawn along the black-board it leaves a visible mark. This mark has breadth and occupies some of the surface upon which it is drawn, and by way of distinction is called a physical line. By continually diminishing the breadth of the physical line we make it approximate to the geometric line. Hence we may consider the geometric line as being the limit towards which a physical line approaches as its breadth is continually diminished. We may consequently consider a geometric line as length abstracted from every other consideration. 6 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. This theoretic relation of a geometric line to a physical one is of some importance, as whatever is true for the physical line, independently of its breadth, is true for the geometric line. And hence arguments in regard to geometric lines may be replaced by arguments in regard to physical lines, if from such arguments we exclude everything that would involve the idea of breadth. The diagrams employed to direct and assist us in geo- metric investigations are formed of physical lines, but they may equally well be supposed to be formed of threads, wires or light rods, if we do not involve in our arguments any idea of the breadth or thickness of the lines, threads, wires or rods employed. In the practical applications of Geometry the diagrams frequently become material or represent material objects. Thus in Mechanics we consider such things as levers, wedges, wheels, cords, etc., and our diagrams become representations of these things. A pulley or wheel becomes a circle, its arms become radii of the circle, and its centre the centre of the circle ; stretched cords become straight lines, etc. 13°. The Point. A point marks position, but has no size. The intersection of one line by another gives a point, called the point of intersection. If the lines are physical, the point is physical and has some size, but when the lines are geometric the point is also geometric. 14°. Straight Line. For want of a better definition we may say that a straight line is one of which every part has the same direction. For every part of a line must have some direction, and when this direction is common to all the parts of the line, the line is straight. The word " direction " is not in itself definable, and when applied to a line in the absolute it is not intelligible. But THE LINE AND POINT. 7 every person knows what is meant by such expressions as "the same direction," "opposite direction," etc., for these express relations between directions, and such relations are as readily comprehended as relations between lengths or other magnitudes. The most prominent property, and in fact the distinctive property of a straight line, is the absolute sameness which characterizes all its parts, so that two portions of the same straight line can differ from one another in no respect except in length. Def. — A plane figure made up of straight lines only is called a rectilinear figure. 15°. A Curve is a line of which no part is straight ; or a curve is a line of which no two adjacent parts have the same direction. The most common example of a curve is a circle or portion of a circle. Henceforward, the word "line," unless otherwise qualified, will mean a straight line. 16°. The "rule" or "straight-edge" is a strip of wood, metal, or other solid with one ^d^g^^ made straight. Its common use is to guide the pen or pencil in drawing lines in Practical Geometry. 17°. A Plane is a surface such that the line joining any two arbitrary points in it coincides wholly with the surface. The planarity of a surface may be tested by applying the rule to it. If the rule touches the surface at some points and not at others the sujface is not a plane. But if the rule touches the surface throughout its whole length, and in every position and direction in which it can be applied, the surface is a plane. The most accurately plane artificial surface known is probably that of a well-formed plane mirror. Examina- 8 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. tion of the images of objects as seen in such mirrors is capable of detecting variations from the plane, so minute as to escape all other tests. 1 8°. A surface which is not plane, and which is not com- posed of planes, is a curved surface. Such is the surface of a sphere, or cylinder. 19°. The point, the line, the curve, the plane and the curved surface are the elements which go to make up geo- metric figures. Where a single plane is the only surface concerned, the point and line lie in it and form a plane figure. But where more than one plane is concerned, or where a curved surface is concerned, the figure occupies space, as a cube or a sphere, and is called a spatial figure or a solid. The study of spatial figures constitutes Solid Geometry, or the Geometry of Space, as distinguished from Plane Geometry. 20°. Given Point and Line. A point or line is said to be given when we are made to know enough about it to enable us to distinguish it from every other point or line ; and the data which give a point or line are commonly said to determine it. A similar nomenclature applies to other geometric ele- ments. The statement that a point or line lies in a plane does not give it, but a point or line placed in the plane for future reference is considered as being given. Such a point is usually called an origin^ and such a line a datum line^ an initial lijie, a pri^ne vector ^ etc. 21°. Def. I. — A line considered merely as a geometric element, and without any limitations, is an indefinite line. 2. — A limited portion of a line, especially when any refer- ence is had to its length, is 2i finite line, or a line-segment, or simply a segment. THE LINE AND POINT. 9 That absolute sameness (14°) which characterizes every part of a line leads directly to the following conclusions : — (i) No distinction can be made between any two segments of the same line equal in length, except that of position in the line. (2) A line cannot return into, or cross itself. (3) A line is not necessarily limited in length, and hence, in imagination, we may follow a line as far as we please without coming to any necessary termination. This property is conveniently expressed by saying that a line extends to infinity. 3. — The hypothetical end-points of any indefinite line are said to be points at infinity. All other points are finite points. 22°. Notation. A point is denoted by a single letter where- ever practicable, as " the point A." An indefinite line is also denoted by a single letter as "the line L," but in this case the letter l has no reference to any point. a b A segment is denoted by naming its end points, as the " segment AB," where A and B are the e7id points. This is a biliteral., or two-letter notation. A segment is also denoted by a single letter, when the limits of its length are supposed to be known, as the " seg- ment rt." This is a uniliteral, or one-letter notation. The term "segment" involves the notion of some finite length. When length is not under consideration, the term " line " is preferred. Thus the " Hne AB " is the indefinite line having A and B as two points upon it. But the "segment AB" is that portion of the line which lies between A and B. 23°. In dealing with a hne-segment, we frequently have to consider other portions of the indefinite line of which the segment is a part. lO SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. As an example, let it be required to divide the segment AB , __, , into two parts whereof one shall ^ ^ ^ c be twice as long as the other. To do this we put C in such a position that it may be twice as far from one of the end-points of the segment, A say, as it is from the other, B. But on the indefinite line through A and B we may place C so as to be twice as far from A as from B. So that we have two points, C and C, both satisfying the condition of being twice as far from A as from B. Evidently, the point C does not divide the segment AB in the sense commonly attached to the word divide. But on account of the similar relations held by C and C to the end- points of the segment, it is convenient and advantageous to consider both points as dividing the segment AB. When thus considered, C is said to divide the segment internally and C to divide it externally in the same manner. 24°. Axiom. — Through a given point only one line can pass in a given direction. Let A be the given point, and let the segment AP mark — V. the given direction. Then, of all the lines that can pass through the point A, only one can have the direction AP, and this one must lie along and coincide with AP so as to form with it virtually but one line. Cor. I. A finite point and a direction determine one line. Cor. 2. Two given finite points determine one line. For, if A and P be the points, the direction AP is given, and hence the line through A and having the direction AP is given. Cor. 3. Two lines by their intersection determine one finite point. For, if they determined two, they would each pass through the same two points, which, from Cor. 2, is impossible. Cor. 4. Another statement of Cor. 2 is — Two lines which have two points in common coincide and form virtually but one line. THE LINE AND POINT. II 25°. Axiom. — A straight line is the shortest distance be- tween two given points. Although it is possible to give a reasonable proof of this axiom, no amount of proof could make its truth more apparent. The following will illustrate the axiom. Assume any two points on a thread taken as a physical line. By separating these as far as possible, the thread takes the form which we call straight, or tends to take that form. Therefore a straight finite line has its end-points further apart than a curved line of equal length. Or, a less length of line will reach from one given point to another when the line is straight than when it is curved. Def. — The distance between two points is the length of the segment which connects them or has them as end-points. 26°. Superpositiojt. — Comparison of Figjcres.—V\[e assume that space is homogeneous, or that all its parts are alike, so that the properties of a geometric figure are independent of its position in space. And hence we assume that a figure may be supposed to be moved from place to place, and to be turned around or over in any way without undergoing any change whatever in its form or properties, or in the relations existing between its several parts. The imaginary placing of one figure upon another so as to compare the two is called siiperpositioti. By superposi- tion we are enabled to compare figures as to their equality or inequality. If one figure can be superimposed upon another so as to coincide with the latter in every part, the two figures are necessarily and identically equal, and become virtually one figure by the superposition. 27°. Two line-segments can be compared with respect to length only. Hence a line is called a magnitude of one dimension. Two segments are equal when the end-points of one can be 12 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. made to coincide with the end-points of the other by super- position. 28°. Def. — The stun of two segments is that segment which is equal to the two when placed in line with one end-point in each coincident. Let AB and DE be two segments, and on the line of which D E AB is a segment let BC be equal to ^ DE. Then AC is the stem of AB "a b c and DE. This is expressed symbolically by writing AC = AB + DE, where = denotes equality in length, and + denotes the placing of the segments AB and DE in line so as to have one common point as an end-point for each. The interpretation of the whole is, that AC is equal in length to AB and DE together. 29°. Def, — The difference between two segments is the segment which remains when, from the longer of the segments, a part is taken away equal in length to the shorter. Thus, if AC and DE be two segments of which AC is the longer, and if BC is equal to DE, then AB is the difference between AC and DE. This is expressed symbolically by writing AB=AC-DE, which is interpreted as meaning that the segment AB is shorter than AC by the segment DE. Now this is equivalent to saying that AC is longer than AB by the segment DE, or that AC is equal to the sum of AB and DE. Hence when we have AB = AC- DE we can write AC = AB-l-DE. We thus see that in using these algebraic symbols, =, +, and -, a term, as DE, may be transferred from one side of THE LINE AND POINT. 1 3 the equation to another by changing its sign from + to - or vice versa. Owing to the readiness with which these symbolic expres- sions can be manipulated, they seem to represent simple alge- braic relations, hence beginners are apt to think that the work- ing rules of algebra must apply to them as a matter of necessity. It must be remembered, however, that the formal rules of algebra are founded upon the properties of numbers, and that we should not assume, without examination, that these rules apply without modification to that which is not number. This subject will be discussed in Part II. 30°. Def. — That point, in a line-segment, which is equi- distant from the end-points is the 7niddle point of the segment. It is also called the internal point of bisection of the seg- ment, or, when spoken of alone, simply \h^ point of bisection. Exercises. 1. If two segments be in line and have one common end- point, by what name will you call the distance between their other end-points .'* 2. Obtain any relation between " the sum and the differ- ence" of two segments and "the relative directions "of the two segments, they being in line. 3. A given line-segment has but one middle point 4. In Art. 23°, if C becomes the middle point of AB, what becomes of C 1 5. In Art. 30° the internal point of bisection is spoken of. What meaning can you give to the " external point of bisection " 1 14 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. SECTION 11. RELATIONS OF TWO LINES.— ANGLES. 31°. When two lines have not the same direction they are said to make an angle with one another, and an angle is a c differejice in direction. '^ Illustratio7i.'—'L^\. A and B represent two stars, and E the A' *A position of an observer's eye. Since the lines EA and EB, which join the eye and the stars, have not the same direction they make an angle with one another at E. 1. If the stars appear to recede from one another, the angle at E becomes greater. Thus, if B moves into the position of C, the angle between EA and EC is greater than the angle between EA and EB, Similarly, if the stars appear to approach one another, the angle at E becomes smaller ; and if the stars become coinci- dent, or situated in the same line through E, the angle at E vanishes. Hence an angle is capable of continuous increase or diminution, and is therefore a magnitude. And, being magnitudes, angles are capable of being compared with one another as to greatness, and hence, of being measured. 2. If B is moved to B', any point on EB, and A to A', any point on EA, the angle at E is not changed. Hence increas- ing or diminishing one or both of the segments which form an angle does not affect the magnitude of the angle. Hence, also, there is no community in kind between an angle and a line-segment or a line. Hence, also, an angle cannot be measured by means of line-segments or lines. RELATIONS OF TWO LINES. — ANGLES. 1 5 32°. Def. — A line which changes its direction in a plane while passing through a fixed point in the plane is said to rotate about the point. The point about which the rotation takes place is the pole^ and any segment of the rotating line, having the pole as an end-point, is a radius vector. Let an inextensible thread fixed at O be kept stretched by a pencil at P. Then, when P moves, keeping the thread straight, OP becomes a radius vector rotating about the pole O. ^ "^ When the vector rotates from direction OP to direction OP' it describes the angle between OP and OP'. Hence we have the following : — Def. I. — The angle between two lines is the I'otation neces- sary to bring one of the lines into the direction of the other. The word " rotation," as employed in this definition, means the amount of turning effected, and not the process of turning. Def. 2. — For convenience the lines OP and OP', which, by their difference in direction form the angle, are called the arms of the angle, and the point O where the arms meet is ih.^ vertex. Cor. From 31°, 2, an angle does not in any way depend upon the lengths of its arms, but only upon their relative directions. 33°. Notation of Angles. — i. The symbol z. is used for the word " angle." 2. When two segments meet at a vertex the angle between them may be denoted by a single letter ^^^^^^B placed at the vertex, as the ^O , or by a letter with or without an arch of dots, as /^S ; or by three letters of which the extreme ones denote points upon the arms of the angle and the middle one denotes the vertex, as lAOB. l6 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 3. The angle between two lines, when the vertex is not pictured, or not referred to, is expressed by l{L. M), or LM, where L and M denote the lines in the one-letter notation (22°); or z.(AB, CD), where AB and CD denote the Hnes in the two-letter notation. -Two angles are equal when the arms of the one may be made to coincide in direction respec- tively with the arms of the other ; or when the angles are described by the same rotation. Thus, if, when C is placed upon O, and O'A' is made to lie along OA, O'B' can also be made to lie along OB, the ^lA'O'B' is equal to lAOB. This equality is symbolized thus : Z-A'0'B'=^A0B. Where the sign = is to be interpreted as indicating the possibility of coincidence by superposition. 35". Sum and Difference of Angles. — The sutn of two angles is the angle described by a radius vector which describes the two angles, or their equals, in succession. sp' Thus if a radius vector starts from co- incidence with OA and rotates into direction OP it describes the zJVOP. If it next rotates into direction OP' it d A describes the /.POP'. But in its whole rotation it has described the zAOP'. Therefore, ^AOP' = ^AOP-H^POP'. Similarly, ^AOP = ^AOP'-^POP'. Z>i?/:— When two angles, as AOP and POP', have one arm in common lying between the remaining arms, the angles are adjacent angles. 36°. Def. — A radius vector which starts from any given direction and makes a complete rotation so as to return to its original direction describes a circumangley ox perigon. RELATIONS OF TWO LINES.— ANGLES. 1 7 One-half of a circumangle is a straight angle, and one- fourth of a circumangle is a right angle. 37°. Theorem. — If any number of lines meet in a point, the sum of all the adjacent angles formed is a circumangle. OA, OB, OC, ..., OF are lines meeting in O. Then ^AOB + ^BOC-f-^COD + ...-f^FOA = a circumangle. D. Proof. — A radius vector which starts from coincidence with OA and rotates into the successive directions, OB, OC, ..., 1^ ^ OF, OA describes in succession the angles AOB, BOC, ..., EOF, FOA. But in its complete rotation it describes a circumangle (36°). /-AOB + ^BOC + ... + Z.FOA = a circumangle. q.e.d. Cor. The result may be thus stated : — The sum of all the adjacent angles about a point in the plane is a circumangle. 38°. Theorem. — The sum of all the adjacent angles on one side of a line, and about a point in the line is a straight angle. O is a point in the line AB ; then ^AOC + iLCOB = a straight angle. Proof. — Let A and B be any two points in the line, and let the figure formed by X*' AB and OC be revolved about AB without displacing the points A and B, so that OC may come into a position OC. Then (24°, Cor. 2) O is not displaced by the revolution, ^AOC = ^AOC', and ^BOC = ^BOC'; .lAOC + :LBOC = £.AOC' + ^BOC', and since the sum of the four angles is a circumangle {zT^^ therefore the sum of each pair is a straight angle (36°). q.e.d. Cor. I. The angle between the opposite directions of a line is a straight angle. B 1 8 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Cor. 2. If a radius vector be rotated until its direction is reversed it describes a straight angle. And conversely, if a radius vector describes a straight angle its original direction is reversed. Thus, if OA rotates through a straight angle it comes into the direction OB. And conversely, if it rotates from direction OA to direction OB it describes a straight angle. 39°. When two lines L and M cut one another four angles are formed about the point of intersection, any one of which may be taken to be the angle between the lines. These four angles consist of two pairs of opposite or vertical angles, viz., A, A', and B, B', A being opposite A', and B being opposite B'. 40°. Theorem. — The opposite angles of a pair formed by two intersecting lines are equal to one another. Proof.— ^A + ^B = a straight angle (38°) and Z.A' + A.B = a straight angle. (38°) -lA=^A', and ^B = ^B'. q.e.d. Def. I. — Two angles which together make up a straight angle are supplementary to one another, and one is called the supplement of the other. Thus, A is the supplement of B', and B of A'. Cor. If aA = aB, then Z.A' = ^B=z.B', and all four angles are equal, and each is a right angle (36°). Therefore, if two adjacent angles formed by two intersect- ing lines are equal to each other, all four of the angles so formed are equal to one another, and each is a right angle. Def. 2. — When two intersecting lines form a right angle at their point of intersection, they are said to be perpendicular to one another, and each is perpendicular to the other. RELATIONS OF TWO LINES. — ANGLES. IQ Perpendicularity is denoted by the symbol X, to be read "perpendicular to" or "is perpendicular to." A right angle is denoted by the symbol ~\. The symbol ± also denotes two right angles or a straight angle. De/. 3. — When two angles together make up a right angle they are complementary to one another, and each is the C07nplement of the other. The right angle is the simplest of all angles, for when two lines form an angle they form four angles equal in opposite pairs. But if any one of these is a right angle, all four are right angles. Perpendicularity is the most important directional relation in the applications of Geometry. Def. 4. — An acute angle is less than a right angle, and an obtuse angle is greater than a right angle, and less than two right angles. 41°. From (36°) we have I circumangle = 2 straight angles =4 right angles. In estimating an angle numerically it may be expressed in any one of the given units. If a right angle be taken as the unit, a circumangle is expressed by 4, i.e. four right angles, and a straight angle by 2. Angles less than a right angle may be expressed, approxi- mately at least, by fractions, or as fractional parts of the right angle. For practical purposes the right angle is divided into 90 equal parts called degrees ; each degree is divided into 60 equal parts called minutes ; and each minute into 60 equal parts called seconds. Thus an angle which is one-seventh of a circumangle contains fifty-one degrees, twenty-five minutes, and forty-two 20 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. seconds and six-sevenths of a second. This is denoted as follows : — 51° 25' 42f". 42°. Theorem. — Through a given point in a line only one perpendicular can be drawn to the line. The hne OC is _L AB, and OD is any other line through O. Then OD is not _L AB. Proof.— 'Y\i^ angles BOC and COA are each right angles (40°, Def. 2). Therefore BOD is not a right angle, and OD is not ± AB. But OD is any line other than OC. Therefore OC is the only perpendicular. q.e.d. Def. — The perpendicular to a line-segment through its middle point is the right bisector of the segment. Since a segment has but one middle point (30°, Ex. 3), and since but one perpendicular can be drawn to the segment through that point, .*. a Hite-segmeiit has but one right bisector, 43°. Def. — The lines which pass through the vertex of an angle and make equal angles with the arms, are the bisectors of the angle. The one which lies within the angle is the internal bisector, and the one lying without is the external bisector. Let AOC be a given angle ; and ■£ let EOF be so drawn that ^AOE = Z.EOC. EF is the internal bisector of the angle AOC. ^ Also, let GOH be so drawn that D ^COG = ^HOA. HG is the external bisector of the angle AOC. z.COG = ^HOA (hyp.) and z.HOA = z_GOB, (40°) ^COG=^GOB; RELATIONS OF TWO LINES. — ANGLES. 21 and the external bisector of AOC is the internal bisector of its supplementary angle, COB, and vice versa. The reason for calling GH a bisector of the angle AOC is given in the definition, viz., GH makes equal angles with the arms. Also, OA and OC are only parts of indefinite lines, whose angle of intersection may be taken as the Z.AOC or as the -lCOB. 44°. Just as in 23° we found two points which are said to divide the segment in the same manner, so we may find two lines dividing a given angle in the same manner, one dividing it internally, and the other externally. Thus, if OE is so drawn that the Zj\OE is double the /_EOC, some line OG may also be drawn so that the ^AOG is double the Z.GOC. This double relation in the division of a segment or an angle is of the highest importance in Geometry. 45°. Theorem. — The bisectors of an angle are perpendicular to one another. EF and GH are bisectors of the Z-AOC ; then EF is ± GH. Proof.- and adding, But Exercises. 1. Three lines pass through a common point and divide the plane into 6 equal angles. Express the value of each angle in right angles, and in degrees. 2. OA and OB make an angle of 30°, how many degrees are there in the angle made by OA and the external bisector of the angle AOB.^ LS.OC- = i^OC, V OE is a bisector ; LCOG: =|^COB, V OG is a bisector ; Z.EOG: = |^AOB. Z.AOB is a straight angle, (38°, Cor. i) ^EOG is a right angle. (36°) 22 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 3. What is the supplement of 13° 27' 42"? What is its complement ? 4. Two lines make an angle a with one another, and the bisectors of the angle are drawn, and again the bisectors of the angle between these bisectors. What are the angles between these latter lines and the original ones ? 5. The lines L, M intersect at O, and through O, V and M' are drawn J_ respectively to L and M. The angle be- tween L' and M' is equal to that between L and M. SECTION III. THREE OR MORE POINTS AND LINES. THE TRIANGLE. 46°. Theorem. — Three points determine at most three lines ; and three lines determine at most three points. Proof I. — Since (24°, Cor. 2) two points determine one line, three points detemiine as many lines as we can form groups from three points taken two and two. Let A, B, C be the points ; the groups are AB, BC, and CA. Therefore three points determine at most three lines. 2. — Since (24°, Cor. 3) two lines determine one point, three lines determine as many points as we can form groups from three lines taken two and two. But if L, M, N be the Hnes the groups are LM, MN, and NL. Therefore three lines determine by their intersections at most three points. THREE OR MORE POINTS AND LINES. 23 47°. Theorem. — Four points determine at most six lines ; and four lines determine at most six points. Proof.—-!. Let A, B, C, D be the four points. The groups of two are AB, AC, AD, BC, BD, and CD ; or six in all. Therefore six lines at most are deter- mined. 2. Let L, M, N, K be the lines. The groups of two that can be made are KL, KM, KN, LM, LN, and MN ; or six in all. Therefore six points of intersection at most are determined. Cor. In the first case the six lines determined pass by threes through the four points. And in the second case the six points determined lie by threes upon the four lines. This reciprocality of property is very suggestive, and in the higher Geometry is of special importance. Ex. Show that 5 points determine at most 10 lines, and 5 lines determine at most 10 points. And that in the first case the lines pass by fours through each point ; and in the latter, the points lie by fours on each line. 48°. Def. — A triangle is the figure formed by three lines and the determined points, or by three points and the deter- mined lines. The points are the vertices of the triangle, and the line- segments which have the points as end-points are the sides. The remaining portions of the determined lines are usually spoken of as the "sides produced." But in many cases generality requires us to extend the term \ " side " to the whole line. ^- Thus, the points A, B, C are the vertices of the triangle ABC. The segments AB, BC, CA are the sides. The portions AE, BF, CD, etc., extending outwards as far as required, arc the sides produced. 24 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. The triangle is distinctive in being the rectilinear figure for which a given number of lines determines the same number of points, or vice versa. Hence when the three points, forming the vertices, are given, or when the three lines or line-segments forming the sides are given, the triangle is com- pletely given. This is not the case with a rectilinear figure having any number of vertices other than three. If the vertices be four in number, with the restriction that each vertex is determined by the intersection of two sides, any one of the figures in the ^ margin will satisfy the conditions. Hence the giving of the four vertices of such a figure is not sufficient to completely determine the figure. 49°. Def.—i. The angles ABC, BCA, CAB are the in- ternal angles of the triangle, or simply the angles of the triangle. 2. The angle DCB, and others of like kind, are external angles of the triangle. 3. In relation to the external angle DCB, the angle BCA is the adjacent interjial angle, while the angles CAB and ABC are opposite iJiternal angles. 4. Any side of a triangle may be taken as its base, and then the angles at the extremities of the base are its basal angles, and the angle opposite the base is the vertical angle. The vertex of the vertical angle is the vertex of the triangle when spoken of in relation to the base. 50°. Notation. — The symbol A is commonly used for the word triangle. In certain cases, which are always readily apprehended, it denotes the area of the triangle. THREE OR MORE POINTS AND LINES. 25 The angles of the triangle are denoted usually by the capital letters A, B, C, and the sides opposite by the cor- responding small letters a, b^ c. 51°. Def. — When two figures compared by superposition coincide in all their parts and become virtually but one figure they are said to be congruent. Congruent figures are distinguishable from one another only by their position in space and are said to be identically equal. Congruence is denoted by the algebraic symbol of identity, = ; and this symbol placed between two figures capable of congruence denotes that the figures are congruent. Closed figures, like triangles, admit of comparison in two ways. The first is as to their capability of perfect coinci- dence ; when this is satisfied the figures are congruent. The second is as to the magnitude or extent of the portions of the plane enclosed by the figures. Equality in this respect is expressed by saying that the figures are equal. When only one kind of comparison is possible, as is the case with line-segments and angles, the word equal is used. CONGRUENCE AMONGST TRIANGLES. 52°. Theorem. — Two triangles are congruent when two sides and the included angle in the one are respectively equal to two sides and the included angle in the other. If AB=A'B"| the triangles y^B /^B' BC = B'C \ are congru- and z.B = z.B' J ent. Proof.— V\2.CQ AABC on A ~c a^ C AA'B'C so that B coincides with B', and BA lies along B'A'. z.B = /lB', BC lies along B'C, (34°) and V AB = A'B' and BC = B'C'; A coincides with A' and C with C, (27") 26 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. and .*. AC lies along A'C ; (24°, Cor. 2) and the As coinciding in all their parts are congruent. (51°) q.e.d. Cor. Since two congruent triangles can be made to coin- cide in all their parts, therefore — When two triangles have two sides and the included angle in the one respectively equal to two sides and the included angle in the other, all the parts in the one are respectively- equal to the corresponding parts in the other. 53°. Theorem. — Every point upon the right bisector of a segment is equidistant from the end-points of the segment AB is a line-segment, and P is any point on its right bisector PC. Then PA = PB. Proof.— In the As APC and BPC, AC = CB, (42°, Def.) z_ACP = z_BCP, (42°, Def.) and PC is common to both As ; AAPC = ABPC, (52°) and.-. PA = PB. (52°, Cor.) ^.^.^/. Def. I. — A triangle which has two sides equal to one an- other is an isosceles triangle. Thus the triangle APB is isosceles. The side AB, which is not one of the equal sides, is called the base. Cor. I. Since the AAPC=ABPC, ^A=^B. Hence the basal angles of an isosceles triangle are equal to one another. Cor. 2. From (52°, Cor.), ^APC = Z-BPC ; Therefore the right bisector of the base of an isosceles tri- angle is the internal bisector of the vertical angle. And since these two bisectors are one and the same line the converse is true. THREE OR MORE POINTS AND LINES. 27 Def. 2. — A triangle in which all the sides are equal to one another is an equilateral triangle. Cor. 3. Since an equilateral triangle is isosceles with re- spect to each side as base, all the angles of an equilateral triangle are equal to one another ; or, an equilateral triangle is equiangular. 54°. Theorem. — Every point equidistant from the end- points of a line-segment is on the right bisector of that segment. (Converse of 53°.) PA = PB. Then P is on the right bisector ofAB. Q^ Proof. — If P is not on the right bisector of AB, let the right bisector cut AP in Q. Then QA=QB, (53°) but PA=PB, (hyp.) QP = PB-QB, or PB = QP + QB, which is not true. (25°, Ax.) Therefore the right bisector of AB does not cut AP ; and similarly it does not cut BP ; therefore it passes through P, or P is on the right bisector. q.e.d. This form of proof should be compared with that of Art. 53°, they being the kinds indicated in 6°. This latter or indirect form is known as proof by reductio ad absurdum (leading to an absurdity). In it we prove the conclusion of the theorem to be true by showing that the acceptance of any other conclusion leads us to some relation which is absurd or untrue. 55°. Def. — The line-segment from a vertex of a triangle to the middle of the opposite side is a median of the triangle. Cor. I. Every triangle has three medians. Cor. 2. The median to the base of an isosceles triangle is 28 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. the right bisector of the base, and the internal bisector of the vertical angle. (53°j Cor. 2.) Cor. 3. The three medians of an equilateral triangle are the three right bisectors of the sides, and the three internal bisectors of the angles. 56°. Theorem.— \i two angles of a triangle are equal to one another, the triangle is isosceles, and the equal sides are opposite the equal angles. (Converse of 53°, Cor. I.) z.PAB=^PBA, then PA = PB. Proof. — If P is on the right bisector of AB, PA=PB. (53°) If P is not on the right bisector, let AP A fc B cut the right bisector in Q. Then QA=QB, and ^QAB=z.QBA. (53° and Cor. i) But ^PBA = ^QAB; (hyp.) z.PBA = ^QBA, which is not true unless P and Q coincide. Therefore if P is not on the right bisector of AB, the Z.PAB cannot be equal to the Z-PBA. But they are equal by hypothesis ; P is on the right bisector, and PA=PB. q.e.d. Cor. If all the angles of a triangle are equal to one another, all the sides are equal to one another. Or, an equiangular triangle is equilateral. 57°. From 53° and 56° it follows that equality amongst the sides of a triangle is accompanied by equality amongst the angles opposite these sides, and conversely. Also, that if no two sides of a triangle are equal to one another, then no two angles are equal to one another, and conversely. THREE OR MORE POINTS AND LINES. 29 Def. — A triangle which has no two sides equal to one another is a scalene triangle. Hence a scalene triangle has no two angles equal to one another. 58°. Theorem. — If two triangles have the three sides in the one respectively equal to the three sides in the other the triangles are congruent. b b' If A'B' = AB]the As ABC B'C' = BC hand A'B'C are C'A' = CA J congruent. A< Proof.— iMXVi the AA'B'C over and place A' on A, and A'C along AC, and let B' fall at some point D. A'C' = AC,C falls ate, (27°) and AADC is the AA'B'C in its reversed position. Since AB = AD and CB - CD, A and C are on the right bisector of BD, and AC is the right bisector of BD. (54°) Z.BAC =z.DAC ; (53°, Cor. 2) and the As BAC and DAC are congruent. (52°) AABC = AA'B'C. q.e.d. 59°. Theorem. — If two triangles have two angles and the included side in the one equal respectively to two angles and the included side in the other, the triangles are congruent. If lM^lK'X and A'C'=ACJ the As ABC and A'B'C are congruent. A c A' c' Proof. — Place A' on A, and A'C along AC. 30 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Because A'C' = AC, C coincides with C ; and V lA.'=lI^, A'B' lies along AB ; and V lC=lC, CV>' lies along CB ; B' coincides with B, and the triangles are congruent. (27°) (24°, Cor. 3) q.e.d. 60°. Theorem. — An external angle of a triangle is greater than an internal opposite angle. The external angle BCD is greater than the internal opposite angle ABC or BAG. Proof. — Let BF be a median produced until FG = BF. Then the As ABF and GGF have BF = FG, (construction) AF = FC, • (55°) and z.BFA = ^GFC. (40°) AABF=ACGF, (52°) and z.FCG = ^BAC. (52°, Cor.) But /LACE is greater than Z.FCG. z.ACEis>^BAC. Similarly, aBCD is>^ABC, and ^BGD=^ACE. (40°) Therefore the ^s BCD and ACE are each greater than each of the Z.S ABC and BAG. q.e.d. 61°. Theorem. — Only one perpendicular can be drawn to a line from a point not on the line. Proof.— L^t B be the point and AD the line ; and let BG be _L to AD, and BA be any line other than BG. Then aBCD is>z.BAG, (60°) ^BAG is not a ~|, and BA is not ± to AD. But BA is any line other than BG ; BC is the only perpendicular from B to AD. q.e.d A THREE OR MORE POINTS AND LINES. 3 1 Cor. Combining this result with that of 42° we have — Through a given point only one perpendicular can be drawn to a given line. 62°. Theorem.— Oi any two unequal sides of a triangle and the opposite angles — 1. The greater angle is opposite the longer side. 2. The longer side is opposite the greater angle. 1. BAis>BC; b then Z.C is > ^A. Proof.— L^t BD = BC. Then the A^DC is isosceles, ** "^^^ and z_BDC = z.BCD. (53°, Cor. i) But z.BDCis>z.A, (60°) and ^BCAis>^BCD; /LBCAis>z.BAC; or, Z.C is>Z-A. q.e.d. 2. lQ is > ^A ; then AB is > BC. Proof. — From the Rule of Identity (7°), since there is but one longer side and one greater angle, and since it is shown (i) that the greater angle is opposite the longer side, therefore the longer side is opposite the greater angle. q.e.d. Cor. I. In any scalene triangle the sides being unequal to one another, the greatest angle is opposite the longest side, and the longest side is opposite the greatest angle. Also, the shortest side is opposite the smallest angle, and conversely. Hence if A, B, C denote the angles, and a, b, c the sides respectively opposite, the order of magnitude of A, B, C is the same as that of a., b, c. 63°. Theorem. — Of all the segments between a given point and a line not passing through the point — 1. The perpendicular to the line is the shortest. 2. Of any two segments the one which meets the line I SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. further from the perpendicular is the longer ; and con- versely, the longer meets the line further from the perpendicular than the shorter does. 3. Two, and only two segments can be equal, and they lie upon opposite sides of the perpendicular. P P is any point and BC a line not pass- ing through it, and PA is _L to BC. I. PA which is J_ to BC is shorter than any segment PB which is not ± "b to BC. Z-PAC = ^PAB=~1- (hyp.) z.PACis>^PBC; (60°) ^PABis>^PBC, and .-. PB is > PA. (62°, 2) q.e.d. 2. AC is > AB, then also PC is > PB. P;-^^— Since AC is > AB, let D be the point in AC sothatAD = AB. Then A is the middle point of BD, and PA is the right bisector of BD. (42°, Def.) PD = PB (53°) and aPDB=^PBD. (53°, Cor i) But ^PDBis>^PCB; A.PBD is>z.PCB, and PCis>PB. (62°, 2) The converse follows from the Rule of Identity. q.e.d. 3. Proof. — In 2 it is proved that PD = PB. Therefore two equal segments can be drawn from any point P to the line BC ; and these lie upon opposite sides of PA. No other segment can be drawn equal to PD or PB. For it must lie upon the same side of the perpendicular, PA, as one of them. If it lies further from the perpendicular than this one it is longer, (2), and if it lies nearer the perpendicular it is shorter. Therefore it must coincide with one of them and is not a third line. q.e.d THREE OR MORE POINTS AND LINES. 33 ■l^^/'—The length of the perpendicular segment between any point and a line is the distance of the point from the line. 64°. Theorevt.~\i two triangles have two angles in the one respectively equal to two angles in the other, and a side opposite an equal angle in each equal, the triangles are congruent. If /-A'=^Althen the As ^C' = aC \h:^'C and ABC and A'B' = AbJ are congruent. Proof.— V\2iQ^ A' on A, and A'B' along AB. A'B' = AB, B' coincides with B. Also, *.• z.A' = ^A, A'C lies along AC. Now if O does not coincide with C, let it fall at some other point, D, on AC. Then, •.' AB = A'B', AD = A'C, and lA==lM, .'. AA'B'C = AABD, (52°) and ^ADB = z.C'. (52°, Cor.) But lC-=lC, (hyp.) .-. ^ADB = ^C, which is not true unless D coincides with C. Therefore C must fall at C, and the As ABC and A'B'C are congruent. The case in which D may be supposed to be a point on AC produced is not necessary. For we may then super- impose the AABC on the AA'B'C. 65°. Theorem. — If two triangles have two sides in the one respectively equal to two sides in the other, and an angle opposite an equal side in each equal, then — 1. If the equal angles be opposite the longer of the two sides in each, the triangles are congruent. 2. If the equal angles be opposite the shorter of the two C 34 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. sides in each, the triangles are not necessarily con- gruent. A'B' = AB, B'C = BC, ^A'=^A. I. If BCis>AB, AA'B'C = AABC. Proof.— Since BC is > AB, therefore B'C is > A'B'. Place A' on A and A'C along AC. ^A' = ^A, and A'B' = AB, B' coincides with B. (34°, 27°) Let BP be _L AC ; then B'C cannot lie between BA and BP (63°, 2), but must lie on the same side as BC ; and being equal to BC, the lines B'C and BC coincide (63°, 3), and hence AA'B'C' = AABC. q.eJ. 2. If BC is < AB, the As A'B'C and ABC may or may not be congruent. -Since AB is > BC, (63°, 2) Proof.- PA is > PC. Let PD = PC, then BD = BC. Now, let AA'B'C be superimposed on AABC so that A' coincides with A, B' with B, and A'C lies along AC. Then, since we are not given the length of A'C, B'C may coincide with BC, and the As A'B'C and ABC be congruent; or B'C may coincide with BD, and the triangles A'B'C and ABC be not congruent. q.e.d. Hence when two triangles have two sides in the one respectively equal to two sides in the other, and an angle opposite one of the equal sides in each equal, the triangles are not necessarily congruent unless some other relation exists between them. THREE OR. MORE POINTS AND LINES. 35 The first part of the theorem gives one of the suffici- ent relations. Others are given in the following cor- ollaries. Cor. I. If lC is a~J> BC and BD (2nd Fig.) coincide along BP, and the As ABD and ABC become one and the same. Hence C must fall at C, and the As A'B'C and ABC are congruent. Cor. 2. The Z.BDA is supplementary to BDC and therefore to BCA. And •.• lBDA is > Z.BPA, .'. ^BDA is greater than a right angle, and the /.BCA is less than a right angle. Hence if, in addition to the equalities of the theorem, the angles C and C are both equal to, or both greater or both less than a right angle, the triangles are congruent. De/.— Angles which are both greater than, or both equal to, or both less than a right angle are said to be 0/ the same affection. 66°. A triangle consists of six parts, three sides and three angles. When two triangles are congruent all the parts in the one are respectively equal to the corresponding parts in the other. But in order to establish the congruence of two triangles it is not necessary to establish independently the respective equality of all the parts ; for, as has now been shown, if certain of the corresponding parts be equal the equality of the remaining parts and hence the congruence of the triangles follow as a consequence. Thus it is sufficient that two sides and the included angle in one triangle shall be respectively equal to two sides and the included angle in another. For, if we are given these parts, we are given con- sequentially all the parts of a triangle, since every triangle having two sides and the included angle equal respectively to those given is congruent with the given triangle. Hence a triangle is given when two of its sides and the angle between them are given. 36 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. A triangle is given or detertnined by its elements being given according to the following table : — 1. Three sides, (58°) 2. Two sides and the included angle, (52°) 3. Two angles and the included side, (59°) 4. Two angles and an opposite side, (64°) 5. Two sides and the angle opposite the longer side, (65°) When the three parts given are two sides and the angle opposite the shorter side, two triangles satisfy the conditions, whereof one has the angle opposite the longer side supple- mentary to the corresponding angle in the other. This is known as the ambiguous case in the solution of triangles. A study of the preceding table shows that a triangle is completely given when any three of its six parts are given, with two exceptions : — (i) The three angles ; (2) Two sides and the angle opposite the shorter of the two sides. 67°. Theorem. — If two triangles have two sides in the one respectively equal to two sides in the other, but the included angles and the third sides unequal, then 1. The one having the greater included angle has the greater third side. 2. Conversely, the one having the greater third side has the greater included angle. ^8' A'B' = AB and B'C' = BC, and I. ^ABC is > /lA'B'C, then AC is > A'C. Proof. — Let A' be placed upon A and A'B' along AB. E c "-^^, Since A'B' = AB, B' falls on B. "^ Let C fall at some point D. Then ABD is A'B'C in its new position. THREE OR MORE POINTS AND LINES. 37 Let BE bisect the ^DBC and meet AC in E. Join DE. Then, in the As DBE and CBE, DB = BC, (hyp.) ^DBE = z.CBE, (constr.) and BE is common. ADBE = ACBE, and DE = CE. But AC = AE + EC = AE + ED, which is greater than AD. ACis>A'C'. q.eJ. 2. AC is > A'C, then ^ABC is greater than ^A'B'C Proof. — The proof of this follows from the Rule of Identity. 68°. Theorem. — i. Every point upon a bisector of an angle is equidistant from the arms of the angle. 2. Conversely, every point equidistant from the arms of an angle is on one of the bisectors of the angle. 1. OP and OQ are bisectors of the angle AOB, and PA, PB are perpendiculars from P upon the arms. Then PA=PB. ''X X^-^P Proof.— T\i^ As POA and FOB a' are congruent, since they have two angles and an opposite side equal in each (64°); .-. PA=PB. If Q be a point on the bisector OQ it is shown in a similar manner that the perpendiculars from Q upon the arms of the angle AOB are equal. q.e.d. 2. If PA is i. to OA and PB is ± to OB, and PA = PB, then PO is a bisector of the angle AOB. Proof— 1\i^ As POA and POB are congruent, since they have two sides and an angle opposite the longer equal in each (65°, i) ; .'. z.POA = ^POB, and PO bisects the ^AOB. 38 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Similarly, if the perpendiculars from Q upon OA ana OB are equal, QO bisects the i^BOA', or is the external bisector of the ^AOB. q.e.d. LOCUS. 69°. A locus is the figure traced by a variable point, which takes all possible positions subject to some constraining condition. If the point is confined to the plane the locus is one or more lines, or some form of curve. Illustration. — In the practical process of drawing a line or curve by a pencil, the point of the pencil becomes a variable (physical) point, and the line or curve traced is its locus. In geometric applications the point, known as iht generat- ing point, moves according to some law. The expression of this law in the Symbols of Algebra is known as the equation to the locus. Cor. I. The locus of a point in the plane, equidistant from the end-points of a given line-segment, is the right bisector of that segment. This appears from 54°. Cor. 2. The locus of a point in the plane, equidistant from two given lines, is the two bisectors of the angle formed by the lines. This appears from 68°, converse. Exercises. 1. How many lines at most are determined by 5 points } by 6 points ? by 12 points ? 2. How many points at most are determined by 6 lines "i by 12 lines .? 3. How many points are determined by 6 lines, three of which pass through a common point 1 THREE OR MORE POINTS AND LINES. 39 4. How many angles altogether are about a triangle? How many at most of these angles are different in magni- tude ? What is the least number of angles of different magnitudes about a triangle ? 5. In Fig. of 53°, if Q be any point on PC, APAQ=APBQ. 6. In Fig. of 53°, if the APCB be revolved about PC as an axis, it will become coincident with APCA. 7. The medians to the sides of an isosceles triangle are equal to one another. 8. Prove 58° from the axiom " a straight line is the shortest distance between two given points." 9. Show from 60° that a triangle cannot have two of its angles right angles. 10. If a triangle has a right angle, the side opposite that angle is greater than either of the other sides. 11. What is the locus of a point equidistant from two sides of a triangle ? 12. Find the locus of a point which is twice as far from one of two given lines as from the other. 13. Find the locus of a point equidistant from a given line and a given point. SECTION IV. PARALLELS, ETC 70°. Def. — Two lines, in the same plane, which do not intersect at any finite point are parallel. Next to perpendicularity, parallelism is the most important directional relation. It is denoted by the symbol ||, which is to be read " parallel to " or " is parallel to " as occasion may require. The idea of parallelism is identical with that of sameness 40 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. of direction. Two line-segments may differ in length or in direction or in both. If, irrespective of direction, they have the same length, they are equal ; if, irrespective of length, they have the same direction, they are parallel ; and if both length and direction are the same they are equal and parallel. Now when two segments are equal one may be made to coincide with the other by superposition without change of length, whether change of direction is required or not. So when they are parallel one may be made to coincide with the other without change of direction, whether change of length is required or not. Axiom. — Through a given point only one line can be drawn parallel to a given line. This axiom may be derived directly from 24°. 71°. Theorem. — Two lines which are perpendicular to the same line are parallel. L and M are both ± to N, then L is || to M. Proof. — If L and M meet at any point, two . perpendiculars are drawn from that point to the line N. But this is impossible (61°). Therefore L and M do not meet, or they are parallel. Cor. All lines perpendicular to the same line are parallel to one another. 72°. Theorem. — Two lines which are parallel are perpen- dicular to the same line, or they have a common perpendicular. (Converse of 71°.) L is II to M, and L is ± to N ; then M is JL to N. Proof.— \i M is not _L to N, through any point P in M, let K be ± to N. PARALLELS, ETC. 4 1 Then K is || to L. (71°) But M is II to L. (hyp.) Therefore K and M are both jj to L, which is impossible unless K and M coincide. (70°, Ax.) Therefore L and M are both J_ to N, or N is a common perpendicular. 'j'^. Def. — A line which crosses two or more lines of any system of lines is a transversal. E/ Thus EF is a transversal to the lines ^ ^/ g AB and CD. In general, the angles formed by ^ a transversal to any two lines are ^/h distinguished as follows — /f a and e^ c and^, b and/, d and h are pairs of corresponding angles. c and f^ e and d are pairs of alternate angles. c and <?, ^and/are pairs of interadjacent angles. 74°. When a transversal crosses parallel lines — 1. The alternate angles are equal in pairs. 2. The corresponding angles are equal in pairs. 3. The sum of a pair of interadjacent angles is a straight angle. g^ AB is II to CD and EF is a transversal, a p / b_ 1. ^AEF = ^EFD. Proof. — Through O, the middle point of EF, draw PQ a common _L to AB and CD. (72°) Then AOPE = AOQF ; (64°) zAEF = Z.EFD. q.e.d. Similarly the remaining alternate angles are equal. 2. ^AEG = ^CFE, etc. Proof.— Z.AE G = supplement of zJVEF, (40°, Def. i) and z_CFE = supplement of -lEFD. 42 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. But zJVEF=^EFD ; (74°, i) ^AEG = ^CFE. q.e.d. Similarly the other corresponding angles are equal in pairs. 3. z_AEF + ^CFE=±. Proof.— ^AEF=^EFD, (74°, and £.CFE + ^EFD=_L; (38°) zAEF+^CFE=±. q.e.d. Cor. It is seen from the theorem that the equality of a pair of alternate angles determines the equality in pairs of corre- sponding angles, and also determines that the sum of a pair of interadjacent angles shall be a straight angle. So that the truth of any one of the statements i, 2, 3 determines the truth of the other two, and hence if any one of the statements be proved the others are indirectly proved also. 75°. Theorem. — If a transversal to two lines makes a pair of alternate angles equal, the two lines are parallel. (Con- verse of 74° in part.) If ^AEF = Z-EFD, AB and CD are parallel. /'/w/— Draw PQ as in 74°, ± to AB, AOPE = AOQF; (59°) .-. :lOPE=^OQF=~l Q and.-. AB is |1 to CD. {7i°)q.e.d. Cor. It follows from 74° Cor. that if a pair of corresponding angles are equal to one another, or if the sum of a pair of interadjacent angles is a straight angle, the two lines are parallel. 76°. Theoreju. — The sum of the internal angles of a tri- angle is a straight angle. ABC is a A ; the^A + ^B + ^C=±. A c D Proof.— l.^X CE be || to AB, and D be any point on AC produced. A P / B /^ c f/ PARALLELS, ETC. 43 Then BC is a transversal to the parallels AB and CE ; zlABC=a.BCE. (74°, i) Also, AC is a transversal to the same parallels ; z.BAC=^ECD. (74°, 2) ^BC + ^BAC=^BCD = supplement of Z.BCA. lA + lB + lC=±. q.e.d. Cor. An external angle of any triangle is equal to the sum of the opposite internal angles. (49°, 3) For ^BCD=^A+Z-B. T]". From the property that the sum of the three angles of any triangle is a straight angle, and therefore constant, we deduce the following — 1. When two angles of a triangle are given the third is given also ; so that the giving of the third furnishes no new information. 2. As two parts of a triangle are not sufficient to deter- mine it, a triangle is not determined by its three angles, and hence one side, at least, must be given (66°, i). 3. The magnitude of any particular angle of a triangle does not depend upon the size of the triangle, but upon the form only, i.e., upon the relations amongst the sides. 4. Two triangles may have their angles respectively equal and not be congruent. But such triangles have the same form and are said to be similar. 5. A triangle can have but one obtuse angle ; it is then called an obtuse-angled triangle. A triangle can have but one right angle, when it is called a right-angled triangle. All other triangles are called acute-angled triangles, and have three acute angles. 6. The acute angles in a right-angled triangle are comple- mentary to one another. 44 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 78°. Theorem. — If a line cuts a given line it cuts every parallel to the given line. Let L cut M, and let N be any parallel to M. Then L cuts N. Proof. — If L does not cut N it is || to N. But M is II to N. Therefore through the same point P two lines L and M pass which are both || to N. But this is impossible ; (70°, Ax.) L cuts N. And N is any line || to M. L cuts every line || to M. q.e.d. 79°. Theorem. — If a transversal to two lines makes the sum of a pair of interadjacent angles less than a straight angle, the two lines meet upon that side of the transversal upon which these inter- adjacent angles lie. GH is a transversal to AB and CD, and ^BEF-|-^EFD<±. Then AB and CD meet towards B and D. Proof. — Let LK pass through E making Z.KEF = Z.EFC. Then LKis||toCD. But AB cuts LK in E, it cuts CD. (78°) Again, •.* EB lies between the parallels, and AE does not, the point where AB meets CD must be on the side BD of the transversal. q.e.d. Cor. Two lines, which are respectively perpendicular to two intersecting lines, intersect at some finite point. 80°. Def — I. A closed figure having four lines as sides is in general called a quadrangle 'c or quadrilateral. in Thus ABCD is a quadrangle. 2. The line-segments AC and BD which join opposite vertices are the diagonals of the quadrangle. PARALLELS, ETC. 45 3. The quadrangle formed when two parallel lines intersect two other parallel lines is a para lie logra7?t, and is usually- denoted by the symbol 1 7 . 81°. Theorem. — In any parallelogram — 1. The opposite sides are equal to one another. 2. The opposite internal angles are equal to one another. 3. The diagonals bisect one another. A_ AB is II to CD, and AC is || to BD, and AD and BC are diagonals. Z--'''^^^ 1. Then AB = CDandAC = BD. c d Proof. — •.• AD is a transversal to the parallels AB and CD, ^CDA=^DAB. (74°, i) and •.' AD is a transversal to the parallels AC and BD, ^CAD=^ADB. (74°, i) Hence, ACAD = ABDA. (59°) AB = CD and AC = BD. q.e.d. 2. iLCAB = z.BDCand^ACD = ^DBA. Proof.— It is shown in i that z.CAD=^DB and Z.BAD = ^DC; .*. by adding equals to equals, ^CAB = ^CDB. Similarly, ^ACD = ^ABD. q.e.d. 3. AO = OD and BO = OC. Proof -The AAO C = AD O B ; (59°) AO = OD andBO = OC. q.e.d. 82°. Def I.— A parallelogram which has two adjacent sides equal is a rhombus. B^ Cor. I. Since AB = BC (hyp.) = DC(8i°, i)=AD. A< Therefore a rhombus has all its sides equal to one another. Cor. 2. Since AC is the right bisector of BD, and BD the right bisector of AC, 46 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Therefore the diagonals of a rhombus bisect one another at right angles. Def. 2. — A parallelogram which has one right angle is a rectangle^ and is denoted by the symbol en. Cor. 3. Since the opposite angle is a ~~1, (81°, 2) and the adjacent angle is a ""], (74°) 3) Therefore a rectangle has all its angles right angles. Cor. 4. The diagonals of a rectangle are equal to one another. Def. 3. — A rectangle with two adjacent sides equal is a square^ denoted by the symbol □. Cor. 5. Since the square is a particular form of the rhombus and a particular form of the rectangle, Therefore all the sides of a square are equal to one another; all the angles of a square are right angles ; and the diagonals of a square are equal, and bisect each other at right angles. 84°. Theorem. — If three parallel lines intercept equal seg- ments upon any one transversal they do so upon every transversal. AE is a transversal to the three parallels AB, CD, and EF, so that AC = CE, and BF is any other transversal. Then BI) = DF. Proof. — Let GDH passing through D be II to AE. Then AGDC and CDHE are Z=7s. (80°, 3) GD=AC = CE = DH. (81°, i) Also, ^GBD =^DFH, •.' AG is || to EF, (74°, i) and ^BDG = ^FDH ; (40°) ABDG = AFDH, (64°) and BD = DF. q.e.d. Def— The figure ABFE is a trapezoid. Therefore a trapezoid is a quadrangle having only two PARALLELS, ETC. 47 sides parallel. The parallel sides are the major and minor bases of the figure. Cor. I. Since and 2CD=AG + EH, =AB+BG+EF-HF BG=HF; CD = |(AB + EF). Or, the line-segment joining the middle points of the non- parallel sides of a trapezoid is equal to one-half the sum of the parallel sides. Cor. 2. When the transversals meet upon one of the extreme parallels, the figure AEF' becomes a A and CD' becomes a line passing through the middle points of the sides AE and AF', and parallel to the base EF'. Therefore, i, the line through the middle point of one side of a triangle, parallel to a second side, bisects the third side. And, 2, the line through the middle points of two sides of a triangle is parallel to the third side. 85°. Theorem. — The three medians of a triangle pass through a common point. CF and AD are medians intersecting in O. Then BO is the median to AC. Proof.— L^\. BO cut AC in E, and let AG II to FC meet BO in G. Join CG. Then, BAG is a A and FO passes through the middle of AB and is || to AG, .-. O is the middle of BG. (84^ Cor 2) Again, DO passes through the middle points of two sides of the ACBG, CG is II to AO or OD ; AOCG is a E=7, and AE = EC; BO is the median to AC. (84°, Cor. 2) (81°, 3) q.e.d. 48 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Def. — When three or more lines meet in a point they are said to be concurrent. Therefore the three medians of a triangle are concurrent. Def. 2. — The point of concurrence, O, of the medians of a triangle is the centi'oid oi the triangle. Cor. Since O is the middle point of BG, and E is the middle point of OG, (8i°, 3) OE = |OB, = 1EB. Therefore the centroid of a triangle divides each median at two-thirds of its length from its vertex. 86°. Theorem. — The three right bisectors of the sides of a B triangle are concurrent. / Proof. — Let L and N be the right bisectors of BC and AB respectively. Then L and N meet in some point O. A ^ (79°, Cor.) Since L is the right bisector of BC, and N of AB, O is equidistant from B and C, and is also equidistant from A and B. (53°) Therefore O is equidistant from A and C, and is on the right bisector of AC. (54°) Therefore the three right bisectors meet at O. q.e.d. Cor. Since two lines L and N can meet in only one point (24°, Cor. 3), O is the only point in the plane equidistant from A, B, and C. Therefore only one finite point exists in the plane equi- distant from three given points in the plane. Def. — The point O, for reasons given hereafter, is called the ctrcumce7itre of the triangle ABC. ^j". Def. — The line through a vertex of a triangle per- pendicular to the opposite side is the perpendicular to that side, and the part of that line intercepted within the triangle is the altitude to that side. PARALLELS, ETC. 49 Where no reference to length is made the word altitude is often employed to denote the indefinite line forming the perpendicular. Hence a triangle has three altitudes, one to each side. 88°. Theorem. — The three altitudes of a triangle are con- current. Proof.— Let ABC be a triangle. Complete the zz::7s, ACBF, ABDC, and ABCE. Then •.• FB is 1| to AC, and BD is || to AC, FBD is one line, (70°, Ax.) and FB = BD. Similarly, DCE is one line and DC = CE, and EAF is one line and EA = AF. Now, ••• AC is II to FD, the altitude to AC is J_ to FD and passes through B the middle point of FD. (72°) Therefore the altitude to AC is the right bisector of FD, and similarly the altitudes to AB and BC are the right bisec- tors of DE and EF respectively. But the right bisectors of the sides of the ADEF are concurrent (86°), therefore the altitudes of the AABC are concurrent. q.e.d. Def, — The point of concurrence of the altitudes of a tri- angle is the orthocentre of the triangle. Cor. I. If a triangle is acute-angled {j']°^ 5), the circum- centre and orthocentre both lie within the triangle. 2. If a triangle is obtuse-angled, the circumcentre and orthocentre both lie without the triangle. 3. If a triangle is right-angled, the circumcentre is at the middle point of the side opposite the right angle, and the orthocentre is the right-angled vertex. Def. — The side of a right-angled triangle opposite the right angle is called the hypothenuse. D 50 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 89°. The definition of 80° admits of three different figures, viz. : — I. The normal quadrangle (i) in which each of the in- ternal angles is less than a straight angle. When not (i) (2) (3) otherwise qualified the term quadrangle will mean this figure. 2. The quadrangle (2) in which one of the internal angles, as at D, is greater than a straight angle. Such an angle in a closed figure is called a re-entrant angle. We will call this an inverted quadrangle. 3. The quadrangle (3) in which two of the sides cross one another. This will be called a crossed quadrangle. In each figure AC and BD are the diagonals ^ so that both diagonals are within in the normal quadrangle, one is within and one without in the inverted quadrangle, and both are without in the crossed quadrangle. The general properties of the quadrangle are common to all three forms, these forms being only variations of a more general figure to be described hereafter. 90°. Theorem. — The sum of the internal angles of a quad- rangle is four right angles, or a circumangle. Proof. — The angles of the two As ABD and CBD make up the internal angles of the quadrangle. But these are ± + _L ; (76°) therefore the internal angles of the quadrangle are together equal to four right angles. q.e.d. Cor. This theorem applies to the inverted quadrangle as is readily seen. PARALLELS, ETC. 5 1 91°. Theorem. — If two lines be respectively perpendicular to two other lines, the angle between the first two is equal or supplementary to the angle between the last two. BC is _L to AB and CD is _L to AD. Then ^(BC . CD) is equal or supplemen- tary to 4AB . AD). Proof. — ABCD is a quadrangle, and the Ls> at B and D are right angles ; ^BAD+^BCD = J_, or Z.BCD is supplementary to Z.BAD. But /.BCD is supplementary to ^ECD ; and the ^(BC . CD) is either the angle BCD or DCE. (39°) Z.(BC . CD) is = or supplementary to ^BAD. q.e.d. Exercises. 1. ABC is a A, and A', B', C are the vertices of equilateral As described outwards upon the sides BC, CA, and AB respectively. Then AA'=BB' = CC'. (Use 52°.) 2. Is Ex. I true when the equilateral As are described " inwardly " or upon the other sides of their bases ? 3. Two lines which are parallel to the same line are parallel to one another. 4. L' and M' are two lines respectively parallel to L and M. Thez.(L'.M')=^(L.M). 5. On a given line only two points can be equidistant from a given point. How are they situated with respect to the perpendicular from the given point 1 6. Any side of a A is greater than the difference between the other two sides. 7. The sum of the segments from any point within a A to the three vertices is less than the perimeter of the A 8. ABC is a A and P is a point within on the bisector of z_A. Then the difference between PB and PC is less than that between AB and AC, unless the A is isosceles. 52 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 9. Is Ex. 8 true when the point P is without the A? but on the same bisector ? 10. Examine Ex. 8 when P is on the external bisector of A, and modify the wording of the exercise accordingly. 11. CE and CF are bisectors of the angle between AB and CD, and EF is parallel to AB. Show that EF is bisected by CD. 12. If the middle points of the sides of a A be joined two and two, the A is divided into four congruent As. 13. From any point in a side of an equilateral A lines are drawn parallel to the other sides. The perimeter of the I 7 so formed is equal to twice a side of the A- 14. Examine Ex. 13 when the point is on a side pro- duced. 15. The internal bisector of one angle of a A and the ex- ternal bisector of another angle meet at an angle which is equal to one-half the third angle of the A 16. O is the orthocentre of the AABC. Express the angles AOB, BOC, and COA in terms of the angles A, B, and C. 17. P is the circumcentre of the AABC. Express the angles APB, BPC, and CPA in terms of the angles A, B, and C. 1 8. The joins of the middle points of the opposite sides of any quadrangle bisect one another. T9. The median to the hypothenuse of a right-angled triangle is equal to one-half the hypothenuse. 20. If one diagonal of a 1 7 be equal to a side of the figure, the other diagonal is greater than any side. 21. If any point other than the point of intersection of the diagonals be taken in a quadrangle, the sum of the line-segments joining it with the vertices is greater than the sum of the diagonals. 22. If two right-angled As have the hypothenuse and an acute angle in the one respectively equal to the like parts in the other, the As are congruent. PARALLELS, ETC. 53 23. The bisectors of two adjacent angles of a 1 7 are JL to one another. 24. ABC is a A- The angle between the external bisector of B and the side AC is |(C - A). 25. The external bisectors of B and C meet in D. Then ^BDC = i(B + C). 26. A line L which coincides with the side AB of the AABC rotates about B until it coincides with BC, without at any time crossing the triangle. Through what angle does it rotate } 27. The angle required in Ex. 26 is an external angle of the triangle. Show in this way that the sum of the three external angles of a triangle is a circumangle, and that the sum of the three internal angles is a straight angle. 28. What property of space is assumed in the proof of Ex. 27? 29. Prove 76° by assuming that AC rotates to AB by crossing the triangle in its rotation, and that AB rotates to CB, and finally CB rotates to CA in like manner. SECTION V. THE CIRCLE. 92°. Def. I. — A Circle is the locus of a point which, movin< in the plane, keeps at a constant ____-^==-— b distance from a fixed point in the plane. The compasses, whatever be their form, furnish us with two points, A "^^a and B, which, from the rigidity of _ the instrument, are supposed to preserve an unvarying distance ^ ^ from one another. Then, if one of the points A is fixed, while the other B moves over the paper or other plane 54 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. surface, the moving point describes a physical circle. The limit of this physical circle, when the curved line has its thiclcness diminished endlessly, is the geometric circle. Def. 2. — The fixed point is the centre of the circle, and the distance between the fixed and moveable points is the radius of the circle. The curve itself, and especially where its length is under consideration, is commonly called the circumference of the circle. The symbol employed for the circle is 0. 93° From the definitions of 92° we deduce the following corollaries : — 1. All the radii of a are equal to one another. 2. The is a closed figure ; so that to pass from a point within the figure to a point without it, or vice versa^ it is necessary to cross the curve. 3. A point is within the 0, on the 0, or without the 0, according as its distance from the centre is less, equal to, or greater than the radius. 4. Two 0s which have equal radii are congruent ; for, if the centres coincide, the figures coincide throughout and form virtually but one figure. Def. — Circles which have their centres coincident are called concentric circles. 94°. Theore7n.—h.X\VLQ can cut a circle in two points, and in two points only. Proof Since the is a closed curve (93°, 2), a line which cuts it must lie partly within the and partly without. And the generating point (69°) of the line must cross the in passing from without to within, and again in passing from within to without. .*. a line cuts a at least twice if it cuts the at all. THE CIRCLE. 55 Again, since all radii of the same are equal, if a line could cut a three times, three equal segments could be drawn from a given point, the centre of the 0, to a given line. And this is impossible (63°, 3). Therefore a line can cut a only twice. q.e.d. Cor. I. Three points on the same circle cannot be in line ; or, a circle cannot pass through three points which are in line. 95°. Def. I. — A line which cuts a is a secant or secant-line. Def. 2. — The segment of a secant included within the is a chord. Thus the line L, or AB, is a secant, and the segment AB is a chord. (21°) The term chord whenever involv- ing the idea of length means the segment having its end- points on the circle. But sometimes, when length is not involved, it is used to denote the whole secant of which it properly forms a part. Def. 3. — A secant which passes through the centre is a centre-line, and its chord is a diameter. Where length is not implied, the term diameter is some- times used to denote the centre-Hne of which it properly forms a part. Thus M is a centre-line and CD is a diameter. 96°. Theorejn. — Through any three points not in line — 1. One circle can be made to pass. *-0 2. Only one circle can be made to pass. Proof. — Let A, B, C be three points not in line. Join AB and BC,and let L and M be the a" right bisectors of AB and BC respectively. I. Then, because AB and BC intersect at B, L and M intersect at some point O, (79° Cor.) 56 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. and O is equidistant from A, B, and C. (86°) .•. the with centre at O, and radius equal to OA, passes through B and C. q.e.d. 2. Any O through A, B, and C must have its centre equally distant from these three points. But O is the only point in the plane equidistant from A, B, and C. (86°, Cor.) And we cannot have two separate 0s having the same centre and the same radius. (93°, 4) .•. only one circle can pass through A, B, and C. q.e.d. Cor. I. Circles which coincide in three points coincide altogether and form one circle. Cor. 2. A point from which more than two equal segments can be drawn to a circle is the centre of that circle. Cor. 3. Since L is a centre-line and is also the right bisector of AB, .•. the right bisector of a chord is a centre line. Cor. 4. The AAOB is isosceles, since OA=OB. Then, if D be the middle of AB, OD is a median to the base AB and is the right bisector of AB. (55°, Cor. 2) .'. a centre-line which bisects a chord is perpendicular to the chord. Cor. 5. From Cor. 4 by the Rule of Identity, A centre line which is perpendicular to a chord bisects the chord. .*. the right bisector of a chord, the centre-line bisecting the chord, and the centre-line perpendicular to the chord are one and the same. 97°. From 92°, Def., a circle is given when the position of its centre and the length of its radius are given. And, from 96°, a circle is given when any three points on it are given. It will be seen hereafter that a circle is determined by three points even when two of them become coincident, and in higher geometry it is shown that three points determine a THE CIRCLE. 57 circle, under certain circumstances, when all three of the points become coincident. Def. — Any number of points so situated that a circle can pass through them are said to be concyclic^ and a rectilinear figure (14°, Def.) having its vertices concyclic is said to be inscribed in the circle which passes through its vertices, and the circle is said to circumscribe the figure. Hence the circle which passes through three given points is the circumcircle of the triangle having these points as ver- tices, and the centre of that circle is the circumcentre of the triangle, and its radius is the circumradius of the triangle. (86°, Def.) A hke nomenclature applies to any rectilinear figure having its vertices concyclic. 98°. Theorem. — If two chords bisect one another they are both diameters. If AP = PD and CP = PB, then P is the ''' centre. Proof. — Since P is the middle point of both AD and CB (hyp.), therefore the right bisectors of AD and CB both pass through P. But these right bisectors also pass through the centre ; (96°, Cor. 3) .'. P is the centre. (24°, Cor. 3) q.e.d. 99°. Theorem. — Equal chords are equally distant from the centre ; and, conversely, chords equally dis- ^ tant from the centre are equal. . If AB = CD and OE and OF are the per- pendiculars from the centre upon these chords, then OE = OF ; and conversely, if OE = OF, then AB = CD. ^ Proof. — Since OE and OF are centre lines J. to AB and CD, AB and CD are bisected in E and F. (96°, Cor. 5) .'. in the As OBE and ODF OB = OD, EB = FD, 58 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. and they are right-angled opposite equal sides, AOBE = AODF, and OE = OF. Conversely, by the Rule of Identity, if OE = OF, then AB = CD. q.e.d. ioo°. Theorem. — Two secants which make equal chords A ^--•'" — -^B ^ p make equal angles with the centre-line through their point of intersection. AB = CD, and PO is a centre-Hne through the point of intersection of AB and CD. Then ^APd=ACPO. Proof.— L^t OE and OF be J_ to AB and CD from the centre O. Then OE = OF, (99") AOPE = AOPF, (65°) and Z.APO=^CPO. q.e.d. Cor. I. •.* E and F are the middle points of AB and CD, (96°, Cor. 5) .-. PE = PF, PA = PC, and PB = PD. Hence, secants which make equal chords make two pairs of equal line-segments between their point of intersection and the circle. Cor. 2. From any point two equal line-segments can be drawn to a circle, and these make equal angles with the centre-line through the point. 101°. As all circles have the same form, two circles which have equal radii are equal and congruent (93°, 4), (51°). Hence equal and cojigruent are equivalent terms when applied to the circle. Def. I, — Any part of a circle is an arc. The word equal when applied to arcs means congruence or capability of superposition. Equal arcs come from the same circle or from equal circles. THE CIRCLE. 59 Def. 2.— A line which divides a figure into two parts such that when one part is revolved about the line it may be made to fall on and coincide with the other part is an axis of symmetry of the figure. 102°. Theorem. the circle. -A centre-line is an axis of symmetry of A^ — ^^B Proof. — Let AB and CD be equal chords meeting at P, and let PHOG be a centre line. Let the part of the figure which lies q> upon the F side of PG be revolved about PG until it comes to the plane on the E side of PG. Then-/ ^GPA = ^GPC, (100°) .*. PC coincides with PA. And •.• PB = PD and PA = PC, (100°, Cor. i) .*. D coincides with B, and C coincides with A. And the arc HCG, coinciding in three points with the arc HAG, is equal to it, and the two arcs become virtually but one arc. (96°, Cor. i) Therefore PG is an axis of symmetry of the O, and divides it into two equal arcs. q.e.d. Def — Each of the arcs into which a centre-line divides the circle is a semicircle. Any chord, not a centre-line, divides the circle into unequal arcs, the greater of which is called the major arc, and the other the minor arc. Cor. I. By the superposition of the theorem we see that arc AB = arc CD, arc HB=arc HD, arc GA=arc GC, arc BDCA = arc DBAC. (ist Fig.) But the arcs BDCA and AB are the major and minor arcs 60 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. to the chord AB, and the arcs DBAC and CD are major and minor arcs to the chord CD. Therefore equal chords determine equal arcs, major being equal to major and minor to minor. Cor. 2. Equal arcs subtend equal angles at the centre. 103°. Theorem. — Parallel secants intercept equal arcs on a E circle. If AB is II to CD, then arc A C = arc D B. /d Proof. — Let EF be the centre-line _L to AB. Then EF is J_ to CD also. (72^) When EBDF is revolved about EF, B comes to coincidence with A, and D with C, and the arc BD with the arc AC, arc AC = arc DB. q.e.d. Cor. Since the chord AC = chord BD, Therefore parallel chords have the chords joining their end-points equal. Exercises. 1. Any plane closed figure is cut an even number of times by an indefinite line. 2. In the figure of Art. 96°, if A, B, and C shift their relative positions so as to tend to come into line, what becomes of the point O ? 3. In the same figure, if ABC is a right angle where is the point O } 4. Given a circle or a part of a circle, show how to find its centre. 5. Three equal segments cannot be drawn to a circle from a point without it. 6. The vertices of a rectangle are concyclic. 7. If equal chords intersect, the segments of one between the THE CIRCLE. 6 1 point of intersection and the circle are respectively equal to the corresponding segments of the other. 8. Two equal chords which have one end-point in common lie upon opposite sides of the centre. 9. If AB and CD be parallel chords, AD and BC, as also AC and BD, meet upon the right bisector of AB or CD. 10. Two secants which make equal angles with a centre-line make equal chords in the circle if they cut the circle. (Converse of 100°) 11. What is the axis of symmetry of (a) a square, (d) a rectangle, (c) an isosceles triangle, (d) an equilateral triangle ? Give all the axes where there are more than one. 12. When a rectilinear figure has more than one axis of symmetry, what relation in direction do they hold to one another ? 13. The vertices of an equilateral triangle trisect its circum- circle. 14. A centre-line perpendicular to a chord bisects the arcs determined by the chord. 1 5. Show how to divide a circle (a) into 6 equal parts, {d) into 8 equal parts. 16. If equal chords be in a circle, one pair of the connecters of their end-points are parallel chords. (Converse of 103°, Cor.) THE PRINCIPLE OF CONTINUITY. 104°. The principle of continuity is one of the most prolific in the whole range of Mathematics. Illustrations of its meaning and application in Geometr}^ will occur frequently in the sequel, but the following are given by way of introduction. I. A magnitude is cojitinuous throughout its extent. Thus a line extends from any one point to another without 62 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. breaks or interruptions ; or, a generating point in passing from one position to another must pass through every inter- mediate position. 2. In Art. 53° we have the theorem — Every point on the right bisector of a segment is equidistant from the end-points of the segment. In this theorem the Imiiting condition in the hypothesis is that the point must be on the right bisector of the segment. Now, if P be any point on the right bisector, and we move P along the right bisector, the limiting condition is not at any time violated during this motion, so that P remains con- tijtuously equidistant from the end-points of the segment during its motion. We say then that the property expressed in the theorem is continuous while P moves along the right bisector. 3. In Art. 97° we have the theorem — The sum of the in- ternal angles of a quadrangle is four right angles. The limiting condition is that the figure shall be a quad- A rangle, and that it shall have in- ternal angles. Now, let ABCD be a quadrangle. Then the condition is not violated if D moves to D^ or D2. But in ^ the latter case the normal quad- rangle ABCD becomes the inverted quadrangle ABCDg, and the theorem remains true. Or, the theorem is continu- ously true while the vertex D moves anywhere in the plane, so long as the figure remains a quadrangle and retains four internal angles. Future considerations in which a wider meaning is given to the word " angle " will show that the theorem is still true even when D, in its motion, crosses one of the sides AB or BC, and thus produces the crossed quadrangle. The Principle of Continuity avoids the necessity of proving theorems for different cases brought about by variations in the disposition of the parts of a diagram, and it thus gener- THE CIRCLE. 63 alizes theorems or relieves them from dependence upon the particularities of a diagram. Thus the two figures of Art. 100° differ in that in the first figure the secants intersect without the circle, and in the second figure they intersect within, while the theorem applies with equal generality to both. The Principle of Continuity may be stated as follows : — When a figure, which involves or illustrates some geometric property, can undergo change, however small, in any of its parts or in their relations without violating the conditions upon which the property depends, then the property is con- tinuous while the figure undergoes any amount of change of the same kind within the range of possibility. 105°. Let AB be a chord dividing the into unequal arcs, and let P and Q be any points upon the major and minor arcs respectively. (102°, Def ) Let O be the centre. 1. The radii OA and OB form two angles at the centre, a major angle denoted by a and a minor angle de- noted by ^. These together make up a circumangle. 2. The chords PA, PB, and QA, QB form two angles at the circle, of which APB is the tninor angle and AQB is the major angle. 3. The minor angle at the circle, APB, and the minor angle at the centre, /3, stand upon the minor arc, AQB, as a base. Similarly the major angles stand upon the major arc as base. 4. Moreover the Z-APB is said to be z;z the arc APB, so that the minor angle at the circle is in the major arc, and the major angle at the circle is in the minor arc. 5. When B moves towards B' all the minor elements increase and all the major elements decrease, and when B comes to B' the minor elements become respectively equal to the major, and there is neither major nor minor. 64 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. When B, moving in the same direction, passes B', the elements change name, those which were formerly the minor becoming the major and vice versa. io6°. Theorem. — An angle at the circle is one-half the corresponding angle at the centre, major corresponding to major and minor to minor. p Z.AOB minor is 2Z.APB. /^ /\ \ N^ Proof. — Since AAPO is isosceles, / / a'l \'Y .'. /.OAP = z.OPA,(53°,Cor.i) /j^/sC\ and^0AP + ^0PA=2^0PA. }^:^^T^y ^"^ zj\OC=^OAP + ^OPA, \>1 y/^ (76°, Cor.) ^^~p^ .*. ^A0C = 2^0PA. Similarly ^B0C = 2^0PB ; .-.adding, ^AOB minor = 2^APB. g.e.d. The theorem is thus proved for the minor angles. But since the limiting conditions require only an angle at the circle and an angle at the centre, the theorem remains true while B moves along the circle. And when B passes B' the angle APB becomes the major angle at the circle, and the angle AOB minor becomes the major angle at the centre. the theorem is true for the major angles. Cor. I. The angle in a given arc is constant. (105°, 4) Cor. 2. Since ^APB = |z.AOB minor, and ^AOB = i^OB major, and '.• ^AOB minor + Z.AOB major = 4 right angles (37°) Z.APB + ^QB = a straight angle. And APBQ is a coney clic quadrangle. Hence a concyclic quadrangle has its opposite internal angles supplementary. (40°, Def. i) Cor. 3. D being on AQ produced, lBQD is supplementary to ^AOB. THE CIRCLE. 65 But Z.APB is supplementary to ^A(2B, ^APB=Z-BOD. Hence, if one side of a concyclic quadrangle be produced, the external angle is equal to a the opposite internal angle. Cor. 4. Let B come to B'. (Fig. of 106°) Then ^AOB' is a straight angle, Z.APB' is a right angle. But the arc APB' is a semicircle, (102°, Def ) Therefore the angle in a semicircle is a right angle. opposite 107°. Theorem. — A quadrangle which has its angles supplementary has its vertices concyclic. (Converse of 106° ABCD is a quadrangle whereof the ^lADC is supplementary to ^ABC ; then a circle can pass through A, B, C, and D. Proof. — If possible let the through A, B, and C cut AD in some point P. Join P and C. Then Z_APC is supplementary to Z.ABC, (106°, Cor. 2) and zADC is supplementary to Z.ABC, z.APC=^DC, which is not true. .*. the cannot cut AD in any point other than D, Hence A, B, C, and D are concyclic. Cor. I. The hypothenuse of a right-angled triangle is the diameter of its circumcircle. (88°, 3, Def. ; 97°, Def.) Cor. 2. When P moves along the the AAPC (last figure) has its base AC constant and its vertical angle APC constant. Therefore the locus of the vertex of a triangle which has a constant base and a constant vertical angle is an arc of a circle passing through the end-points of the base. This property is employed in the trammel which is used to describe an arc of a given circle. E (hyp.) (60^) g.e.d. 66 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. It consists of two rules (i6°) L and M joined at a L ^y^2\ determined angle. When it is made to slide over two pins A and B, a pencil at P traces an arc passing through A and B. io8°. Theorem. — The angle between two intersecting se- cants is the sum of those angles in the circle which stand on the arcs intercepted between the secants, when the secants intersect within the circle, and is the difference of these angles when the secants intersect without the circle. lAPC=^ABC + z_BCD, {i%) ^APC = aABC-^BCD. CfIJ) Proof.-i. z.APC=^PBC+^PCB, (6o°) .-. aAPC = z.ABC + £.BCD. 2. /.ABC=^APC + ^BCP, .-. ^APC = ^ABC-^BCD. q.e.d. Exercises. 1. If a six-sided rectilinear figure has its vertices concyclic, the three alternate internal angles are together equal to a circumangle. 2. In Fig. 105°, when B comes to O, BQ vanishes ; what is the direction of BQ just as it vanishes 1 3. Two chords at right angles determine four arcs of which a pair of opposite ones are together equal to a semi- circle. 4. A, B, C, D are the vertices of a square, and A, E, F of an equilateral triangle inscribed in the same circle. What is thQ angle between the lines BE and DF? between BF and ED ? THE CIRCLE. 67 SPECIAL SECANTS— TANGENT. Let P be a fixed point on the S and O a variable 109 one. The position of the secant L, cut- ting the circle in P and Q, depends upon the position of O. As Q moves along the the secant rotates about P as pole. While Q makes one complete revolution along the the secant L passes through two special positions. The first of these is when O is farthest distant from P, as at Q', and the secant L becomes a centre- line. The second is when Q comes into coincidence with P, and the secant takes the position TT' and becomes a tangent. Def. I.— A tangent to a circle is a secant in its limiting position when its points of intersection with the circle become coincident. That the tangent cannot cut or cross the is evident. For if it cuts the at P it must cut it again at some other point. And since P represents two points we would have the absurdity of a line cutting a circle in three points. (94°) Def. 2.— The point where P and Q meet is called Xh^ point of contact. Being formed by the union of two points it repre- sents both, and is therefore a double point. From Defs. i and 2 we conclude — 1. A point of contact is a double point. 2. As a line can cut a only twice it can touch a only once. 3. A line which touches a cannot cut it. 4. A is determined by two points if one of them is a given point of contact on a given line ; or, only one circle can pass through a given point and touch a given line at a given point. (Compare 97°.) 6S SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY iio°. Theorem. — A centre-line and a tangent to the same point on a circle are perpendicular to one another. L' is a centre-line and T a tan- iQ gent, both to the point P. Then L' is _L to T. Proof. — '.* T has only the one point P in common with the 0, every point of T except P lies without the 0. .'. T' if O is the centre on the line L', OP is the shortest segment from O to T. OP, or L', is ± to T. (63°, i) q.c.cL Cor. I. Tangents at the end-points of a diameter are parallel. Cor. 2. The perpendicular to a tangent at the point of con- tact is a centre-line. (Converse of the theorem.) Cor. 3. The perpendicular to a diameter at its end-point is a tangent. 111°. Theorem. — The angles between a tangent and a D chord from the point of contact are respectively equal to the angles in the opposite arcs into which the chord divides the circle. TP is a tangent and PQ a chord to the same point P, and A is any point on the 0. Then ^QPT=^QAP. Let PD be a diameter. ^QAP = ^QDP, /.DQP is a "X ^DPQ is comp. of Z.QPT, ^DPQ is comp. of ^ODP, ^QDP=i.QPT=z.QAP. Similarly, the ^QPT'=^QBP. Proof.- Then and Also and (106°, Cor. i) (106°, Cor. 4) (40°, Def. 3) {n% 6) q.e.d. THE CIRCLE. 69 112°. Theorem. — Two circles can intersect in only two points. Proof. — If they can intersect in three points, two circles can be made to pass through the same three points. But this is not true. (96°) .'. two circles can intersect in only two points. Cor. Two circles can touch in only one point. For a point of contact is equivalent to two points of intersection. 113°. Theorem. — The common centre-line of two intersect- ing circles is the right bisector of their common chord. O and O' are the centres of S and S', and AB is their common chord. Then 00' is the right bisector of AB. (50 Proof.- Since AO = BO, and AO' = BO', .*. O is on the right bisector of AB. Similarly O' is on the right bisector of AB, .*. 00' is the right bisector of AB. Cor. I. By the principle of continuity, OO' always bisects AB. Let the circles separate until A and B coincide. Then the circles touch and 00' passes through the point of contact. Def. — Two circles which touch one another have external contact when each circle lies without the other, and internal contact when one circle lies within the other. Cor. 2. Since 00' (Cor. i) passes through the point of contact when the circles touch one another — {(.i) When the distance between the centres of two circles is the sum of their radii, the circles have external contact. {b) When the distance between the centres is the difference of the radii, the circles have internal contact. 70 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. (c) When the distance between the centres is greater than the sum of the radii, the circles exclude each other without contact. (d) When the distance between the centres is less than the difference of the radii, the greater circle includes the smaller without contact. (e) When the distance between the centres is less than the sum of the radii and greater than their difference, the circles intersect. 14°. Theo7-em. — From any point without a circle two tangents can be drawn to the circle. Proof.— 1.^1 S be the and P the point. Upon the segment PO as diameter let the ©S' be described, cutting 0S in A and B. Then PA and PB are both tangents to S. For Z.OAP is in a semicircle and is a "~|' (106°, Cor. 4) .-. AP is tangent to S. (110°, Cor. 3) Similarly BP is tangent to S. Cor. I. Since PO is the right bisector of AB, (113°) PA = PB. (53°) Hence calling the segment PA the tangent from P to the circle, when length is under consideration, we have — The two tangents from any point to a circle are equal to one another. Def — The line AB, which passes through the points of contact of tangents from P, is called the chord of contact for the point P. 115°. Def I. — The angle at which two circles intersect is the angle between their tangents at the point of intersection. Def 2. When two circles intersect at right angles they are said to cut each other orthogonally. THE CIRCLE. 71 The same term is conveniently applied to the intersection of any two figures at right angles. Cor. I. If, in the Fig. to 114°, PA be made the radius of a circle and P its centre, the circle will cut the circle S ortho- gonally. For the tangents at A are respectively perpendicular to the radii. Hence a circle S is cut orthogonally by any circle having its centre at a point without S and its radius the tangent from the point to the circle S . 116°. The following examples furnish theorems of some importance. Ex. I. Three tangents touch the circle S at the points A, B, and C, and inter- sect to form the AA'B'C. O being the centre of the circle, A.A0C = 2^A'0C'. Proof.— AC'=BC', and BA' = CA', (114°, Cor. i) AAOC' = ABOC, and ABOA' = ACOA' ^BOC' = ^AOC, and ^COA'=^BOA', zAOC = 2^A'OC'. q.e.d. Similarly ^AOB = 2/.A'OB', and ^B0C = 2^B'0C'. If the tangents at A and C are fixed, and the tangent at B is variable, we have the following theorem : — The segment of a variable tangent intercepted by two fixed tangents, all to the same circle, subtends a fixed angle at the centre. Ex. 2. If four circles touch two and two externally, the points of contact are concyclic. Let A, B, C, D be the centres of the circles, and P, Q, R, S be the points of contact. Then AB passes through P, BC through Q, etc. (113°, Cor. i ) J 2 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Now, ABCD being a quadrangle, ^A + i.B + ^C + ^D=4~|s. (90°) But the sum of all the internal angles of the four As APS, BQP, CRQ, and DSR is 8~ls, and z.APS=^ASP, ^BPQ=/.BQP, etc., z.APS + ^BPQ + ^CRQ + /.DRS = 2~ls. Now * /.SPQ = 2~]s-(^APS + £.BPQ), ^QRS = 2 "Is - (^CRQ + Z.DRS), ^SP0 + /.QRS = 2"ls. and P, Q, R, S are concyclic (107°). q.e.d. Ex. 3. If the common chord of two intersecting circles subtends equal angles at the two circles, the circles are equal. AB is the common chord, C, C points upon the circles, and ^ACB = .lACB. Let O, O' be the centres. Then ^AOB = ^AO'B. (106°) And the triangles OAB and O'AB being isosceles are con- gruent, .'. OA = O^A, and the circles are equal. (93°, 4) Ex. 4. If O be the orthocentre of a AABC, the circum- circles to the As ABC, AOB, BOC, COA are all equal. *.' AX and CZ are ± respectively to BC and AB, £.CBA = sup. of ^XOZ = sup. of ^COA. But D being any point on the arc AS2C, ^CDA is the sup. of ^COA. ^CBA = ^CDA, and the 0s S and 83 are equal by Ex. 3. In like manner it may be proved that the 0S is equal to the 03 S3 and Si. Ex. 5. If any point O be joined to the vertices of a AABC, the circles having OA, OB, and OC as diameters intersect upon the triangle. Proof.— VixTs.^ OX _L to BC and OY ± to AC. THE CIRCLE. 73 •/ z.OXB=~~|, the on OB as diameter passes through X. (107°, Cor. I) Similarly the on OC as diameter passes through X. Therefore the 0s on OB and OC intersect in X ; and in like manner it is seen that the 0s on OC and OA intersect in Y, and those on OA and OB intersect in Z, the foot of the X from O to AB. Ex. 6. The feet of the medians and the feet of the altitudes in any triangle are six concyclic points, and the circle bisects that part of each altitude lying between the orthocentre and the vertex. D, E, F are the feet of the medians, i.e., the middle points of the sides of the AABC. Let the circle through D, E, F cut the sides in G, H, K. Now FD is II to AC and ED is || to AB, ^FDE = ^FAE. But ^FDE = ^FHE, .-. AAFH is isosceles, and AF = FH = FB ^AHB=n, and H is the foot of the altitude from B. Similarly, K and G are feet of the altitudes from C and A. Again, ^KPH = ^KFH = 2/.KAH. And A, K, O, H are concyclic (107°), and AO is a diameter of the circumcircle, therefore P is the middle point of AO. Similarly, O is the middle point of BO, and R of CO. Def. — The circle S passing through the nine points D, E, F, G, H, K, and P, Q, R, is called the 7iine-poiiits circle of the AABC. Cor. Since the nine-points circle of ABC is the circum- circle of ADEF, whereof the sides are respectively equal to half the sides of the AABC, therefore the radius of the nine- points circle of any triangle is one-half that of its circumcircle. (84°, Cor. 2) (106°, Cor. I) (106°, Cor. 4) 74 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Exercises. 1. In 105° when P passes B where is the Z.APB ? 2. A, B, C, D are four points on a circle whereof CD is a diameter and E is a point on this diameter. If z_AEB = 2^ACB, E is the centre. 3. The sum of the alternate angles of any octagon in a circle is six right angles. 4. The sum of the alternate angles of any concyclic polygon of 2;/ sides is 2{n — i) right angles. 5. If the angle of a trammel is 60° what arc of a circle will it describe ? what if its angle is 7t° ? 6. Trisect a right angle and thence show how to draw a regular 12-sided polygon in a circle. 7. If r, r' be the radii of two circles, and d the distance between them, the circles touch when d=r±r'. 8. Give the conditions under which two circles have 4, 3, 2, or I common tangent. 9. Prove Ex. 2, 116°, by drawing common tangents to the circles at P, Q, R, and S. I o. A variable chord passes through a fixed point on a circle, to find the locus of the middle point of the chord. 11. A variable secant passes through a fixed point, to find the locus of the middle point of the chord determined by a fixed circle. 12. In Ex. II, what is the locus of the middle point of the secant between the fixed point and the circle ? 13. In a quadrangle circumscribed to a circle the sums of the opposite sides are equal in pairs ; and if the vertices be joined to the centre the sums of the opposite angles at the centre are equal in pairs. 14. If a hexagon circumscribe a circle the sum of three alternate sides is equal to that of the remaining three. 15. If two circles are concentric, any chord of the outer which is tangent to the inner is bisected by the point THE CIRCLE. 75 of contact ; and the parts intercepted on any secant between the two circles are equal to one another. 1 6. If two circles touch one another, any line through the point of contact determines arcs which subtend equal angles in the two circles. 17. If any two lines be drawn through the point of contact of two touching circles, the lines determine arcs whose chords are parallel. 18. If two diameters of two touching circles are parallel, the transverse connectors of their end-points pass through the point of contact. 19. The shortest chord that can be drawn through a given point within a circle is perpendicular to the centre-line through that point. 20. Three circles touch each other externally at A, B, and C. The chords AB and AC of two of the circles meet the third circle in D and E. Prove that DE is a diameter of the third circle and parallel to the common centre- line of the other two. 21. A line which makes equal angles with one pair of oppo- site sides of a concyclic quadrangle makes equal angles with the other pair, and also with the diagonals. 22. Two circles touch one another in A and have a common tangent BC. Then lBAC is a right angle. 23. OA and OB are perpendicular to one another, and AB is variable in position but of constant length. Find the locus of the middle point of AB. 24. Two equal circles touch one another and each touches one of a pair of perpendicular lines. What is the locus of the point of contact of the circles ? 25. Two lines through the common points of two intersecting circles determine on the circles arcs whose chords are parallel. 26. Two circles intersect in A and B, and through B a secant cuts the circles in C and D. Show that Z.CAD is constant, the direction of the secant being variable. jG SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 27. At any point in the circumcircle of a square one of the sides subtends an angle three times as great as that subtended by the opposite side. 28. The three medians of any triangle taken in both length and direction can form a triangle. SECTION VI. CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY, INVOLVING THE PRINCIPLES OF THE FIRST FIVE SECTIONS, ETC. 117°. Constructive Geometry applies to the determination of geometric elements which shall have specified relations to given elements. Constructive Geometry is Practical when the determined elements are physical, and it is Theoretic when the elements are supposed to be taken at their limits, and to be geometric in character. (12°) Practical Constructive Geometry, or simply " Practical (Geometry," is largely used by mechanics, draughtsmen, sur- veyors, engineers, etc., and to assist them in their work numerous aids known as " Mathematical Instruments " have been devised. A number of these will be referred to in the sequel. In "Practical Geometry " the " Rule " (16°) furnishes the means of constructing a line, and the " Compasses " (92°) of constructing a circle. In Theoretic Constructive Geometry we assume the ability to construct these two elements, and by means of these we are to determine the required elements. 118'. To test the " Rule." Place the rule on a plane, as at R, and draw a line AB CONSTRUCTIVE GEOxMETRY. 7/ along its edge. Turn the rule into the position R'. If the edge now coincides with the line ^ -; v^_^ the rule is true. ^^(7 r -^^ — This test depends upon the pro- perty that two finite points A and B determine one line. (24°, Cor. 2) Def. — A construction proposed is in general called a proposition (2°) and in particular 7ip7'oblem. A complete problem consists of (i) the statement of what is to be done, (2) the construction, and (3) the proof that the construction furnishes the elements sought. 119°. Problem. — To construct the right bisector of a given line segment. Let AB be the given segment. Construction. — With A and B as centres and with a radius AD greater than half of a" AB describe circles. Since AB is < the sum of the radii and > their difference, the circles will meet in two points P and Q. (ii3°> Cor. 2, e) The line PQ is the right bisector required. Proof. — P and O are each equidistant from A and B and .'. they are on the right bisector of AB ; (54°) .*. PQ is the right bisector of AB. Cor. I. The same construction determines C, the middle point of AB. Cor. 2. If C be a given point on a line, and we take A and B on the line so that CA=CB, then the right bisector of the segment AB passes through C and is J_ to the given line. .•. the construction gives the perpendicular to a given line at a given point in the line. 120°. Problem. — To draw a perpendicular to a given line from a point not on the line. I \ I \ I > ^ — Id 7S SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Let L be the given line and P be the point. Constr. — Draw any line through P meeting L at some point A. Bisect AP in C (119°, Cor. i), and with C as centre and CP as radius describe a circle. If PA is not i. to L, the will -cut L in two points A and D. Then PD is the J. required. Proof. — PDA is the angle in a semicircle, ^PDA is a "~I- (106°, Cor. 4) Cor. Let D be a given point in L. With any centre C and CD as radius describe a circle cutting L again in some point A. Draw the radius ACP, and join D and P. Then DP is ± to L. .*. the construction draws a X to L at a given point in L. (Compare 119°, Cor. 2) Cor. 2. Let L be a given line and C a given point. To draw through C a line parallel to L. With C as the centre of a circle, construct a figure as given. Bisect PD in E (119°, Cor. i). Then CE is || to L. For C and E are the middle points of two sides of a triangle of which L is the base. (84°, Cor. 2) 121°. The Square. — The square consists of two rules with their edges fixed permanently at right angles, or of a triangular plate of wood or metal having Dtwo of its edges at right angles. To test a square. Draw a line AB and place the square as at S, so that one edge coincides with the line, and along the other edge draw the line CD. Next place the square in the position S'. If the edges can CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. 79 now be made to coincide with the two lines the square is true. This test depends upon the fact that a right angle is one- half a straight angle. The square is employed practically for drawing a line J_ to another line. — Cor. I. The square is employed to draw a series of parallel lines, as in the figure. Cor. 2. To draw the bisectors of an angle by means of the square. Let AOB be the given angle. Take OA = OB, and at A and B draw perpendiculars to OA and OB. Since AOB is not a straight angle, these perpendiculars meet at some point C. (79°, Cor.) Then OC is the internal bisector of ^lAOB. For the tri- angles AOC and BOC are evidently congruent. ^AOC = ^BOC. The line drawn through O _L to OC is the external bisector. 122°. Problem. — Through a given point in a line to draw a line which shall make a given angle with that line. Let P be the given point in the line L, and let X be the given angle. Constr.— Yxom any point B the arm OB draw a ± to the arm OA. Make PA' = OA, and at A' draw the J. A'B' making A'B' = AB, PB' is the line required. Proof. — The triangles OBA and PB'A' are evidently con- gruent, and .*. z.BOA = X = ^B'PA'. Cor. Since PA' might have been taken to the left of P, the problem admits of two solutions. When the angle X is a right angle the two solutions become one. (120°) 8o SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 123°. The Protractor. — This instrument has different forms depending upon the accuracy re- quired of it. It usually consists of a semicircle of metal or ivory divided into degrees, etc. (41°). The point C is the centre. By placing the straight edge of the instrument in coincidence with a given line AB so that the centre falls at a given point C, we can set off any angle given in degrees, etc., along the arc as at D. Then the line CD passes through C and makes a given angle with AB. 124°. Problem.- Given the sides of a triangle to construct it. Constr. — Place the three sides of the triangle in line, as AB, 15 C, CD. With centre C and radius CD D describe a circle, and with centre B and radius BA describe a circle. Let E be one point of intersection of these circles. Then A^EC is the triangle required. Proof.— V,^ = V>K and CE = CD. Since the circles intersect in another point E', a second triangle is formed. But the two triangles being congruent are virtually the same triangle. Cor. I. When AB = BC=? C A the triangle is equilateral. (53°, Def. 2) In this case the circle AE passes through C and the circle DE through B, so that B and C become the centres and BC a common radius. Cor. 2. When BC is equal to the sum or difference of AB and CD the circles touch (113°, Def.) and the triangle takes the limiting form and becomes a line. When BC is greater than the sum or less than the differ- CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. 8 1 ence of AB and CD the circles do not meet (113°, Def.) and no triangle is possible. Therefore that three line-segments may form a triangle, each one must be less than the sum and greater than the difference of the other two. 125°. The solution of a problem is sometimes best effected by supposing the construction made, and then by reasoning backwards from the completed figure to some relation amongst the given parts by means of which we can make the construction. This is analogous to the process employed for the solution of equations in Algebra, and a more detailed reference will be made to it at a future stage. The next three problems furnish examples 126°. Problein. — To construct a triangle when two sides and the median to the third side are given. Let a and b be two sides and n the median to the third side. Suppose ACB is the required triangle having CD as the given median. By completing the ^^ACBC and joining DC, we have DC c' equal to CD and in the same line, and BC=AC (81°) ; and the triangle CCB has CC = 2;/, CB = rt:, and BC=AC = ^, and is constructed by 124°. Thence the triangle ACB is readily constructed. Cor. Since CC is twice the given median, and since the possibility of the triangle ACB depends upon that of CCB, therefore a median of a triangle is less than one-half the sum, and greater than one-half the difference of the conter- minous sides. (124°, Cor. 2) F 82 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 127°. Problem. — To trisect a given line-segment, i.e.^ to divide it into three equal parts. Cojistr. — Let AB be the segment. Through A draw any line CD and make Af •^^ 3^B AC=AD. Bisect DB in E, and join CE, E cutting AB in F, D Then AF is |AB. Proof. — CBD is a A and CE and BA are two medians. AF=|AB. (85°, Cor.) Bisecting FB gives the other point of division. 128°. Problem. — To construct a A when the three medians /, are given. Let /, m, n be the medians, and suppose to be the required Then BE = ?«, and CF = ;2, given ABC triangle, c AD = AO = f/, OB = |;;z, and OY = \n, .'. in the AAOB we have two sides and the median to the third side given. Thence AAOB is constructed by 126° and 127°. Then producing FO until 0C = 2F0, C is the third vertex of the triangle required. Ex. To describe a square whose sides shall pass through four given points. Let P, Q, R, S be the given points, and suppose ABCD to be the square required. Join P and Q upon opposite sides of the square, and draw QG || to BC. Draw SX J_ to PQ to meet BC in E, and draw EF II to CD. Then AQPG = AFSE, and SE = PO. Hence the construction : — Join any two points PQ, and through a third point S draw CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. S^ SX ± to PQ. On SX take SE = PQ and join E with the fourth point R. ER is a side of the square in position and direction, and the points first joined, P and Q, are on oppo- site sides of the required square. Thence the square is readily constructed. Since SE may be measured in two directions along the line SX, two squares can have their sides passing through the same four points P, Q, R, S, and having P and Q on opposite sides. Also, since P may be first connected with R or S, two squares can be constructed fulfilling the conditions and having P and Q on adjacent sides. Therefore, four squares can be constructed to have their sides passing through the same four given points. CIRCLES FULFILLING GIVEN CONDITIONS. The problems occurring here are necessarily of an elemen- tary character. The more complex problems require relations not yet developed. 129°. Problem. — To describe a circle to touch a given line at a given point. m P is a given point in the line L. Co7istr. — Through P draw M J_ to L. A circle having any point C, on M, as centre and CP as radius touches L at P. Proof. — L is ± to the diameter at its end-point, therefore L is tangent to the circle. (110°, Cor. 3) Def. — As C is a7iy point on M, any number of circles may be drawn to touch L at the point P, and all their centres lie on M. Such a problem is indefinite because the conditions are not sufficient to determine a particular circle. If the circle 84 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. varies its radius while fulfilling the conditions of the problem, the centre moves along M ; and M is called the centre-locus of the variable circle. Hence the centre-locus of a circle which touches a fixed line at a fixed point is the perpendicular to the line at that point. Cor. If the circle is to pass through a second given point Q the problem is definite and the circle is a particular one, since it then passes through three fixed points, viz., the double point P and the point Q. (109°) 4) In this case Z.COP=Z_CPQ. But ^CPQ is given, since P, Q, and the line L are given. .*. z_CQP is given and C is a fixed point. 130°. Problem. — To describe a circle to touch two given non-parallel lines. Let L and M be the lines inter- secting at O. Draw N, N, the bisectors of the angle between L and M.(i2i°, Cor. 2) From C, any point on either bi- sector, draw CA X to L. The circle with centre C and radius CA touches L, and if CB be drawn X to M, CB = CA. (68°) Therefore the circle also touches M. As C is any point on the bisectors the problem is indefinite, and the centre-locus of a circle which touches two intersecting lines is the two bisectors of the angle between the lines . 131°. Prohle77i. — To describe a circle to touch three given lines which form a triangle. L, M, N are the lines forming the triangle . Constr. — Draw Ij, E^, the internal and external bisectors of the angle A ; and I2, Eg, those of the angle B. ^A + /.Bis<J_, .-. ^BAO-fiLABO is<~l- CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. 8S .*. Ii and I2 meet at some point O (79°) and are not X to one another and therefore Ej and Eg meet at some point O3. m\ /m (79°, Cor.) Also Ii and Eg meet at some point Oj, and similarly Ig and El meet at O2. The four points O, O^, Og, O3 are the centres of four circles each of which touches the three lines L, M, and N. Proof. — Circles which touch M and N have \ and E^ as their centre-locus (130°), and circles which touch N and L have Ig and Eg as their centre-locus. .'. Circles which touch L, M, and N must have their centres at the intersections of these loci. But these intersections are O, O^, Og, and O3, .*. O, Oi, Og, and O3 are the centres of the circles required. The radii are the perpendiculars from the centres upon any one of the lines L, M, or N. Cor. I. Let I3 and E3 be the bisectors of the Z.C. Then, since O is equidistant from L and M, I3 passes through O. (68°) .*. the three internal bisectors of the angles of a triangle are concurrent. Cor. 2. Since O3 is equidistant from L and M, I3 passes through O3. (68°) 86 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. .*. the external bisectors of two angles of a triangle and the internal bisector of the third angle are concurrent. Def. I. — When three or more points are in line they are said to be collinear. Cor. 3. The line through any two centres passes through a vertex of the AABC. .*. any two centres are collinear with a vertex of the A- The lines of collinearity are the six bisectors of the three angles A, B, and C. Def. 2 — With respect to the AABC, the circle touching the sides and having its centre at O is called the i7iscribed circle or simply the in-circle of the triangle. The circles touching the lines and having centres at Oj, O2, and O3 are the escribed or ex-circles of the triangle. REGULAR POLYGONS. 132°. Def. I. — A closed rectilinear figure without re-entrant angles (89°, 2) is in general called z. polygon. They are named according to the number of their sides as follows : — 3, triangle or trigon ; 4, quadrangle, or tetragon, or quadrilateral ; 5, pentagon ; 6, hexagon ; 7, heptagon ; 8, octagon ; 10, decagon ; 12, dodecagon ; etc. The most important polygons higher than the quadrangle are regular polygons. Def 2. — A regular polygon has its vertices concyclic, and all its sides equal to one another. The centre of the circumcircle is the centre of the polygon. 133". Theorem. — If ;/ denotes the number of sides of a CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. 8/ regular polygon, the magnitude of an internal angle is ( 2 - 4 J right angles. \ nf Proof. — Let AB, BC be two consecu- tive sides of the polygon and O its centre. Then the triangles AOB, BOG are isosceles and congruent. ^OAB=^OBA-/.OBC = etc., ^OAB + ^OBA = /.ABC. But ^OAB + ^OBA-J_-zAOB, and (132°, Def. 2) ^ob = 4 right angles^ z.ABC = (2-4) right angles, i^-)} 90" q.e.d. Cor. The internal angles of the regular polygons expressed in right angles and in degrees are found, by putting proper values for «, to be as follows : — Equilateral triangle, f 60° Octagon, . f 135° Square, i 90° Decagon, . f 144° Pentagon, . . . . f 108° Dodecagon, f 150° Hexagon, . . . . ^ 120° 134°. Problem. — On a given line-segment as side to con- struct a regular hexagon. A^ Let AB be the given segment. Constr. — On AB construct the equi- pj lateral triangle AOB (124°, Cor. i), and with O as centre describe a circle through A, cutting AO and BO produced in D e." and E. Draw FC, the internal bisector of Z.AOE. ABCDEF is the hexagon. Proof.— ^AOB = ^EOD = O Z.A0E=O and A0F = O ^A0B = /.B0C = ^C0D = etc. = |n. 88 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. And the chords AB, BC, CD, etc., being sides of congruent equilateral triangles are all equal. Therefore ABCDEF is a regular hexagon. Cor. Since AOB is an equilateral triangle, AB=AO ; .*. the side of a regular hexagon is equal to the radius of its circumcircle. 135°. Pi'oblem. — To determine which species of regular polygons, each taken alone, can fill the plane. That a regular polygon of any species may be capable of filling the plane, the number of right angles in its internal angle must be a divisor of 4. But as no internal angle can be so great as two right angles, the only divisors, in 133°, Cor., are f, i, and |, which give the quotients 6, 4, and 3. Therefore the plane can be filled by 6 equilateral triangles, or 4 squares, or 3 hexagons. It is worthy of note that, of the three regular polygons which can fill the plane, the hexagon includes the greatest area for a given perimeter. As a consequence, the hexagon is frequently found in Nature, as in the cells of bees, in certain tissues of plants, etc. Ex. I. Let D, E, F be points of contact of the in- circle, and P, P', P", R, R', R", etc., of the ex- circles. (131") ThenAP = AP',CP' = CP", andBP = BP",(ii4°,Cor.i) .-. AP' + AP =AB+BC+AC and, denoting the perimeter of the triangle by is^ we have AP = AF=J, CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. 89 CP' = J'-^ = CP", BP=j-r=BP". Similarly, AR = ^-^ = AR", BR' = s-a = BR", etc. Again, CD = CE = ^-AE = ^-AF = ^-(^-BF) CE = CD=j-^=BP". Similarly, AE = AF = j - ^ = BR", etc. These relations are frequently useful. If we put Az to denote the distance of the vertex A from the adjacent points of contact of the in-circle, and A^, Ac to denote its distances from the points of contact of the ex-circles upon the sides d and c respectively, we have A/= B^ = C <^ = i- - ^'-r, Bi = Ca = Ac=s-d, Cz=Ad=Ba = s — c. Exercises. 1. In testing the straightness of a " rule " three rules are virtually tested. How ? 2. To construct a rectangle, and also a square. 3. To place a given line-segment between two given lines so as to be parallel to a given line. 4. On a given line to find a point such that the lines joining it to two given points may make equal angles with the given line. 5. To find a point equidistant from three given points. 6. To find a line equidistant from three given points. How many lines ? 7. A is a point on line L and B is not on L. To find a point P such that PA±PB may be equal to a given segment. 8. On a given line to find a point equidistant from two given points. 9. Through a given point to draw a line which shall form an isosceles triangle with two given lines. How many solutions ? 90 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 10. Through two given points on two parallel lines to draw two lines so as to form a rhombus. 11. To construct a square having one of its vertices at a given point, and two other vertices lying on two given parallel lines. 12. Through a given point to draw a line so that the intercept between two given parallels may be of a given length. 13. To construct a triangle when the basal angles and the altitude are given. 14. To construct a right-angled triangle when the hypothen- use and the sum of the sides are given. 1 5. To divide a line-segment into any number of equal parts. 16. To construct a triangle when the middle points of its sides are given. 17. To construct a parallelogram when the diagonals and one side are given. 18. Through a given point to draw a secant so that the chord intercepted by a given circle may have a given length. 19. Draw a line to touch a given circle and be parallel to a given line. To be perpendicular to a given line. 20. Describe a circle of given radius to touch two given lines. 21. Describe a circle of given radius to touch a given circle and a given line. 22. Describe a circle of given radius to pass through a given point and touch a given circle. 23. Describe a circle of given radius to touch two given circles. 24. To inscribe a regular octagon in a circle. 25. To inscribe a regular dodecagon in a circle. 26. A, B, C, D, ..., are consecutive vertices of a regular octagon, and A, B', C, D', ..., of a regular dodecagon in the same circle. Find the angles between AC and B'C; between BE' and B'E. (Use io8°.) 27. Show that the plane can be filled by {a) Equilateral triangles and regular dodecagons. {b) Equilateral triangles and squares. {c) Squares and regular octagons. PART II PRELIMINARY. 136°. Def. I. — The area of a plane closed figure is the por- tion of the plane contained within the figure, this portion being considered with respect to its extent only, and without respect to form. A closed figure of any form may contain an area of any given extent, and closed figures of different forms may con- tain areas of the same extent, or equal areas. Def. 2. — Closed figures are equal to one another when they include equal areas. This is the definition of the term " equal " when comparing closed figures. Congruent figures are necessarily equal, but equal figures are not necessarily congruent. Thus, a A and a [=3 may have equal areas and therefore be equals although necessarily having different forms. 137°. Areas are compared by superposition. If one area can be superimposed upon another so as exactly to cover it, the areas are equal and the figures containing the areas are equal. If such superposition can be shown to be impossible the figures are not equal. In comparing areas we may suppose one of them to be divided into any requisite number of parts, and these parts to be afterwards disposed in any convenient order, since the whole area is equal to the sum of all its parts. 91 92 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Illustration. — ABCD is a square. Then the AABC^AADC, and they are therefore equal. 6 ^ Now, if AD and DE be equal and in line, the As ADC and EDC are con- gruent and equal. Therefore the AABC may be taken "e from its present position and be put into the position of CDE. And the square ABCD is thus trans- formed into the A ACE without any change of area ; QABCD^AACE. It is evident that a plane closed figure may be considered from two points of view. 1. With respect to the character and disposition of the lines which form it. When thus considered, figures group themselves into triangles, squares, circles, etc., where the members of each group, if not of the same form, have at least some community of form and character. 2. With respect to the areas enclosed. When compared from the first point of view, the capability of superposition is expressed by saying that the figures are congruent. When compared from the second point of view, it is expressed by saying that the figures are equal. Therefore congruence is a kind of higher or double equality, that is, an equality in both form and extent of area. This is properly indicated by the triple lines ( = ) for con- gruence, and the double lines ( = ) for equality. 138°. Def. — The altitude of a figure is the line-segment which measures the distance of the farthest point of a figure from a side taken as base. The terms base and altitude are thus correlative. A tri- angle may have three different bases and as many corre- sponding altitudes. ^1°) In the rectangle (82°, Def. 2) two adjacent sides being perpendicular to one another, either one may be taken as the COMPARISON OF AREAS. 93 base and the adjacent one as the altitude. The rectangle having two given segments as its base and altitude is called the rectangle on these segments. Notation. — The symbol im stands for the word rectangle and I 7 iox parallelogram. Rectangles and parallelograms are commonly indicated by naming a pair of their opposite vertices. SECTION I. COMPARISON OF AREAS—RECTANGLES, PARALLELOGRAMS, TRIANGLES. 139°. Theorem. — i. Rectangles with equal bases and equal altitudes are equal. 2. Equal rectangles with equal bases have equal altitudes. 3. Equal rectangles with equal altitudes have equal bases.^ c Q D G I. In the OS BD and FH, if \ AD = EH, and AB = EF, ^ then [=]BD=c=iFH. ^ Proof. — Place E at A and EH along AD. Then, as ^FEH =z.BAD ="], EF will lie along AB. And because EH = AD and EF = AB, therefore H falls at D and F at B, and the two cds are congruent and therefore equal. q.e.d. 2. If[=iBD = i=iFH andAD = EH, then AB = EF. Proof.— \{ EF is not equal to AB, let AB be > EF. Make AP = EF and complete the cuPD. Then oP D = aF H , by the first part, but i=iBD=aFH, (hyp.) 94 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. i=iPD = [=iBD, which is not true, .*. AB and EF cannot be unequal, or AB = EF. q,e.d. 3. lf[=iBD=[=iFH and AB = EF, then AD = EH. Proof.— l^et AB and EF be taken as bases and AD and EH as altitudes (138°), and the theorem follows from the second part. q.e.d. Cor. In any rectangle we have the three parts, base, alti- tude, and area. If any two of these are ^iven the third is given also. 140°. Theorem. — A parallelogram is equal to the rectangle E .B F c on its base and altitude. / AC is a I 7 whereof AD is the base and DF is the altitude. Then nZ7AC=i=i on AD and DF. /•r^^/— Complete the cuADFE by drawing AE ± to CB produced. Then AAEB = ADFC, '.• AE = DF, AB = DC, and ^EAB = ^FDC; .*. ADFC may be transferred to the position AEB, and ^ZIjABCD becomes the cuAEFD, ZZZ7AC = [=i on AD and DF. q.e.d. Cor. I . Parallelograms with equal bases and equal altitudes are equal. For they are equal to the same rectangle. Cor. 2. Equal parallelograms with equal bases have equal altitudes, and equal parallelograms with equal altitudes have equal bases. Cor. 3. If equal parallelograms be upon the same side of the same base, their sides opposite the common base are in line. 141°. Theorem. — A triangle is equal to one-half the rect-. angle on its base and altitude. COMPARISON OF AREAS. 95 ABC is a triangle of which AC is the base and BE the altitude. b P Then AABC = |(=i on AC and BE. Pr^^/— Complete the £I^ABDC, of which AB and AC are adjacent sides, a Then AABC = ADCB, AABC=|£ZI7AD=|i=] on AC and BE. (140°) q.e.d. Cor. I. A triangle is equal to one-half the parallelogram having the same base and altitude. Cor. 2. Triangles with equal bases and equal altitudes are equal. For they are equal to one-half of the same rectangle. Cor. 3. A median of a triangle bisects the area. For the median bisects the base. Cor. 4. Equal triangles with equal bases have equal alti- tudes, and equal triangles with equal altitudes have equal bases. Cor. 5. If equal triangles be upon the same side of the same base, the line through their vertices is parallel to their common base. 142°. Theorem. — If two triangles are upon opposite sides of the same base — 1. When the triangles are equal, the base bisects the seg- ment joining their vertices ; 2. When the base bisects the segment joining their vertices, the triangles are equal. (Converse of i.) ABC and ADC are two triangles upon opposite sides of the common base AC. A' I. If then AABC = AADC, BH = HD. Proof.— Lq\. be and DF be altitudes, Then •.* AABC = AADC, .'. BE = DF, AEBH=AFDH, andBH = HD. 2. IfBH = HD, then AABC=AADC. q.e.d. X Y 96 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Proof.— Since BH = HD, .'. AABH=AADH, and ACBH=ACDH. (141°, Cor. 3) /.adding, AABC=AADC. q.e.d. 143. Def. — By the stem or difference of two closed figures is meant the sum or difference of the areas of the figures. If a rectangle be equal to the sum of two other rectangles its area may be so superimposed upon the others as to cover both. 144°. Theorem. — If two rectangles have equal altitudes, their sum is equal to the rectangle on their common altitude and the sum of their bases. '^ D F Proof.— Lei the as X and Y, having equal altitudes, be so placed as to have their altitudes in common at CD, and so that one en may not overlap the other. Then ^BDC=z.CDF="]» BDF is a Hne. (38°, Cor. 2) Similarly ACE is a line. But BD is II to AC, and BA is || to DC || to FE ; therefore AF is the m on the altitude AB and the sum of the bases AC and CE ; and the [=]AF=cdAD +0CF. q.e.d. Cor. I. If two triangles have equal altitudes, their sum is equal to the triangle having the same altitude and having a base equal to the sum of the bases of the two triangles. Cor. 2. If two triangles have equal altitudes, their sum is equal to one-half the rectangle on their common altitude and the sum of their bases. Cor. 3. If any number of triangles have equal altitudes, their sum is equal to one-half the rectangle on their common altitude and the sum of their bases. In any of the above, "base" and "altitude" are inter- changeable. COMPARISON OF AREAS. . 97 145°. Theorem. — Two lines parallel to the sides of a parallelogram and intersecting upon a diagonal divide the parallelogram into four parallelograms such that the two through which the diagonal does not pass are equal to one another. In the£IZ7ABCD,EFis || to AD and GH is II to BA, and these intersect at O on the diagonal AC. Then /=Z7BO = Z=Z70D. /'r^^/— AABC = AADC, and AAEO=AAHO, and AOGC = AOFC ; (141°, Cor. i) but £IZ7BO=AABC-AAEO-AOGC, and C=70D=AADC-AAH0-A0FC. 'B0 = /=Z70D. q.e.d. Cor. I. £Z7BF = ^=7GD. Cor. 2. If £Z:7B0 = £Z70D, O is on the diagonal AC. (Converse of the theorem.) For if O is not on the diagonal, let the diagonal cut EF in O'. Then Z=II7BO' = iCZ70'D. (145°) But £ZI7B0' is < ^IZ7BO, and .CZJO'D is > ZZZ70D ; .'. I 7 BO is > I 7 OD, which is contrary to the hypothesis; .'. the diagonal cuts EF in O. Ex. Let ABCD be a trapezoid. (84°, Def ) In line with AD make DE = BC, and in line with BC make CF-AD. Then BF = AE and BFEA is a EX But the trapezoid CE can be superimposed on the trape- zoid DB, since the sides are respectively equal, and ^F=A, and :lE = B, etc. trapezoid BD=|/^I7BE, or, a trapezoid is equal to one-half the rectangle on its alti- tude and the sum of its bases. G 98 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Exercises. 1. To construct a triangle equal to a given quadrangle. 2. To construct a triangle equal to a given polygon. 3. To bisect a triangle by a line drawn through a given point in one of the sides. 4. To construct a rhombus equal to a given parallelogram, and with one of the sides of the parallelogram as its side. 5. The three connectors of the middle points of the sides of a triangle divide the triangle into four equal triangles. 6 Any line concurrent with the diagonals of a parallelogram bisects the parallelogram. 7. The triangle having one of the non-parallel sides of a trapezoid as base and the middle point of the opposite side as vertex is one-half the trapezoid. 8. The connector of the middle points of the diagonals of a quadrangle is concurrent with the connectors of the middle points of opposite sides. 9. ABCD is a parallelogram and O is a point within. Then AA0B+AC0D=^ZIZ7. What does this become when O is without ? TO. ABCD is a parallelogram and O is a point within. Then AAOC = AAOD-AAOB. What does this become when O is without? (This theorem is important in the theory of Statics.) 11. Bisect a trapezoid by a line through the middle point of one of the parallel sides. By a line through the middle point of one of the non-parallel sides. 12. The triangle having the three medians of another tri- angle as its sides has three-fourths the area of the other. COMPARISON OF AREAS. 99 POLYGON AND CIRCLE. 146°. Def. — The sum of all the sides of a polygon is called its perimeter^ and when the polygon is regular every side is at the same distance from the centre. This distance is the apothem of the polygon. Thus if ABC D... LA be a regu- lar polygon and O the centre (132°, Def. 2), the triangles OAB, OBC, ... are all congruent, and Lj OP = OQ = etc. o AB + BC + CD + ... + LA is the perimeter and OP, per- pendicular upon AB, is the apothem. 147°. Theorem. — A regular polygon is equal to one-half the rectangle on its apothem and perimeter. Proof.— T\i^ triangles AOB, BOC, ... LOA have equal altitudes, the apothem OP, .'. their sum is one-half the cu on OP and the sum of their bases AB + BC-f... LA. (144°, Cor. 3) But the sum of the triangles is the polygon, and the sum of their bases is the perimeter. .*. a regular polygon = |[Z] on its apothem and perimeter. 148°. Of a limit. — A limit or limiting value of a variable is the value to which the variable by its variation can be made to approach indefinitely near, but which it can never be made to pass. Let ABCD be a square in its cir- cumcircle. If we bisect the arcs AB, BC, CD, and DA in E, F, G, and H, we have the vertices of a regular octagon AEBFCGDHA. Now, the area of the octagon approaches nearer to that of the circle than the area of the square does ; and the lOO SYNTHETIC GEOxMKTRY. perimeter of the octagon approaches nearer to the length of the circle than the perimeter of the square does ; and the apothem of the octagon approaches nearer to the radius of the circle than the apothem of the square does. Again, bisecting the arcs AE, EB, BF, etc., in I, J, K, etc., we obtain the regular polygon of i6 sides. And all the fore- going parts of the polygon of i6 sides approach nearer to the corresponding parts of the circle than those of the octagon do. It is evident that by continually bisecting the arcs, we may obtain a series of regular polygons, of which the last one may be made to approach the circle as near as we please, but that however far this process is carried the final polygon can never become greater than the circle, nor can the final apothem become greater than the radius. Hence the circle is the limit of the perimeter of the regular polygon when the number of its sides is endlessly increased, and the area of the circle is the limit of the area of the poly- gon, and the radius of the circle is the limit of the apothem of the polygon under the same circumstances. 149°. Theorem. — A circle is equal to one-half the rectangle on its radius and a line-segment equal in length to the circle. Proof. — The is the limit of a regular polygon when the number of its sides is endlessly increased, and the radius of the is the limit of the apothem of the polygon. But, whatever be the number of its sides, a regular polygon is equal to one-half the CD on its apothem and perimeter. (147°) .'. a is equal to one-half the [=] on its radius and a line- segment equal to its circumference. Exercises. I. Show that a regular polygon may be described about a circle, and that the limit of its perimeter when the number of its sides is increased indefinitely is the circumference of the circle. MEASUREMENT OF LENGTHS AN'B AREA^: lOI 2. The difference between the areas of tw.a re^u-ai: polygo-ns^ one inscribed in a circle and the other circumscribed about it, vanishes at the limit when the number of sides of the polygons increases indefinitely. 3. What is the limit of the internal angle of a regular polygon as the number of its sides is endlessly increased ? SECTION 11. MEASUREMENT OF LENGTHS AND AREAS. 150°. Def. — I. That part of Geometry which deals with the measures and measuring of magnitudes is Metrical Geometry. 2. To measure a magnitude is to determine how many unit magnitudes of the same kind must be taken together to form the given magnitude. And the number thus determined is called the measure of the given magnitude with reference to the unit employed. This number may be a whole or a frac- tional number, or a numerical quantity which is not arith- metically expressible. The word "number" will mean any of these. 3. In measuring length, such as that of a line-segment, the unit is a segment of arbitrary length called the unit-length. In practical work we have several such units as an inch, a foot, a mile, a metre, etc., but in the Science of Geometry the unit-length is quite arbitrary, and results obtained through it are so expressed as to be independent of the length of the particular unit employed. 4. In measuring areas the unit magnitude is the area of the square having the unit-length as its side. This area is the unit-area. Hence the unit-length and unit-area are not both 102' ■ ' SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. kWLt^ry,, cforl if' tiiher is fixed the other is fixed also, and determinable. This relation between the unit-length and the unit-area is conventional, for we might assume the unit-area to be the area of any figure which is wholly determined by a single segment taken as the unit-length : as, for example, an equi- lateral triangle with the unit-length as side, a circle with the unit-length as diameter, etc. The square is chosen because it offers decided advantages over every other figure. For the sake of conciseness we shall symbolize the term unit-length by ?/./. and unit-area by z^.a. 5. When two magnitudes are such that they are both capable of being expressed arithmetically in terms of some common unit they are coinviensurable^ and when this is not the case they are mcomme7tsiirable. Illus. — Let ABCD be a square, and let EF and HG be drawn _L to BD, and EH and FG _L to AC. Then EFGH is a square (82°, Cor. 5), and the triangles AEB, APB, BFC, BPC, etc., are all equal H D G to one another. If AB be taken as u.l.^ the area of the square AC is the u.a.\ and if EF be taken as u.l., the area of the square EG is the 21. a. In the first case the measure of the square AC is i, and that of EG is 2 ; and in the latter case the measure of the square EG is i, and that of AC is \. So that in both cases the measure of the square EG is double that of the square AC. .'. the squares EG and AC are commensurable. Now, if AB be taken as ?/./., EF is not expressible arith- metically, as will be shown hereafter. .". AB and EF are incommensurable. 151°. Let AB be a segment trisected at E and F (127°), and let AC be the square on AB. ThenAD = AB. And p 1 2 3 4 '^S 6 7 8 9 G H MEASUREMENT OF LENGTHS AND AREAS. IO3 if AD be trisected in the points K and M, and through E and F ||s be drawn to AD, and through ^ e F K and M ||s be drawn to AB, the figures I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 are all squares equal to one another. Now, if AB be taken as u.l.^ AC is the u.a. ; and if AE be taken as w./., any one of the small squares, as AP, is the u.a. And the segment AB con- tains AE 3 times, while the square AC contains the square AP in three rows with three in each row, or 3'-^ times. .*. if any assumed u.l. be divided into 3 equal parts for a new ?/./., the corresponding u.a. is divided into 3^ equal parts for a new u.a. And the least consideration will show that this is true for any whole number as well as 3. .'. I. If an assumed u.l. be divided into n equal parts for a new u.l.., the corresponding u.a. is divided into 11^ equal parts for a new u.a.\ n denoting any whole number. Again, if any segment be measured by the u.l. AB, and also by the 21.I. AE, the measure of the segment in the latter case is three times that in the former case. And if any area be measured by the ti.a. AC, and also by the ti.a. AP, the measure of the area in the latter case is 3^ times its measure in the former case. And as the same relations are evidently true for any whole number as well as 3, .'. 2. If any segment be measured by an assumed u.l. and also by th of the assumed u.l. as a new u.l.., the measure of ;/ the segment in the latter case is n times its measure in the former. And if any area be measured by the corresponding u.a.% the measure of the area in the latter case is n^ times its measure in the former case ; n being any whole number. This may be stated otherwise as follows : — By reducing an assumed u.l. to ^th of its original length, n we increase the measure of any given segment 11 times, and we increase the measure of any given area J1^ times ; ;/ being a whole number. 104 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. In all cases where a u.l. and a u.a. are considered together, they are supposed to be connected by the relation of 1 50°, 3 and 4. I52^ Theorem. — The number of unit-areas in a rectangle is the product of the numbers of unit-lengths in two adjacent sides. The proof is divided mto three cases. 1. Let the measures of the adjacent sides with respect to c the unit adopted be whole numbers. Let AB contain the assumed 11. l. a times, and let AD contain it b times. Then, by dividing AB into a equal parts and drawing, through each point of division, lines || to AD, and by dividing AD into b equal parts and drawing, through each point of division, lines || to AB, we divide the whole rectangle into equal squares, of which there are a rows with b squares in each row. the whole number of squares is ab. But each square has the u.l. as its side and is therefore the u.a. u.a.s in AC=^?/./.s in AB x u.l.s in AD. We express this relation more concisely by writing symbolic- ally [=]AC = AB.AD, where [=:AC means" the number ofu.a.s in[=]AC,"and AB and AD mean respectively "the numbers of w./.s in these sides." And in language we say, the area of a rectangle is the pro- duct of its adjacent sides ; the proper interpretation of which is easily given. 2. Let the measures of the adjacent sides with respect to the unit adopted be fractional. Then, ".• AB and AD are commensurable, some unit will be an aliquot part of each (150°, 5). Let the new unit be -th of the adopted unit, and let AB contain p of the new units, and AD contain ^ of them. The measure of [z:AC in terms of the new 71. a. is ^a MEASUREMENT OF LENGTHS AND AREAS. I05 (i 52°, i), and the measure of the ciiAC in terms of the adopted unit is ^f (151°, 2) But the measure of AB in terms of the adopted //./. is '^, and of AD it is ^ . (151", 2) n n and -^=^.2, or nAC^AB.AD. Illus. — Suppose the measures of AB and AD to some unit-length to be 3.472 and 4.631. By taking a //./. 1000 times smaller these measures become the whole numbers 3472 and 4631, and the number of corresponding u.a.s in the rectangle is 3472 x 4631 or 16078832 ; and dividing by looo^, the measure of the area with respect to the original 2i.L is 16.078832 = 3.472 x 4.631. 3. Let the adjacent sides be incommensurable. There is now no ti.l. that will measure both AB b c and AD. If [=]AC is not equal to AB . AD, let it be equal to AB . AE, where AE has a a e h d measure different from AD ; and suppose, first, that AE is < AD, so that E lies between A and D. With any u.l. which will measure AB, and which is less than ED, divide AD into parts. One point of division at least must fall between E and D ; let it fall at H. Complete the rectangle BH. Then AB and AH are commensurable, and □BH^AB.AH, but miBD^AB.AE; (hyp.) and i=]BHis<[=!BD; AB.AH is<AB.AE, and AB being a common factor AH is < AE ; which is not true. .*. If [=iAC = AB . AE, AE cannot be < AD, and similarly it may be shown that AE cannot be > AD ; .*. AE = AD, or [=]AC=AB.AD. q.e.d. i06 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 153°. The results of the last article in conjunction with Section I. of this Part give us the following theorems. 1. The area of a parallelogram is the product of its base and altitude. (140°) 2. The area of a triangle is one-half the product of its base and altitude. (141°) 3. The area of a trapezoid is one-half the product of its altitude and the sum of its parallel sides. (M5°j Ex.) 4. The area of any regular polygon is one-half the product of its apothem and perimeter. (H7°) 5. The area of a circle is one-half the product of its radius and a line-segment equal to its circumference. (H9°) Ex. I. Let O, O' be the centres of the in-circle and of the P ex-circle to the side BC (131°); V y/^ \ and let OD, O'P" be perpen- ^^" \ diculars on BC, OE, O'P' per- ^(^;\d^^^^^^°' pendiculars on AC, and OF, O'P yy^^^^^^\y^/ ^"^ AB- Then A ^ c*\~P' ^,^^1 0'P = 0'P' = 0'P''=r'; .-. AABC = AAOB-|-ABOC + ACOA = UB. OF + ^BC.OD-t-|CA.OE (153°, 2) = ^ r X perimeter = 7's, where s is the half perimeter ; /\ = rs. Ex. 2. AABC = AAO'B + AAO'C-ABO'C = \0'V . AB -f- ^O'P'. AC - |0'P". BC r=\r\b^c-a) = r\s-d), where r' is the radius of the ex-circle to side a ; l\=r\s-a). Similarly, A = ^"''■^ - b) MEASUREMENT OF LENGTHS AND AREAS. lO; Exercises. 1. l=L+J +JL. I ' If ' tit r r r r 2. /\^ = rr'r"r"'. 3. What relation holds between the radius of the in-circle and that of an ex- circle when the triangle is equiangular.'* Note. — When the diameter of a circle is taken as the u.l. the measure of the circumference is the inexpressible numeri- cal quantity symbolized by the letter tt, and which, expressed approximately, is 3. 141 5926.... 4. What is the area of a square when its diagonal is taken as the u.l. ? 5. What is the measure of the diagonal of a square when the side is taken as the ?/./.? (150°, 5) 6. Find the measure of the area of a circle when the di- ameter is the u.l. When the circumference is the u.l. 7. If one line-segment be twice as long as another, the square on the first has four times the area of the square on the second. (151°) 2) 8. If one line-segment be twice as long as another, the equilateral triangle on the first is four times that on the second. (141°) 9. The equilateral triangle on the altitude of another equilat- eral triangle has an area three-fourths that of the other. 10. The three medians of any triangle divide its area into six equal triangles. 1 1. From the centroid of a triangle draw three lines to the sides so as to divide the triangle into three equal quadrangles. 12. In the triangle ABC X is taken in BC, Y in CA, and Z in AB, so that BX = iBC, CY = iCA, and AZ = ^AB. Express the area of the triangle XYZ in terms of that of ABC. 13. Generalize 12 by making BX = -BC, etc. 14. Show that a = s(\- ^\ = -{r" ■\-r' 108 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. SECTION III. GEOMETRIC INTERPRETATION OF ALGEBRAIC FORMS. 1 54''. We have a language of symbols by which to express and develop mathematical relations, namely, Algebra. The symbols of Algebra are quantitative and operative, and it is very desirable, while giving a geometric meaning to the symbol of quantity, to so modify the meanings of the sym- bols of operation as to apply algebraic forms in Geometry. This application shortens and generalizes the statements of geometric relations without interfering with their accuracy. Elementary Algebra being generalized Arithmetic, its quantitative symbols denote numbers and its operative sym- bols are so defined as to be consistent with the common properties of numbers. Thus, because 2 + 3 = 3-1-2 and 2.3 = 3.2, we say that a^rb = b-\-a and ab=ba. This is called the commutative law. The first example is of the existence of the law in addition, and the second of its existence in multiplication. The commutative law in addition may be thus expressed : — A sum is independent of the order of its addends ; and in multiplication — A product is independent of the order of its factors. Again, because 2(3 + 4) = 2 . 3 -f- 2 . 4, we say that a{b + c) — ab + ac. This is called the distributive law and may be stated thus : — The product of multiplying a factor by the sum of several terms is equal to the sum of the products arising from multiplying the factor by each of the terms. These two are the only laws which need be here mentioned. And any science which is to employ the forms of Algebra INTERPRETATION OF ALGKBRAIC FORMS. IO9 must have that, whatever it may be, which is denoted by the algebraic symbol of quantity, subject to these laws. 155°. As already explained in 22° we denote a single hne- segment, in the one-letter notation, by a single letter, as a, which is equivalent to the algebraic symbol of quantity ; and hence, A single algebraic symbol of quantity is to be interpreted geometrically as a line- segment. It must of course be understood, in all cases, that in em- ploying the two-letter notation for a segment (22°), as " AB," the two letters standing for a single line-segment are equiva- lent to but a single algebraic symbol of quantity. The expression a^b denotes a segment equal in length to those denoted by a and b together. Similarly '2a = a-\-a^ and na means a segment as long as n of the segments a placed together in line, n being any numerical quantity whatever. (28°) a — b^ when a is longer than b, is the segment which is left when a segment equal to b is taken from a. Now it is manifest that, if a and b denote two segments, a-vb=b-\-a, and hence that the commutative law for addition applies to these symbols when they denote magnitudes having length only, as well as when they denote numbers. 1 56°. Line in Opposite Senses. — A quantitative symbol, a, is in Algebra always affected with one of two signs, -f or - , which, while leaving the absolute value of the symbol un- changed, impart to it certain properties exactly opposite in character. This oppositeness of character finds its complete interpreta- tion in Geometry in the opposite directions of every segment. Thus the segment in the margin may be con- a sidered as extending/r<77/z A to B or from B to A. A B With the two-letter notation the direction can be denoted by the order of the letters, and this is one of the advantages I TO SYNTHETIC GEOMETRV. of this notation ; but with the one-letter notation, if we denote the segment AB by + a^ we ;;/«j-/ denote the segment B A by -a. But as there is no absolute reason why one direction rather than the other should be considered positive, we express the matter by saying that AB and BA, or +a and -a, denote the same segment taken in opposite senses. Hence the algebraic distinction of positive and negative as applied to a single symbol of quantity is to be interpreted geometrically by the oppositeness of direction of the segment denoted by the symbol. Usually the applications of this principle in Geometry are confined to those cases in which the segments compared as to sign are parts of one and the same line or are parallel. Ex. I. Let ABC be any A and let BD be the altitude from the vertex B. Now, suppose that the sides AB and BC undergo a gradual change, so that B may move along the Hne BB' until it comes into the position denoted by B'. "a d c Then the segment AD gradually di- minishes as D approaches A ; disappears when D coincides with A, in which case B comes to be vertically over A and the A becomes right-angled at A ; reappears as D passes to the left of A, until finally we may suppose that one stage of the change is represented by the AAB'C with its altitude B'D'. Then, if we call AD positive, we must call AD' negative, or we must consider AD and AD' as having opposite senses. Again, from the principle of continuity (104°) the foot of the altitude cannot pass from D on the right of A to D' on the left of A without passing through every intermediate point, and therefore passing through A. And thus the seg- ment AD must vanish before it changes sign. This is conveniently expressed by saying that a line- INTERPRETATION OF ALGEBRAIC FORMS. 1 1 1 segjnent changes sign when it passes through zero; passing through zero being interpreted as vanishing and reappearing on the other side of the zero-point. Ex. 2. ABCD is a normal quadrangle. Consider the side AD and suppose D to move along the line g DA until it comes into the position D'. The segments AD and AD' are opposite in sense, and ABCD' is a crossed quad- rangle. .•. the crossed quadrangle is derived from "^ ^ ° the normal one by changing the sense of one of the sides. Similarly, if one of the sides of a crossed quadrangle be changed in sense the figure ceases to be a crossed quadrangle. Ex. 3. This is an example where segments which are par- allel but which are not in line have opposite senses. ABC is a A ^rid P is any point within from which perpendiculars PD, PE, PF are drawn to the sides. Suppose that P moves to P'. Then PF becomes P'F', and PF and P'F' being in the same direc- tion have the same sense. Similarly PE becomes P'E', and these segments have the same sense. But PD becomes P'D' which is read in a direction opposite to that of PD. Hence PD and P'D' are opposite in sense. But PD and P'D' are perpendiculars to the same line from points upon opposite sides of it, and it is readily seen that in passing from P to P' the _LPD becomes zero and then changes sense as P crosses the side BC. Hence if by any continuous change in a figure a point passes from one side of a line to the other side, the peipen- dicular from that point to the line changes sense. Cor, If ABC be equilateral it is easily shown that PD-}-PE-hPF = a constant. 112 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. And if we regard the sense of the segments this statement is true for all positions of P in the plane. 157°. Product. — The algebraic form of a product of two symbols of quantity is interpreted geometrically by the rect- angle having for adjacent sides the segments denoted by the quantitative symbols. This is manifest from Art. 152°, for in the form ab the single letters may stand for the measures of the sides, and the product ab will then be the measure of the area of the rect- angle. If we consider ab as denoting a en having a as altitude and b as base, then ba will denote the izu having b as altitude and a as base. But in any en it is immaterial which side is taken as base (138°) ; therefore ab^ba, and the form satisfies the commutative law for multiplication. Again, let AC be the segment b-\-Cy and AB be the segment A D c a, so placed as to form the ni^a{b + c) or " ^ I AF. Taking AD =^^, let DE be drawn ! II to AB. Then AE and DF are rect- F angles and DE = AB = rt:. cziAE is nnaby and cziDF is nnac ; n2a{b ->rc) = nnab -f \:nac^ and the distributive law is satisfied. 158°. We have then the two following interpretations to which the laws of operation of numbers apply whenever such operations are interpretable. I. A si7tgle symbol of qua7itity denotes a line -segment. As the sum or difference of two line-segments is a segment, the sum of any number of segments taken in either sense is a segment. Therefore any number of single symbols of quantity con- nected by + and - signs denotes a segment, as a-\-b^ a-b-irc, a-b + {-c), etc. INTERPRETATION OF ALGEBRAIC FORMS. II 3 For this reason such expressions or forms are often called linear^ even in Algebra. Other forms of linear expressions will appear hereafter. 2. The product form of two symbols of quantity denotes the rectangle whose adjaceitt sides are the segments denoted by the single symbols. A rectangle encloses a portion of the plane and admits of measures in two directions perpendicular to one another, hence the area of a rectangle is said to be of two dimensions. And as all areas can be expressed as rectangles, areas in general are of two dimensions. Hence algebraic terms which denote rectangles, such as ab^ {a-\-b)c, {a-irb){c+d\ etc., are often called rectangular terms, and are said to be of two dimensions. a d c Ex. Take the algebraic identity a{b-\-c) = ab-\-ac. The geometric interpretation gives — be f If there be any three segments {a, b, c) the cu on the first and the sum of the other two {b, c) is equal to the sum of the czis on the first and each of the other two. The truth of this geometric theorem is evident from an inspection of a proper figure. This is substantially Euclid, Book II., Prop. i. 159°. Square. — When the segment b is equal to the seg- ment a the rectangle becomes the square on a. When this equality of symbols takes place in Algebra we write a^ for aa, and we call the result the " square " of a, the term " square " being derived from Geometry. Hence the algebraic form of a square is interpreted geo- metrically by the square which has for its side the segment denoted by the root symbol. Ex. In the preceding example let b become equal to a^ and a{a + ^) = ^- 4- iiCj H 114 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. which interpreted geometrically gives — If a segment (a + c) be divided into two parts {a, c), the rectangle on the segment and one of its parts {a) is equal to the sum of the square on that part {aP) and the rectangle on the two parts {ac). This is Euclid, Book II., Prop. 3. The truth of the geo- metric theorem is manifest from a proper figure. 160°. Homogeneity. — Let a, b, c, d denote segments. In the linear expressions a + b, a-b, etc., and in the rectangular expressions ab + cd, etc., the interpretations of the symbols + and — are given in 28°, 29°, and 143°, and are readily in- telligible. But in an expression such as ab + c we have no interpreta- tion for the symbol -f- if the quantitative symbols denote line-segments. For ah denotes the area of a rectangle and c denotes a segment, and the adding of these is not intelligible in any sense in which we use the word " add." Hence an expression such as ab + c is not interpretable geometrically This is expressed by saying that — An alge- braic form has no geometric interpretation unless the form is homogeneous, i.e., unless each of its terms denotes a geo- metric element of the same kind. It will be observed that the terms "square," "dimensions," "homogeneous," and some others have been introduced into Algebra from Geometry. 161°. Rectangles i7i Opposite Senses. — The algebraic term ab changes sign if one of its factors changes sign. And to be consistent we must hold that a rectangle changes sense whenever one of its adjacent sides changes sense. Thus the rectangles AB . CD and AB . DC are the same in extent of area, but have opposite senses. And AB.CD + AB.DC = o, for the sum = AB(CD + DC), and CD + DC = o. (156°) INTERPRETATION OF ALGEBRAIC FORMS. 15 + — -f c As the sense of a rectangle depends upon that of a line- segment there is no difficulty in determining when rectangles are to be taken in different senses. The following will illustrate this part of the subject : — Let OA = OA'and OC = OC', and let bob, the figures be rectangles. ns OA. OC and OA'. OC have the common altitude OC and bases equal in length but opposite in sense. There- fore OA.'OC and OA'. OC are opposite in sense, and if we call [zdOA. OC positive we must call cdOA'. OC negative. Again, cds OC . OA' and OC . OA' have the common base OA' and altitudes equal in length but opposite in sense. Therefore cds OC. OA' and OC. OA' are opposite in sense, and therefore ens OA. OC and OA'. OC are of the same sense. Similarly ens OC . OA' and OC. OA are of the same sense. These four czis are equivalent to the algebraic forms : — + a. + l>= +a^, -a.-\-b= -ab, -{■a.-b= -ab, -a.-b=+ab. Ex. I. ABCD is a normal quadrangle whose opposite sides meet in O, and OE, OF are altitudes of the As DOC and AOB respectively. The Od. ABCD =ADOC-AAOB, = |c=]DC.OE-|[=]AB.OF. (141°) Now, let A move along AB to A' (104°). Then O comes to O', F to F', E to E', and O'E', O'F' become the altitudes of the As DO'C and A'O'B respectively. But O'E' and OE have the same sense, therefore DC . OE and DC . OE' have the same sense. Also, A'B is opposite in sense to AB, and O'F' is opposite in sense to OF. (156°, Ex. 3) AB . OF and A'B . O'V have the same sense ; Od. A'BCD = ADO'C-AA'0'B; ii6 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. / - yr N /\ \U ^ J s D R .^Q or, the area of a crossed quadrangle must be taken to be the difference between the two triangles which constitute it. 162°. Theorem. — A quadrangle is equal to one-half the parallelogram on its diagonals taken in both magnitude and relative direction. P B .Q ABCD is a quadrangle of which AC and BD are diagonals. Through B and D let PQ and RS be drawn || to AC, and through A and C let PS and OR be drawn || to BD. Then PORS is the I 7 on the diagonals AC and BD in both magnitude and direction. Qd. ABCD = |z=::7PQRS. Proof.— Qi^. ABCD =AABC + AADC(istFig.) = AABC - AADC (2ndFig.) A (161°, Ex.) AABC = i£II7P0CA, AADC = |nZ7SRCA, (141°, Cor. i) Qd. ABCD=^£ZI7P0RS in both figures. This theorem illustrates the generality of geometric results when the principle of continuity is observed, and segments and rectangles are considered with regard to sense. Thus the principle of continuity shows that the crossed quadrangle is derived from the normal one (156°, Ex. 2) by changing the sense of one of the sides. This requires us to give a certain interpretation to the area of a crossed quadrangle (161°, Ex. i), and thence the present example shows us that all quadrangles admit of a common expression for their areas. 163°. A rectangle is constructed upon two segments which are independent of one another in both length and sense. But a square is constructed upon a single segment, by using INTERPRF.TATION OF ALGEBRAIC FORMS. 11/ it for each side. In other words, a rectangle depends upon two segments while a square depends upon only one. Hence a square can have only one sign, and this is the one which we agree to call positive. Hence a squtwe is always positive. 164°. The algebraic equation ab=cd tells us geometrically that the rectangle on the segments a and b is equal to the rectangle on the segments c and d. But the same relation is expressed algebraically by the form cd therefore, since rz is a segment, the form ^ is linear and o denotes that segment which with a determines a rectangle equal to cd. Hence an expression such as - + — + — is linear. cab 165°. The expression a^ = bc tells us geometrically that the square whose side is a is equal to the rectangle on the seg- ments b and c. But this may be changed to the form a = J be. Therefore since «: is a segment, the side of the square, the form f^fbc is linear. Hence the algebraic forin of the square root of the product of two symbols of quantity is interpreted geometrically by the side of the square which is equal to the rectangle on the segments denoted by the quatititative symbols. 166°. The following theorems are but geometric interpreta- tions of well-known algebraic identities. They may, however, be all proved most readily by superposition of areas, and thus the algebraic identity may be derived from the geo- metric theorem. Ii8 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. ab b' a« ab I. The square on the sum of two segments is equal to the sum of the squares on the segments and twice the a b rectangle on the segments. 2. The rectangle on the sum and differ- ence of two segments is equal to the difference of the squares on these segments. 3. The sum of" the squares on the sum and on the differ- ence of two segments is equal to twice the sum of the squares on the segments. {a + bf + {a- bf = 2(^2 + d'^)^ a>b. 4. The difference of the squares on the sum and on the difference of two segments is equal to four times the rectangle on the segments. {a^-bf-{a-bf = ^ab, a>b. Exercises. I. To prove 4 of Art. 166°. Let AH = ^ and HB = ^ be the segments, so that A g H 6 B AB is their sum. Through H draw HG |1 to EC, a side of the square on AB. Make HG = rt, and complete the square FGLE, as in the figure, so that FG is a — b. Then AC is {a + bf and EG is {a — by-, and their difference is the four rectangles AF, HK, CL, and DE ; but these each have a and b as adjacent sides. {a + bf-{a-b)'^=^ab. State and prove geometrically {a - b)^= or + b^ - 2ab. State and prove geometrically {a-\-b){a-{-c) = a'- + a{b + c) + bc. State and prove geometrically by superposition of areas ab b ab b b ab E F L G 6 ab («+b)'^ AREAL RELATIONS. 1 I9 {a-\-i?)--\-{a-bf-\-2{(i + b){a-b)=^{2ay,v^-hQVQ a and b denote segments. If a given segment be divided into any three parts the square on the segment is equal to the sum of the squares on the parts together with twice the sum of the rectangles on the parts taken two and two. Prove, by comparison of areas from the Fig. of Ex. i, that {a-\-bf = 2b{a + b) + 2b{a'-b)->r{a-bf, and state the theorem in words. SECTION IV. AREAL RELATIONS. 167°. Def. — 1. The segment which joins two given points is called the join of the points ; and where no reference is made to length the Join of two points may be taken to mean the hne determined by the points. 2. The foot of the perpendicular from a given point to a given line is the orthogonal projection^ or simply the projec- tion^ of the point upon the line. 3. Length being considered, the join of the projection of two points is the projection of the join of the points. Thus if L be a given line and P, Q, two given points, and PP', QQ' perpendiculars upon L ; PQ is the join of P and Q, P' and Q' are the p^ Q^ l projections of P and Q upon L, and the segment P'Q' is the projection of PO upon L. 168°. Theorem.— T\iQ: sum of the projections of the sides of 20 SYxNTHETIC GEOMETRY. any closed rectilinear figure, taken in cyclic order with c respect to any line, is zero. ABCD is a closed rectilinear figure and L is any line. Then Pr.AB + Pr.BC + Pr.CD + Pr.DA=o A' B o D' L /'/T?^— Draw the perpendiculars AA', BE', CC, DD', and the sum of the projections becomes A'B' + B'C' + C'D' + D'A'. But D'A' is equal in length to the sum of the three others and is opposite in sense. .*. the sum is zero. It is readily seen that since we return in every case to the point from which we start the theorem is true whatever be the number or disposition of the sides. This theorem is of great importance in many investigations. Cor. Any side of a closed rectilinear figure is equal to the sum of the projections of the remaining sides, taken in cyclic order, upon the line of that side. Def. — In a right-angled triangle the side opposite the right angle is called the hypothe?tuse, as distinguished from the remaining two sides. Theorem. — In any right-angled triangle the square on one of the sides is equal to the rectangle on the hypothenuse and the projection of that side on the hypothenuse. ABC is right-angled at B, and BD is ± AC. Then AB2 = AC.AD. Proof.— \.^\. AF be the □ on AC, and let EH be II to AB, and AGHB be a en, since Z_B is a ~|- Then-.- ^GAB = z.EAC=~|, (82^ Cor. 5) z.CAB = ^EAG. Also, AE = AC, (hyp.) ACAB = AEAG, (64°) and .-. AG = AB, and AH is the n P" '^R- AREAL RELATIONS. 121 Now nAH=-£IZ7ABLE = i=]ADKE, (140°) i.e., AB'-^ = AC.AD. q.e.d. As this theorem is very important we give an alternative proof of it. Proof.— KY is the D on AC and AH is the D on AB, and BD is _L AC. ^GAB=Z.CAE=~1. (82°, Cor. 5)G< .*. ^GAC=z.BAE. Also, AG = AB, and AC = AE, (82°, Cor^ 5) .'. AGAC=ABAE. (5O But AGAC = inAH, (141°) and ABAE=|i=iAK, DAH=dAK, i.e.. AB2=AC.AD. Cor. I. Since AB2 = AC . AD we have from symmetry BC2=AC.DC, .-. adding, AB2 + BC2 = AC(AD + UC), or AB2 + BC2 = AC2. .'. The square on the hypothenuse of a right-angled triangle is equal to the sum of the squai'es on the remaining sides. This theorem, which is one of the most important in the whole of Geometry, is said to have been discovered by Pythagoras about 540 B.C. Cor. 2. Denote the sides by a and c and the hypothenuse by b, and let a-^ and c^ denote the projections of the sides a and c upon the hypothenuse. Then a^ = af), c'^^c^b., and «2 + ^2_^2_ Cor. 3. Denote the altitude to the hypothenuse by p. Then b=^c^-\-a^, and ADB and CDB are right-angled at D, ^2= ^^2 + ^^2 .,.2^^^^ ; (166°, i) add 2/J2 to each side and b^ + ip^ = c;^ -1-/2 + a^ +/2 + 2r^.7„ 122 SYNTHETIC GEOiMETRY. or 6-^ + rt2_|.2^2_^2 + ^2 + 2^i^i. (Cor. l) or BD2 = AD.DC, i.e.^ the square on the altitude to the hypothenuse is equal to the rectangle on the projections of the sides on the hypo- thenuse. Def. — The side of the square equal in area to a given rectangle is called the mean proportional or the geoinetric mean between the sides of the rectangle. Thus the altitude to the hypothenuse of a right-angled /\ is a geometric mean between the segments into which the altitude divides the hypothenuse. (169°, Cor. 3) And any side of the A is a geometric mean between the hypothenuse and its projection on the hypothenuse. (169'') 170°. Theorem. — If the square on one side of a triangle is equal to the sum of the squares on the remaining sides, the triangle is right-angled at that vertex which is opposite the side having the greatest square. (Converse of 169°, Cor.) If AC2 = AB2 + BC^, the Z.B is a "1- Proof.— l.tt ADC be a i0 on AC. AC=^ = AB2-fBC2, AB is < AC. a chord AD can be found equal to AB. // Then the AADC is right-angled at D. IS (106", Cor. 4) AC- = AD2-fDC2, (169°, Cor. i) and AC2=AB2-fBC2, and AD = AB. (hyp.) DC = BC, and AADC = AABC. ^D=^B = ~1. ^.^.^• 171°. Theorem 169° with its corollaries and theorem 170° are extensively employed in the practical applications of Geometry. If we take the three numbers 3, 4, and 5, we AREAL RELATIONS. 123 have 52=32 + 42. Therefore if a triangle has its sides 3, 4, and 5 feet, metres, miles, or any other ;/./., it is right-angled opposite the side 5. For the segments into which the altitude divides the hypothenuse we have S^h^3'^ ^"^ 5'^i = 4^ whence ^?i = | and =iJi For the altitude itself, /2==u whence p ■■ Problem. — To find sets of whole numbers which represent the sides of right-angled triangles. This problem is solved by any three numbers ,r, y^ and s^ which satisfy the condition ;ir2 =^2 4. ^2_ Let in and n denote any two numbers. Then, since {7n^-Vn^Y = {in'^-n^f^{2inny, (166°, 4) the problem will be satisfied by the numbers denoted by )n^-\-n^^ m^ — fi^, and 2tfin. The accompanying table, which may be extended at pleasure, gives a number of sets of such numbers : — 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ' ... 5 ' 10 15 26 37 50 65 82 lOI ... I 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 ,, ! 4 : 8 17 24 3S 48 63 80 99 1 ,^3 20 29 40 53 68 85 104 2 i 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 .. 5 12 21 32 45 60 77 96 .. 25 34 45 S8 7?> 90 109 .. 3 ' 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 .. ' 7 16 27 40 55 72 91 .. 41 52 6^ 80 97 116 .. 4 9 48 S6 64 72 80 .. 40 20 33 48 65 84 61 74 89 106 125 J 5 60 70 80 90 icoj i 1 " 24 39 56 75 1 .. ... ... •• 24 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 172°. Let a, d, c be the sides of any triangle, and let b be 3 taken as base. Denote the projections of a and r on /^ by a-^ and q, and the ^a altitude to b by p. Then (i) U^^c-i^-\-a^^2.c^a^, (166°, i) (2) ^2 = ^1^/2, (169°, Cor. I) (3) ^^ = ^i2+/2. 1. By subtracting (2) from (3) : . The difference between the squares upon two sides of a triangle is equal to the difference of the squares on the projec- tions of these sides on the third side, taken in the same order. Since all the terms are squares and cannot change sign (163°), the theorem is true without any variation for all As. 2. By adding (i) and (2) and subtracting (3), b'^-\-c'^-a^ = ic^ + 2^1 ^1 = 2^^i, •.* b=c^-\-a^, a'^ = b''- + c'^-2bc^. Now, since we have assumed that b=c-^^-]-a-^, where c^ and a^ are both positive, D falls between A and C, and the angle A is acute. .'. In any triangle the square on a side opposite an acute angle is less than the sum of the sqicares upon the other two sides by twice the rectangle ott one of these sides and the pro- jection of the other side upon it. 3. Let the angle A become obtuse. Then D, the foot of the altitude to b, passes beyond A, and c^ changes sign. a .•. [=1(5^1 changes sign, (161°) and a^ = b'^'-Vc^^ibc^. .'. The square on the side opposite obttcse angle i7i an obtuse- angled triaftgle is greater than the sum of the squares on the other two sides by twice the rectangle on one of these sides and the projection of the other side upon it. AREAL RELATIONS. 125 The results of 2 and 3 are fundamental in the theory of triangles. These results are but one ; for, assuming as we have done that the nn^Ci is to be subtracted from d'^ + c^ when A is an acute angle, the change in sign follows necessarily when A becomes obtuse, since in that case the en changes sign because one of its sides changes sign (161°); and in conformity to algebraic forms - ( — 2bc-^= + 2bc-^. Cor. If the sides a, b, c of a. triangle be given in numbers, we have from 2 Ci~ , 20 which gives the projection of c on k If ^1 is + the lA is acute ; if c^ is o the z_A is ~~\ ; and if ^1 is - the lA is obtuse. Ex. The sides of a triangle being 12, 13, and 4, to find the character of the angle opposite side 13. Let 13 = ^, and denote the other sides as you please, ^.^., ^=12 and c=4. Then . _ I2H4^-I3 ^_ 3 1 :r, ~ Q' 24 6 and the angle opposite side 13 is obtuse. 173°. Theorem. — The sum of the squares on any two sides of a triangle is equal to twice the sum of the squares on one- half the third side and on the median to b that side. BE is the median to AC. Then AB2 + BC2=2(AE2 + EB2). Proof.— l^^t D be the foot of the altitude ^ ^ ^ on AC. Consider the AABE obtuse-angled at E, and AB2 = AE2-fEB2 + 2AE.ED. (172°, 3) Next, consider the ACBE acute-angled at E, and BC2 = EC2-HEB2-2EC.ED. (172°, 2) 126 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Now, adding and remembering that AE = EC, AB2 + BC2 = 2AE2 + 2EB2. q.e.d. Cor. I. Denoting the median by in and the side upon which it falls by b^ we have for the length of the median 4 Cor. 2. All the sides of an equilateral triangle are equal and the median is the altitude to the base and the right bisector of the base. (53", Cors. 2, 3) .'. in an equilateral triangle, ni^=p^ = \aP-^ ox p = \asj 2i^ a being the side. 173°. Theorem. — The sum of the squares on the sides of a quadrangle is equal to the sum of the squares on the diagonals, and four times the square on the join of the middle points of the diagonals. E, F are middle points of AC and BD. Then 2(AB2) = AC2 + BD2+4EF2. D Proof.— ]6m AF and CF. Then AF is a median to AABD, and CF to ACRD. AB2 + AD2=2BF2-f2AF2, (172^^ and BC2 + CD2 = 2BF2 + 2CF2, .-. adding, 2(AB2) = 4BF2 + 2(AF2+CF2). But EF is a median to AAFC. AF2 + CF2 = 2CE2 + 2EF2, (172^) 2;( AB2) = 4BF2 + 4CE2 + 4EF2 = BD2 + AC2 + 4EF2. q.e.d. Since squares only are involved this relation is true with- out any modification for all quadrangles. Cor. I. When the quadrangle becomes a 1 7 the diagonals bisect one another (81°, 3) and EF becomes zero. .•. the sum of the squares on the sides of a parallelogram is equal to the sum of the squares on its diagonals. AREAL RELATIONS. I 2/ 174°. Let ABC be an isosceles triangle and P be any point in the base AC, and let D be the middle point of ^ the base, and therefore the foot of the altitude. In the ABAP, acute-angled at A, BP2=BA2 + AP2-2AP.AD, (172°, 2) / BA2-BP2=AP(2AD-AP) / = AP.PC. Q A P D C If P moves to Q, AP becomes AQ and changes sign, BP becomes BQ which is > BA, and thus both sides of the equality change sign together as they pass through zero by P passing A. Now, of the two segments from B we always know which is the greater by 63°, and if we write PA for AP the izdPA . PC is positive when P is on the Q side of A. Hence, considering the rectangle as being always positive, we may state the theorem — The differoice between the squares on a side of an isosceles triangle and on the join of the vertex to any point in the base is equal to the rectangle on the segments into which that poijit divides the base. 175°. I. From 174° we have BA2-BP2 = AP . PC. Now BA is fixed, therefore the [=]AP . PC increases as BP de- creases. But BP is least when P is at D (63°, i), therefore the cdAP . PC is greatest when P is at D. Def I. — A variable magnitude, which by continuous change may increase until a greatest value is reached and then decrease, is said to be capable of a maximum, and the greatest value reached is its maximum. Thus as P moves from A to C the imAP . PC increases from zero, when P is at A, to its maximum value, when P is at D, and then decreases again to zero, when P comes to C. And as AC may be considered to be any segment divided at P, .'. The maximum rectangle on the parts of a given segment is formed by bisecting the segment; 128 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Or, of all rectangles with a given perimeter the square has the greatest area. 2. AC2=(AP + PC)2 = AP2 + PC2 + 2AP.PC (166°, i) = AP2 + PC2 + 2(AB2-BP2). (174°) But AC and AB are constant, AP2 + PC2 decreases as BP2 decreases. But BP is least when P is at D, AP2 + PC2 is least when P is at D. Def. 2. — A variable magnitude which by continuous change decreases until it reaches a least value and then increases is said to be capable of a miniinnm, and the least value attained is called its miniimiin. .'. The sum of the squares on the ttvo parts of a given seg- ment is a minimum when the segme7it is bisected. I75j°. The following examples give theorems of importance. B Ex. I. Let ABC be any triangle and BD the altitude to side b. Then y p\ \a . b-' + C'^-a- ^1= zi ' (172°, Cor.) A fa D c But P^^c^-c^^-ic-^-c^ic-c^, and /\ = \bp. (153°, 2) Now, .+., = (i±f)^^=(A±i±^(^±fZ-).^ 2b lb and c-c _ a''-{b-c f_ {a + b-c){a-b + c) '^ 2b 2b ' )'^=:i6/\^ = {a + b + c){b^-c-a){c+a-b){a + b-c\ and by writing s for \{a + b + c), dindi accordingly s-a for \{b + c—a), etc., we obtain A = slXs-a){s-b){s~c): This important relation gives the area of the A in terms of its three sides. Ex. 2. Let ABC be an equilateral A Then the area may be found from Ex. i by making a = b = c, when the reduced 2 expression becomes, A = '^ \^3- 4 AREAL RELATIONS. 1 29 Ex. 3. To find the area of a regular octagon in terms of its circumradius. A d Let A, B, C be three vertices of the octagon and O the centre. Complete the square OD, and draw BE ± to OA. Since lEOB^^~], and OB = r, E0 = EB-|rV2, and A0AB=^0A.EB=|r.|rV2=irV2. But AOAB is one-eighth of the octagon, Oct. = 2rV2. Exercises. 1. ABC is right-angled at B, and E and F are middle points of BA and BC respectively. Then 5AC2 = 4(CE2-^ AF2). 2. ABC is right-angled at B and O is the middle of AC, and D is the foot of the altitude from B. Then 2AC.OD = AB2-BC2. 3. ABC is right-angled at B and, on AC, AD is taken equal to AB, and on CA, CE is taken equal to CB. Then ED2=2AE.DC. 4. The square on the sum of the sides of a right-angled tri- angle exceeds the square on the hypothenuse by twice the area of the triangle. 5. To find the side of a square which is equal to the sum of two given squares. 6. To find the side of a square which is equal to the differ- ence of two given squares. 7. The equilateral triangle described upon the hypothenuse of a right-angled triangle is equal to the sum of the equilateral triangles described on the sides. 8. ABC is a triangle having AB = CB, and AD is J_ upon BC. Then AC2=2CB.CD. 9. Four times the sum of the squares on the three medians of a triangle is equal to three times the sum of the squares on the sides. I I30 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 10. ABCD is a rectangle and P is any point. Then PA2 + PC2=PB2 + PD2. 11. O is the centre of a circle, and AOB is a centre-line. OA=-OB and C is any point on the circle. Then AC2 + BC2 = a constant. Define a circle as the locus of the point C. 12. AD is a perpendicular upon the line OB, and BE is a perpendicular upon the line OA. Then OA . OE = OB.OD. 13. Two equal circles pass each through the centre of the other. If A, B be the centres and E, F be the points of intersection, EF2 = 3AB2. If EA produced meets one circle in P and AB pro- duced meets the other in Q, PQ2 = 7AB2. 14. ABC is a triangle having the angle A two-thirds of a right angle. Then AB2-fAC2 = BC2 + AC. AB. 15. In the triangle ABC, D is the foot of the altitude to AC and E is the middle point of the same side. Then 2ED.AC = AB2-BC2. 16. AD is a line to the base of the triangle ABC, and O is the middle point of AD. If AB2 + BD2=AC2 + CD2, then OB = OC. 17. ABC is right-angled at B and BD is the altitude to AC. Then AB. CD = BD . BC and AD . CB = BA. BD. 18. ABC is a triangle and OX, OY, OZ perpendiculars from any point O on BC, CA, and AB respectively. Then BX2 -f- C Y2 -f AZ2 = CX2 + A Y2 -1- BZl A similar relation holds for any polygon. 19. AA^, BBi are the diagonals of a rectangle and P any point. Then PA2+ PB2 + PAi2 + PBi2=AAj--}-4P02, where O is the intersection of the diagonals. 20. ABC is a triangle, AD, BE, CF its medians, and P any point. Then PA2-hPB2 + PC2 = PD2-fPE2+PF2-fi(AD- + BE2-fCF2), or 2PA2 = 2PD2-i- 12;a22^ where in is a median. 21. If O be the centroid in 20, AREAL RELATIONS. I31 PA2+PB2 + PC2 = 3P02 + MAD2 + BE2 + CF2), or SPA2 = 3P02 + fS;/z2. 22. ABCD is a square and AA', BE', CC, DD' perpendicu- lars upon any line L. Then (AA'2 + CC'2)~2BB'. DD' = area of the square. 23. The sum of the squares on the diagonals of any quad- rangle is equal to twice the sum of the squares on the joins of the middle points of opposite sides. 24. ABCD is a trapezoid having AD parallel to BC. Then AB2 + CD2 + 2AD.BC = AC2 + BD2. 25. If A, B, C be equidistant points in line, and D a fourth point in same line, the difference between the squares on AB and DB is equal to the rectangle on AD and CD. 26. If A, B, C, D be any four points in line, AD2 + BC2=:AC2-fBD2 + 2AB.CD. 27. Any rectangle is equal to one-half the rectangle on the diagonals of the squares described on adjacent sides. 28. In the triangle ABC, D is any point in BC, E is the middle point of AC and F of BC. Then AB24-AC2 = AD2 + 4EF2-f-2BD.DC. 29. The sides of a rectangle are a and b. If/ be the length of the perpendicular from a vertex upon a diagonal and q be the distance between the feet of the two parallel perpendiculars so drawn, ps!'cfiV^= ab and q^'c^T¥= b^ -a^ {b > a), what line-segment is denoted by s/ii^ + b'^ ? 30. ABCD is a square. P is a point in AB produced, and Q is a point in AD. If the rectangle BP . QD is con- stant, the triangle PQC is constant. 31. If the lengths of the sides of a triangle be expressed by x^+i, x^- I, and 2r, the triangle is right-angled. 32. If a and c be the sides of a right-angled triangle and p be the altitude to the hypothenuse, 14-1=1. ^2 • ^2 ^2 132 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 33. The triangle whose sides are 20, 15, and 12 has an obtuse angle. 34. The area of an isosceles triangle is 8^15 and the side is twice as long as the base. Find the length of the side of the triangle. 35. What is the length of the side of an equilateral triangle which is equal to the triangle whose sides are 13, 14, and 15? 36. If AB is divided in C so that AC2-2BC2, then AB2 + BC2=2AB.AC. 37. Applying the principle of continuity state the resulting theorem when B comes to D in (i) the Fig. of 172°, (2) the Fig. of 173°. 38. Applying the principle of continuity state the resulting theorem when B comes to E in the Fig. of 173°. 39. The bisector of the right angle of a right-angled triangle cuts the hypothenuse at a distance a from the middle point, and the hypothenuse is lb. Find the lengths of the sides of the triangle. 40. Construct an equilateral triangle having one vertex at a given point and the remaining vertices upon two given parallel lines. 41. A square of cardboard whose side is s stands upright with one edge resting upon a table. If a lower corner be raised vertically through a distance a^ through what distance will the corner directly above it be raised ? 42. What would be the expression for the area of a rectangle if the area of the equilateral triangle having its side the u.l. were taken as the u.a?. 43. The opposite walls of a house are 12 and 16 feet high and 20 feet apart. The roof is right-angled at the ridge and has the same inclination on each side. Find the lengths of the rafters. 44 Two circles intersect in P and Q. The longest chord through P is perpendicular to PQ. AREAL RELATIONS. 33 45. The largest triangle with a given perimeter is an equi- lateral triangle. 46. The largest triangle having its base and the sum of the other two sides given is isosceles. 47. The largest polygon of given species and given perimeter is regular. 48. The largest isosceles triangle with variable base has its sides perpendicular to one another, 49. The largest rectangle inscribed in an acute-angled tri- angle and having one side lying on a side of the triangle has its altitude one-half that of the triangle. 50. L, M are two lines meeting in O, and P is any point. APB is a variable hne cutting L in A and M in B. The triangle AOB is least when P bisects AB. EQUALITIES OF RECTANGLES ON SEGMENTS RELATED TO THE CIRCLE. 176°. Theorem. — If two secants to the same circle inter- sect, the rectangle on the segments between the point of intersection and the circle with respect to one of the secants is equal to the corresponding rectangle with respect to the other secant. I. Let the point of intersection be within the circle. Then AP.PB = CP.PD. Proof. — AOB is an isosceles triangle, and P is a point on the base AB. OA2-OP2 = AP.PB. (174°) Similarly, COD is an isosceles tri- angle, and P a point in the base CD, OC2-OP2=CP.PD. But OC = OA, AP.PB = CP.PD. q.e.d. 134 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Cor. I. (a) Let CD become a diameter and be _L to AB. Then AP. PB becomes AP2, (96°, Cor. 5) AP2 = CP.PD, and denoting AP by c, CP by -z/, and the radius of the circle by r, this becomes which is a relation between a chord of a 0, the radius of the 0, and the distance CP, commonly called the versed sine, of the arc AB. {b) When the point of intersection P passes without the we have still, by the principle of con- tinuity, AP . PB = CP . PD. But the as being now both negative we make them both positive by writing PA.PB = PC.PD. Cor. 2. When the secant PAB be- comes the tangent PT (109°), A and B coincide at T, and PA.PB becomes PT2, .-. PT2 = PC.PD, .e., if a tangent and a secant be drawn from the same point to a circle^ the square on the tangent is equal to the rectangle on the segments of the secant between the point a7id the circle. Cor. 3. Conversely, if T is on the circle and PT2=PC . PD, PT is a tangent and T is the point of contact. For, if the line PT is not a tangent it must cut the circle in some second point T' (94°). Then PT.PT' = PC.PD = PT2. Therefore PT = PT', which is not true unless T and T' coin- cide. Hence PT is a tangent and T is the point of contact. Cor. 4. Let one of the secants become a centre-line as PEF. Denote PT by /, PE by h, and the radius of the circle byr. Then PT2 = PE.PF becomes f^—hip-r+h). AREAL RELATIONS. 1 35 Exercises. 1. The shortest segment from a point to a circle is a portion of the centre-line through the point. 2. The longest segment from a point to a circle is a portion of the centre-line through the point. 3. If two chords of a circle are perpendicular to one another the sum of the squares on the segments between the point of intersection and the circle is equal to the square on the diameter. 4. The span of a circular arch is 120 feet and it rises 15 feet in the middle. With what radius is it con- structed? 5. A conical glass is b inches deep and a inches across the mouth. A sphere of radius r is dropped into it. How far is the centre of the sphere from the bottom of the glass ? 6. The earth's diameter being assumed at 7,960 miles, how far over its surface can a person see from the top of a mountain 3 miles high ? 7. How much does the surface of still water fall away from the level in one mile ? 8. Two circles whose radii are 10 and 6 have their centres 12 feet apart. Find the length of their common chord, and also that of their common tangent. 9. Two parallel chords of a circle are c and c-^ and their distance apart is d^ to find the radius of the circle. 10. If V is the versed sine of an arc, k the chord of half the arc, and r the radius, k^ = 2vr. 177°. Theorem. — If upon each of two intersecting lines a pair of points be taken such that the rectangle en the seg- ments between the points of intersection and the assumed points in one of the lines is equal to the corresponding rect- 1.^6 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. angle for the other Hne, the four assumed points are concyclic. (Converse of 176°.) L and M intersect in O, and OA.OB = OC.OD. Then A, B, C, and D are concydic. Proof. — Since the ens are equal, if A and B lie upon the same side of O, C and D must lie upon the same side of O ; and if A and B He upon opposite sides of O, C and D must lie upon opposite sides of O. Let a pass through A, B, C, and let it cut M in a second point E. Then OA.OB = OC.OE. (176°) But OA.OB = OC.OD. (hyp.) OD = OE, and as D and E are upon the same side of O they must co- incide; .*. A, B, C, D are concyclic. q.e.d. 178°. Let two circles excluding each other without contact have their centres at A and B, and let C be the point, on their common centre-line> which divides AB so that the difference between the squares on the segments AC and CB is equal to the difference between the squares on the con- terminous radii. Through C draw the line PCD X to AB, and from any point P on this line draw tangents PT and PT' to the circles. Join AT and BT'. Then, by construction, AC2-BC2 = AT2-Br2. But, since PC is an altitude in BC2=AP2-BP2, (172°, i) AP2=AT2 + PT2, BP2 = BT'2 + PT'2, (169°, Cor. i) p'J'2_p'p'2 PT = PT'. AREAL RELATIONS. 137 Therefore PCD is the locus of a point from which equal tangents are drawn to the two circles. Def. — This locus is called the radical axis of the circles, and is a line of great importance in studying the relations of two or more circles. Cor. I. The radical axis of two circles bisects their com- mon tangents. Cor. 2. When two circles intersect, their radical axis is their common chord. Cor. 3. When two circles touch externally, the common tangent at the point of contact bisects the other common tangents. 179°. The following examples give theorems of some im- portance. Ex. I. P is any point without a circle and TT' is the chord of contact (114°, Def.) for the point P. TT' cuts the centre-Hne PO in O. Then, PTO being a "]» (i 10°) OQ.OP = OT2. (169°) .*. the radius is a geometric mean be- tween the join of any poifit with the centre and the perpendictdar from the centre upon the chord of contact of the point. Def. — P and Q are called inverse points with respect to the circle. Ex. 2. Let PQ be a common direct tangent to the circles having O and O' as centres. Let OP and O'Q be radii to the points of contact, and let QR be II to 00'. Denote the radii by r and /. Then AC = 00' + r-r', BD = 00'-r-l-r'. .-. AC.BD = 00'2-(r-r')2 = QR2-PR2 = PQ2. (169°, Cor. i) 138 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Similarly it may be shown that AD . BC = square on the transverse common tangent. Exercises. 1. The greater of two chords in a circle is nearer the centre than the other. 2. Of two chords unequally distant from the centre the one nearer the centre is the greater. 3. AB is the diameter of a circle, and P, Q any two points on the curve. AP and BQ intersect in C, and AQ and BP in C. Then AP.AC + BQ.BC = AC'.AQ + BC'.BP. 4. Two chords of a circle, AB and CD, intersect in O and are perpendicular to one another. If R denotes the radius of the circle and E its centre, 8R2 = AB2 + CD2 + 40E2. 5. Circles are described on the four sides of a quadrangle as diameters. The common chord of any two adjacent circles is parallel to the common chord of the other two. 6. A circle S and a line L, without one another, are touched by a variable circle Z. The chord of contact of Z passes through that point of S which is farthest distant from L. 7. ABC is an equilateral triangle and P is any point on its circumcircle. Then PA + PB + PC=o, if we consider the line crossing the triangle as being negative. 8. CD is a chord parallel to the diameter AB, and P is any point in that diameter. Then PC2 + PD2 = PA2 + PB2. CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. 1 39 SECTION V. CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. 1 80°. Problem.— PC& being a given segment, to construct the segment ABv/2. A b C^;zj/r.— Draw BC JL to AB and equal to it. Then AC is the segment ABx/2. Proof. — Since ABC is right-angled at B, AC2=AB2 + BC2 = 2AB2, (169, Cor. i) AC = ABV2. Cor. The square on the diagonal of a given square is equal to twice the given square. 181°. Problem.— To construct ABv'S- Constr. — Take BC in line with AB and equal to it, and on AC construct an equilateral tri- angle ADC. (124°, Cor. I) BD is the segment ABV3. Proof.— KBJ) is a ~1, and AD = AC = 2AB. Also AD2 = AB2-hBD2 = 4AB2. (169°, Cor. i) BD2 = 3AB2, and BD^AB^/S- Cor. Since BD is the altitude of an equilateral triangle and AB is one-half the side, .'. the square on the altitude of an equilateral triangle is equal to three times the square on the half side. 182°. Problem.— To construct AB^S- Constr. —Draw BC X to AB and equal to twice AB. Then AC is the segment ABV5. Pr^^— Since Z.B is a right angle, AC2 = ABHBC2. But BC2 = 4AB2; AC2=5AB2, and AC = ABV5. 140 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 183°. The three foregoing problems furnish elements of construction which are often convenient. A few examples are given. Ex. I. AB being a given segment, to find a point C in its , line such that AC' = AB . CB. A c B Analysis- AC2 = AB. CB = AB(AB- AC), AC^ + AC.AB = AB2. Considering this an algebraic form and solving as a quad- ratic in AC, we have AC = J(ABV5 - AB), and this is to be constructed. Constr. — Construct AD=ABV5 (by 182°) as in the figure, c ' A 9 ^ ^^^ ^^t E be the middle point of BD. TakeDF = DE. Then AF=ABV5-AB; .*. bisecting AF in G, AG = AC =MABV5-AB), and the point C is found. Again, since ^J^ has two signs + or -, Jy^' take its negative sign and we have AC = - ^AB^S + AB). Therefore, for the point C, on AD produced take DF' = DE, and bisect AF' in G'. Then AG'=|(ABV5 + AB); and since AC is negative we set off AG' from A to C, and C is a second point. The points C and C satisfy the conditions, AC2 = AB . CB and AC2=AB . CB. A construction effected in this way requires no proof other than the equation which it represents. \ CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. I4I It is readily proved however. For AD2=5AB-, and also AD2=(AF + FD)2 = (2AC + AB)2, whence AC2 = AB(AB - AC) = AB . CB. It will be noticed that the constructions for finding the two points differ only by some of the segments being taken in different senses. Thus, for C, DE is taken from DA, and for C\ added to DA ; and for C, AC is taken in a positive sense equal to AG, and for C, AC is taken in a negative sense equal to AG'. In connection with the present example we remark : — 1. Where the analysis of a problem involves the solution of a quadratic equation, the problem has two solutions corre- sponding to the roots of the equation. 2. Both of the solutions may be applicable to the wording of the problem or only one may be. 3. The cause of the inapplicability of one of the solutions is commonly due to the fact that a mathematical symbol is more general in its significance than the words of a spoken language. 4. Both solutions may usually be made applicable by some change in the wording of the problem so as to generalize it. The preceding problem may be stated as follows, but whether both solutions apply to it, or only one, will depend upon our definition of the word " part." See Art. 23°. To divide a given segment so that the square tipon one of the parts is equal to the rectangle on the whole segment and the other part. Def. — A segment thus divided is said to be divided into extreme and mea7i ratio, or in median section. Ex. 2. To describe a square when the sum of its side and diagonal is given. Analysis. — If AB is the side of a square, AB^/2 is its diagonal, (iSo°) 142 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. yH' .'. AB(i +J2) is a given segment =S, say. Then AB = S(V2-i). Constr. — Let EF be the given segment S. Draw FG JL and = to EF, and with centre G and radius GF describe a cut- ting EG in H and H'. EH is the side of the square; whence the square is easily constructed. If we enquire what EH' means, we find it to be the side of the square in which the difference between the side and diagonal is the given segment S. The double solution here is very suggestive, but we leave its discussion to the reader. 184°. Problem. — To find a segment such that the rectangle on it and a given segment shall be equal to a given rectangle. p G E "■ Constr. — Let S be the given segment, and AC the given rectangle. On DA produced make AP = S, and draw PBO to cut DC produced in Q. CQ is the segment required. -Complete the as PEQD, PGBA, and BCQF. i=iAC=[=:GF = GB.BF = PA.CQ, S.CQ = [=iAC. Def. — The segments AP and CQ are reciprocals of one another with respect to the cuAC as unit. 185°. Problem. — To find the side of a square which is equal to a given rectangle. Constr. — Let AC be the rectangle. Make BE = BC and in line with BA. On AE describe a semicircle, and pro- duce CB to meet it in F. ^ ^ BF is the side of the required square. Proof. — Since AE is a diameter and FB a half chord JL to it, /"^ r\ ^ B CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. 143 BF2=AB.BE, BF2=AB.BC. (176°, Cor. i) Cor. This is identical with the problem, "To find a geo- metric mean between two given segments," and it furnishes the means of constructing the segment a, when a=^>Jbc, b and ^ being given. (165°) Ex. I. To construct an equilateral triangle equal to a given rectangle. b c Let AC be the given rectangle, and suppose PQR to be the required triangle. Then AB.BC = iPR.QT = PT.QT. But QT = PTV3, (181°, Cor.) PT.QT=PTV3 whence PT2=ABV3-iBC. p t r And PT is the side of a square equal to the rectangle whose sides are ABAy3 and ^BC, and is found by means of 181°, 127°, and 185°. Thence the triangle is readily constructed. Ex. 2. To bisect the area of a triangle by a line parallel to its base. Let ABC be the triangle, and assume PQ as the required line, and complete the parallelograms AEBC, KFBC, and let BD be the altitude to AC. Because PQ is II to AC, BD is ± to PQ. Now /=7EP = Z=Z7PC, (145°) E=7FC = e:^EQ, or PQ.BD = AC.BG. (153°, i) But 2Z=7FQ = £Z:7EC, or 2PQ.bg = AC. BD; .*. dividing one equation by the other, and reducing to one line, BD''i = 2BG2; and therefore BG is one-half the diagonal of the square of which BD is the side, and the position of PQ is de- termined. 144 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 1 86°. Problem. — To find the circle which shall pass through two given points and touch a given line. Let A, B be the given points and L the given line. Constr. — Let the line AB cut L in O. Take OP = OP', a geometric mean be- tween OA and OB (185°). The circles through the two sets of three points A, B, P and A, B, P' are the two solutions. The proof is left to the reader. (See 176°, Cor. 2.) 187°. Problem. — To find a to pass through two given points and touch a given 0. Let A, B be the points and S the given 0. Constr, — Through A and B draw any so as to cut S in two points C and D. Let the line CD meet the hne AB in O. From O draw tangents OP and OQ to the 0S (114°). Pand Q are the points of contact for the 0s which pass through A and B and touch S. There- fore the 0s through the two sets of three points A, B, P and A, B, Q are the 0s required. Proof.- OB.OA=OC.OD = OQ2=OP2; therefore the 0s through A, B, P and A, B, Q have OP and OQ as tangents (176°, Cor. 3). But these are also tangents to 0S ; therefore P and Q are the points of contact of the required 0s. Exercises. 1. Describe a square that shall have twice the area of a given square. 2. Describe an equilateral triangle equal to a given square. CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY. 145 3. Describe an equilateral triangle having five times the area of a given equilateral triangle. 4. Construct ABV7, where AB is a given segment. 5. Construct sJa^ + b^ and sla^-b'^, where a and b denote given line segments. 6. Divide the segment AB in C so that AC2 = 2CB2. Show that AC is the diagonal of the square on CB. Does this hold for external division also ? 7. ABCD is a rectangle and DE, a part of DA, is equal to DC. EF, perpendicular to AD, meets the circle having A as centre and AD as radius in F. Then DF is the diagonal of a square equal to the rectangle. 8. In the Fig. of 183°, CE^^sAB . CB, CD2 = CE2 + 3ED2 = 3AB(AB + CB). 9. Show that the construction of 183° solves the problem, "To divide a segment so that the rectangle on the parts is equal to the difference of the squares on the parts." 10. Show that the construction of 183° solves the problem, " To divide a given segment so that the rectangle on the whole and one of the parts is equal to the rectangle on the other part and the segment which is the sum of the whole and the first part." 11. Construct an equilateral triangle when the sum of its side and altitude are given. What does the double solution mean? (See 183°, Ex. 2.) 12. Describe a square in a given acute-angled triangle, so that one side of the square may coincide with a side of the triangle. 13. Within a given square to inscribe a square having three- fourths the area of the first. 14. Within an equilateral triangle to inscribe a second equi- lateral triangle whose area shall be one -half that of the first. 1 5. Produce a segment AB to C so that the rectangle on the sum and difference of AC and AB shall be equal to a given square. K 146 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 16. Draw a tangent to a given circle so that the triangle formed by it and two fixed tangents may be (i) a maximum, (2) a minimum. 17. Draw a circle to touch two sides of a given square, and pass through one vertex. Generalize this problem and show that there are two solutions. 18. Given any two lines at right angles and a point, to find a circle to touch the lines and pass through the point. 19. Describe a circle to pass through a given point and to touch a given line at a given point in the line. 20. Draw the oblique lines required to change a given square into an octagon. If the side of a square is 24, the side of the result- ing octagon is approximately 10 ; how near is the approximation ? 21. The area of a regular dodecagon is three times that of the square on its circumradius. 22. By squeezing in opposite vertices of a square it is trans- formed into a rhombus of one-half the area of the square. What are the lengths of the diagonals of the rhombus? 23. P, Q, R, S are the middle points of the sides AB, BC, CD, and DA of a square. Compare the area of the square with that of the square formed by the joins AQ, BR, CS, and DP. 24. ABCDEFGH is a regular octagon, and AD and GE are produced to meet in K. Compare the area of the tri- angle DKE with that of the octagon. 25. The rectangle on the chord of an arc and the chord of its supplement is equal to the rectangle on the radius and the chord of twice the supplement. 26. At one vertex of a triangle a tangent is drawn to its cir- cumcircle. Then the square on the altitude from that vertex is equal to the rectangle on the perpendiculars from the other vertices to the tangent. 27. SOT is a centre-line and AT a tangent to a circle at the point A. Determine the angle AOT so that AS = AT. PART III. PRELIMINARY. 1 88°. By superposition we ascertain the equality or in- equality of two given line-segments. But in order to express the relation between the lengths of two unequal segments we endeavour to find two numerical quantities which hold to one another the same relations in magnitude that the given seg- ments do. Let AB and CD be two given segments. If they are com- mensurable (150°, 5) some M.l. can be found with respect to which the measures of AB and CD (150°, 2) are both whole numbers. Let in denote the measure of AB and n the measure of CD with respect to this unit-length. The numbers in and n hold to one another the same rela- tions as to magnitude that the segments AB and CD do. The fraction — is called in Arithmetic or Algebra the ratio n ofm to 11, and in Geometry it is called the ratio of AB to CD. Now n has to in the same ratio as unity has to the fraction — . But if CD be taken as i/J. its measure becomes unity, n ^ in while that of AB becomes — • Therefore the ratio of AB to CD is the measure of AB with respect to CD as unit-length. When AB and CD are commensurable this ratio is expres- sible arithmetically either as a whole number or as a fraction ; 147 148 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. but when the segments are incommensurable the ratio can only be symbolized, and cannot be expressed arithmetically except approximately. 189°. If we suppose CD to be capable of being stretched until it becomes equal in length to AB, the numerical factor which expresses or denotes the amount of stretching neces- sary may conveniently be called the tensor of AB with respect to CD. (Hamilton.) As far as two segments are concerned, the tensor, as a numerical quantity, is identical with the ratio of the segments, but it introduces a different idea. Hence in the case of com- mensurable segments the tensor is arithmetically expressible, but in the case of incommensurable ones the tensor may be symbolically denoted, but cannot be numerically expressed except approximately. Thus if AB is the diagonal of a square of which CD is the side, AB = CDV2 (180°); and the tensor of AB on CD, Le.^ the measure of AB with CD as unit-length, is that numerical quantity which is symbolized by sji^ and which can be expressed to any required degree of approximation by that arithmetical process known as "extracting the square root of 2." 190°. That the tensor symbolized by ^2 cannot be ex- pressed arithmetically is readily shown as follows : — If /^2 can be expressed numerically it can be expressed as a fraction, — , which is in its lowest terms, and where accord- n ingly m and n are not both even. If possible then let ^2 = -. n Then 211^ = m'^. Therefore m'^ and in are both even and « is odd. „ m But if m is even, — is even, and n^ and ;/ are both even. But n cannot be both odd and even. Therefore sji cannot be arithmetically expressed. PRELIMINARY. I49 Illustration of an ificommensurable tensor. Let BD be equal to AB, and let AC be equal to the diagonal of a square of which AB is the side. ^ E'F' ^ A B E 'c' 1^ D Then some tensor will bring AB to AC. Let BD be divided into 10 equal parts whereof E and F are those numbered 4 and 5. Then the tensor i . 4 stretches AB to AE, and tensor i . 5 stretches AB to AF. But the first of these is too small and the second too great, and C lies between E and F. Now, let EF be divided into 10 equal parts whereof E', F' are those numbered i and 2. Then, tensor i . 41 brings AB to AE', and tensor i . 42 brings AB to AF' ; the first being too small and the second too great. Similarly by dividing E'F' into 10 equal parts we obtain two points ^, yj numbered 4 and 5, which lie upon opposite sides of C and adjacent to it. Thus, however far this process be carried, C will always lie between two adjacent ones of the points last obtained. But as every new division gives interspaces one-tenth of the length of the former ones, we may obtain a point of division lying as near C as we please. Now if AB be increased in length from AB to AD it must at some period of its increase be equal to AC. Therefore the tensor which brings AB to AC is a real tensor which is inexpressible, except approximately, by the symbols of Arithmetic. The preceding illustrates the difference between magnitude and number. The segment AB in changing to AD passes through every intermediate length. But the commensurable or numerically expressible quantities lying between i and 2 must proceed by some unit however small, and are therefore not continuous. ISO SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Hence a mag7titude is a variable which^ in passing from one value to another^ passes through every intermediate value. 191°. The tensor of the segment AB with respect to AC, or the tensor of AB on AC is the numerical factor which brings AC to AB. But according to the operative principles of Algebra, ^^.AC=AB, AB .*. -^ is the tensor which brings AC to AB. Hence the algebraic form of a fraction^ when the parts denote segments^ is interpreted geometrically by the tensor which brings the denominator to the numerator ; or as the ratio of the numerator to the denominator. SECTION I. PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 192°. Def — Four line-segments takett in order form a proportion^ or are in proportion^ when the tensor of the first on the second is the same as the tensor of the third on the fourth. This definition gives the relation -r-, (^> where a, b^ c, and d denote the segments taken in order. The fractions expressing the proportion are subject to all the transformations of algebraic fractions (158°), and the re- sult is geometrically true whenever it admits of a geometric interpretation. The statement of the proportion is also written (B) PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 151 where the sign : indicates the division of the quantity de- noted by the preceding symbol by the quantity denoted by the following symbol. In either form the proportion is read " rt: is to ^ as ^ is to dP 193°. In the form (b) a and d are called the extremes, and b and c the means ; and in both forms a and c are called antecedents and b and d consequents. In the form (a) a and d^ as also b and c^ stand opposite each other when written in a cross, as a\c b\d' and we shall accordingly call them the opposites of the proportion. 194°. I. From form (a) we obtain by cross-multiplication ad— be, which states geometrically that When four segments are in proportion the rectangle upon one pair of opposites is equal to that upon the other pair of opposites. Conversely, let rt(5 and^i'^^'be equal rectangles having for adjacent sides a, b, and a', b' respectively. Then ab = a'b', and this equality can be expressed under any one of the fol- lowing forms, or may be derived from any one of them, viz. ; a _b' a _a' b _b' b _a' a' b b' b a' a b' a in all of which the opposites remain the same. Therefore 2. Two equal rectangles have their sides in proportion, a pair of opposites of the proportion coming from the same rectangle. 3. A given proportion amongst four segments may be written in any order of sequence, provided the opposites remain the same. ^S2 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 195°. The following transformations are important. Let ^ = ^, then a±b c±d / ,r ■ \ 1. ~~b~^~T^ {a>btoY - sign) a c a-\-c a — c 1 ^ r • \ 2. -/, = :>==T-r:>=7--7- {ci>ciox - sign) b d b + a b-d ^ a c Let ,=-^= b d 3- c = etc., then a c b d f b + d+f+Qic' To prove i. *•■ a c I'd' ...|±.=f±:,and4^ = c±d d ' To prove 2. or a c b~d' , a b ' ' "c'd' a±c b±d c d ' a c a±c b d b±d' (194°, 3) To prove 3. •.• n __e _ a + c P -irr-^—r.^ say, b 7 7+Q~^+^+/ SIMILAR TRIANGLES. 196°. Def. — I. Two triangles are similar when the angles of the one are respectively equal to the angles of the other. {n\ 4) 2. The sides opposite equal angles in the two triangles are corresponding or homologous sides. The symbol ^ will be employed to denote similarity, and will be read "is similar to." PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 1 53 In the triangles ABC and A'B'C, if zA=lA' and z.B = ^B', then also lC=lC and the tri- angles are similar. The sides AB and A'B' are / / \ //> homologous, so also are the other / / \ // pairs of sides opposite equal ^ ' ^ '^—^ angles. ad c Let BD through B and B'D' through B' make the ^BDA = ^B'D'A'. Then AABD « AA'B'D' since their angles are respectively equal. In like manner ADBC « AD'B 'C, and BD and B'D' divide the triangles similarly. 3. Lines which divide similar triangles similarly are homologous lines of the triangles, and the intersections of homologous /i?tes are homologous points. Cor. Evidently the perpendiculars upon homologous sides of similar triangles are homologous lines. So also are the medians to homologous sides ; so also the bisectors of equal angles in similar triangles ; etc. 197°. Theorem. — The homologous sides of similar triangles are proportional. AABC^AA'B'C having lA. = lA.' and lR=lB'. rj,.^ AB BC CA ^^'^ A^=FC = C^- , B C Proof.— V\3,ce A' on A, and let C fall at D. Then, since lA'=lA, A'B' will lie along AC and B' will fall at some point E. Now, AA'B'C'^AAED, and therefore ^AED=^B, and B, D, E, C are concyclic. (107°) Hence AD.AB = AE.AC, (176°, 2) or A'C'.AB = A'B'.AC. , AB AC /ox A^B'=A^- (^94,2) 154 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Similarly, by placing B' at B, we prove that AB _ BC A'B' B'C* AB^BC^CA , A'B' B'C C'A'' ^' ' ' Cor. I. Denoting the sides of ABC by a, b, c, and those of A'B'C by a', b', c', a _b _c a~b'~c'' ^ a b c a + b + c /,^r-° ^\ Cor. 2. v = A' = 7' = vn:i'3:7>' ('95 , 3) a c a +b +c i.e., the perimeters of similar triangles are proportional to any pair of homologous sides. 198°. Theorem. — Two triangles which have their sides pro- b' portional are similar, and have their equal angles opposite hom- ologous sides. (Converse of 197°.) AB _ BC _ CA A'B' B'C C'A'' Then .iA = zj\', ^B = z.B', and ^C=z.C'. Proof.— On A'C let the AA'DC be constructed so as to have the ^DA'C'=zA and ^DC'A'=Z-C. Then AA'DC ^AABC, (196°, Def. i) ^^A AB AC BC . ,.s ^^^ A^==A^' = DC' ^^97) u . AB AC BC /, X ^"' A^ = A^' = B'C' ^^^P-^ A'D = A'B' and DC' = B'C, and AA'DC = AA'B'C'. (58°) ZJ\' = ^A, ^B'=^B, and ^C'=^C. q.e.d. PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 1 55 199°. Theorem. — If two triangles have two sides in each proportional and the included a angles equal, the triangles are similar. D^ then AABC^AA'B'C. c Proof. — Place A' on A, and let A'C lie along AB, and A'B' lie along AC, so that C falls at D and B' at E. The triangles AED and A'B'C are congruent and therefore . ., , AB AC similar, and ^=^ Hence AB . AD = AE . AC ; ( 1 94°) and .'. B, D, E, C are concyclic. {mT) Z_AED = aB, and £ADE = zlC, (106°, Cor. 3) and AABC ^ AAED « AA'B'C. q.e.d. 200°. Theorem. — If two triangles have two sides in each proportional, and an angle opposite a homologous side in each equal : 1. If the angle is opposite the longer of the two sides the triangles are similar. 2. If the angle is opposite the shorter of the two sides the triangles may or may not be similar. I. If BOAB, AABC^AA'B'C. Pr^^/— Place A' at A and let B' fall at D, and A'C along AC. Draw DE || to BC. Then AABC« AADE, and ^^=§§- 156 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. And since B'C'> A'B', the AA'B'C' = AADE and they are therefore similar. (65°, i) But AABC^AADE, AABC^AA'B'C. 2. If BC<AB, B'C'<A'B', and the triangles may or may not be similar. Proof.— Since AD = A'B', and DE = B'C', and B'C'<A'B', .*. the triangles A'B'C and ADE may or may not be congruent (65°, 2), and therefore may or may not be similar. But AABC^AADE, .*. the triangles ABC and A'B'C may or may not be similar. Cor. Evidently, if in addition to the conditions of the theorem, the angles C and C are both less, equal to, or greater than a right angle the triangles are similar. Also, if the triangles are right-angled they are similar. 201°. The conditions of similarity of triangles may be classified as follows : — 1. Three angles respectively equal. (Def. of similarity.) 2. Three sides proportional. 3. Two sides proportional and the included angles equal. 4. Two sides proportional and the angles opposite the longer of the homologous sides in each equal. If in 4 the equal angles are opposite the shorter sides in each the triangles are not necessarily similar unless some other condition is satisfied. By comparing this article with 66° we notice that there is a manifest relation between the conditions of congruence and those of similarity. Thus, if in 2, 3, and 4 of this article the words "propor- tional " and " homologous " be changed to " equal," the statements become equivalent to 1,2, and 5 of Art. 66°. The PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 1 5/ difference between congruence and similarity is the non- necessity of equality of areas in the latter case. When two triangles, or other figures, are similar, they are copies of one another, and the smaller may be brought, by a uniform stretching of all its parts, into congruence with the larger. Thus the primary idea of similarity is that every line-segment of the smaller of two similar figures is stretched to the same relative extent to form the corresponding seg- ments of the larger figure. This means that the tensors of every pair of corresponding line- segments, one from each figure, are equal, and hence that any two or more line- segments from one figure are proportional to the correspond- ing segments' from the second figure. Def. — Two line-segments are divided similarly when, being divided into the same number of parts, any two parts from one of the segments and the corresponding parts from the other taken in the same order are in proportion. 202°. Theorejn. — A line parallel to the base of a triangle divides the sides similarly ; and Conversely, a line which divides two sides of a triangle similarly is parallel to the third side. B DE is II to AC. Then BA and BC are divided similarly in D and E. Proof.— Tht triangles ABC and DBE are /^ evidently similar, ^ ^ AB CB ^. . AD CE . ^_o ^ DB = E-B'^"^- DB^EB' ^^^^ ' ^^ and AB and CB are divided similarly in D and E. g.e.d. Conversely, if DE so divides BA and BC that AD : DB = CE : EB, DE is || to AC. P.../-Since AD^CE ._ AB^CB ^ ^„, ^,^ .^j.^g,,, ABC and DBE having the angle B common, and the sides 158 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. about that angle proportional, are similar. (i99°) aBDE=^ and DE is|| to AC. q.e.d. Cor. I. Since the triangles ABC and DBE are similar BA:BD=AC:DE. 203°. Theorem. — Two transversals to a system of parallels are divided similarly by the parallels. AA' is II to BB' is || to CC, etc. Then AD and A'D' are divided similarly. Proof. — Consider three of the ||s, AA', BB', and CC, and draw A'Q || to AD. Then AP and BQ are 1 — 7 s, and AB = A'P and BC = PQ. (81°, i) But A'QC is a triangle and PB' is || to QC. A'P A'B' . ^,0. ^,. AB BC . o V ^=— (202), 01 ^,g,=^^, (194,3). Similarly, if DD' be a fourth parallel, AB A'B' BC B'C CD CD' BC^ B'C CD CD" = etc. Def, — A set of three or more lines meeting in a point is a pencil and the lines are rays. The point is the vertex or centre of the pencil. Cor. I. Let the transversals meet in O, and let L denote any other transversal through O. Then AD, A'D', and L are all divided similarly by the parallels. But the parallels are transversals to the pencil. .*. parallel transversals divide the rays of a pencil similarly. Cor. 2. Applying Cor. i of 202", OA OB OC OD AA' BB' CC DD" =etc. PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 1 59 204°. Theorem. — The rectangle on any two sides of a tri- angle is equal to twice the rectangle on B the circumradius (97°, Def.) and the alti- tude to the third side. ^f^ ^-^ — ^° BD is _L to AC and BE is a diameter. Then BA.BC = BE.BD. Proof.— lA = lE, and^ADB=z.ECB=~l, (106°, Cor. I) (106°, Cor. 4) AABD^AEBC, and |^=|§, BA.BC = BE.BD. g.e.d. Cor. Denoting BD by p and the circumradius by R, ac= 2/R, and multiplying by 3, and remembering that pd=2^ (i 53°, 2), 4A' which (with i7si°, Ex. i) gives the means of calculating the circumradius of a triangle when its three sides are given . we obtain 205°. Theorem. — In a concyclic quadrangle the rectangle on the diagonals is equal to the sum of the rectangles on the sides taken in opposite pairs. AC . BD = AB . CD + BC . AD. Proof.— DvdiVf AE making aAED = zABC. Then, since ^BCA=^BDA, the triangles EDA and BCA are similar. BC.AD=AC.DE. Again, since z_AEB is supp. to Zj\ED, and Z.CDA is supp. to ^lABC, therefore triangles BE A and CD A are similar, and AB . CD = AC . EB. Adding these results, AB . CD + BC . AD = AC . BD. This theorem is known as Ptolemy's Theorem. 206°. Def. — Two rectilinear figures are similar when they l60 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. can be divided into the same number of triangles similar in pairs and similarly placed. Thus the pentagons X- and Y can be divided into the same number of tri- angles. If then AP « AP', AQ ^ AQ', AR « AR', and the triangles are similarly placed, the pentagons are similar. The triangles are similarly placed if Z.EAD corresponds to E'A'D', ^AED to A'E'D', .lDAC to D'A'C, etc. This requires that the angles A, B, C, etc., of one figure shall be respectively equal to the angles A', B', C, etc., of the other figure. Hence when two rectilinear figures are similar, their angles taken in the same order are respectively equal, and the sides about equal angles taken in the same order are pro- portional. Line-segments, such as AD and A'D', which hold similar relations to the two figures are similar or homologous lines of the figures. 207°. Theorem. — Two similar rectilinear figures have any two line-segments from the one proportional to the homolo- gous segments from the other. Proof. — By definition AP^^AP', and they are similarly placed, .-. AE : A'E' = AC : A'C. For like reasons, AD : A'D' = AC : A'C' = AB : A'B'. AE _ AD _ AC _ AB _ A'E' A'D' A'C A'B' '' and the same can be shown for any other sets of homologous line-segments. Cor. I. All regular polygons of the same species are similar figures. PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. l6l Now, let a^ b, c, ..., a', b\ (f, ..., be homologous sides of two similar regular polygons, and let r and r' be their circumradii. Then r and r' are homologous, r _a _b _c _ _ a-^b-^c^... / o . V~a'~'b~'<f~""'V+Y+l^\:: ^'^^'^^ _ perimeter of P perimeter of P' But at the limit (148°) the polygon becomes its circumcircle. .•. the circumferences of any two circles are proportional to their radii. Cor. 2. If ^, c' denote the circumferences of two circles and r and r' their radii, - = ^ = constant. r r Denote this constant by 27r, then C=7.Trr. It is shown by processes beyond the scope of this work that TT stands for an incommensurable numerical quantity, the approximate value of which is 3. 141 5926... Cor. 3. Since equal arcs subtend equal angles at the centre (102°, Cor. 2), if s denotes the length of any arc of a circle whose radius is r, the tensor - varies directly as s varies, and also varies directly as the angle at the centre varies. Hence - is taken as the measure of the angle, subtended by the arc, at the centre. Denote this angle by Q. Then and when s = r^B becomes the unit angle. .*. the unit angle is the angle subtended at the centre by an arc equal in length to the radius. This unit is called a radian, and the measure of an angle in radians is called its radian measure. Radian measure will be indicated by the mark '^. Cor. 4. When j=^ = a semicircle, Q — ir. 1 62 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. But a semicircle subtends a straight angle at the centre. .*. tr is the radian measure of a straight angle and - of a J. Now a straight angle contains i8o°, (4i°) 7r'^=i8o°. Hence i'^=57°.29578..., and i° = o'\oi7453... ; and these multipliers serve to change the expression of a given angle from radians to degrees or from degrees to radians. Cor. 5. Since the area of a circle is equal to one-half that of the rectangle on its radius and a segment equal in length to its circumference, (i49°) Q) = \cr=\.2Trr.r (Cor. 2) = 7rr2. .'. the area of a is tt times that of the square on its radius. 208°. Theorem. — The bisectors of the vertical angle of a triangle each divides the base into parts which are propor- g tional to the conterminous sides. BD and BD' are bi- sectors of Z.B. Then AD_AD^_AB DC CD' BC* /*r^^— Through C draw EE'lltoAB. Then EBE'='~1(45°), and^E = ^ABD = ^DBC, BC = EC = CE'. (88°, 3) But ABD and ABD' are triangles having EE' || to the common base AB. AB_AD ^ AB AD' , o ^ v EC-D-C ^"^ CE' = CD" ^^°^ ' ^^'-^ ^_ AD_AD' AB , DC~Ciy = BC- ^^'^'^• Cor. D and D' divide the base internally and externally in PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 163 the same manner. Such division of a segment is called har- monic division. .*. the bisectors of any angle of a triangle divide the oppo- site side harmonically. 209°. Theorem.— K line through the vertex of a triangle dividing the base into parts which are proportional to the conterminous sides is a bisector of the vertical angle. (Converse of 208°.) Let the line through B cut AC internally in F. Then, AD being the internal bisector |^=^^ (208°), and || = ^-^ by , ,, . . AF AD hypothesis,.. FC^DC- But AD is < AF while DC is > FC. .'. the relation is impossible unless F and D coincide, i.e.^ the line is the bisector AD. Similarly it may be proved that if the line divides the base externally it is the bisector AD'. 210°. Theorem. — The tangent at any point on a circle and the pei*pendicular from that point upon t he di ameter divide the diameter harmonically. AB is divided harmonically in M and T. a Proof.-LQ,VT=^LVWY=~^, (110°) ACPM^ACTP, r and CM^CP CP CT' CB+CM CT+CB or CM_CB CB CT AM AT CB-CM Ct-CB' MB BT' ,\ AB is divided harmonically in M and T. (195°, 2) q.e.d. 211". The following examples give important results. 164 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Ex. I. L, M, and N are tangents which touch the circle at A, B, and P. AX and BY are _Ls on N, PC is X on AB, and PO and PR are ±s upon L and M. Let N meet the chord of contact of L and M in T. Then the triangles TAX, TPC, TBY are all TA.TB _TP2 PC2' (176°, Cor. 2) (A) similar, But AX. BY Then (114°, Cor. i) 1^ and and Similarly Ex. TA_TP_TB. AX PC BY ' TA.TB = TP2, AX.BY = PC2 Again, let L and N intersect in V. VP=VA, /.V0P = ^VXA = ~1, ^QVP = z.XVA. AVXA = AVQP, AX = PQ. BY = PR, .-. PO.PR = PC^ (B) AD is a centre-line and DO a perpendicular to it, and AQ is any line from A to the line DO. Let AQ cut the- circle in P. Then AADQ^AAPB, AD^AQ AP AB' or AD.AB = AP.AO. But the circle and the point D being given, AB . AD is a given constant. AP . AQ = a constant. Conversely, if Q moves so that the cziAP.AQ remains constant, the locus of Q is a line ± to the centre-line through A. , PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 165 Now, let the dotted lines represent rigid rods of wood or metal jointed together so as to admit of free rotation about the points A, C, P, U, V, and Q, and such that UPVQ is a rhombus (82°, Def. i), and AU=AV, and AC = CP, AC being fixed. PQ is the right bisector of UV, and A is equidistant from U and V. Therefore A, P, Q are always in line. Also, PUO is an isosceles triangle and UA is a line to the base, therefore UA2-UP2 = AP . AQ (174°).,. But, UA and UP being constants, AP . AQ is constantl" ' ''' And AC being fixed, and CP being equal to AC, P moves on the circle through A having C as centre. .'. Q describes a line _L to AC. This combination is known as Peaucelller's cellj and is interesting as being the first successful attempt to describe a line by circular motions only. Ex. 3. To construct an isosceles triangle of which each basal angle shall be double the vertical angle. Let ABC be the triangle required, and let AD bisect the Z.A. Then ^B=z_BAD=^DAC, and ^C is common to the triangles ABC and DAC. Therefore these triangles are similar, and the ACAD is isosceles and AD = AC. Also, AABD is isosceles and AD = DB=AC. BA:AC = AC:DC, or BC:BD = BD:DC. BC.DC = BD2. And BC is divided into extreme and mean ratio at D (183°, Ex. i). Thence the construction is readily obtained. Cor. I. The isosceles triangle ADB has each of its basal angles equal to one-thtrd its vertical angle. Cor. 2. JJ\BC = 36°, ^BAC = 72°, Z-BDA= 108°. Hence (i) Ten triangles congruent with ABC, placed side by side with their vertices at B, form a regular decagon. (132°) 1 66 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. (2) The bisectors AD and CE of the basal angles of the AABC meet its circumcircle in two points which, with the three vertices of the triangle, form the vertices of a regular pentagon. (3) The ^BDA = the internal angle of a regular pentagon. The following Mathematical Instruments are im- P portant : — I. Proportional Compasses. This is an instrument primarily for the purpose of increasing or diminishing given line-segments in a given ratio ; ?>., of multiplying given line- segments by a given tensor. If AO = BO and QO = PO, the triangles AOB, POQ are isosceles and similar, and AB:PQ = OA:OP. B Hence, if the lines are one or both capable of rotation about O, the distance AB may be made to vary at pleasure, and PQ will remain in a constant ratio to AB. The instrument usually consists of two brass bars with slots, exactly alike, and having the point of motion O so arranged as to be capable of being set at any part of the slot. The points A, B, P, and Q are of steel. 2. The Sector. This is another instrument which pri- marily serves the purpose of increasing or diminishing given line-segments in given ratios. This instrument consists of two rules equal in length and jointed at O so as to be opened and shut like a pair of com- passes. Upon each rule various lines are drawn corresponding in pairs, one on each rule. Consider the pair OA and OB, called the "line of lines." Each of the lines of this pair is divided into 10 equal parts PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 1 6/ which are again subdivided. Let the divisions be numbered from o to lo along OA and OB, and suppose that the points numbered 6 are the points P and Q. Then GAB and OPQ are similar triangles, and therefore PQ : AB=OP : OA. But OP = j%AO. .-. PQ = i%AB. And as by opening the instrument AB may be made equal to any segment not beyond the compass of the instrument, we can find PQ equal to ^q of any such given segment. The least consideration will show that the distance 5-5 is |AB, 3-3 is f^^AB, etc. Also that 3-3 is f of 7-7, 5-5 is f of 7-7, etc. Hence the instrument serves to divide any given segment into any number of equal parts, provided the num- ber is such as belongs to the instrument. The various other lines of the sector serve other but very similar purposes. 3. TAe Pantagraph or Eidograph. Like the two preceding in- struments the pantagraph pri- y^ marily increases or diminishes segments in a given ratio, but unlike the others it is so ar- ranged as to be continuous in its operations, requiring only one setting and no auxiliary instruments. It is made of a variety of forms, but the one represented in the figure is one of the most convenient. AE, AB, and BF are three bars jointed at A and B. The bars AE and BF are attached to the wheels A and B respec- tively, which are exactly of the same diameter, and around which goes a very thin and fle^xible steel band C. The result is that if AE and BF are so adjusted as to be parallel, they remain parallel however they be situated with respect to AB. E, F are two points adjustable on the bars 6S SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. AE and BF, and D is a point in line with EF, around which the whole instrument can be rotated. Now let EG KM be any figure traced by the point E ; then F will trace a similar figure FHLN. Evidently the triangles DAE and DBF remain always similar however the instrument is transformed. Therefore DF is in a constant ratio to DE, viz., the ratio DB : DA. Now, when E comes to G, F comes to some point H in fine with GD, and such that DH : DG = DB : DA. .*. the triangles EDG and FDH are similar, and FH is [[ to EG, and has to it the constant ratio DB : DA. Similarly HL is II to GK and has to it the same constant ratio, etc. .'. the figures are similar, and the ratio of homologous lines in GMandHN is AD :DB. The three points E, D, and F being all adjustable the ratio can be changed at pleasure. Altogether the Pantagraph is a highly important instrument, and when so adjusted that E, D, and F are not in line its results offer some interesting geometrical features. 4 : i 'c > 1 c ) A 4. The Diagonal Scale. This is a divided scale in which, by means of similar tri- angles, the difficulty of reading off minute divisions is very much diminished. Its simpler form is illustrated in °' ^ the figure. A scale divided to fortieths of an inch is, on account of the closeness of the divisions, very difficult to read. In the scale represented OA is \ inch. The distance AB is divided into 10 equal parts by the horizontal parallel lines numbered i, 2, 3, etc. Then QBO' is a triangle whereof the horizontal lines are all parallel to the base. Hence it is readily seen from the proportionality of the homologous sides of the similar triangles formed that the intercept on the hori- PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. 1 69 zontal line i, between GO' and OB, is tgO'E, that is j^ inch. Similarly the intercept on the horizontal line 2 is ^ inch, on 3, -£'q inch, etc. Hence from j?^ to g^ is one inch and seven-fortieths. In a similar manner diagonal scales can be made to divide ,any assumed unit-length into any required number of minute parts. The chief advantages of such scales are that the minute divisions are kept quite distinct and apparent, and that errors are consequently avoided. Exercises. 1. ABCD is a square and P is taken in BC so that PC is one-third of BC. AC cuts thie diagonal BD in O, and AP cuts it in E. Then OE is one-tenth of DB. 2. If, in I, OE is one-eighth of DB, how does P divide BC ? 3. If BP is one nth of BC, what part of DB is OE ? 4. Given three line-segments to find a fourth, so that the four may be in proportion. 5. The rectangle on the distances of a point and its chord of contact from the centre of a circle is equal to the square on the radius of the circle. 6. OD and DO are fixed lines at right angles and O is a fixed point. A fixed circle with centre on OD and passing through O cuts OQ in P. Then OP . OQ is a constant however OQ be drawn. 7. To divide a given segment similarly to a given divided segment. 8. To divide a given segment into a given number of equal parts. 9. Two secants through A cut a circle in B, D, and C, E respectively. Then the triangles ABE and ACD are similar. So also are the triangles ABC and AED. 10. Two chords are drawn in a circle. To find a point on lyo SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. the circle from which perpendiculars to the chords are proportional to the lengths of the chords. 11. ABC is a triangle and DE is parallel to AC, D being on AB and E on CB. DC and AE intersect in O. Then BO is a median. 12. If BO, in II, cuts DE in P and AC in O, BO is divided harmonically by P and Q. 13. A and B are centres of fixed circles and AX and BY are parallel radii. Show that XY intersects AB in a fixed point. 14. In the triangle ABC, BD bisects the ^B and cuts AC in D. Then BD2=AB. BC -AD . DC. (Employ the circumcircle.) 15. ABC is right-angled at B and BD is the altitude on AC. (i) The As ADB and BDC are each similar to ABC. (2) Show by proportion that AB2 = AD . AC, and BD2=AD.DC. 16. If R and r denote the radii of the circumcircle and in- circle of a triangle, 2Rr(rt -\-d + c) = abc. 17. In an equilateral triangle the square on the side is equal to six times the rectangle on the radii of the circum- circle and incircle. 18. OA, OB, OC are three lines. Draw a line cutting them so that the segment intercepted between OA and OC may be bisected by OB. 19. What is the measure of an angle in radians when its measure in degrees is 68° 1 7' .'* 20. How many radians are in the angle of an equilateral A ? 21. The earth's diameter being 7,960 miles, what is the dis- tance in miles between two places having the same longitude but differing 16° in latitude.'' 22. Construct a regular pentagon, a regular decagon, a regular polygon — of 1 5 sides, of 30 sides, of 60 sides. 23. ABODE is a regular pentagon. (i) Every diagonal is divided into extreme and mean ratio by another diagonal. PROPORTION AMONGST LINE-SEGMENTS. I/I (2) The diagonals enclose a second regular pentagon. 24. Compare the side and the areas of the two pentagons of 23 (2). 25. If one side of a right-angled triangle is a mean propor- tional between the other side and the hypothenuse, the altitude from the right angle divides the hypothenuse into extreme and mean ratio. 26. A variable line from a fixed point A meets a fixed circle in P, and X is taken on AP so that AP . AX = a con- stant. The locus of X is a circle. 27. If two circles touch externally their common tangent is a mean proportional between their diameters. 28. Four points on a circle are connected by three pairs of lines. If a, oj denote the perpendiculars from any fifth point on the circle to one pair of lines, /3, ^^ to another pair, and 7, y^ to the third pair, then aai=/3j3i = 77i. (Employ 204°.) 29. A line is drawn parallel to the base of a trapezoid and bisecting the non-parallel sides. Compare the areas of the two trapezoids formed. 30. Draw two lines parallel to the base of a triangle so as to trisect the area. 31. ABC is right-angled at B, and AP is the perpendicular from A to the tangent to the circumcircle at B. Then AP.AC = AB-. SECTION II. FUNCTIONS OF ANGLES.— AREAL RELATIONS. 212°. De/. — When an element of a figure undergoes change the figure is said to vary that element. If a triangle changes into any similar triangle it varies its magnitude while its form remains constant ; and if it changes 1/2 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. into another form while retaining the same area, it varies its form while its area remains constant, etc. Similar statements apply to other figures as well as triangles. When a triangle varies its magnitude only, the tensors or ratios of the sides taken two and two remain constant. Hence the tensors or ratios of the sides of a triangle taken two and two determine the form of the triangle but not its magni- tude ; i.e.^ they determine the angles but not the sides. {n% 3 ; 197° ; 198° ; 201°) A triangle, which, while varying its size, retains its form, is sometimes said to remain similar to itself, because the tri- angles due to any two stages in its variation are similar to one another. 213°. In the right-angled triangle the ratios or tensors of the sides taken in pairs are important functions of the angles and receive distinctive names. ^' '' The AOPM is right-angled at M, and the :lPOM is denoted by e. PM Then, -~~ is the sine of ^, and is contracted to sin B in writing. ^^ is the sine of the ^OPM, but as ^OPM is the comple- ment of ^, this tensor is called the cosine of ^, and is written cos Q. '-' is the tangent of B contracted to tan B. OM * Cor. I. V ™ = PM..OP, ., tan<» = liil^. OM OP OM' cos» PM^.oM==op^ .-. e)%(^y Cor. 2. or sin-^-f cos'-^^=i. 214°. LetOP' = OP be drawn so that aP'OM' = POM = ^, and let P'M' be _L on OM. Then z.P'OM is the supplement of ^, and the triangles P'OM' and POM are congruent. FUNCTIONS OF ANGLES. — AREAL RELATIONS. 1 73 sinP'OM = ^ = ™^sin.. i.e., an angle and its supplement have the same sine. 2. CosP'OM = 5^. But in changing from OM to OM', on the same line, OM vanishes and then reappears upon the opposite side of O. Therefore OM and OM' have opposite senses (156°), and if we consider OM positive, OM' is negative. 0M'= - OM, and hence an angle and its supplement have cosines which are equal in numerical value but opposite in sign. 215°, Theorem. — The area of a parallelogram is the pro- duct of two adjacent sides multiplied by the sine of their included angle. (152°,!) AC is a I 7 and BP is X upon AD. Then BP is the altitude, and the area = AD.BP. (153°, i) But BP = ABsin^BAP. £=7 = AB . AD sin ^BAP=rt<5 sin ^. Cor. I. Since the area of a triangle is one-half that of the parallelogram on the same base and altitude, .'. the area of a triangle is one-half the product of any two sides multiplied by the sine of the included angle. Or 2A = ^<^sin C = ^i:sin A=<f^sin B. 216°. Theorem. — The area of any quadrangle is one-half the product of the diagonals multiplied by the sine of the angle between them. ABCD is a quadrangle of which AC and BD are diagonals. Let^AOB = ^ = ^COD. Then ^BOC=z.AOD = supp. of ^. AAOB =^0A . OB sin B, ABOC=iOB . CO sin B, ACOD =^0C . DO sin B, 74 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. ADOA= |DO . OA sin 6, and adding, Od.=:|AC.BDsin^. (compare 162°) 217°. BD being the altitude to AC in the AABC, we have B from 172°, 2, But r2. AD = AB cos A=r cos A, a^ = b^+C'-2bccos\. When B comes to B' the lK becomes (214°, 2) D' A DC obtuse, and cos A changes sign. If we consider the cosine with respect to its magnitude only, we must write + before the term 2bccosK, when A be- comes obtuse. But, if we leave the sign of the function to be accounted for by the character of the angle, the form given is universal. Cor. I. ABCD is a parallelogram. Consider the AABD, then '^T)'^ = a'^-\-b^-2abcosd. Next, consider the AABC. Since ^ABC is the supplement of ^, and BC = AD = /^, AO=d^ + b'^ + 2abcosd. and writing these as one expression, a'^->rb'^±2abcosd^ gives both the diagonals of any 1 — 7 , one of whose angles is 0. Cor. 2. DE = rt:cos^(CEbeingJ_to AD), CE = rtsin^. AE = ^ + ^cos^; and tanCAE = CE^_^zsin^ AE b + aco^ d' which gives the direction of the diagonal. 218". Def. — The ratio of any area X to another area Y is the measure of X when Y is taken as the unit-area, and is accordingly expressed as — . (Compare i88°.) I. Let X and Y be two similar rectangles. Then X = ab FUNCTIONS OF ANGLES.— AREAL RELATIONS. 175 and Y = a'd\ where a and /; are adjacent sides of the nnX and a' and d' those of the cziY. X _a d But because the rectangles are similar, — = . X^^ ^' ^' Y a"'' /.<?., the areas of similar rectangles are proportional to the areas of the squares upon homologous sides. 2. Let X and Y be two similar triangles. Then X = ^ad sin C, Y = ha' d' sin C, Y c^b' rt'^' because the triangles are similar, (i97°) i.e.^ the areas of similar triangles are proportional to the areas of the squares upon homologous sides. 3. Let X denote the area of the pentagon ABCDE, and Y that of the similar pentagon p^ A'B'CD'E'. Then A^\ R P^AD^ R^AC^ P' A'D'2' R' A'C'^' / p \ Q Q' D'C'2* ^ But (X) P' R' Q' P' + Q' + R' , AD _ AC _ DC ana aTD'-A'C'D'C" X_ DC^ Y D'C'^' And the same relation may be proved for any two similar rectilinear figures whatever. .'. the areas of any two similar rectilinear figures are pro- portional to the areas of squares upon any two homologous lines. 176 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 4. Since two circles are always similar, and are the limits of two similar regular polygons, .*. the areas of any two circles are proportional to the areas of squares on any homologous chords of the circles, or on line-segments equal to any two similar arcs. 5. When a figure varies its magnitude and retains its form, any similar figure may be considered as one stage in its variation. Hence the above relations, i, 2, 3, 4, may be stated as follows : — The area of any figure with coiista7it form varies as the square upon any one of its line-segments. Exercises. Two triangles having one angle in each equal have their areas proportional to the rectangles on the sides containing the equal angles. Two equal triangles, which have an angle in each equal, have the sides about this angle reciprocally propor- tional, i.e.^ a : a' = b' : b. The circle described on the hypothenuse of a right-angled triangle is equal to the sum of the circles described on the sides as diameters. If semicircles be described outwards upon the sides of a right-angled triangle and a semicircle be described in- wards on the hypothenuse, two crescents are formed whose sum is the area of the triangle. AB is bisected in C, D is any point in /::m^ AB, and the curves are semicircles. ^ q Prove that P 4-5 = -f-R. A c d If ^, b denote adjacent sides of a parallelogram and also of a rectangle, the ratio of the area of the parallelogram to that of the rectangle is the sine of the angle of the parallelogram. FUNCTIONS OF ANGLES! — AREAL RELATIONS. 1 7/ 7. The sides of a concyclic quadrangle are a, b^ c^ d. Then the cosine of the angle between a and b is {d'^b^-c'-d'')l2{^ab^cd). 8. In the quadrangle of 7, \is denotes one-half the perimeter, area = ^{{s-d){s- b)(s - c){s ~d)}. 9. In any parallelogram the ratio of the rectangle on the sum and differences of adjacent sides to the rectangle on the diagonals is the cosine of the angle between the diagonals. 10. U a, b be the adjacent sides of a parallelogram and 6 the angle between them, one diagonal is double the other when cos^=-l-(^ + ^\ 11. If one diagonal of a parallelogram is expressed by / J -^^^'—^ — H, the other diagonal is n times as long. 12. Construct an isosceles triangle in which the altitude is a mean proportional between the side and the base. 13. Three circles touch two lines and the middle circle touches each of the others. Prove that the radius of the middle circle is a mean proportional between the radii of the others. 14. In an equilateral triangle describe three circles which shall touch one another and each of w hich shall touch a side of the triangle. 15. In an equilateral triangle a circle is described to touch the incircle and two sides of the triangle. Show that its radius is one-third that of the incircle. PART IV. SECTION I. GEOMETRIC EXTENSIONS. 220°. Let two lines L and M passing through the fixed points A and B meet at P. When P moves in the direction of the arrow, L and M approach towards parallelism, and the angle APB diminishes. Since the ^ •- . *" ~--^ lines are unlimited (21°, 3) P may re- cede from A along L until the segment AP becomes greater than any conceivable length, and the angle APB becomes less than any conceivable angle. And as this process may be supposed to go on endlessly, P is said to "go to infinity^' or to "be at infinity," and the z_APB is said to vanish. But lines which make no angle with one another are parallel, .'. Parallel lines meet at infinity^ and lines which meet at injitiity are parallel. The symbol for " infinity " is 00 . The phrases " to go to infinity," " to be at infinity," must not be misunderstood. Infinity is not a place but a property. Lines which meet at 00 are lines so situated that, having the same direction they cannot meet at any finite point, and therefore cannot meet at all, within our apprehension, since every point that can be conceived of is finite. 178 GEOMETRIC EXTENSIONS. 1/9 The convenience of the expressions will appear throughout the sequel. Cor. Any two lines in the same plane meet : at a finite point if the lines are not parallel, at infinity if the lines are parallel. 221°. L and M are lines intersecting in O, and P is any point from which PB and PA are || respectively to L and M. A third and variable line N turns about P in the direction of the arrow. 1. AX. BY = a constant (184') = U say. When N comes to parallelism with L, AX becomes infinite and BY becomes zero. .-. 00.0 is indefinite since U may have any value we please. 2. The motion continuing, let N come into the position N'. Then AX' is opposite in sense to AX, and BY' to BY. But AX increased to 00 , changed sign and then decreased ab- solutely, until it reached its present value AX', while BY decreased to zero and then changed sign. /. a magnitude changes sign when it passes through zero or infinity. 3. It is readily seen that, as the rotation continues, BY' in- creases negatively and AX' decreases, as represented in one of the stages of change at X" and Y". After this Y" goes off to 00 as X" comes to A. Both magnitudes then change sign again, this time BY" by passing through 00 and AX''' by pass- ing through zero. .Since both segments change sign together the product or rectangle remains always positive and always equal to the constant area U. l8o SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 222°. A line in the plane admits of one kind of varia- tion, rotation. When it rotates about a fixed finite point it describes angles about that point. But since all the lines of a system of parallels meet at the same point at infinity, rota- tion about that point is equivalent to translation, without rotation, in a direction orthogonal to that of the line. Hence any line can be brought into coincidence with any other line in its plane by rotation about the point of intersection. 223". If a line rotates about a finite point while the point simultaneously moves along the line, the point traces a curve to which the line is at all times a tangent. The line is then said to envelope the curve, and the curve is called the en- velope of the line. The algebraic equation which gives the relation between the rate of rotation of the line about the point and the rate of translation of the point along the line is the intrinsic equation to the curve. 224°. A line-segment in the plane admits of two kinds of variation, viz., variation in length, and rotation. If one end-point be fixed the other describes some locus depending for its character upon the nature of the variations. The algebraic equation which gives the relation between the rate of rotation and the rate of increase in length of the segment, or radius vector, is the polar equation of the locus. When the segment is invariable in length the locus is a circle. 225°. A line which, by rotation, describes an angle may rotate in the direction of the hands of a clock or in the con- trary direction. If we call an angle described by one rotation positive we must call that described by the other negative. Unless con- venience requires otherwise, the direction of rotation of the hands of a clock is taken as negative. GEOMETRIC EXTENSIONS. I8l An angle is thus counted from zero to a circumangle either positively or negatively. The angle between AB and A'B' is the rotation which brings AB to A'B', and is either + a or — j3, and the sum of these A two angles irrespective of sign is a cir- cumangle. When an angle exceeds a circumangle the excess is taken in Geometry as the angle. Ex. QA and QB bisect the angles CAB and ABP extern- ally ; to prove that z_P = 2^Q. The rotation which brings CP to AB is -20, AB to BP is +2^9, .-. ^P = 2(/3-a). Also, the rotation which brings AQ to AB is -a, and AB to BO is +/3, .-. ^Q=/3-a. z.(CP.BP) = 2Z-(AQ.BQ). This property is employed in the working of the sextant. 226°. Let AB and CD be two diameters at right angles. The rectangular sections of the plane taken in order of positive rotation and starting from A are called respectively the first, second, third, and fourth quadrants, the first being AOC, the ^\ second COB, etc. The radius vector starting from co- incidence with OA may describe the positive zJ\OP, or the negative Z.AOP'. Let these angles be equal in absolute value, so that the AMOPs AMOP', PM being ± on OA. Then PM=-P'M, since in passing from P to P', PM passes through zero. sinAOP' = P'M OP -PM OP = -sinAOP. 82 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. and cosAOP'=OM^=0^=cosAOP. .'. the sine of an angle changes sign when the angle does, but the cosine does not. 227°. As the angle AOP increases, OP passes through the several quadrants in succession. When OP lies in the ist Q., sin AOP and cos AOP are both positive ; when OP lies in the 2nd g., sin AOP is posi- tive and cos AOP is negative ; when OP lies in the 3rd O., the sine and cosine are both negative ; and, lastly, when OP lies in the 4th ^., sin AOP is negative and the cosine positive. Again, when P is at A, i.AOP = o, and PM==o, while OM = OP. .•. sin = and cos 0=1. When P comes to C, PM = OP and 0M=o, and denoting a right angle by \ (207°, Cor. 4) sin 2= I, and cos^ = o. When P comes to B, PM=o and OM= - 1, sin 7r = o, and cos7r= — I. Finally when P comes to D, PM= -OP and OM=o. sin ^'^= - I, and cos ^^^ = 0. •7. ' -? These variations of the sine and cosine for the several quadrants are collected in the following table : — ISt(?. 2nde. 3rd<>. 4th (>. Sine, Cosine, .... + + + - + Sine, Cosine, .... From To I From To I -T From To - r - 1 From To - I I GEOMETRIC EXTENSIONS. 183 228°. ABC is a triangle in its circumcircle whose diameter we will denote by d. ^ ^^ ^b Let CD be a diameter. Then ^D = Z.A, (106°, Cor. i) and Z.CBD=~|- ^^ CB = CDsinCDB = ^sinA = ^. and from symmetry, <!/= ^ _ b ^ c sin A sin B sin C* Hence the sides of a triangle are proportional to the sines of the opposite angles ; and the diameter of the circumcircle is the quotient arising from dividing any side by the sine of the angle opposite that side. PRINCIPLE OF ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION. 229°. The orthogonal projection {i6y°, 2) of PO on L is P'O', the segment intercepted between the feet of the perpendiculars PP' and QQ'. Now P'Q' = PQcos(PQ . P'Q'). .'. the projection of any segment on a given line is the segment multiplied by the cosine of the angle which it makes with the given line. From left to right being considered as the + direction along L, the segment PQ lies in the ist Q., as may readily be seen by considering P, the point from which we read the segment, as being the centre of a circle through Q. Similarly QP lies in the 3rd Q., and hence the projection of PO on L is + while that of OP is -. When PQ is J_ to L, its projection on L is zero, and wheTi II to L this projection is PO itself. Results obtained through orthogonal projection are univer- sally true for all angles, but the greatest care must be 1 84 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. exercised with regard to the signs of angular functions concerned. Ex. AX and OY are fixed lines at right angles, and AQ is any line and P any point. Required to find the ±PQ in terms of AX, PX, and the z_A. Take PO as the positive direction, and project the closed figure POAXP on the line of PO. Then pr.PQ + pr.QA + pr.AX + pr.XP = o. (i68') Now, pr.PQ is PQ, and pr.QA = o ; AX lies in ist Q.^ and XP in the 3rd Q. Moreover z.(AX . PQ), i.e., the rotation which brings AX to PQ in direction is -Z-N, and its cosine is +. cos4AX.PQ)=+sinA. Also, pr.XP is -XPcos^XPQ= -XPcosA. PO = XPcosA-AXsinA. SIGNS OF THE SEGMENTS OF DIVIDED LINES AND ANGLES. 230°. AOB is a given angle and ^AOB= -Z.BOA. Let OP divide the Z.AOB internally, and OQ divide it ex- ternally into parts denoted respectively by a, /3, and a!^. If a is the ^AOP and /3 the ^POB, a and /3 are both positive. But if we write Q for P, a! = /-AOQ, and /3' = ^Q0B, and a and /S' have contrary signs. On the other hand, if a is ^AOP and ^ the ^BOP, a and /8 have contrary signs, while replacing P by Q gives a and ^ with hke signs. The choice between these usages must depend upon con- venience : and as it is more symmetrical with a two-letter GEOMETRIC EXTENSIONS. 1 85 notation to write AGP, BOP, AGO, BOO, than AGP, FOB, etc., we adopt the convention that internal division of an angle gives segments with opposite signs, while external division gives segments with like signs. In like manner the internal division of the segment AB gives parts AP, BP having unlike signs, while external divi- sion gives parts AQ, BQ having hke signs. Def. — A set of points on a line is called a 7-ajige, and the line is called its axis. By connecting the points of the range with any point not on its axis we obtain a corresponding pencil. (203°, Def) Cor. To any range corresponds a pencil for every vertex, and to any vertex corresponds a range for every axis, the axis being a transversal to the rays of the pencil. If the vertex is on the axis the rays are coincident ; and if the axis passes through the vertex the points are coincident. 231°. BY is any line dividing the angle B, and CR, AP are perpendiculars upon BY. B Then AAPY^ACRY, and AP is AB sin ABY, and CR is BC sin CBY, AY^AB sin ABY CY CB • sin CBY' Therefore a line through the vertex of a tri- angle' divides the base into segments which are proportional to the products of each conterminous side multiplied by the sine of the corresponding segment of the vertical angle. Cor. I. Let BY bisect /.B, then ^^=-. YC a AY=^(^-AY), and AY = — . Thence YC = -^. a + c 1 86 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Which are the segments into which the bisector of the ^B divides the base AC. Cor. 2. In the AABY, BY2 = ABHAY--2AB.AY.cosA. (217°) But cos A = ^'±^'-":-''- (217^), and AY=-^-, ibc " a + c whence by reduction which is the square of the length of the bisector. Cor. 3. When AY = CY, BY is a median, and AB^sinYBC CB sinABY" .'.a median to a triangle divides the angle through which it passes into parts whose sines are reciprocally as the con- terminous sides. 232°. In any range, when we consider both sign and mag- nitude, the sum AB + BC + CD + DE + EA=o, however the points may be arranged. For, since we start from A and return to A, the translation in a + direction must be equal to that in a - direction. That this holds for any number of points is readily seen. Also, in any pencil, when we consider both sign and mag- nitude, the sum zA0B + ^B0C-hz.COD-f^D0A=o. For we start from the ray OA and end with the ray OA, and hence the rotation in a -f- direction is equal to that in a - direction. RANGES AND PENCILS OF FOUR. 533°. Let A, B, C, P be a range of four, then AB.CP-l-BC.AP + CA.BP = o. GEOMETRIC EXTENSIONS. 1 8/ Proof.— AP = AC + CP, and BP = BC + CP. .'. the expression becomes BC(AC + CA) + (AB + BC + CA)CP, and each of the brackets is zero (232°). .'. etc. 234°. Let O . ABCP be a pencil of four. Then sinAOB.sinCOP + sinBOC.sinAOP + sinCOA.sinBOP^o. P^^^y:_/^AOB=|OA . OB sin AOB, also AAOB=^AB.;^, where p is the common altitude to all the triangles. AB ./ = OA . OB . sin AOB. Similarly, CP./=OC. OP. sin COP. '^ ^ c\ AB . CP .^2== OA . OB . OC . OP sin AOB . sin COP. Now, /" and OA . OB . OC . OP appear in every homologous product, .•.(AB.CP + BC.AP + CA.BP)/^ = OA . OB . OC . OP(sin AOB . sin COP + sin BOC . sin AOP + sin COA . sin BOP). But the bracket on the left is zero (233°), and OA. OB.OC.OD is not zero, therefore the bracket on the right is zero. q.e.d. 235''. From P let perpendiculars PA', PB', PC be drawn to OA, OB, and OC respectively. Then sinAOP = ^, sinBOP=^^, etc., and putting these values for sin AOP, etc., in the relation of 234°, we have, after multiplying through by OP, C'P.sinAOB + A'P.sinBOC + B'P.sinCOA = o. Or, let L, M, and N be any three concurrent lines, /, ///, 7i the perpendiculars from any point P upon L, M, and N respectively, then >^ /sin MN+;;zsinNL + ;;sin LM=o. where MN denotes the angle between M and N, etc. SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Let four rays be disposed in the order OA, -P OB, OC, OP, and let OP be perpendicular to OA. Denote /.AOC by A, and ^AOB by B. Then 234° becomes sinBcosA + sin(A-B)sin2-sinAcosB=o, or, sin(A-B)=sinAcosB-cosAsinB. Similarly, by writing the rays in the same order and making ^BOP a n, and denoting ^AOB by A and ^BOC by B, we obtain sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B. Also, by writing the rays in the order OA, OP, OB, OC, and denoting z_AOP by A and Z.BOC by B, we obtain (i) when ^AOB=n, cos (A - B)= cos A cos B + sin A sin B ; (2) when zAOC=n, cos (A + B) = cosAcosB-sinAsinB ; which are the addition theorems for the sine and cosine. Ex. 2. ABC is a triangle and P is any point. Let PX, p PY, PZ be perpendiculars upon BC, K-^. ^ A CA, AB, and be denoted by P«, P^, Pc 1 \ ''""-v//- I'espectively. I /^/ I Then (235°) X B c D PQsinA + PYsinB + PZsinC = o. But if AD is±to BC, AD = ^sin C = QX. (PX-(^sinC)sinA + PYsinB +PZsinC = o, or .2:(P„sinA) = <^sinAsinC. Similarly, S(PaSin A) = rsin Bsin A = ^sin C sin B, 2(P„sin A)=^{abcs\n^K sin2B sin^C}. Hence the function of the perpendicular P,, sin A + Pj sin B + Pc sin C is constant for all positions of P. This constancy is an important element in the theory of trilinear co-ordinates. GEOMETRIC EXTENSIONS. 189 237". A, B, C being a range of three, and P any point not on the axis, AB.CP-4-BC.AP- + CA.BP- --AB.BC.CA. Proof.— LtX P() be X to AC. Then AO = AC + CQ, BQ = BC + CQ, and the expression becomes (AB + BC + CA)(PQ2 + CQ-) + BC.CA(BC-AC) = BC . CA(BC + CA) = BC . CA . BA = -AB.BC.CA. Exercises. 1. A number of stretched threads have their lower ends fixed to points lying in line on a table, and their other ends brought together at a point above the table. What is the character of the system of shadows on the table when {a) a point of light is placed at the same height above the table as the point of concurrence of the threads ? {b) when placed at a greater or less height t 2 . If a line rotates uniformly about a point while the point moves uniformly along the line, the point traces and the line envelopes a circle. 3. If a radius vector rotates uniformly and at the same time lengthens uniformly, obtain an idea of the curve traced by the distal end-point. 4. Divide an angle into two parts whose sines shall be in a given ratio. (Use 231°, Cor. 3.) 5. From a given angle cut off a part whose sine shall be to that of the whole angle in a given ratio. 6. Divide a given angle into two parts such that the product of their sines may be a given quantity. Under what condition is the solution impossible ? 7. Write the following in their simplest form : — sin(7r-^), sin (2+^), sin {tt- (^-|) }, C0s(27r + ^), cos -j27r-(^-|)}, COS { ^ - (J-)-^) }. IQO SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 8. Make a table of the variation of the tangent of an angle in magnitude and sign. 9. OM and ON are two lines making theiLMON = w, and PM and PN are perpendiculars upon OM and ON respectively. Then OP sin a; = MN. A transversal makes angles A', B', C with the sides BC, CA, AB of a triangle. Then sin A sin A' + sin B sin B' + sin C sin C = o. OA, OB, OC, OP being four rays of any length whatever, AAOB.ACOP+ABOC.AAOP+ACOA.ABOP=o. If r be the radius of the incircle of a triangle, and r-^ be that of the excircle to side a^ and if p^ be the altitude to the side a^ etc., .^ .(sin A + sinB + sinC) sni A -^-\ (-sin A + sinB + sinC), sm A 10 II. J 2, 13- A and + -+- = ^+^ ^3 P\ Pi /; + ^ = i (Use 235°.) The base AC of a triangle is trisected at M and N, then BN- = i(3BC- + 6BA2-2AC). SECTION II. CENTRE OF MEAN POSITION. A, B, C, D are any points in line, and perpendiculars AA', BB', etc., are drawn to any fixed line L. Then there is, on the line, evidently some point, O, for which AA' + BB' + CC'+DD' = 40N ; and ON is less than A A' and greater than DD'. The point O is called the centre o/jnean position, or simply the 7ne(m centi'e, of the system of points A, B, C, D. CENTRE OF MEAN POSITION. IQI Again, if we take multiples of the perpendiculars, as a.AA', b . BB', etc., there is some point O, on the axis of the points, for which ^?.AA' + /5.BB' + r.CC' + ^. DI)' = (rt + /A+6-+^/)ON. Here again ON lies between AA' and DD'. O is then called the nieati centre of the system of points for the system of multiples. Def.— For a range of points with a system of multiples we define the mean centre by the equation 2(^?.A0) = o, where 2(/t . AO) is a contraction for ^.AO + ^.BO + 6-.CO + ..., and the signs and magnitudes of the segments are both considered. The notion of the mean centre or centre of mean position has been introduced into Geometry from Statics, since a system of material points having their weights denoted by «, b, c, ..., and placed at A, B, C, ..., would "balance" about the mean centre O, if free to rotate about O under the action of gravity. The mean centre has therefore a close relation to the " centre of gravity " or "mass centre" of Statics. 239°. Theorem. — If P is an independent point in the line of any range, and O is the mean centre, ^ ^ S(^ . AP) = S(«) . OP. "a b S c p /•r^^/-- AP = AO + OP, BP = BO + OP, etc., rt.AP = ^.AO + rt.OP, ^.BP = <^.BO + ^.OP, etc. 2(^ . AP) = Z(^ . AO) + 2(^) . OP. But, if O is the mean centre, 2(<z. AO)=o, by definition, 2(rt.AP)=S(.?)-OP. Ex. The mean centre of the basal vertices of a triangle 192 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. when the multiples are proportional to the opposite sides is the foot of the bisector of the vertical angle. 240°. Let A, B, C, ... be a system of points situated any- where in the plane, and let AL, BL, CL, ..., AM, BM, CM, ..., denote perpendiculars from A, B, C, ... upon two Hnes L and M. Then we define the mean centre of the system of points for a system of multiples as the point of intersection of L and M when 2(^z.AL) = o, and 2(rt:.AM)=o. If N be any other line through this centre, S(^.AN)=o. For, let A be one of the points. Then, since L, M, N is a pencil of three and A any point, (235°) AL . sin MON + AM . sin NOL+AN . sin LOM =0, also BL . sin MON + BM . sin NOL + BN . sin LOM = 0, and multiplying the first b}' <?, the second by b^ etc., and adding, 2(^.AL)sinMON + 2(^.AM)sinNOL + 2(rt.AN)sinLOM=o. But 2:(^. AL) = S(rt'. AM) = o, by definition, 2:(rt.AN) = o. 241". 'J'heore7n. — If O be the mean centre of a system of points for a system of multiples, and L any line whatever, 20?.AL) = 2(rt).OL. Proof. — Let M be || to L and pass through O. Then AL = AM + ML, .-. ^.AL=-^.AM + ^?.ML, BL = BM + ML, ,-. /;.BL = ^.BM + /5.ML, adding, ^{a . AL) = Y.{a . AM) + ^{d) . ML. But, since M passes through O, S(«.AM)=:o, and ML = OL, S(^.AL)=S(^).OL. CENTRE OF MEAN POSITION. 1 93 242°. Theorem. — The mean centre of the vertices of a triangle with multiples proportional to the opposite sides is the centre of the incircle. Proof. — Take L along one "of the sides, as BC, and let/ be the ± from A. Then A 2(^.AL) = ^./ and S(.i:).OL = (« + <^+<:).OL, ■•■(^39°) OL = -^^=f = .; (.53', Ex..) i.e.^ the mean centre is at the distance r from each side, and is the centre of the incircle. Cor. I. If one of the multiples, as a, be taken negative, OL=- ~^f =z:A^ _^' (j53° Ex. 2) />., the mean centre is beyond L, and is at the distance r' from each side, or it is the centre of the excircle to the side a. Cor. 2. If any line be drawn through the centre of the in- circle of a triangle, and a, j8, 7 be the perpendiculars from the vertices upon it, aa + d^ + cy=o, and if the line passes through the centre of an excircle, that on the side ^ for example, aa = b^ + cy. Exercises. If a line so moves that the sum of fixed multiples of the perpendiculars upon it from any number of points is constant, the line envelopes a circle whose radius is The mean centre of the vertices of a triangle, for equal multiples, is the centroid. The mean centre of the vertices of any regular polygon, for equal multiples, is the centre of its circumcircle. N 194 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 243°. Theorem. — If O be the mean centre of a system of points for a system of multiples, and P any independent point in the plane, Proof. — Let O be the mean centre, P the independent point, and A any point of the system. Let L pass through O and be per- pendicular to OP, and let AA' be perpen- dicular to OP. Then AP2=AOHOP2-20P.OA', and «.AP2 = ^.A02 + «.OP2-20P.^.OA'. Similarly <5. BP2 = <^. 30^ + ^. OP2-20P.^. OB', 2(^.AP2) = 2(«.A02)-l-2(^).0P2-20P.2(^.0A'). But 2(^.0A') = 2(«.AL)=o, (241°) 2(^. AP2) = 2(^. A02) + 2(rt). 0P2. q.e.d. Cor. In any regular polygon of ;^ sides -th the sum of the squares on the joins of any point with the vertices is greater than the square on the join of the point with the mean centre of the polygon by the square on the circumradius. For making the multiples all unity, 2(AP2) = /z^ + «OP2, i2(AP2) = OP2 + r2. 71 Ex. Let a, b, c be the sides of a triangle, and a, j8, 7 the joins of the vertices with the centroid. Then (242°, Ex. 2) 2(AP2)=2(A02)-f-30P2. ist. Let P be at A, ^^.^^^^a^ + zS^-l-T'+Sa', 2nd. „ P „ B, r^ + ^^^a^ + iSHv' + S^', 3rd. „ P „ C, «2 + <^^ = a2 + /32-f-7H3r, whence Vz^+(^^ + c^=3(a-+/3H7-). Ex. If ABCDEFGH be the vertices of a regular octagon taken in order, AC2 + ADHAE2-t-AF2 + AG2=i4r2. CENTRE OF MEAN POSITION. 195 244°. Let O be the centre of the incircle of the AABC and let P coincide with A, B, and C in succession. ist. bc"^ cl^ = ^{a . AO^) + 2(rt)A02, 2nd. ac^ +t-«2_2(^.A02) + S(rt)B02, 3rd. aB'-^ba'^ =2(^.AO2) + 2(.0CO2. Now, multiply the ist by a, the 2nd by b^ the 3rd by c, and add, and we obtain, after dividing by {a^rb^rc\ ^{a. AO^) =abc. Cor. I, For any triangle, with O as the centre of the incircle, the relation 2(^. AP2)=S(rt. A02)+2(rt)OP2 becomes 'Z{a.AV^)=abc+2s. OP^, and, if O be the centre of an excircle on side ^, for example, S(^. AP2)= -abc+2{s-a)0V\ where a denotes that a alone is negative. Cor. 2. Let P be taken at the circumcentre, and let D be the distance between the circumcentre and the centre of the incircle. Then AP = BP = CP = R. 2s'K^=^abc + 2sT>\ But abc=^/S^, (204°, Cor.) and s=^, (153°, Ex. i) D2=R2-2Rr. Cor. 3. If Dj be the distance between the circumcentre and the centre of an excircle to the side a, we obtain in a similar manner D ^ = R^ + 2 Rr^. Similarly D2^ = RH2Rr2, D32 = R2 + 2Rr3. 245°. Ex. To find the product OA. OB . DC, where O is the centre of the incircle. Let P coincide with A. Then (244°) bc'' + ^c=abc+2s.K0\ 196 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Similarly B0^=£%1^\ and C02 = ^%l£), AO^. BO^. CO^: s s _ a^^c^s(s - a)(s - /?){s - c) =^A'=i6RV, and OA.OB.OC = 4R^2. 246°. If S(rt . AP^) becomes constant, /^, we have ^ = 2(^.A02) + 2(rt)0P^ and 2(^z . AO^) being independent of the position of P, and therefore constant for variations of P, OP is also constant, and P describes a circle whose radius is p2_ >^-S(^.AO^) .'. If a point so moves that the sum of the squares of its joins with any number of fixed points, each multiplied by a given quantity, is constant, the point describes a circle whose centre is the mean point of the system for the given multiples. Exercises, 1. If O', O", O'" be the centres of the escribed circles, AO'.BO".CO"'=4R«5-'. 2. A0'.B0'.C0' = 4R^i'. 3. s.OL = {s- a)0'L + {s- ^)0"L + {s- c)0"'L, where L is any line whatever. 4. If P be any point, 5. (s-a). O'O^ + {s-d). 0"02 + {s~ c)0"'0'' = labc. 6. If D is the distance between the circumcentre and the centroid, Ti" =\{c)P:- - a^ - V" - c"). OF COLLIN.EARITY AND CONCURRENCE. I9; SECTION III. OF COLLINEARITY AND CONCURRENCE. 247°. Def. I. — Three or more points in line are collinear, and three or more lines meeting in a point are concurrent. Def. 2. — A tetragram or general quadrangle is the figure formed by four lines no three of which are concurrent, and no two of which are parallel. Thus L, M, N, K form a tetra- l/ ^^^^/c gram. A, B, C, D, E, F are its six vertices. AC, BD are its internal ^^ diagonals, and EF is its external diagonal. 248°. The following are promiscuous examples of collinear- ity and concurrence. Ex. I. AC is a 1 7 , and P is any point. Through P, GH is drawn |1 to BC, and EF || k N o to AB. The diagonals EG, HF, and DB of the three / 7s AP, PC, and AC are concur- rent. EG and HF meet in some D H c L point O ; join BO and complete the ZZZ70KDL, and make the extensions as in the figure. We are to prove that D, B, O are collinear. /'r^<?/:— /ZZ7KG = Z=7GM, and ^Z7FL = £i:7FN, (145°) Ei:7KG = ^=Z7GF + ZZ:7BM, and z=:7FL = £:Z7GF + z:=7NB. Hence EI::7KB = CZ7BL, B is on the line DO, (i45°j Cor. 2) and D, B, O are collinear. 198 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Ex. 2. The middle points of the three diagonals of a tetra- gram are collinear. ABCDEF is the tet- ragram, P, Q, R the middle points of the diagonals. Complete the paral- lelogram AEDG, and through B and C draw lines II to AG and AE respectively, and let them meet in T. Then, from Ex. i, IH passes through F. Therefore EI HP is a triangle, and the middle points of EI, EH, and EF are collinear. (84°, Cor. 2) But these are the middle points of AC, BD, and EF re- spectively. .'. P, Q, R are collinear. Ex. 3. Theorem. — The circumcentre, the centroid, and the orthocentre of a triangle are col- linear. Proof.— L^\. YD and ZD be the right bisectors of AC and AB. Join BY, CZ, and through E, A Y H c the intersection of these joins, draw DE to meet the altitude BH in O. Then D is the circumcentre and E is the centroid. Since DY is II to BH, the triangles YDE and BOE are similar. But BE = 2EY, (85°, Cor.) OE = 2DE, and as D and E are fixed points, O is a fixed point. .*. the remaining altitudes pass through O. 249°. 77/^<7r^;«.— Three concurrent lines perpendicular to the sides of a triangle at X, Y, Z divide the sides so that BX2 + CY2 + AZ2 = CXHAY2-l-BZ2; OF COLLINEARITY AND CONCURRENCE. 199 and, conversely, if three lines perpendicular to the sides of a triangle divide the sides in this manner, B the lines are concurrent. Proof.— \.^\, OX, OY, OZ be the lines. z^ Then BX2-CX2 = B02-C02,(i72°,i) ^j Similarly CY^- AY2 = C02-A02, AZ2-BZ2 = A02-BO^ A BX2 + CY2 + AZ2-CX"^-AY2-BZ2 = o. q.eul Conversely, let X, Y, Z divide the sides of the triangle in the manner stated, and let OX, OY, perpendiculars to BC and CA, meet at O. Then OZ is _L to AB. Proof.— 1{ possible let OZ' be J_ to AB, Then, by the theorem, BXH CY^ + AZ'^ - CX^ - AY^ - BZ'2=o, and by hyp. BX2 + CYHAZ2-CX2-AY2-BZ2=o, AZ'2-AZ2=BZ'2-BZ2. But these differences have opposite signs and cannot be equal unless each is zero. .*. Z' coincides with Z. Exercises. 1. When three circles intersect two and two, the common chords are concurrent. Let S, Si, S2 be the circles, and A, B, C their centres. Then (113°) the chords are perpendicular to the sides of the AABC at X, Y, and Z. And if r, r^, r^ be the radii of the circles, BX2-CX2 = ri2-r22, etc., etc., and the criterion is satisfied. .*. the chords are concurrent. 2. The perpendiculars to the sides of a triangle at the points of contact of the escribed circles are concurrent. 3. When three circles touch two and two the three common tangents are concurrent. 4. If perpendiculars from the vertices of one triangle on the sides of another be concurrent, then the perpendiculars 200 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. from the vertices of the second triangle on the sides of the first are concurrent. 5. When three perpendiculars to the sides of a triangle are concurrent, the other three at the same distances from the middle points of the sides are concurrent.' 6. Two perpendiculars at points of contact of excircles are concurrent with a perpendicular at a point of contact of the incircle. 250°. Theorem. — When three points X, Y, Z lying on the sides BC, CA, and AB of a triangle are collinear, they divide the sides into parts which fulfil the relation f. BX.CY.AZ ^ {(X) ■ = I : ^ ' CX.AY.BZ and their joins with the opposite vertices divide the angles into parts which fulfil the relation ,,N sin BAX . sin CBY . sin ACZ _ ^^ sinCAX.sinABY.sinBCZ * Proof of {a).— On the axis of X, Y, Z draw the perpendicu- B lars AP, BQ, CR. On account of similar /\s, ^=?S ^=CR AZ^AP CX CR' AY AP' BZ BQ' BX.CY.AZ _ CX.AY.BZ ' Proof of {b).- BX=ABAX^B AsinBAX ■^•^^^ CX ACAX CAsinCAX' sinBAX_CA BX sinCAX BA'CX' Similarlv si" CBY _AB CY sinACZ _BC AZ ^' sinABY CB'AY' sin BCZ AC " BZ* sin BAX . sin CBY . sin ACZ _ BX . CY. AZ _ SinCAX.sinABY.sinBCZ CX.AY.BZ ' q.e.d. The preceding functions which are criteria of collinearity OF COLLINEARITY AND CONCURRENCE. 201 will be denoted by the symbols It is readily seen that three points on the sides of a triangle can be collinear only when an even number of sides or angles (2 or o) are divided internally, and from 230° it is evident that the sign of the product is + in these two cases. Hence, in applying these criteria, the signs may be dis- regarded, as the final sign of the product is determined by the number of sides or angles divided internally. The converses of these criteria are readily proved, and the proofs are left as an exercise to the reader. Ex. If perpendiculars be drawn to the sides of a triangle from any point in its circumcircle, the feet of the perpendicu- lars are collinear. X, Y, Z are the feet of the perpendicu- lars. If X falls between B and C, ^OBC is < a ~~|, and therefore Z.OAC is > a ""], and Y divides AC externally ; .'. it is a case of collinearity. Now, BX = OBcosOBC, and AY=OAcosOAC. But, neglecting sign, cosOBC=cosOAC, BX^OB AY OA' CY^OC BZ OB BX CX and similarly. AZ CX" OA OC Vex/ and X, Y, Z are collinear. Def. — The line of collinearity of X, Y, Z is known as " Simson's line for the point O." 251°. Theorem. — When three lines through the vertices of a triangle are concurrent, they divide the angles into parts 202 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. which fulfil the relation , V s in BAX . sin CBY . sin ACZ _ _ ^^' sinCAX.sinABY.sinBCZ and they divide the opposite sides into parts which fulfil the ^^ CX.AY.BZ To prove {a). — Let O be the point of concurrence of AX, BY, and CZ, and let OP, OQ, OR be perpendiculars on the sides. sin BAX OR Then sinCAX OQ' sinCBY _OP sinABY OR* sinACZ _OQ sinBCZ OP' sinBAX\ A QY , . , . /sin D/\A.\ .-.multiplying, (inrCAx)=-'' the negative sign resulting from the three angles being divided internally. (230°) To prove (<5).— From B and C let BE and CF be per- pendiculars upon AX. Then, from similar As BEX and CFX, BX_BE_ ABsinBAX CX CF ACsinCAX* e. ., , CY_BCsinCBY AZ_CAsinACZ j)imiiariy, AY ~BA sinABY' BZ~CBsinBCZ' ^)=-i, from (^). ^^^ The negative sign results from the three sides being divided internally. (230°) It is readily seen that three concurrent lines through the vertices of a triangle must divide an odd number of angles and of sides internally, and that the resulting sign of the product is accordingly negative. Hence, in applying the criteria, the signs of the ratios may be neglected. OF COLLINEARITY AND CONCURRENCE. 203 The remarkable relation existing between the criteria for coUinearity of points and concurrence of lines will receive an explanation under the subject of Reciprocal Polars. Exercises. 252°. I. Equilateral triangles ABC, BCA', CAB' are de- scribed upon the sides AB, BC, CA of any triangle. Then the joins A A', BB', CC are concurrent. Proof.— S'mce AC' = AB, AB'=AC, and ^CAC'=^BAB', ACAC'=AB'AB, and aAC'C = ^ABB'. i^ sin ACZ _sin ACC'_AC'_AB (oi9,°\ " sin ABY~ sin ACC~ AC ~ AC' ^ ^ c- ., , sin BAX BC sin CBY CA ^'"^'^^'^^^ ihTBCZ^BA' ilKCAX^CB' /sin BAX \_ VsinCAX/ ' and hence the joins AA', BB', CC are concurrent. 2. The joins of the vertices of a A with the points of con- tact of the incircle are concurrent. 3. The joins of the vertices of a A with the points of contact of an escribed are concurrent. 4. ABC is a A, right-angled at B, CD is = and _L to CB, and AE is = and _L to AB. Then EC and AD inter- sect on the altitude from B. 5. The internal bisectors of two angles of a A and the external bisector of the third angle intersect the opposite sides collinearly. 6. The external bisectors of the angles of a A intersect the opposite sides collinearly. 7. The tangents to the circumcircle of a A, at the vertices of the A, intersect the opposite sides collinearly. 8. If any point be joined to the vertices of a A, the lines through the point perpendicular to those joins intersect the opposite sides of the A collinearly. 204 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 9, A cuts the sides of a A in six points so that three of them connect with the opposite vertices concurrently. Show that the remaining three connect concurrently with the opposite vertices. [o. Is the statement of Ex. i true when the As are all de- scribed internally upon the sides of the given A ? [I. If L is an axis of symmetry to the congruent As ABC and A'B'C, and O is any point on L, A'O, B'O, and CO intersect the sides BC, CA, and AB collinearly. 253°. Theorem. — Two triangles which have their vertices connecting concurrently have their corresponding sides inter- secting collinearly. (Desargue's Theorem.) \z ABC, A'B'C are two As having their vertices connect- ing concurrently at O, and their corresponding sides in- tersecting in X, Y, Z. To prove that X, Y, Z are col- linear. Proof. — To the sides of AA'B'C draw perpendiculars AP, AP', BQ, BQ', CR, CR'. Then, from similar As, bx^bq; CX CR' CY^CR' AY AP' AZ_AF BZ BQ' A P\ BO\CR' AP . BQ . CR* But t^=«4^LAA;^;, sm AA'C" with similar expressions for the other ratios. OF COLLINEARITY AND CONCURRENCE. 205 Also, since AA', BB', CC are concurrent at O, they divide the angles A' B', C so that sin AA^B\ sin BB'C. sin CC^A ^ ^ ^ sin AA'C sin BB'A'. sin CC'B' ' ( — V j = I, and X, Y, Z are collinear. The converse of this theorem is readily proved, and will be left as an exercise to the reader. Ex. A', B', C are points upon the sides BC, CA, AB re- spectively of the AABC, and AA', BB', CC are concurrent in O. Then 1. AB and A'B', BC and B'C, CA and CA' meet in three points Z, X, Y, which are collinear. 2. The lines AX, BY, CZ form a triangle with vertices A", B", C", such that AA", BB", CC" are concurrent in O. OF RECTILINEAR FIGURES IN PERSPECTIVE. 254°. Def. — AB and A'B' are two segments and AA' and BB' meet in O. a b Then the segments AB and A'B' are said to be in perspective at O, which is called their centre of perspective. The term perspective is introduced from Optics, because an eye placed at O would see A' coinciding with A and B' with B, and the segment A'B' coinciding with AB. By an extension of this idea O' is also a centre of perspective of AB and B'A'. O is o then the external centre of perspective and O' is the internal centre. Def. — Two rectilinear figures of the same number of sides are in perspective when every two corresponding sides have the same centre of perspective. 206 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Cor. I. From the preceding definition it follows that two rectilinear figures of the same species are in perspective when the joins of their vertices, in pairs, are concurrent. Cor. 2. When two triangles are in perspective, their ver- tices connect concurrently, and their corresponding sides intersect collinearly. (253°) In triangles either of the above conditions is a criterion of the triangles being in perspective. Def. — The line of collinearity of the intersections of corre- sponding sides of triangles in perspective is called their axis of perspective ; and the point of concurrence of the joins of corresponding vertices is the centre of perspective. 255°. Let AA', BB', CC be six points which connect con- currently in the order written. These six points may be connected in four different ways so as to form pairs of triangles having the same centre of perspective, viz., ABC, A'B'C; ABC, A'B'C ; AB'C, A'BC; A'BC, AB'C. These four pairs of conjugate triangles determine four axes of perspective, which intersect in six points ; these points are centres of perspective of the sides of the two triangles taken in pairs, three X, Y, Z being external centres, and three X', Y', Z' being internal centres. (254°) The points, the intersections which determine them, and the segments of which they are centres of perspective are given in the following table : — OINT. Determined by Intersection of Centre of Perspective to X BC-B'C BC'-B'C Y CA-C'A' CA'-C'A Z AB-A'B' AB'-A'B X' BC'-B'C BC-B'C Y' CA'-C'A CA~C'A' Z' AB'-A'B AB-A'B' OF INVERSION AND INVERSE FIGURES. 207 And the six points lie on the four lines thus, XYZ, X'Y'Z, X'YZ', XY'Z'. Exercises 1. The triangle formed by joining the centres of the three excircles of any triangle is in perspective with it. 2. The three chords of contact of the excircles of any tri- angle form a triangle in perspective with the original. 3. The tangents to the circumcircle of a triangle at the three vertices form a triangle in perspective with the original. SECTION IV. OF INVERSION AND INVERSE FIGURES. 256°. Def. — Two points so situated upon a centre-line of a circle that the radius is a geometric mean (169°, Def) between their distances from the centre are called inverse points with respect to the circle. Thus P and Q are inverse points if CP.CQ = CB2=R2, a| R being the radius. The 0S is the circle of inversion or the inverting 0, and C is the centre of inversion. Cor. From the definition : — 1. An indefinite number of pairs of inverse points may lie on the same centre-line. 2. An indefinite number of circles may have the same two points as inverse points. 3. Both points of a pair of inverse points lie upon the same side of the centre of inversion. 4. Of a pair of inverse points one lies within the circle and one without. 208 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 5. P and Q come together at B ; so that any point on the circle of inversion is its own inverse. 6. When P comes to C, Q goes to co ; so that the inverse of the centre of inversion is any point at infinity. 257°. Problem. — To find the circle to which two pairs of coUinear points may be inverse points. P^,_-— .^Q c p! ~^Q' P> Qj P') Q' ^6 the four collinear points, of which PQ and P'Q' are respec- tively to be pairs of in- verse points. Through P, Q and \v through P', Q' describe any two circles S, S' to intersect in two points U and V. Let the connector UV cut the axis of the points in C, and let CT be a tangent to circle S'. Then C is the centre and CT the radius of the required circle. Proof.— CT2 = CP'. CQ' = CU. CV = CQ. CP. Cor. If the points have the order P, P', Q, Q' the centre C is real and can be found as before, but it then lies within both circles S and S', and no tangent can be drawn to either of these circles ; in this case we say that the radius of the circle is imaginary although its centre is real. In the present case P and Q, as also P' and Q', lie upon opposite sides of C, and the rectangles CP. CQ and CP'. CQ' are both negative. But R^ being alwa;^s positive (163°) cannot be equal to a negative magnitude. When the points have the order P, P', Q', Q, the circle of inversion is again real. Hence, in order that the circle of inversion may be real, each pair of points must lie wholly without the other, or one pair must lie between the others. OF INVERSION AND INVERSE FIGURES. 209 Exercises. 1. Given a and a point without it to find the inverse point. 2. Given a and a point within it to find the inverse point. 3. Given two points to find any to which they shall be inverse. 4. In 3 the is to have a given radius. 5. In 3 the is to have a given centre on the line of the points. 258°. Theorem. — A which passes through a pair of inverse points with respect to another cuts the latter orthogonally. (i 15°, Defs. i, 2) And, conversel}^, a which cuts another orthogonally determines a pair of inverse points on any centre-line of the latter. 1. P and O are inverse to 08. Then CP.C0 = CT2, CT is tangent to 0S'. (176°, Cor. 3) And .*. S' cuts S orthogonally since the radius of S is perpen- dicular to the radius of S' at its end-point. 2. Conversely, let S' cut S orthogonally. Then Z-CTC is a ""I, and therefore CT is tangent to S' at the point T. Hence CT^^CP.CQ, and P and Q are inverse points to 08. Cor. I. A through a pair of points inverse to one another with respect to two 0s cuts both orthogonally. Cor. 2. A which cuts two 0s orthogonally determines on their common centre-line a pair of points which are inverse to one another with respect to both 0s. Cor. 3. If the 08 cuts the 0s 8' and 8" orthogonally, the tangents from the centre of 8 to the 0s 8' and 8" are radii of S and therefore equal. 2IO SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. .*. (178°) a which cuts two 0s orthogonally has its centre on their radical axis. Cor. 4, A having its centre on the radical axis of two given 0s, and cutting one of them orthogonally, cuts the other orthogonally also. 259°. Let P, O be inverse points to circle S and D any point on it. Then CP.CQ=CD2, .-. CP:CD = CD:CQ. Hence the triangles CPD and CDQ are similar, and PD and DQ are homolo- gous sides. PD2_CD2_ CP.CQ _CP QD2 CQ2 CQ2 CQ- .'. the squares on the joins of any point on a circle with a pair of inverse points with respect to the circle are propor- tional to the distances of the inverse points from the centre. Cor. I. If P and Q are fixed, PD^: QD^ is a fixed ratio. .'. the locus of a point, for which the squares on its joins to two fixed points have a constant ratio, is a circle having the two fixed points as inverse points. Cor. 2. When D comes to A and B we obtain CP_PD2_PA2_PB2 CQ QD'-* 0A2 QB2' Pp^PA^PB QD QA QB- Hence DA and DB are the bisectors of the ^PDQ, and the segments PB and BQ subtend equal angles at D. Hence the locus of a point at which two adjacent segments of the same line subtend equal angles is a circle passing through the common end-points of the segments and having their other end-points as inverse points. OF INVERSION AND INVERSP: FIGURES. 211 Cor. 3. Let P', Q' be a second pair of inverse points. Then Z.BDP' = ^BDQ', and ^BDP = ^BDQ, z.PDP' = ^QDQ'; or the segments PP' and QO' subtend equal angles at D. Hence the locus of a point at which two non-adjacent seg- ments of the same line subtend equal angles is a circle having the end-points as pairs of inverse points. Cor. 4. Since AP : AQ = PB : BQ, (Cor. i) .*. P and Q divide the diameter AB in the same manner in- ternally and externally, and B and A divide the segment PQ in the same manner internally and externally. .*. from 208°, Cor., P, Q divide AB harmonically, and A, B divide PO harmonically. Hence, when two segments of the same line are such that the end-points of one divide the other harmonically, the circle on either segment as diameter has the end-points of the other segment as inverse points. Exercises. 1. If a variable circle passes through a pair of inverse points with respect to a fixed circle, the common chord of the circles passes through a fixed point. 2. To draw a circle so as to pass through a given point and cut a given circle orthogonally. 3. To draw a circle to cut two given circles orthogonally. 4. On the common centre-line of two circles to find a pair of points which are inverse to both circles. Let C, C be the centres of the circles S and S'. Take any point P, without both circles," and find its inverses P' and P" with respect to both circles. (257°, Ex. i) The circle through P, P', and P" cuts the common centre-line CC in the required points Q and Q'. 5. To describe a circle to pass through a given point and cut two given circles orthogonally. 212 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 6. To determine, on a given line, a point the ratio of whose distances from two fixed points is given. 7. To find a point upon a given line from which the parts of a given divided segment may subtend equal angles. 8. A, B, C, D are the vertices of a quadrangle. Gn the diagonal BD find a point at which the sides BA and BC subtend equal angles. 9. To draw a circle to pass through a given point and touch two given lines. 260°. Def. — One figure is the inverse of another when every point on one figure has its inverse upon the other figure. Theorem. — The inverse of a circle is a circle when the centre of inversion is not on the figure to be inverted. s T Let O be the centre of inversion and S be the circle to be inverted ; and let A', B', C be the inverses of A, B, C respec- tively. To prove that the L^Ch! = ~^ Pr^t?/— OA. OA'=OB. OB' = OC. 0C'=R2, (256°) A0A'C5=?A0CA, and AOB'C'^AOCB. (i) aOC'A'=z.OAC, and (2) Z-OC'B' = z.OBC. And ^B'CA' = ^OCA'-OCB'=^OAC-^OBC = z.ACB=n, since ACB is in a semicircle. .*. as C describes S, its inverse, C, describes the circle S' on A'B' as diameter. q.e.d. OF INVERSION AND INVERSE FIGURES. 21 3 Cor. I. The point O is the intersection of common direct tangents. Cor. 2. •.• CD'. OD = OT. OT'. ^^.^ = RK ?-^', where R is the radius of the circle of inversion ; .*. the centre of a circle and the centre of its inverse are not inverse points, unless OD = OT, i.e., unless the centre of inversion is at 00 . Cor. 3. When the circle to be inverted cuts the circle of inversion, its inverse cuts the circle of inversion in the same points. (256°, Cor. 5) 261°. Theorem. — A circle which passes through the centre of inversion inverts into a line. Let O be the centre of inversion and S the circle to be inverted, and let P and P' be inverses of Q and Q'. Proof.— '$AnQ.Q OP.OO = OP'. 00' = R2, OP:OP' = OQ':OQ, and the triangles OPP' and OQ'Q are similar, and ^OPP' = Z.OQ'Q = "~|> since OQ'Q is in a semicircle. And as this is true however OP' be drawn, PP' is a line ± to OP, the common centre-line of the circle of inversion and the circle to be inverted. q.e.d. Cor. I. Since inversion is a reciprocal process, the inverse of a line is a circle through the centre of inversion and so situated that the line is J_ to the common centre- line of the two circles. Cor. 2. Let I be the circle of inversion, and let PT and PT' be tangents to circles I and S respectively. Then, PT2 = OP2-OT2=OP2-OP.OQ = OP.PQ=PT'2, PT = Pr, .*. when a circle inverts into a line with respect to another circle, the line is the radical axis of the two circles. (178°, Def.) 214 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Cor. 3. If a circle passes through the centre of inversion and cuts the circle of inversion, its inverse is their common chord. Cor. 4. A centre-line is its own inverse. Cor. 5. Considering the centre of inversion as a point-circle, its inverse is the line at 00 . 262°. A circle which cuts the circle of inversion orthogon- ally inverts into itself. Since circle S cuts circle I orthogon- ally OT is a tangent to S, and hence OP.OO = OT2, .'. P inverts into Q and O into P, and the arc TQV inverts into TPV and vice versa. q.e.d. Cor. Since I cuts S orthogonally, it is evident that I inverts into itself with respect to S. 263°. A circle, its inverse, and the circle of inversion have t^ a common radical axis. Let I be the circle of inver- '^^^^^ I sion, and let the circle S' be the inverse of S. o^---^ \J I \ The tangents TT' and VV v^^^-~f-f_ X meet at O (260°, Cor. i), and T, T' are inverse points. D, the middle point of TT' is on the radical axis of S and S', and the circle with centre at D and radius DT cuts S and S' orthogonally. But this circle also cuts circle I orthogonally (258°). .*. D is on the radical axes of I, S and S'. Similarly D', the middle point of the tangent VV, is on the radical axes of I, S and S'. .*. the three circles I, S, and S' have a common radical axis passing through D and D'. q.e.d. OF INVERSION AND INVERSE FIGURES. 21 5 Remarks. — This is proved more simply by supposing one of the circles to cut the circle of inversion. Then its inverse must cut the circle of inversion in the same points, and the common chord is the common radical axis. The extension to cases of non-intersection follows from the law of continuity. 264°. Theorem. — The angle of intersection of two lines or circles is not changed in magnitude by inversion. Let O be the centre of in- version, and let P be the point of intersection of two circles S and S', and Q its inverse. Take R and T points near P, o and let U and V be their in- verses. Then 0U.0R = 0Q.0P = 0V.0T = R2, AOQU^AORP, and ^OQU = ^ORP = ^RPX-^ROP. Similarly ^OQV = ^TPX-^TOP, ^UQV = ^RPT-^ROT. But at the limit when R and T come to P the angle between the chords RP and PT becomes the angle between the circles (115°, Def. I ; 109°, Def. i). And, since ^ROT then vanishes, we have ultimately ^UQV = I.RPT. Therefore S and S', and their inverses Z and Z', intersect at the same angle. Cor. I. If two circles or a line and a circle touch one another their inverses also touch one another. Cor. 2. If a circle inverts into a line, its centre-lines invert into circles having that line as a common diameter. For, since the circle cuts its centre-lines orthogonally, their in- verses must cut orthogonally. But the centre-line is the only line cutting a circle orthogonally. 2l6 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Exercises. 1. What is the result of inverting a triangle with respect to its incircle ? 2. The circle of self-inversion of a given circle cuts it or- thogonally. 3. Two circles intersect in P and O, and AB is their common centre-line. What relation holds between the various parts when inverted with P as centre of inversion ? 4. A circle cuts two circles orthogonally. Invert the system into two circles and their common centre-line. 5. Three circles cut each other orthogonally. If two be in- verted into lines, their intersection is the centre of the third. 265°. The two following examples are important. Ex. I. Any two circles cut their common centre-line, and a circle which cuts them orthogonally in two sets of points which connect concurrently on the last-named circle. S and S' are the two given circles and Z a circle cutting them orthogonally. Invert S and S' and their common centre line with re- spect to a circle which cuts S and S' orthogonally and has its centre at some point O on Z. S and S' invert into themselves, and their centre-line into a circle through O cutting S and S' ortho- gonally, i.e.^ into circle Z. .•. A' is the inverse of A, B' of B, etc , and the points AA', BB', CC, DD' connect concurrently at O. Ex. 2. The nine-points circle of a triangle touches the in- circle and the excircles of the triangle. OF INVERSION AND INVERSE FIGURES. 21/ Let ABC be any triangle having its side AB touched by the incircle I at b h ^ T, and by the ex- circle to the side c at T'. Take CH = CAand CD = CB, and join DH and HA. From the sym- metry of the fig- ure it is evident that HD touches both the circles I and S. Let E and F be the middle points of AB and AC, and let EF cut HA in G. From 135°, Ex. i, AT = BT'=j-rt;, whence ET = ET' = |(^-/^). But, since EF bisects HA, EG = ^BH = |(^-^), ET = ET' = EG, and the circle with E as centre and EG as radius cuts I and S orthogonally, and, with respect to this circle, the circles I and 8 invert into themselves. Now, PF :HC = DF :DC = BC-CF:BC, PF = ii^(BC-CF) = ^-— , BC 2a EP = EF-PF = --^-j-^, 2 2a EP.EF = f''-^-h— )- = K^-^)2 = EG2. ^2 2a'2 .'. P inverts into F, and the line HD into the circle through E and F, and by symmetry, through the middle point of BC. But this is the nine-points circle (116°, Ex. 6). And since HD touches I and S, the nine-points circle, which is the inverse of HD, touches the inverses of I and S, t.e., I and S themselves. And, similarly, the nine-points circle touches the two remaining excircles. 2l8 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. SECTION V. OF POLE AND POLAR. 266°. Def. — The line through one of a pair of inverse points perpendicular to their axis is the polat' of the other point with respect to the circle of inversion, and the point is the pole of the line. The circle is called, in this relation, Xh^ polar circle, and its centre is called the polar cejitre. From this definition and from the nature of inverse points we readily obtain the following : — Cor. I. The polar of the polar centre is a line at infinity. But, since the point which is the inverse of the centre may go to 00 along any centre-line, all the hnes obtained therefrom are polars of the centre. And as a point has in general but o/te polar with respect to any o?ie circle, we speak of the polar of the centre as being the line at infinity, thus assuming that there is but one line at infinity. Cor. 2. The polar of any point on the circle is the tangent at that point ; or, a tangent to the polar circle is the polar to the point of contact. Cor. 3. The pole of any line lies on that centre-line of the polar circle which is perpendicular to the former line. Cor. 4. The pole of a centre-line of the polar circle lies at 00 on the centre-line which is perpendicular to the former. Cor. 5. The angle between the polars of two points is equal to the angle subtended by these points at the polar centre. 267°. Theorem. — If P and Q be two points, and P lies on the polar of Q, then O lies on the polar of P. OF POLE AND POLAR. 219 OP and OQ are centre-lines of the polar circle and PE, ± to OQ, is the polar of Q. To prove that QD, ± to OP, is the polar of P. Proof.— The As ODQ and OEP are similar. OE:OP = OD:OQ, and.-. OE.OQ = OP.OD. But E and Q are inverse points with respect to circle I, P and D are inverse points, and .'. DQ is the polar of P. Def. — Points so related in position that each lies upon the polar of the other are conjugate points, and lines so related that each passes through the pole of the other are conjugate lines. Thus P and Q are conjugate points and L and M are con- jugate lines. Cor. I. If Q and, accordingly, its polar PV remain fixed while P moves- along PE, L, which is the polar of P, will rotate about Q, becoming tangent to the circle when P comes to U or V, and cutting the circle when P passes without. Similarly, if Q moves along L, M will rotate about the point P. Cor. 2. As L will touch the circle at U and V, UV is the chord of contact for the point Q. .*. for any point without a circle its chord of contact is its polar. Cor. 3. For every position of P on the line M, its polar passes through Q. .'. collinear points have their polars concurrent, and con- current lines have their poles collinear, the point of concur- rence being the pole of the line of collinearity. 220 SYNTHETIC GEOMETKY. Exercises. 1. Given a point and a line to find a circle to which they are pole and polar. 2. In Ex, I the circle is to pass through a given point. 3. In the figure of 267° trace the changes, (a) when P goes to 00 along M ; (6) when P goes to 00 along OD ; (c) when P moves along UV, what is the locus of D ? 4. From any point on a circle any number of chords are drawn, show that their poles all lie on the tangent at the point. 5. On a tangent to a circle any number of points are taken, show that all their polars with respect to the circle pass through the point of contact. 268°. Theorem. — The point of intersection of the polars of two points is the pole of the join of the points. A Let the polars of B and of C pass through A. Then A lies on the polar of B, and therefore B lies on the polar of A (267°). For similar B . . c reasons C lies on the polar of A. .*. the polar of A passes through B and C and is their join. q.e.d. Cor. Let two polygons ABCD... and abc... be so situated that a is the pole of AB, b of BC, c of CD, etc. Then, since the polars of a and b meet at B, B is the pole of ab ; similarly C is the pole of hc^ etc. kE .'.if two polygons are such that the vertices of one are poles of the sides of the other, then, reciprocally, the vertices of the second polygon are poles of the sides of the first, the polar circle being the same in each case. OF POLE AND POLAR. 221 Def. I.- -Polygons related as in the preceding corollary are polar reciprocals to one another. Def. 2. — When two polar reciprocal As become coincident, the resulting A is self-reciprocal or self-conjngate^ each vertex being the pole of the opposite side. I^^f' 3- — The centre of the with respect to which a A is self-reciprocal is the polar centre of the A? and the O itself is the polar circle of the A 269°. The orthocentre of a triangle is its polar centre . Let ABC be a self-conjugate A- a Then A is the pole of BC, and B of AC, and C of AB. Let AX, J_ to BC, and BY, ± to AC, meet in O. Then O is the ortho- centre. (88°, Def) Now, as AX is \_ to BC, and as A is the pole of BC, the polar centre lies on AX. For similar reasons it lies on BY. (266°, Cor. 3) .*. O is the polar centre of the AABC. q.e.d. Cor. I. With respect to the polar of the A? the on AO as diameter inverts into a line _L to AO (261°). And as A and X are inverse points, this line passes through X ; therefore BC is the inverse of the on OA as diameter. Similarly, AC is the inverse of the on OB as diameter, and AB of the on OC as diameter. Cor. 2. As the on AO inverts into BC, the point D is inverse to itself, and is on the polar of the A- (256°, 5) .'. OD is the polar radius of the A- Cor. 3. If O falls within the A^ it is evident that the on OA as diameter will not cut CB. In this case the polar centre is real while the polar radius is imaginary. (257°, Cor.) Hence a A which has a real polar circle must be obtuse- angled. 222 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Cor. 4. The on BC as diameter passes through Y since Y is a ~~1- But B and Y are inverse points to the polar 0. .*. the polar cuts orthogonally the on BC as diameter. (258°) Similarly for the circles on CA and AB. .'. the polar of a A cuts orthogonally the circles having the three sides as diameters. Cor. 5. The^A0Z=^B,^BOZ = zA, and ^OAC=^(C-|)- And CX = OC sin AOZ = OC sin B, also =-^cosC, 0C=--^ — — .cosC= -^cos C, sm B where d is the diameter of the circumcircle (228°) to the triangles AOC or BOC or AOB or ABC, these being all equal. (116°, Ex. 4) Similarly OA = ^cosA, OB = ^cosB. But OX = OCcosB=-^cosBcosC, R2 = OX. OA=-^2cosAcosBcosC. In order that the right-hand member may be +, one of the angles must be obtuse. Cor. 6. R2 = OC.OZ = OC(OC + CZ) = OC2 + OC.CZ, and OC=-<^cosC, and CZ = ^sinB = ^, (228°) R2=^2(i_sin2C)-rt^cosC = ^2_^(^2 + ^2 + ^2). (217°) If O is within the triangle, d"^ < \{a^ ^ b'^ ■\- c^) and R is imaginary. Exercises. 1. If two triangles be polar reciprocals, the inverse of a side of one passes through a vertex of the other. 2. A right-angled triangle has its right-angled vertex at the centre of a polar circle. What is its polar reciprocal .'* 3. In Fig. of 269°, if the polar circle cuts CY produced in C, prove that CY=YC'. OF POLE AND POLAR. 223 4. If P be any point, ABC a triangle, and A'B'C its polar reciprocal with respect to a polar centre O, the per- pendiculars from O on the joins PA, PB, and PC intersect the sides of A'B'C coUinearly. 270°. Theore77t.—\i two circles intersect orthogonally, the end-points of any diameter of either are conjugate points with respect to the other. Let the circles S and S ' in- tersect orthogonally, and let PQ be a diameter of circle S'. Then P' is inverse to P, and P'Q is ± to CP. .'. P'Q is the polar of P with respect to circle S. .'. Q lies on the polar of P, and hence P lies on the polar of O, and P and Q are conjugate points (267° and Def.). q.e.d. Cor. I. PQ2 = CP2 + CQ2-2CP.CP' (172°, 2) = CP2 + C02-2R2 = CP2-R2 + CQ2-R2 = T2 + T'2, where T and T' are tangents from P and Q to the circle S. .*. the square on the join of two conjugate points is equal to the sum of the squares on the tangents from these points to the polar circle. Cor. 2. If a circle be orthogonal to any number of other circles, the end-points of any diameter of the first are conju- gate points with respect to all the others. And when two points are conjugate to a number of circles the polars of either point with respect to all the circles pass through the other point. 271°. Theorhn. — The distances of any two points from a polar centre are proportional to the distances of each point from the polar of the other with respect to that centre. (Salmon) 224 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. NN' is the polar of P and MM' is the polar of Q. PO:00 = PM:ON. Then MM' Proof.— h^t Om be 1| to and O;/ be II to NN'. Then OP'. OP = OQ'. OQ OP_OQ'_M;;^ OQ OP' N;^" But the triangles OP;;z and 00;/ are similar, OQ Q« N;2 _ P^+M;;g _PM , Q;/ + N« ON" ^ Cor. I. A, B are any two points and L and M their polars, and P the point of contact of any tangent N. AX and BY are _L upon N, and PH and PK are J_ upon L and M respectively. Then M = ?2and AX_AO PK R PH R' BY. AX AO.BO ;_ ^,^„, PK.-pH = -^^-=^'^^°^^''"'' AX.BY = ^.PH.PK. If A and B are on the circle, L and M become tangents having A and B as points of contact, and AO = BO = R. AX.BY = PH.PK. (See 211°, Ex. i) Exercises. If P and Q be the end-points of any diameter of the polar circle of the AABC, the chords of contact of the point P with respect to the circles on AB, BC, and CA as diameters all pass through Q. Two polar reciprocal triangles have their corresponding vertices joined. Of what points are these joins the polars ? OF POLE AND POLAR. 225 A, B, C are the vertices of a triangle and L, M, N the corresponding sides of its reciprocal polar. If T be a tangent at any point P, and AT is ± to T, etc., AT.BT.CT AG. BO. CO PL.PM.PN = R3 =^ '^"''^^'- If A, B, C are on the circle, AT . BT . CT = PL . PM . PN. In Ex. 3, if A', B', C be the vertices of the polar reciprocal, AT . BT . CT _ A^O . B^O . CO AT.BT.CT R3 The right-hand expression is independent of the position ofT. If ABC, A'B'C be polar reciprocal triangles whose sides are respectively L, M, N and L', M', N', and if AM' is the ± from A to M', etc., AM'. BN'. CL' = AN'. BL'. CM', and A'M . B'N . C'L = A'N . B'L . CM. etc., 272°. Theorem. — Triangles which are polar reciprocals to one another are in perspective. ^' Let ABC and A'B'C be polar recipro- cals. Let AP, AP' be perpendiculars on ^ A'B' and A'C, BQ and BO' be perpen- diculars on B'C and B'A', etc. Then (271°) AP'_AO BQ'^BO men (271) ^--^, CR CO AP'. BQ'. CR' _ AP.B(2.CR ' But AP' = AA'sinAA'P', AP = AA'sin AA'P', . . AP'^sinAA'P' AP sin AA'P' and similarly for the other ratios. Hence AA', BB', CC divide the angles at A, B, and C, so as to fulfil the criterion of 251°. .*. AA', BB', and CC are concurrent, and the triangles are in perspective. (254°, Cor. 2) P 226 SYiNTHETIC GEOMETRY. SECTION VI. OF THE RADICAL AXIS. 273°. Dcf. I. — The line perpendicular to the common centre-line of two circles, and dividing the distance be- tween the centres into parts such that the difference of their squares is equal to the difference of the squares on the conterminous radii, is the radical axis of the two circles. Cor. I. When two circles intersect, their radical axis is the secant line through the points of intersection. Cor. 2. When two circles touch, their radical axis is the common tangent at their point of contact. Cor. 3. When two circles are mutually exclusive without contact, their radical axis lies between them. Cor. 4. When two circles are equal and concentric, their radical axis is any line whatever, and when unequal and con- centric it is the line at 00 . Def. 2. — When three or more circles have a common radical axis they are said to be co-axal. 274°. If several circles pass through the same two points they form a co-axal system. For (273°, Cor. i) the line through the points is the radical axis of all the circles taken in pairs, and is therefore the common radical axis of the system. Such circles are called circles of the common point species^ contracted to f./. -circles. Let a system of ^./.-circles S, S^, S2, ..., pass through the common points P and O, and let L'L be the right bisector ofPO. Then the centres of all the circles of the f./.-system lie on L'L and have M'M for their common radical axis. OF THE RADICAL AXIS. 227 Hence from any point C in M'M the tangents to all the circles are equal to one another. (178°) Let CT be one of these tangents. The circle Z with C as centre and CT as radius cuts all the <;./. -circles orthogonally. Similarly, a system of circles Z, Zj, Zg, ... may be found with centres lying on M'M such that each one of the system cuts orthogonally every one of the r./. -circles. Since the centre of any circle of this new system is obtained by drawing a tangent from any one of the circles, as Sg, of the <:.^. -species, to meet MM', it follows that no circle of this new system can have its centre lying between P and Q. As T approaches P the dependent circle Z contracts until it be- comes the point-circle P, when T comes to coincidence with P. Hence P and O are limiting forms of the circles having their centres on M'M and cutting the c.p.-chdes orthogon- ally. The circles of this second system are consequently called limithig point circles^ contracted to /./.-circles. From the way in which /./.-circles are obtained we see that from any point on L'L tangents to circles of the /./.-system are all equal, and hence that L'L is the radical axis of the /./.-circles. Thus the two systems of circles have their radi- 228 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. cal axes perpendicular, and every circle of one system cuts every circle of the other system orthogonally. Hence P and Q are inverse points with respect to every circle of the /./.-system, and with respect to any circle of either system all the circles of the other system invert into themselves. If P and Q approach L, the c.p.-cirdes separate and the /./.-circles approach, and when P and Q coincide at L the circles of both species pass through a common point, and the two radical axes become the common tangents to the respec- tive systems. If this change is continued in the same direction, P and Q become imaginary, and two new limiting points appear on the line L'L, so that the former /./.-circles become ^./.-circles, and the former ^./.-circles become /./.-circles. Thus, in the systems under consideration, two limiting points are always real and two imaginary, except when they all become real by becoming coincident at L. Cor. I. As the r./.-circles and the /^.-circles cut each other orthogonally, the end-points of a diameter of any circle of one species are conjugate points with respect to every circle of the other species. But a circle of either species may be found to pass through any given point (259°, Ex. 5). .'. the polars of a given point with respect to all the circles of either species are concurrent. Cor. 2. Conversely, if the polars of a variable point P with respect to three circles are concurrent, the locus of the point is a circle which cuts them all orthogonally. For let Q be the point of concurrence. Then P and O are conjugate points with respect to each of the circles. Hence the circle on PQ as diameter cuts each of the circles ortho- gonally. (270°) Cor. 3. If a system of circles is cut orthogonally by two circles, the system is co-axal. For the centres of the cutting circles must be on the radical OF THE RADICAL AXIS. 229 axis of all of the other circles taken in pairs ; therefore they have a common radical axis. Cor. 4. If two circles cut two other circles orthogonally, the common centre-line of either pair is the radical axis of the other pair. Cor. 5. Two /./.-circles being given, a circle of any required magnitude can be found co-axal with them. But if the circles be of the ^./.-species no circle can be co-axal with them whose diameter is less than the distance between the points. Exercises. 1. Given two circles of the /./.-species to find a circle with a given radius to be co-axal with them. 2. Given two circles of either species to find a circle to pass through a given point and be co-axal with them. 3. To find a point upon a given line or circle such that tan- gents from it to a given circle may be equal to its distance from a given point. 4. To find a point whose distances from two fixed points may be equal to tangents from it to two fixed circles. 275°. Theorem. — The difference of the squares on the tan- gents from any point to two circles is equal to twice the rectangle on the distance between the centres of the circles and the distance of the point from their radical axis. Let P be the point, S and S' the circles, and LI their radical axis. Let PQ be J_ to AB. PT^ — PT'^ = PA2-PB2-(r2-r'^), where r, r' are radii of S and S'. But, 273°, Def I, r2-r'2 = AI=^ 230 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. and PA'^-PB2 = AQ2-QB2, (172°, i) PT2-PT'2 = AQ2-QB2-(AI2-IB2) = AB(AQ - QB) - AB(AI - IB) = 2AB.IQ = 2AB.PL. q.e.d. This relation is fundamental in the theory of the radical axis. Cor. I. When P is on the radical axis PL=o, and the tangents are equal, and when P is not on the radical axis the tangents are not equal. Cor. 2. The radical axis bisects all common tangents to the two circles. Cor. 3. If P lies on the circle S', PT' = o, and PT2 = 2AB.PL, .*. the square of the tangent from any point on one circle to another circle varies as the distance of the point from the radical axis of the circles. Cor. 4. If C is the centre of a circle S" passing through P and co-axal with S', PT2 = 2AC . PL. Now, if P could at any time leave this circle we would have PT2_pr'2 = 2Ac.pl, where PT" is the tangent from P to the circle S" p'r2_p'p2_ p'p"2 which is impossible finless PT"=o. Hence the locus of a point, which so moves that the square on the tangent from it to a given circle varies as the distance of the point from a given line, is a circle, and the line is the radical axis of this circle and the given circle. Cor. 5. Let PT' = ^ . PT, where ^ is a constant. Then PT2-Pr- = (i-/&2)px2 = 2Ab.pl, p-p2- 2AB. PL As PT2 varies as PL, P lies on a circle co-axal with S and S'. .'. the locus of a point from which tangents to two given circles are in a constant ratio is a circle co-axal with the two. OF THE RADICAL AXIS. 23 1 Exercises. 1. In Cor. 5 what is the position Y)f the locus for k = o^ /C'=t, ^ = > I, /& negative? 2. What is the locus of a point whose distances from two fixed points are in a constant ratio t 3. P and Q are inverse points to the circle I, and a line through P cuts circle I in A and B. PQ is the internal or external bisector of the ^AOB, according as P is within or without the circle. 4. P, Q are the limiting points of the //^.-circles S and S', and a tangent to S' at T cuts S p^^ ^g in A and B. Then, considering P as a point-circle, tangents from any point on S to P and S' are in a constant ratio. .-. AP:AT = BP:BT, and PT is the external bi- sector of lAPB. If S' were enclosed by S, BT would be an internal bisector. 5. The points of contact of a common tangent to two l.p.- circles subtend a right angle at either limiting point. 276°. Theorejn. — The radical axes of three circles taken in pairs are concurrent. Let Si, S2, S3 denote the circles, and let L be the radical axis of Si and S2, M of S2 and S3, and N of S3 and S^ L and M meet at some point O, from which 0Ti = 0T2, and OT2=OT3, where OT^ is the tangent from O to S^, etc., 0Ti = 0T3, and O is on N, .*. L, M, and N are concurrent at O. Def. — The point of concurrence of the three radical axes of three circles taken in pairs is called the radical centre of the circles. Cor. I. If Si, S2 are cut by a third circle Z, the common chords of Si, Z and S2, Z intersect on the radical axis of Si and So. 232 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Hence to find the radical axis of two given circles S^ and S2, draw any two circles Z -and Z^ cutting the given circles. The chords Sj, Z and 83, Z give one point on the radical axis and the chords S^, Zj and S2, Z^ give a second point. Cor. 2. If three circles intersect each other, their three common chords are concurrent. (See 249°, Ex. i.) Cor. 3. If a circle touches two others, the tangents at the points of contact meet upon the radical axis of the two. Cor. 4. If a circle cuts three circles orthogonally, its centre is at their radical centre and its radius is the tangent from the radical centre to any one of them. Cor. 5. If in Cor. 4 the three circles are co-axal, any num- ber, of circles may be found to cut them orthogonally, and hence they have no definite radical centre, as any point upon the common radical axis of the three becomes a radical centre. Cor. 6. If in Cor. 4 the three circles mutually intersect one another, the radical centre is within each circle (Cor. 2), and no tangent can be drawn from the radical centre to any one of the circles. In this case the circle which cuts them all or- thogonally has a real centre but an imaginary radius. 277°. Theorem. — li ^.ny three lines be drawn from the ver- tices of a A to the opposite sides, the polar centre of the A is the radical centre of the circles having these lines as A R z B diameters. ABC is a A and O its ortho- centre, and AP, BQ, CR are lines from the vertices to the opposite sides. Q •.• ^BXA=n, o the circle on AP as diameter passes through X, and OX. OA is equal to the square on the tangent from O to the circle on AP. OF THE RADICAL AXIS. 233 Similarly OY. OB is the square of the tangent from O to the circle on BQ as diameter, and similarly for OZ.OC. But as O is the polar centre of AABC, (269°) OX. OA = OY. OB = OZ. OC .*. the tangents from O to the three circles on AP, BQ, and CR are equal, and O is their radical centre. q.e.d. Cor. I. Let P, Q, R be collinear. Then the polar centre of AABC is the radical centre of circles on AP, BQ, and CR as diameters. Again, in the AAQR AP, QB, and RC are lines from the vertices to the opposite sides. .'. the polar centre of AAQR is the radical centre of circles on AP, BQ, and CR as diameters. Similarly the polar centres of the As BPR and CPQ are radical centres to the same three circles. But these As have not a common polar centre, as is readily seen. Hence the same three circles have four different radical centres. And this is possible only when the circles are co-axal. (276°, Cor. 5) .*. the circles on AP, BQ, and CR are co-axal. .'. if any three collinear points upon the sides of a A be joined with the opposite vertices, the circles on these joins as diameters are co-axal. Cor. 2. Since ARPC is a quadrangle or tetragram (247°, Def. 2), and AP, BQ, CR are its three diagonals, .'. the circles on the three diagonals of any quadrangle are co-axal. Cor. 3. The middle points of AP, BQ, and CR are col- linear. But ARPC is a quadrangle of which AP and CR are internal diagonals, and BQ the external diagonal. .*. the middle points of the diagonals of a complete quad- rangle, or tetragram, are collinear. (See 248°, Ex. 2) Cor. 4. The four polar centres of the four triangles deter- mined by the sides of a tetragram taken in threes are collinear 234 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. and lie upon the common radical axis of the three circles having the diagonals of the tetragram as diameters. 278°. Theorem. — In general a system of co-axal circles inverts into a co-axal system of the same species. (i.) Let the circles be of the r./. -species. The common points become two points by inversion, and the inverses of all the circles pass through them. Therefore the inverted system is one of ^./.-circles. Cor: I. The axis of the system (LL' of Fig. to 274") inverts into a circle through the centre of inversion (261°, Cor. i), and as all the inverted circles cut this orthogonally, the axis of the system and the two common points invert into a circle through the centre and a pair of inverse points to it. (258°, Conv.) Cor. 2. If one of the common points be taken as the centre of inversion, its inverse is at 00 . The axis of the system then inverts into a circle through the centre of inversion, and having the inverse of the other common point as its centre, and all the circles of the system invert into centre-lines to this circle. (2.) Let the circles be of the /./.-species. Let the circles S and S' pass through the limiting points, and be thus ^./.-circles. Generally S and S' invert into circles which cut the in- verses of all the other circles orthogonally. (264°) .'. the intersections of the inverses of S and S' are limiting points, and the inverted system is of the /./.-species. Cor. 3. The axis of the system (MM' of Fig. to 274°) be- comes a circle through the centre and passing through the limiting points of the inverted system, thus becoming one of the r./. -circles of the system. Cor. 4. If one of the limiting points be made the centre of OF THE RADICAL AXIS. 235 inversion, the circles S and S' become centre-lines, and the /./.-circles become concentric circles. Hence concentric circles are co-axal, their radical axis being at 00 . Exercises. 1. What does the radical axis of (i, 278^^) become? 2. What does the radical axis of (2, 278°) become ? 3. How would you invert a system of concentric circles into a common system of /./.-circles ? 4. How would you invert a pencil of rays into a system of ^./.-circles. 5. The circles of 277° are common point circles. 279". Theorem. — Any two circles can be inverted into equal circles. Let S, S' be the circles having radii r and r', and let C, C be the equal circles into which S and S' are to be inverted ; and let the common radius be p. But, since P and Q and also P' and Q' are inverse points, OP.OO = OP'.OQ', OQ2 r , , and (275°, Cor. 5) O lies on a circle co-axal with S and S'. And with any point on this circle as a centre of inversion S and S' invert into equal circles. Cor. I. Any three non-co-axal circles can be inverted into equal circles. \l6 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. For, let the circles be S, S', S", and let Z denote the locus of O for which S and S' invert into equal circles, and Z' the locus of O for which S and S" invert into equal circles. Then Z' is co-axal with S and S". And, as S, S', and S" are not co-axal, Z and Z' intersect in two points, with either of which as centre of inversion the three given circles can be inverted into equal circles. Cor. 2. If S, S', and S" be /./.-circles, Z and Z' being co-axal with them cannot intersect, and no centre exists with which the three given circles can be inverted into equal circles. But if S, S' and S" be ^/.-circles, Z and Z' intersect in the common points, and the given circles invert into centre-lines of the circle of inversion, and having each an infinite radius these circles may be considered as being equal. (278°, Cor. 2) Cor. 3. In general a circle can readily be found to touch three equal circles. Hence by inverting a system of three circles into equal circles, drawing a circle to touch the three, and then re-inverting we obtain a circle which touches three given circles. If the three circles are co-axal, no circle can be found to touch the three. 280°. Let the circles S and S', with centres A and B and radii r and r, be cut by the circle Z with centre at O and radius OP = R. Let NLbe the radical axis of S and S'. Since AP is J. to the tangent at P to the circle S, and OP is JL to the tangent at P to the circle Z, the ^APO = ^ is the angle of intersection of the circles S OF THE RADICAL AXIS. 53/ and Z (115°, Def. i). Similarly BQO-0 is the angle of intersection of the circles S' and Z. Now PP' = 2rcos^ = R-OP', and QQ' = 2r'cos0 = R-OQ', OP' - OQ' = 2(r'cos - r cos ^). But R.OP'-R.OQ' = OT2-Or2 (where OT is the tangent from O to S, etc.) =2AB . OL, (275°) R = _ ^ .OL. rcos<i>-rcosd Cor. I. When 6 and <p are constant, R varies as OL. .*. a variable circle which cuts two circles at constant angles has its radius varying as the distance of its centre from the radical axis of the circles. Cor. 2. Under the conditions of Cor. i ON varies as OL, and .*. --^, is constant. ON .•.a variable circle which cuts two circles at a constant angle cuts their radical axis at a constant angle. Cor. 3. When 0L = o, /coscp^rcosd, and r : r' = cos0 : cos^. .'. a circle with its centre on the radical axis of two other circles cuts them at angles whose cosines are inversely as the radii of the circles. Cor. 4. If circle Z touches S and S', d and <p are both zero ot both equal to tt, or one is zero and the other is tt. AB .'. when Z touches S and S' R= . , . OL, where the variation in sign gives the four possible varieties of contact. Cor. 5. When d = <f) = 2' Z cuts S and S' orthogonally, and OL=o, and the centre of the cutting circle is on the radical axis of the two. 238 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. SECTION VII. CENTRE AND AXES OF SIMILITUDE OR PERSPECTIVE. The relations of two triangles in perspective have been given in Art. 254°. We here propose to extend these rela- tions to the polygon and the circle. Let O, any point, be connected Avith the vertices A, B, C, ... of a polygon, and on OA, OB, OC, ... let points a, b, c, ... be taken so that OA : 0^ = 0B : Ol?=OC : Or... and OA : 0^' = 0B : 0^' = 0C : O^:'... Then, since OAB is a A and ab is so drawn as to divide the sides proportionally in the same order, .-. ab is II to AB. (202°, Conv.) Similarly, be is II to BC, cd to CD, etc., b'c' is II to BC, (fd' to CD, etc., AO AB ^ /\Oab « /Spa'b', AOl^C^ /\Obc^ AOb'c', ... .*. the polygons ABC..., abc..., and a'b'c'... are all similar and have their homologous sides parallel. Def.—The. polygons ABCD... and abed... are said to be similarly placed, and O is their ^aY^r;/^?/ centre of similitude; while the polygons ABCD... and a'b'e'd'... are oppositely placed, and O is their internal centre of similitude. Hence, when the lines joining any point to the vertices of a polygon are all divided in the same manner and in the same order, the points of division are the vertices of a second similarly, and CENTRE OF SIMILITUDE OR PERSPECTIVE. 239 polygon similar to the original, and so placed that the homologous sides of the two polygons are parallel. 282°. When two similar polygons are so placed as to have their homologous sides parallel, they are in perspective, and the joins of corresponding vertices concur at a centre of similitude. Let ABCD..., abed... be the polygons. Since they are similar, AB : ab=^^C : bc=CD : cd... (207"), and by hypothesis AB is || to ab, BC to bc^ etc. Let ha and ^b meet at some point O. Then GAB is a A and ab\s\\ to AB. OB_AB_BC_ .^ Wb ab be ' .". C<; passes through O, and similarly D^^ passes through O, etc. By writing alb'd ... for abe... the theorem is proved for the polygon a'b'e'd', which is oppositely placed to ABCD... Cor. I. If Aa and V>b meet at 00, <?^ = AB, and hence ^(r=BC, etc., and the polygons are congruent. Cor. 2. The joins of any two corresponding vertices as A, C ; a, c ', a\ e' are evidently homologous lines in the polygons and are parallel. Similarly any line through the centre O, as XxOx' is homologous for the polygons and divides them similarly. 283°. Let the polygon ABCD... have its sides indefinitely increased in number and diminished in length. Its limiting form (148°) is some curve upon which its vertices lie. A similar curve is the limiting form of the polygons abed... as also oi a'b'c'd'..., since every corresponding pair of limiting or vanishing elements are similar. Hence, if two points en a variable radius vector have the ratio of their distances from the pole constant, the loci of the 240 • SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. points are similar curves in perspective, and having the pole as a centre of perspective or simihtude. Cor. I. In the limiting form of the polygons, the line BC becomes a tangent at B, and the line be becomes a tangent at b. And similarly for the line be'. .'. the tangents at homologous points on any two curves in perspective are parallel. 284°. Since abed. . . and a'b'e'd'. . . are both in perspective with ABCD... and similar to it, we see that two similar polygons may be placed in two different relative positions so as to be in perspective, that is, they may be similarly placed or oppo- sitely placed. In a reguLir polygon of an even number of sides no dis- tinction can be made between these two positions ; or, two similar regular polygons are both similarly and oppositely placed at the same time when so placed as to be in per- spective. Hence two regular polygons of an even number of sides and of the same species, when so placed as to have their sides respectively parallel, have two centres of perspective, one due to the polygons being similarly placed, the external centre ; and the other due to the polygons being oppositely placed, the internal centre. Cor. Since the limiting form of a regular polygon is a circle (148°), two circles are always similarly and oppositely placed at the same time, and accordingly have always two centres of perspective or similitude. 285°. Let S and S' be two circles with centres C, C and radii r, r' respectively, and let O and O' be their centres of perspective or similitude. Let a secant line through O cut S in X and Y, and S' in X' and Y'. CENTRE OF SIMILITUDE OR PERSPECTIVE. 241 Then O is the centre of similitude due to considering the circles S and S' as being similarly placed. Hence X and X', as also Y and Y', are homologous points, and (283°, Cor. i) the tangents at X and X' are parallel. So also the tangents at Y and Y' are parallel. Again O' is the centre of similitude due to con- sidering the circles as being oppositely placed, and for this centre Z and Y' as also U and U' are homologous points ; and tangents at Y' and Z are parallel, and so also are tangents at U and U'. Hence YZ is a diameter of the circle S and is parallel to Y'Z' a diameter of the circle S'. Hence to find the centres of similitude of two given circles : — Draw parallel diameters, one to each circle, and connect their end-points directly and transversely. The direct connector cuts the common centre-line in the external Q 242 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. centre of similitude, and the transverse connector cuts it in the internal centre of simihtude. 286°. Since OX : OX' = OY : OY', if X and Y become coin- cident, X' and Y' become coincident also. .'. a line through O tangent to one of the circles is tangent to the other also, or O is the point where a common tangent cuts the common centre-line. A similar remark applies to O'. When the circles exclude one another the centres of similitude are the intersections of common tangents of the same name, direct and transverse. When one circle lies within the other (2nd Fig.) the com- mon tangents are imaginary, although O and O' their points of intersection are real. 287°. Since AOCY^AOC'Y', .-. OC:OC = r:?'', and since AO'CZ^ AO'C'Y', .-. O'C : 0'C' = r : r\ .'. the centres of similitude of two circles are the points which divide, externally and internally, the join of the centres of the circles into parts which are as the conterminous radii. The preceding relations give OC = -/!-. CC, and 0'C=-;^ . CC. r -J' r -\-r OC is < r according as CC is < r' — r, and O'C is ^ r according as CC is % r' + r. Hence 1. O lies within the circle S when the distance between the centres is less than the difference of the radii, and O' lies within the circle S when the difference between the centres is less than the sum of the radii. 2. When the circles exclude each other without contact both centres of similitude lie without both circles. 3. When the circles touch externally, the point of contact is the internal centre of similitude. 4. When one circle touches the other internally, the point of contact is the external centre of similitude. CENTRE OF SIMILITUDE OR PERSPECTIVE. 243 5. When the circles are concentric, the centres of similitude coincide with the common centre of the circles, unless the circles are also equal, when one centre of similitude becomes any point whatever. 6. If one of the circles becomes a point, both centres of similitude coincide with the point. 288°. Def. — The circle having the centres of similitude of two given circles as end-points of a diameter is called the circle of similitude of the given circles. The contraction of s. will be used for circle of similitude. Cor. I. Let S, S' be two circles and Z their of s. Since O and O' are two points from which tangents to circles S and S' are in the constant ratio of r to r', the circle o" Z is co-axal with S and S' (275°, Cor. 5). Hence any two circles and their Q) of s. are co-axal. Cor. 2. From any point P on circle Z, PT :TC = PT':T'C, and.-. ^TPC = ^T'PC'. Hence, at any point on the Q) of s. oi two circles, the two circles subtend equal angles. Cor. 3. OC = CC. -,^. and O'C = CC. -^. ^287°) ^ r'-r r' + r ' ' ^ whence 00'= CC. The Q) of s.\s a line, the radical axis, when the given circles are equal {r=r'). The (z) of s. becomes a point when one of the two given circles becomes a point (r or r' = o). The ofs. is a point when the given circles are con- centric (CC'=o). 244 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 289°. Def. — With reference to the centre O (Fig. of 285°), X and y, as also X' and Y, are called antihomologoiis points. Similarly with respect to the centre O', U' and Z, as also U and Y', are antihomologous points. Let tangents at X and Y' meet at L. Then, since CX is || to CX', ^CXY=^C'X'Y' = z.C'Y'X'. But ^LXY is comp. of ^CXY and Z.LY'X' is comp. of Z.C'Y'X'. ALXY' is isosceles, and LX = LY'. L is on the radical axis of S and S'. Similarly it may be proved that pairs of tangents at Y and X', at U and Y', and at U' and Z, meet on the radical axis of S and S', and the tangent at U passes through L. .'. tangents at a pair of antihomologous points meet on the radical axis.- Cor. I. The join of the points of contact of two equal tangents to two circles passes through a centre of similitude of the two circles. Cor. 2. When a circle cuts two circles orthogonally, the joins of the points of intersection taken in pairs of one from each circle pass through the centres of similitude of the two circles. 290°. Since OX:OX' = r:r', OX.OY':OX'. OY' = r:r'. But OX'. OY' = the square of the tangent from O to the circle S' and is therefore constant. OX . 0Y' = -, . 0T'2 = a constant. r .'. X and Y' are inverse points with respect to a circle whose centre is at O and whose radius is OT' /^,. B^/. — This circle is called the circle of antisimilihide^ and will be contracted to ofans. Evidently the circles S and S' are inverse to one another with respect to their ofans. CENTRE OF SIMILITUDE OR PERSPECTIVE. 245 For the centre 0' the product OU . OY' is negative, and the of ans. corresponding to this centre is imaginary. Cor. I. Denoting the distance CC by d^ and the difference between the radii {r' — r) by 5, we have R' = ^^'-— 52-' where R = the radius of the of ans. Hence 1. When either circle becomes a point their of ans. becomes a point. 2. When the circles S and S' are equal, the of ans. be- comes the radical axis of the two circles. 3. When one circle touches the other internally the of ans. becomes a point-circle. (d=d.) 4. When one circle includes the other without contact the of ans. is imaginary. (d<d.) Cor. 2. Two circles and their circle of antisimilitude are co-axal. (263°) Cor. 3. If two circles be inverted with respect to their circle of antisimilitude, they exchange places, and their radi- cal axis being a line circle co-axal with the two circles becomes a circle through O co-axal with the two. The only circle satisfying this condition is the circle of similitude of the two circles. Therefore the radical axis inverts into the circle of similitude, and the circle of simili- tude into the radical axis. Hence every line through O cuts the radical axis and the circle of similitude of two circles at the same angle. 291°. D^f — When a circle touches two others so as to exclude both or to include both, it is said to ifouc/i them similarly^ or to have contacts of like kind with the two. When it includes the one and excludes the other, it is said to touch them dissimilarly^ or to have contacts of unlike kinds with the two. 246 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 292°. Theorem. — When a circle touches two other circles, its chord of contact passes through their external centre of similitude when the contacts are of like kind, and through their internal centre of similitude when the contacts are of unlike kinds. Proof. — Let circle Z touch circles S and S' at Y and X'. Then CYD and C'X'D are lines. (113°, Cor. i) Let XYX'Y' be the secant through Y and X'. Then ^CXY = aCYX = ^DYX' = ^DX'Y = ^CX'Y'. .*. CX and C'X' are parallel, and X'X passes through the external centre of similitude O. (285") Similarly, if Z' includes both S and S', it may be proved that its chord of contact passes through O. Again, let the circle W, with centre E, touch S' at Y' and S at U so as to include S' and exclude S, and let UY' be the chord of contact. Then ^CVU = i.CUV = ^EUY' = _EY'U, .*. EY' and CV are parallel and VY' connects them trans- versely ; .*. VY' passes through O'. q.e.d. Cor. I. Every circle which touches S and S' similarly is cut orthogonally by the external circle of antisimilitude of S and S'. CENTRE OF SIMILITUDE OR PERSPECTIVE. 247 Cor. 2. If two circles touch S and S' externally their points of contact are concyclic. (n6°, Ex. 2) But the points of contact of either circle with S and S' are antihomologous points to the centre O. .'. if a circle cuts two others in a pair of antihomologous points it cuts them in a second pair of antihomologous points. Cor. 3. If two circles touch two other circles similarly, the radical axis of either pair passes through a centre of simili- tude of the other pair. For, if Z and Z' be two circles touching S and S' externally, the external circle of antisimilitude of S and S' cuts Z and Z' orthogonally (Cor. i) and therefore has its centre on the radical axis of Z and Z'. Cor. 4. If any number of circles touch S and S' similarly, they are all cut orthogonally by the external circle of anti- similitude of S and S', and all their chords of contact and all their chords of intersection with one another are concurrent at the external centre of antisimilitude of S and S'. 293°. 71ieorein.—\{ the circle Z touches the circles S and S', the chord of contact of Z and the radical axis of S and S' are conjugate lines with respect to the circle Z. Proof. — Let Z touch S and S' in Y and X' respectively. The tangents at Y and X' meet at a point P on the radical axis of S and S'. (178 ) But P is the pole of the chord of contact YX'. .*. the radical axis passes through the pole of the chord of contact, and reciprocally the chord of contact passes through the pole of the radical axis (267°, Def ) and the lines are conjugate. q.c.d. 248 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. AXES OF SIMILITUDE. 294°. Let Sj, S2, S3 denote three circles having their centres A5 B, C and radii r^, ?^2y ^z^ ^"<^ let X, X', Y, Y', Z, Z' be their six centres of similitude. Now X, Y, Z are three points on the sides of the AABC, BX^r, CX r.l and _'3 r^y CY AY AZ BZ Vex/ ' and X, Y, Z are col- linear. Similarly it is proved that the triads of points XY'Z', YZ'X', ZX'Y' are collinear. Def. — These lines of coUinearity of the centres of similitude of the three circles taken in pairs are the axes of similitude of the circles. The line XYZ is the external axis, as being external to all the circles, and the other three, passing be- tween the circles, are internal axes. Cor. I. If an axis of similitude touches any one of the circles it touches all three of them. (286°) Cor. 2. If an axis of similitude cuts any one of the circles it cuts all three at the same angle, and the intercepted chords are proportional to the corresponding radii. Cor. 3. Since XYX'Y' is a quadrangle whereof XX', YY', and ZZ' are the three diagonals, the circles on XX', YY', and ZZ' as diameters are co-axal. (277°, Cor. 2) .'. the circles of similitude of three circles taken in pairs are co-axal. AXES OF SIMILITUDE OR PERSPECTIVE. 249 Cor. 4. Since the three circles of similitude are of the c.p.- species, two points may be found from which any three circles subtend equal angles. These are the common points to the three circles of similitude. (288°, Cor. 2) Cor. 5. The groups of circles on the following triads of segments as diameters are severally co-axal, AX, BY, CZ ; AX, YZ', Y'Z ; BY, Z'X, ZX'; CZ, XY', X'Y. 295°. Any two circles Z and Z', which touch three circles Si, S2, S3 similarly, cut their circles of antisimilitude ortho- gonally (292°, Cor. i), and therefore have their centres at the radical centre of the three circles of antisimilitude. (276°, Cor. 4) But Z and Z' have not necessarily the same centre. .*. the three circles of antisimilitude of the circles S^, S2, and S3 are co-axal, and their common radical axis passes through the centres of Z and Z'. 296°. Theorem. — If two circles touch three circles similarly, the radical axis of the two is an axis of similitude of the three ; and the radical centre of the three is a centre of similitude of the two. Proof. — The circles S and S' touch the three circles A, B, and C similarly. I. Since S and S' touch A and B similarly, the radical axis of S and S' passes through a centre of similitude of A and B. (292°, Cor. 3) Also, the radical axis of S • and S' passes through a centre of similitude of B and C, and through a centre of similitude of C and A. ,*. the radical axis of S and S' is an axis of similitude of the three circles A, B, and C. 250 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 2. Again, since A and B touch S and S', the radical axis of A and B passes through a centre of simiHtude of S and S'. For similar reasons, and because A, B, and C touch S and S' similarly, the radical axes of B and C, and of C and A, pass through the same centre of similitude of S and S'. But these three radical axes meet at the radical centre of A, B, and C. .', the radical centre of A, B, and C is a centre of simili- tude of S and S'. q.e.d. 297°. Problem. — To construct a circle which shall touch three given circles. In the figure of 296°, let A, B, and C be the three given circles, and let S and S' be two circles which are solutions of the problem. Let L denote one of the axes of similitude of A, B, and C, and let O be their radical centre. These are given when the circles A, B, and C are given. Now L is the radical axis of S and S' (296°, i), and O is one of their centres of similitude. But as A touches S and S' the chord of contact of A passes through the pole of L with respect to A (293°). Similarly the chords of contact of B and C pass through the poles of L with respect to B and C respectively. And these chords are concurrent at O. (292°) Hence the following construction : — Find O the radical centre and L an axis of simiHtude of A, B, and C. Take the poles of L with respect to each of these circles, and let them be the points p, q, r respectively. Then Op, Og, Or are the chords of contact for the three given circles, and three points being thus found for each of two touching circles, S and S', these circles are determined. (This elegant solution of a famous problem is due to M. Gergonne.) Cor. As each axis of similitude gives different poles with respect to A, B, and C, while there is but one radical centre AXES OF SIMILITUDE OR PERSPECTIVE. 25 I O, in general each axis of similitude determines two touching circles ; and as there are four axes of similitude there are eight circles, in pairs of twos, which touch three given circles. Putting i and e for internal and external contact with the touching circle, we may classify the eight circles as follows : (See 294°) Axes of Similituul. A B c X Y Z i e i e :]'- X Y' Z' e i i e :]^>- X' Y Z' i e e i :]^- X' Y' Z i e i e :.}.pr. PART V. ON HARMONIC AND ANHARMONIC RATIOS— HOMOGRAPHY. INVOLUTION, ETC. SECTION I. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS IN REGARD TO HARMONIC AND ANHARMONIC DIVISION. 298°. Let C be a point dividing a segment AB. The posi- tion of C in relation to A and B is determined by the ratio , ^ , AC : BC. For, if we know this ratio, we ^ D B know completely the position of C with respect to A and B. If this ratio is negative, C lies between A and B ; if positive, C does not lie between A and B. If AC:BC= — I, C is the internal bisector of AB ; and if AC : BC= + 1, C is the external bisector of AB, i.e., a point at CO in the direction AB or BA. Let D be a second point dividing AB. The position of D is known when the ratio AD : BD is known. Be/. — If we denote the ratio AC : BC by w, and the ratio AD : BD by ;/, the two ratios 7/1 : n and n : m, which are reciprocals of one another, are called the two anhannonic ratios of the division of the segment AB by the points C and D, or the harmonoids of the range A, B, C, D. 252 HARMONIC AND ANHARMONIC DIVISION. 253 Either of the two anharmonic ratios expresses a relation between the parts into which the segment AB is divided by the points C and D. Evidently the two anharmonic ratios have the same sign, and when one of them is zero the other is infinite, and vice versa. These ratios may be written : — AC . AD AC.BD AC . ED BC ' BD BC.AD AD . BC* AD . AC AD^C AI:K^ BD ' BC BD.AC AC.BD* The last form is to be preferred, other things being convenient, on account of its symmetry with respect to A and B, the end-points of the divided segment. 299°. The following results readily follow. T , AC.BD, , T^t, AC 1 AD , ,.1 1. Let ^^^-^S7^ be +. Then -- and — -^ have like signs, AD . riC x>v^ -dU and therefore C and D both divide AB internally or both externally. (298") In this case the order of the points must be some one of the following set, where AB is the segment divided, and the letters C and D are considered as being interchangeable : CDAB, ACDB, CABD, ABCD. T , AC.BD, T,, AC J AD , 2. Let ^^-g^ be -. Then — and --^ have opposite signs, and one point divides AB internally and the other externally. The order of the points is then one of the set CADB, ACBD. 3. When either of the two anharmonic ratios is ±1, these ratios are equal. ^ ^' ^?= + ■• '^''^" ^=nG' ^"-^ ^ ^"^ ° ^^« both internal or both external. 254 synthetic geometry. ., ac-bc ad-bd ab ab ^^^° bc-=Td-'"'bc=bd' and C and D coincide. Hence, when C and D are distinct points, the anharmonic ratio of the parts into which C and D divide AB cannot be positive unity. ^ . . AC.BD ^ T,, „ AC AD 5- L^^AD7BC=-^- ^^^^BC=-BD- And since C and D are now one external and one internal (2), they divide the segment AB in the same ratio internally and externally, disregarding sign. Such division of a line segment is called harmonic. (208°, Cor. i) Harmonic division and harmonic ratio have been long em- ployed, and from being only a special case of the more general ratio, this latter was named "anharmonic" by Chasles, " who was the first to perceive its utility and to apply it extensively in Geometry." 300°. Def. — When we consider AB and CD as being two segments of the same line we say that CD divides AB, and that AB divides CD. Now the anharmonic ratios in which CD divides AB are AC.BD , AD . BC AD.BC ^" AC.BD' And the anharmonic ratios in which AB divides CD are CA^DB , CB.DA CB.DA CA.DB* But the anharmonic ratios of these sets are equal each to each in both sign and magnitude. .'. thea7iharmonic ratios in which CD divides AB are the same as those in which AB divides CD. Or, any two segments of a common tine divide each other eqiiianharmonically. 301°. Four points A, B, C, D taken on a line determine six segments AB, AC, AD, BC, BD, and CD. HARMONIC AND ANHARMONIC DIVISION. 255 These may be arranged in three groups of two each, so that in each group one segment may be considered as dividing the others, viz., AB, CD ; BC, AD ; CA, BD. Each group gives two anharmonic ratios, reciprocals of one another ; and thus the anharmonic ratios determined by a range of four points, taken in all their possible relations, are six in number, of which three are reciprocals of the other three. These six ratios are not independent, for, besides the reciprocal relations mentioned, they are connected by three relations which enable us to find all of them when any one is given. P,^„_AC.BD, p BA.CD, ^ CB.AD, ^ ^^""'^ ADTBC ^^ ^' BD7CA ^^ ^' CDTAB ^^ ^^ Then P, O, R are the anharmonic ratios of the groups ABCD, BCAD, and CABD, each taken in the same order. But in any range of four (233°) we have AB.CD + BC.AD + CA.BD=o. And dividing this expression by each of its terms in succes- sion, we obtain Q + ^^ = R + ^ = P + - = i. From the symmetry of these relations we infer that any general properties belonging to one couple of anharmonic ratios, consisting of any ratio and its reciprocal, belong equally to all. Hence the properties of only one ratio need be studied. The symbolic expression {ABCD} denotes any one of the anharmonic ratios, and may be made to give all of them by reading the constituent letters in all possible orders. Except in the case of harmonic ratio, or in other special cases, we shall read the symbol in the one order of alternat- ing the letters in the numerator and grouping the extremes and means in the denominator. Thus {ABCD} denotes ^§^- It is scarcely necessary to say that whatever order may be 256 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. adopted in reading the symbol, the same order must be em- ployed for each when comparing two symbols. 302°. Theorem. — Any two constituents of the anharmonic symbol may be interchanged if the remaining two are inter- changed also, without affecting the value of the symbol. Proof.- {ABCD} = AC.BD : AD.BC. Interchange any two as A and C, and also interchange the remaining two B and U. Then {CDAB}=CA.DB:CB.DA = AC.BD : AD.BC. Similarly it is proved that [ABCD} = {BADC} = {CDAB} = {DCBA}. q.e.d. 303°. If interchanging the first two letters, or the last two, without interchanging the remaining letters, does not alter the value of the ratio, it is harmonic. For, let {ABCD} = {ABDC}. ^, AC.BD_AD^BC AD.BC AC.BD' or, multiplying across and taking square roots, AC. BD=± AD.BC. But the positive value must be rejected (299°, 4), and the negative value gives the condition of harmonic division. 304". Let ABCD be any range of four and O any point not on its axis. The anharmonic ratio of the pencil O . ABCD corresponding to any given ratio of the range is the same function of the sines of the angles as the given ratio is of the corresponding segments. ry,^^ sin AOC. sin BOD , , AC.BD Thus -. - — • tt^^ corresponds to , ,^ -^ ; smAOD.smBOC ^ AD.BC r, symbolically, 0{ABCD} corresponds to {ABCD}. HARMONIC AND ANHARMONIC DIVISION. 257 To prove that the corresponding anharmonic ratios of the range and pencil are equal. AC_ AAOC _ OA.OCsinAOC _OA sinAOC BC ABOC OB.OCsinBOC OB ' sin BOC o. ., , BD OB sin BOD Similarly, aD = OA' ilKAOD' AC . BD _ sin AOC . sin BOD AD.BC sinAOD.sinBOC* Hence, symbolically {ABCD}=0{ABCD} ; and, with necessary formal variations, the anharmonic ratio of a range may be changed for that of the corresponding pencil,- and vice versa, whenever required to be done. Cor. I. Two angles with a common vertex divide each other equianharmonically. (300°) Cor. 2. If the anharmonic ratio of a pencil is +1, two rays coincide, and if - 1, the pencil is harmonic. (299°, 4, 5) Cor. 3. A given range determines an equianharmonic pen- cil at every vertex, and a given pencil determines an equian- harmonic range on every transversal. Cor. 4. Since the sine of an angle is the same as the sine of its supplement (214°, i), any ray may be rotated through a straight angle or reversed in directionwithout affecting the ratio. Corollaries 2, 3, and 4 are of special importance. 305. Theorem, — If three pairs of corresponding rays of two equianharmonic pencils intersect collinearly, the fourth pair intersect upon the line of collinearity. Proof.— \.Q.\. 0{ABCD}=0'{ABCD'}, and let the pairs of corresponding rays OA and O'A, OB and O'B, OC and O'C intersect in the three collinear points A, B, and C. Let the fourth corresponding rays meet the axis of ABC in D and D' respectively. Then {ABCD} = ^ABCD'}, (304°) R 258 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. AD.BC AD'.BC'^" AD AD" which is possible only when D and D' coincide. .*. the fourth intersection is upon the axis of A, B, and C, and the four intersections are collinear. q.e.d. Cor. If two of the corresponding rays as OC and 0"C become one line, these rays may be considered as intersecting at all points on this line, and however A and B are situated three corresponding pairs of rays necessarily intersect col- linearly. .*. when two equianharmonic pencils have a pair of cor- responding rays in common, the remaining rays intersect collinearly. 306°. Theoretn. — If two equianharmonic ranges have three pairs of corresponding points in perspective, the fourth points are in the same perspective. Proof.— {ABCD} = {A'B'C'D'}, and A and A', B and B', and C and C are in perspective at O. Now 0{ABCD} = 0{A'B'C'D'}, and we have two equianharmonic pen- cils of which three pairs of correspond- ^' ing rays meet collinearly at A, B, and C. Therefore OD' and OD meet at D, or D and D' are in perspective at O. Cor. If two of the corresponding points, as C and C", be- come coincident, these two points are in perspective at every centre, and hence three corresponding pairs of points are necessarily in perspective. .*. when two equianharmonic ranges have a pair of cor- responding points coincident, the remaining pairs of cor- responding points are in perspective. HARMONIC RATIO. 259 SECTION II. HARMONIC RATIO. 307". Harmonic ratio being a special case of anharmonic ratio (299°, 5), the properties and relations of the latter belong also to the former. The harmonic properties of a divided segment may ac- cordingly be classified as follows : — 1. The dividing points alternate with the end points of the divided segment. For this reason harmonic division is symbolized by writing the letters in order of position, as, {APBO}, where A and B are the end points of the segment and P and Q the dividing points (301°). A— P— B— O. 2. The dividing points P and O divide the segment extern- ally and internally in the same ratio, neglecting sign. (299°, 5) 3. If one segment divides another harmonically, the second also divides the first harmonically. (300°) 4. A harmonic range determines a harmonic pencil at every vertex, and a harmonic pencil determines a harmonic range on every transversal. (304°^ Cor. 3) 5. If one or more rays of a harmonic pencil be reversed in direction the pencil remains harmonic. (304°) Cor. 4) 6. Two harmonic pencils which have three pairs of corre- sponding rays intersecting collinearly have all their corre- sponding rays intersecting collinearly. (305°) 7. Two harmonic ranges which have three pairs of corre- sponding points in perspective have all their corresponding points in perspective. (306°) 8. If two harmonic pencils have a corresponding ray from €ach in common, all their corresponding rays intersect col- linearly. (305'* Cor.) 9. If two harmonic ranges have a corresponding point from each in common, all their corresponding points are in perspective. (306°, Cor.) 26o SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. aoS"". Let APBO be a harmonic range. Then - I , . . AP:PB = AQ:BQ, ^ ^ ^ ^ :. AP:AO = AB-AP:AO-AB. Taking AP, AB, AG as three magnitudes, we have the statement : — The first is to the third as the difference between the first and second is to the difference between the second and the third. And this is the definition of three quantities in Harmonic Proportion as given in Arithmetic and Algebra. Exercises. 1. When three line segments are in harmonic proportion the rectangle on the mean and the sum of the extremes is equal to twice the rectangle on the extremes. 2. The expanded symbol {APBQ}=-i gives AP : AG = - BP : BQ. Why the negative sign ? 3. Prove from the nature of harmonic division that when P bisects AB, Q is at 00 . 4. Prove that if OP bisects z_AOB internally GO bisects it externally ; O {APBQ} is equal to — i. 5. Trace the changes in the value of the ratio AC : BC as G moves from - 00 to + 00 . 309*. In the harmonic range APBQ, P and Q are called conjugate points, and so also are A and B. Similarly in the harmonic pencil O.APBQ, OP and OQ are conjugate rays, and so also are OA and OB. Ex. I. Given three points of a harmonic range to find the fourth. Let A, P, B be the three given points. By (259°, Ex. 7) find any point O at which the segments AP and PB subtend equal angles. Draw 00 the external bisector of the ^AOB. Q is the fourth point. For OP and OQ are internal and external bisectors of the ,z_AOB. (208", Cor. i) HARMONIC RATIO. 261 Ex. 2. Given three rays to find a fourth so as to make the pencil harmonic. o Let OA, OP, OB be the three rays. 0^ 'On OA take any two equal distances ^^ OD and DE. Draw DF |i to OB, and draw OQ || to EF. OQ is the fourth ray required. For since OD = DE, EF = FG. And OQ meets EF at 00 are harmonic and hence O . APBQ are Then EFGoo harmonic. Cor. In the symbolic expression for a harmonic ratio a pair of conjugates can be interchanged without destroying the harmonicism. {APBQ} = {BPAQ} = {BQAP} = {AQBP}, for {APBQ} gives AP . BQ : AG . BP= - i, and {BPAQ} gives BP . AG : BQ . AP, and being the reciprocal of the former its value is - i also. And similarly for the remaining symbols. HARMONIC PROPERTIES OF THE TETRAGRAM OR COMPLETE QUADRANGLE. 310°. Let ABGD be a quadrangle, of which AC, BD, and EF are the three diagonals. (247°, Def 2) Also let the line EO cut two sides in G aijd H, and the line FO cut the other two sides in K and L. Then . I. AEDisa Awhereof AC, EH, and DB are concurrent lines from the vertices to the opposite sides. .-. AB.EC.DH=-AH.DC.EB. (251°, b) Also, AED is a A and FCB is a transversal. AB.EC.DF = AF.DC 262 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. and dividing the former equality by the latter, DH__AH DF AF' and AHDF is a harmonic range. 2. Again, {AHDF} = E{AHDF} = E{LOKF} = E{BGCF}. (307°, 4) LOKF and BGCF are harmonic ranges. 3. 0{AHDF}=0{CEDK} = F{CEDK} = F{GEHO} = F{BEAL}, (307°, 4, 5) but {CEDK} = {DKCE}, etc. (309°, Cor.) DKCE, HOGE, ALBE are harmonic ranges. 4. If AC be produced to meet EF in I, AOCI is a harmonic range. .'. all the lines upon which four points of the figure lie are divided harmonically by the points. And the points E, F, and O at which four hnes concur are vertices of harmonic pencils. Exercises. 1. A line || to the base of a A has its points of intersection with the sides connected transversely with the end points of the base. The join of the vertex with the point of intersection of these connectors is a median, and is divided harmonically. (Let F go to 00 in the last figure.) 2. ABC is a A and BD is an altitude. Through any point O on BD, CO and OA meet the sides in F and E respectively. Show that DE and DF make equal angles with AC. 3. The centres of two circles and their centres of similitude form a harmonic range. 4. In the Fig. of 310° the joins DI, IB, BH, and LD are all divided harmonically. HARMONIC RATIO. 263 311°. Let APBQ be a harmonic range and let C be the middle point of AB. Then AP__BP_PB AQ BQ BQ- T.,,, • CB + CP_CB-CP ^^^^ 'CB + CQ"CQ-CB» CB+CP _ CQ+CB °^ CB-CP CQ-CB' , CB CO whence ^=^. .*. CP . CQ = CB2, Qj. p aj^fj Q aj.g inverse points to the circle having C as centre and CB as radius. .'. I. The diameter of a circle is divided harmonically by any pair of inverse points. And a circle having a pair of co7ijugates of a harmonic range as end-points of a diameter has the other pair of conjugates as inverse points. Again, let EF be any secant through P meeting the polar of P in V. A circle on PV as diameter passes through Q and P, and therefore cuts S orthogonally. (258°) Hence also the circle S cuts the circle on PV orthogonally, and E and F are inverse points to the circle on PV. .'. EPFV is a harmonic range. .*. 2. A line is cut harmonically by a pointy a circle^ and the polar of the point with respect to the circle. Ex. P, Q are inverse points, and from Q a line is drawn cutting the circle in A and B. The join PB cuts the circle in A'. Then AA' is ± to PQ. 312°. Let P be any point and L its polar with respect to the circle Z, And let PCD and PBA be any two secants. Then I. PCED and PBFA are harmonic ranges having P a cor- responding point in each. Therefore AD, FE, and BC arc concurrent. And BC and AD meet on the polar of P. (309°, 9) 264 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 2. Again, since {PCED}={PDEC}, (309°, Cor.) .*. PDEC and PBFA are harmonic ranges having P a cor- responding point in each. Therefore DB, EF, and CA are concurrent, and AC and DB meet on the polar of P. .*. If from any point two secants be dj'aivft to a circle, the connectors of their points of intersection with the circle meet upon the polar of the first point. 3. Since O is on the polar of P, P is on the polar of O. But since Q is a point from which secants are drawn satis- fying the conditions of 2, Q is on the polar of O. .-. PQ is the polar of O. Now ABCD is a concyclic quadrangle whereof AC and BD are internal diagonals and PQ the external diagonal. .*. In any concyclic qicadrangle t}ie external diagonal is the polar of the point of intersection of the internal diagoiials, with respect to the circumcircle. 4. Since Q is on the polar of P and also on that of O, therefore PO is the polar of O, and POQ is a triangle self- conjugate with respect to the circle. 5. Let tangents at the points A, B, C, D form the circum- scribed quadrangle USVT. HARMONIC RATIO. 265 Then S is the pole of AB, and T of DC. .*. ST is the polar of P, and S and T are points on the line QO. Similarly U and V are points on the line PC. But XY is the external diagonal of USVT, and its pole is 0. the point of intersection of DB and AC. .*. X and Y are points on the line PQ. Hence, If tatigents be drazun at the vertices of a coney cite quadrangle so as to form a circninscribed quadrangle^ the in- ternal diagonals of the two quadrangles are concurrent, and their external diagonals are seginents of a coinmon line; and the point of concurrence and the line are pole and polar with respect to the circle. Exercises. 1. UOVP and SOTQ are harmonic ranges. 2. If DB meets the line PQ in R, lOR is a self-conjugate triangle with respect to the circle. 3. To find a circle which shall cut the sides of a given triangle harmonically. 4. QXPY is a harmonic range. 313°. Let S be a circle and A'P'B'Q' a harmonic range. Taking any point O on the p •circle and through it projecting rectilinearly the points A'P'B'Q' we obtain the system APBO, which is called a harmonic sys- q,^^ \"""T\~~ \ ^~A^ tern of points on the circle. Now, taking O' any other point on the circle, O'. APBQ is also V \ \ I / y^' harmonic. For ^AOP=_AO'P, aPOB = ^PO'B, etc. .'. Def — Four points on a circle formaharmonicsystem when their A p b' q' joins with any fifth point on the circle form a harmonic pencil. 266 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Cor. I. Since sinz.AOP = i^^, sin^POB = £-^, etc., (228°) a a .-. (304°), neglecting sign, AP . BQ = AQ . PB, .•. When four poiiits form a harmonic system on a circle^ the rectangles on the opposite sides of the nor7nal quadrangle which they determine are equal. Cor. 2. If O comes to A, the ray OA becomes a tangent at A. .*. When fottr poi7its form a harmonic system on a circle^ the tangent at any one of them and the chords from the point of contact to the others form a harmo7iic pencil. 314°. Let the axis of the harmonic range APBQ be a tan- gent to the circle S. Through A, P, B, and Q draw the tangents A^,. B^, Vp, and Q^. These four tangents form a harmonic system of tangents to the circle S- Let L be any other tan- gent cutting the four tan- gents of the system in A' P', B', and (^. Then, considering A«, P^, B(5, etc., as fixed tangents, and A'P'B'Q' as any other tangent. lA.OV = lA.O'V\ z.POB = ^P'OB', etc., (116°, Ex. i> .-. the pencils O.APBQ and O . A'P'B'Q' are both har- monic, and A'P'B'Q' is a harmonic range. .*. Whetifour tangents form a harjnonic system to a circle, they intersect any other tangent in points which foi'i7i a har- 7no7iic range. Cor. I. If the variable tangent coincides with one of the fixed tangents, the point of contact of the latter becomes one of the points of the range. HARMONIC RATIO. 26/ .'. When four ta7igenis form a harmo7iic system to a circle, each tangent is divided harmonically by its point of contact and its intersections with the other tangents. Exercises. 1. Tangents are drawn at A, A' the end-points of a diameter, and two points P, B are taken on the tangent through A such that AB = 2AP. Through P and B tangents are drawn cutting the tangent at A' in P' and B'. Then 2A'B' = A'P', and AA', PB', and BP' are concurrent. 2. Four points form a harmonic system on a circle. Then the tangents at one pair of conjugates meet upon the secant through the other pair. 3. If four tangents form a harmonic system to a circle, the point of intersection of a pair of conjugate tangents lies on the chord of contact of the remaining pair. 4. If four points form a harmonic range, their polars with respect to any circle form a harmonic pencil ; and conversely. SECTION III. OF ANHARMONIC PROPERTIES. 315°. Let A, E, C and D, B, F be two sets of three col- linear points having their ^ axes meeting in some point R. Join the points alter- nately, as ABCDEFA. Then AB and DE, BC and EF, CD and FA meet in P, Q, O. To show that these points are collinear. 268 SYNTHETIC GEOxMETRY. 0{ECQF} = C{EOQF} (referred to axis EF) = C{RDBF} (referred to axis DR) -A{RDBF} = A{EDPF} (referred to axis DE) = 0{EDPF} = 0{ECPF}. (by reversing rays, etc.) . .'. the pencils O. ECQF and O. ECPF are equianharmonic, and having three rays in common the fourth rays must be in common, /.<?., they can differ only by a straight angle, and therefore O, P, Q are collinear. (Being the first application of anharmonic ratios the work is very much expanded.) .' . If six lines taken in order intersect alternately in two sets of three collinear points^ they intersect in a third set of three collijiear points. Cor. I. ABC and DEF are two triangles, whereof each has one vertex lying upon a side of the other: If AB and DE are taken as corresponding sides, A and F are non-corresponding vertices. But, if AB and EF are taken as corresponding sides, A and D are non-corresponding vertices. Hence the intersections of AB and EF, of ED and CB, and of AD and CF are collinear. .*. If two triangles have each a vertex lying upon a side of the other, the remaining sides and the joins of the remaining non-corresponding vertices intersect collinearly. Cor. 2. Joining AD, BE, CF, ADBE, EBFC, and ADFC are quadrangles, and P, O, O are respectively the points of intersection of their internal diagonals. .*. if a quadrangle be divided into two quadrangles, the points of intersection of the internal diagonals of the three quadrangles are collinear. OF ANHARMONIC PROPERTIES. 269 316", Let A, A', B, B', C, C be six points lying two by two on two sets of three con- current lines, which meet at P and O. Then the points lie upon a third set of three concurrent lines meeting at O. We are to prove that AG and AA' are in line. A{0,rC'B} = B'{0:irC'Q} = B'{CPC>} = Q{A'P^B} =A{A';rC'B}. .'. the pencils A.OjtC'B and A.A';i'C'B are equi- anharmonic, and have three corresponding rays in common. Therefore AG and A A' are in line. Cor. ABC and A'B'C are two As which are in perspective at both P and Q, and we have shown that they are in per- spective at G also. As there is an axis of perspective corresponding to each centre, the joins of the six points, accented letters being taken together and unaccented together, taken in every order intersect in three sets of three collinear points. Exercises. If two As have their sides intersecting collinearly, their corresponding vertices connect concurrently. The converse of Ex. i. Three equianharmonic ranges ABCD, A'B'C'D', and PQRS have their axes concurrent at Y, and AA', BB', CC, DD' concurrent at X. Then the two groups of joins AP, BO, CR, DS, and A'P, B'Q, C'R, D'S are 2/0 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. concurrent at two points O and O' which are coUinear with X. 4. From Ex. 3 show that if a variable A has its sides passing through three fixed points, and two of its vertices lying upon fixed lines, its third vertex lies upon a fixed line concurrent with the other two. 5. If a variable A has its vertices lying on three fixed lines and two of its sides passing through fixed points, its third side passes through a fixed point coUinear with the other two. The range ABCD is transferred to the circle S by rectilinear projection through any point O on the circle. Then A'B'C'D' is a system of points on the circle which is equianharmonic with the range ABCD. I. If O' be any other point on the circle, the ^A'OB' = ^A'0'B', ABCD ^B'OC' = ^B'0'C', etc., and the two pencils O . A'B'C'D' and O'. A'B'C'D' are equi- anharmonic. .'. four points on a circle subtend equianharmonic pencils at all fifth points on the circle. 2. Since sinA'OB' = A'B' sin COD': etc., CD' AB . CD + BC . AD = AC . BD, A'B'. CD' + B'C. A'D' = A'C'. B'D' ; which is an extension of Ptolemy's theorem to a concyclic quadrangle. (205°) and (233°) OF ANHARMONIC PROPERTIES. 2J\ 3. If the range ABCD is inverted with O as the centre of inversion, the axis of the range inverts into a circle S through O, and A, B, C, D invert into A', B', C, and D' respectively. Hence, in general, anharmonic relations are unchanged by inversion, a range becoming an equianharmonic system on a circle, and under certain conditions vice versa. 4. In the inversion of 3, A and A', B and B', etc., are pairs of inverse points. OA.OA' = OB.OB' = OC.OC'=OD.OD', and the As OAB and OB'A', OAC and OCA', etc., are similar in pairs. And if P be the ± from O to AD, and P^, Pg, P3, and P4 be the J_s from O to A'B', B'C, CD', and D'A', we have AB A'B' BC B'C P Pi' P P2' CD P CD' P3' DA P ■ D'A' P4' AB-}-BC + CD4 -DA_ =T^ B'C , CD' "pT^-pr P D'A' „ P4* But (232°) AB + BC + CD + DA=o, A'B' ^ B'C , CD' ^ D'A' And since the same principle applies to a range of any number of points, .*. in any concyclic polygon, if each side be divided by the perpendicular upon it from any fixed point on the circle, the sum of the quotients is zero. . In the preceding theorem, as there is no criterion by which we can distinguish any side as being negative, some of the perpendiculars must be negative. Of the perpendiculars one falls externally upon its side of 2/2 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. the polygon and all the others fall internally. Therefore the theorem may be stated : — If _Ls be drawn from any point on a circle to the sides of an inscribed polygon, the ratio of the side, upon which the X falls externally, to its ± is equal to the sum of the ratios of the remaining sides to their _Ls. 318°. Theorem. — If two circles be inverted the ratio of the square on their common tangent to the rectangle on their diameters is unchanged. Let S, S' be the circles and AD be the common centre line, and let the circles s and s' and the circle Z be their inverses respectively. Then Z cuts s and / orthogonally, and O{ABCDH0{A'B'C'D'}. But if abed be the common centre line of s and s\ aPJ, bB\ eC, and dl>' are concurrent at O. (265', Ex. I) 0{rt^rrt'} = 0{A'B'C'D'} = 0{ABCD}, {«^^^} = {ABCD}, A.C.BT> _ac.bd AB.CD ab.ed' But AC . BD = the square on the common direct tangent to S and S', and ac . (^^= the square of the corresponding tangent to s and s'. (i79°j Ex. 2) And AB . CD and ab.ed diXQ the products of the diameters respectively. or OF ANHARMONIC PROPERTIES. 2/3 And the theorem is proved. Cor. I. Writing the symbolic expressions {ABCD} and {adcd} in another form, we have AD.BC _ad.dc AB.CD ad.cd' And AD . BC and ad. be are equal to the squares on the transverse common tangents respectively. Cor. 2. If four circles Sj, S2, S3, S4 touch a line at the points A, B, C, D, and the system be inverted, we have four circles s^, s^^ s^, ^"4, which touch a circle Z through the centre of inversion. Now let </i, </2' ^3» ^4 be the diameters of Sj, S2, etc., and let ^i> ^2> ^35 ^4 be the diameters of j^, s^^ etc., and let t^^ be the common tangent to s-^ and s^, /g^ be that to s^ and J4, etc. Then AB, etc., are common tangents to S^ and 82, etc.^ and AB.CD + BC.AD + CA.BD=o. (233°) And AB2 d,d^ CD2 5354' AB.CD ^ sld^d^d^^ _ ^12^34 and similar equalities for the remaining terms, /l2^34 + ^23^1 4 + ^31^4 " ^• This theorem, which is due to Dr. Casey, is an extension of Ptolemy's theorem. For, if the circles become point- circles, the points form the vertices of a concyclic quadrangle and the tangents form its sides and diagonals. If we take the incircle and the three excircles of a triangle as the four circles, and the sides of the triangle as tangents, we obtain by the help of Ex. i, 135°, (^2 _ ^2 + ^2 _ ^2 + ^2 _ ^2 as the equivalent for /12/34 + etc. ; and as this expression is identically zero, the four circles given can all be touched by a fifth circle. S 274 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 319°. Let A, B, C, D, E, F be six points on a circle so con- nected as to form a iiexagram, i.e.^ such that each point is con- nected with two others. Let the opposite sides AB, DE meet in P ; BC, EF in Q ; and CD, FA in R. To prove that P, Q, and R are coUinear. 0{BDER} = Q{CDER} = F{CDEA} = B{CDEP} = Q{BDEP}, .'. QR and QP are in line. .•. if a hexagram have its vertices concyclic, the points of intersection of its opposite sides in pairs are collinear. Dcf. — The line of collinearity is called the pascal of the hexagram, after the famous Pascal who discovered the theorem, and the theorem itself is known as Pascal's theorem. Cor. I. The six points may be connected in 5x4x3x2 or 120 different ways. For, starting at A, we have five choices for our first connection. It having been fixed upon, we have four for the next, and so on to the last. But one-half of the hexagrams so described will be the other half described by going around the figure in an opposite direction. Hence, six points on a circle can be connected so as to form 60 different hexagrams. Each of these has its own pascal, and there are thus 60 pascal lines in all. When the connections are made in consecutive order about the circle the pascal of the hexagram so formed falls without the circle ; but if any other order of connection is taken, the pascal may cut the circle. OF ANIIARMONIC PROPJiRTIKS. 2/5 Cor 2. In the hexagram in the figure, the pascal is the line through P, O, R cutting the circle in H and K. Now C{KFBD} = C(KFQR} ^ — = F{KCOR} a//\ \c = F{KCEA}, /W \yf\ {KFBD}={KCEA}, ( \j\)W j and K is a common point to two equi- hV ^/V/^SAP J^ anharmonic systems on the circle. So xTX / ^xf also is H. B These points are important in the theory of homographic systems. Cor. 3. Let i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 denote six points taken consecu- tively upon a circle. Then any particular hexagram is denoted by writing the order in which the points are connected, as for example, 2461352. In the hexagram 246135 the pairs of opposite sides are 24 and 13, 46 and 35, 61 and 52, and the pascal passes through their intersections. Now taking the four hexagrams 246135, 245136, 246315, 2453I6, the pascal of each passes through the intersection of the connector of 2 and 4 with the connector of i and 3. Hence the pascals of these four hexagrams have a common point. It is readily seen that inverting the order of 2 and 4 gives hexagrams which are only those already written taken in an inverted order. .•. the pascals exist in concurrent groups of four, meeting at fifteen points which are intersections of connectors. Cor. 4. In the hexagram 1 352461 consider the two triangles formed by the sides 13, 52, 46 and 35, 24, 61. The sides 13 and 24, 35 and 46, 52 and 61 intersect on the pascal of 1352461, and therefore intersect collinearly. Hence the vertices of these triangles connect concurrently, i.e., the line through the intersection of 35 and 61 and the intersection of 52 and 46, the line through the intersection of 2/6 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 35 and 24 and the intersection of I3 and 46, and the line through the intersections of 24 and 61 and the intersection of 13 and 25 are concurrent. But the first of these Hnes is the pascal of the hexagram 1643521, the second is the pascal of the hexagram 3564213, and the third is the pascal of the hexagram 4256134. .*. the pascals exist in concurrent groups of three, meeting at 20 points distinct from the 1 5 points already mentioned. Cor. 5. If two vertices of the hexagram coincide, the figure be- comes a pentagram, and the missing side becomes a tangent. .*, if a pentagram be inscribed in a circle and a tangent at any vertex meet the opposite side, the point of intersection and the points where the sides about that vertex meet the remaining sides are collinear. Ex. I. The tangents at opposite vertices of a concyclic quad- rangle intersect upon the external diagonal of the quadrangle. Ex. 2. ABCD is a concyclic quadrangle. AB and CD meet at E, the tangent at A meets BC at G, and the tangent at B meets AD at F. Then E, F, G are collinear. 320°. Let six tangents denoted by the numbers i, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 touch a circle in A, B, C, D, E, and F. And let the points of inter- section of the tangents be de- noted by 12, 23, 34, etc. Then the tan- gents form a hexagram about the circle. Now, 12 is the pole of AB, and 45 is the pole of ED. Therefore the OF ANHARMONIC PROPERTIES. 277 line 12.45 is the polar of the point of intersection of AB and ED. Similarly the line 23 . 56 is the polar of the intersection of BC and EF, and the line 34.61 is the polar of the intersec- tion of CD and FA. But since ABCDEF is a hexagram in the circle, these three intersections are collinear. (319°) .*. the lines 12 . 45, 23 . 56, and 34. 61 are concurrent at O. And hence the hexagram formed by any six tangents to a circle has its opposite vertices connecting concurrently. Def. — The point of concurrence is the Briaiichon point, and the theorem is known as Brianchoiis theorei7i. Cor. I. As the six tangents can be taken in any order to form the hexagram, there are 60 different hexagrams each having its own Brianchon point. Now take, as example, the hexagram formed by the lines 123456 taken in order. The connectors are 12 . 45, 23 . 56, 34. 61, and these give the point O. But the hexagrams 126453, 123546, and T26543 all have one connector in common with 123456, namely, that which passes through 12 and 45. Hence the Brianchon points of these four hexagrams lie upon one connector. .*. the 60 Brianchon points lie in collinear groups of four upon 15 connectors of the points of intersection of the tangents. Cor. 2. Consider the triangles 12.56.34 and 45.23.61. These have their vertices connecting concurrently, and there- fore they have their sides intersecting collinearly. But the point of intersection of the sides 61 . 23 and 56. 34 is the Brianchon point of the hexagram formed by the six lines 234165 taken in order ; and similar relations apply to the other points of intersection. Hence the 60 Brianchon points lie in collinear groups of three upon axes which are not diagonals of the figure. 2/8 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Cor. 3. Let two of the tangents become coincident. Their point of intersection is then their common point of contact, and the hexagram becomes a pentagram. .•. in any pentagram circumscribed to a circle the join of a point of contact with the opposite vertex is concurrent with the joins of the remaining vertices in pairs. Ex. I. In any quadrangle circumscribed to a circle, the diagonals and the chords of contact are concurrent. Ex. 2. In any quadrangle circumscribed to a circle, the lines joining any two vertices to the two points of contact adjacent to a third vertex intersect on the join of the third and the remaining vertex. SECTION IV. OF POLAR RECIPROCALS AND RECIPROCATION. 321°. The relation of pole and polar has already been explained and somewhat elucidated in Part IV., Section V. It was there explained that when a figure consists of any number of points, and their connecting lines, another figure of the same species may be obtained by taking the poles of the connectors of the first figure as points, and the polars of the points in the first figure as connecting lines to form the second. And as the first figure may be reobtained from the second in the same way as the second is obtained from the first, the figures are said to be polar reciprocals of one another, as being connected by a kind of reciprocal relation. The word reciprocal in this connection has not the same meaning as in 184°, Def. The process by which we pass from a figure to its polar reciprocal is called polar reciprocation or simply reciprocation. OF POLAR RECIPROCALS AND RECIPROCATION. 279 322°. Reciprocation is effected with respect to a circle either expressed or imphed. The radius and centre of this reciprocating circle are quite arbitrary, and usually no account need be taken of the radius. Certain problems in reciprocation, however, have reference to the centre of re- ciprocation, although the position of that centre may gener- ally be assumed at pleasure. From the nature of reciprocation we obtain at once the following statements : — 1. A point reciprocates into a line and a line into a point. And hence a figure consisting of points and lines reciprocates into one consisting of lines and points. 2. Every rectilinear figure consisting of more than a single line reciprocates into a rectilinear figure. 3. The centre of reciprocation reciprocates into the line at 00 , and a centre-line of the circle of reciprocation reciprocates into a point at 00 in a direction orthogonal to that of the centre-line. 4. A range of points reciprocates into a pencil of lines, and the axis of the range into the vertex of the pencil. And similarly, a pencil of lines reciprocates into a range of points, and the vertex of the pencil into the axis of the range. 323°. Let O.LMNK be a pencil of four, and C be the centre of reciprocation. ./ Draw the perpendiculars C/ on L, C»z' on M, C«' on N, and Qk' on K. The poles of L, M, N, K lie respectively on these perpendiculars, forming a range of points as /, m, 11^ k. Then I. Evidently the ^LOM = ^/C;;/, ^MON = i.wC;/, etc. .*. the angle between two lines is equal to that subtended at 280 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. the centre of reciprocation by the poles of the lines ; and the angle subtended at the centre of reciprocation by two points is equal to the angle between the polars of the points. 2. Any pencil of four is equianharmonic with its polar reciprocal range. And hence anharmonic or harmonic re- lations are not altered by reciprocation. Def. — Points are said to be perpendicular to one another when their joins with the centre of reciprocation are at right angles. In such a case the polars of the points are perpen- dicular to one another. 324°. In many cases, and especially in rectilinear figures, the passing from a theorem to its polar reciprocal is quite a mechanical process, involving nothing more than an intel- ligent and consistent change in certain words in the statement of the theorem. In all such cases the truth of either theorem follows from that of its polar reciprocal as a matter of necessity. Take as example the theorem of 88°, " The three altitudes of a A are concurrent," To get its polar reciprocal put it in the following form, where the theorem and its polar reciprocal are given in alternate lines : — rp, ^ -T^^^^f lines through the vertices) r a ^• ^ The three -^ . ^ , ., ,^of a A Perpendicular (pomts on the sides ) to the opposite!^' ^^ [are] ( vertices ) ( concurrent collinear. To get a point J_ to a vertex we connect the vertex to the centre of reciprocation, and through this centre draw a line X to the connector. The point required lies somewhere on this line. (323°, Def.) And as the centre may be any point, we may state the polar reciprocal thus : — " The lines through any point perpendicular to the joins of OF POLAR RECIPROCALS AND RECIPROCATION. 28 1 that point with the vertices of a triangle intersect the opposite sides of the triangle collinearly." (252°, Ex. 8) 325°. Consider any two As- These reciprocate into two As ; vertices giving sides, and sides, vertices. If the original As are in perspective their vertices connect concurrently. But in reciprocation the vertices become sides and the point of concurrence becomes a line of collinearity. Hence the polar reciprocals of these As have their sides intersecting collinearly and are in perspective. .*. As in perspective reciprocate into As in perspective. But any three concurrent lines through the vertices of a A intersect the opposite sides in points which form the vertices of a new A in perspective with the former. Hence all cases of three concurrent lines passing through the vertices of a A reciprocate into As in perspective with the original. Such are the cases of the concurrence of the three medians, the concurrence of the three altitudes, of the three bisectors of the angles, etc. 326°. The complete harmonic properties of the tetragram may be expressed in the two following theorems, which are given in alternate lines, and are polar reciprocals to one another : — Fourj^'"^' determine by their j^^^^^^^^^^^^H six JP^"^^^^ (points) (connectors ) (lines, j and the|~""^«?= iof these by theirl'""='-^^"'°"= Ideter- ( mtersections ) ( connectors ) mine three new|P°™'^-l Thel™""^""^ lof any of the (hnes. ) (mtersections) three newjP°'"^^lwith the original six|P''^''^^|form a har- (hnes ) (lines i monic jP^"^^^- ( range. Other polar reciprocal theorems, which have been already 282 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. given, are Pascal's and Brianchon's theorems with all their corollaries, the theorems of Arts. 313" and 314°, of Arts. 315° and 316°, etc. The circle, when reciprocated with respect to any centre of reciprocation not coincident with its own centre, gives rise to a curve of the same species as the circle, ?>., a conic section, and many properties belonging to the circle, and particularly those which are unaltered by reciprocation, become properties of the general curve. These generalized properties cannot be readily understood without some preliminary knowledge of the conic sections. SECTION V. HOMOGRAPHY AND INVOLUTION. 327°. Let A, B and A', B' be fixed points on two lines, and • ' ' ' — let P and P' be variable points, BODE . . ___^ one on each line which so move B' C D' E' as to preserve the relation AP_, AT' BP ' ' B'P" where >6 is any constant ; and let C, C' ; D, D' ; E, E', etc., be simultaneous positions of P and P'. Then the points A, B, C, D, E, etc., and A', B', C', D', E', etc., divide homographically the lines upon which they lie. AC _ ; A'C 1 AD _ ; A'D' BC-^^-FC'^^'^BD-^'-B'D" A C.BD _A^C.B'D^ AD . BC A'D' . B'C" or {ABCD} = {A'B'C'D'}. Similarly, {ABCE} = {A'B'C'E'}, {BCDE} = {B'C'D'E'}, etc. HOMOGRAPHY AND INVOLUTION. 285 Evidently for each position of P, P' can have only one position, and conversely, and hence the points of division on the two axes correspond in unique pairs. .'. two lines are divided homographically by two sets of points when to each point on one corresponds one and only one point on the other, and when any four points on one line and their four correspondents on the other form equianhar- monic ranges. Cor. I. If the systems of points be joined to any vertices O and C, the pencils O.ABCD... and 0'. A'B'C'D'... are evidently homographic, and cut all transversals in homo- graphic ranges. Cor. 2. The results of Arts. 304°, Cors. 3 and 4, and of Arts. 305° and 306° and their corollaries are readily extended to homographic ranges and pencils. The following examples of homographic division are given. Ex. I. A line rotating about a fixed point in it cuts any two lines homographically. Ex. 2. A variable point confined to a given line determines two homographic pencils at any two fixed points. Ex. 3. A system of ^./.-circles determines two homographic ranges upon any Hne cutting the system. Consider any two of the circles, let P, Q be the common points, and let the line L cut one of the circles in A and A' and the other in B and B'. Then the ^PBB' = Z.PQB', and _PAB' = ^PQA'. .-. £.APB = ^A'OB'. Hence the segment BA subtends the same angle at P as the segment at B'A' does at O. And similarly for all the segments made in the other circles. Ex. 4. A system of /.^.-circles determines two homographic ranges upon every line cutting the system. 284 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. DOUBLE POINTS OF HOMOGRAPHIC SYSTEMS. 328°. Let ABCD... and A'B'C'D'... be two homographic ^ ^ ^ ^ B c p ranges on a common axis. ° A' B' c D' If any two correspondents from the two ranges become coincident the point of co- incidence is a double point of the system. If A and A' were thus coincident we would have the rela- tions {ABCE} = {AB'C'E'}, etc. Thus a double point is a common constituent of two equi- anharmonic ranges, of which the remaining constituents are correspondents from two homographic systems upon a common axis. ABC and A'B'C being fixed, let D and D' be two variable correspondents of the doubly homographic system. Then {ABCD}={A'B'CD'}, , BD.A-D- __ BC.A-C _j» ""^^^"^ AD.B'D'-ACTFC"? ^' Now taking O, an arbitrary point on the axis, let OD=ji', OV>' = x', OK=a, OA'=a', 0B = ^, 0B'=^'. ThenBD=x-<^, B'D'=x'-d', AD=x-a, A'D' = x'-a', (x-d)(x'-a') _p {x-a){x'-b')—q' which reduces to the form xx' + P;r+ Q;r' + R =0. When D and D' become coincident x' becomes equal to x and we have a quadratic from which to determine x^ i.e., the positions of D and D' when uniting to form a double point. Hence every doubly homographic system has two double points which are both real or both imaginary, and of which both may be finite, or one or both may be at infinity. Evidently there cannot be more than two double points, for since such points belong to two systems, three double points would require the coincidence of three pairs of corre- spondents, and hence of all. (306°) HOMOGRAPHY AND INVOLUTION. 285 329°. If D be one of the double points of a doubly homo- ,. , DB.DA' CB.C'A' P graphic system, jj^-^jj, = -,^^^ = ^, say. Now DB.DA' and DA.DB' are respectively equal to the squares on tangents from D to any circles passing through B, A' and B', A. But the locus of a point from which tangents to two given circles are in a constant ratio is a circle co-axal with both. (275°, Cor. 5> Hence the following construction for finding the double points. Through A, B' and A', B draw any two circles so as to intersect in two points U and V, and through these points of intersection pass the circle S", so as to be the locus of a point from which tangents to the circles S and S' are in the given ratio VP : VQ. The circle S" cuts the axis in D, D, which are the required double points. Evidently, instead of A, B' and A', B we may take any pairs of non-corresponding points, as A, C and A', C; or B, C and B', C. The given ratio ^/P : JQ is different, however, for each different grouping of the points. Cor. I. When P-Q, i.e., when ^=^^, the circle S" BC B (_/ takes its limiting form of a line and cuts the axis at one finite point or at none. In this case both double points may be at 00 or only one of them. Cor. 2. If any disposition of the constituents of the system causes the circle S" to lie wholly upon one side of the axis, the double points for that disposition become imagin- ary. 2^6 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. 330°. Let L be the axis of a doubly homographic system. Through any point O on the circle S transfer the system, by rectilinear projection, to the circle. Then ABC..., A'B'C... form a doubly homographic system on the circle. Now, by connecting any two pairs of non-correspond- ents A, B' and A', B ; B, C and B', C ; C, A' and C, A, we obtain the pascal line KH which cuts the circle in two points such that {KABC} = {KA'B'C'}. (319°, Cor. 2) Hence H and K are double points to the system on the circle. And by transferring K and H back through the point O to the axis L, we obtain the double points D, D of the doubly homographic range. Cor. I. When the pascal falls without the circle, the double points are imaginary. Cor. 2. When one of the joins, KO or HO, is the double points is at co . to L, one of Cor. 3. If the system upon the circle with its double points H and K be projected rectilinearly through any point on the circle upon any axis M, it is evident that the projected system is a doubly homographic one with its double points. Cor, 4. Cor. 3 suggests a convenient method of finding the double points of a given axial system. Instead of employing a circle lying without the axis, employ the axis as a centre-line and pass the circle through any pair of non-correspondents. HOMOGRAPHY AND INVOLUTION. 2Zj Then from any convenient point on the circle transfer the remaining points, find the pascal, and proceed as before. 331°. The following are examples of the application of the double points of doubly homographic systems to the solution of problems. Ex. I. Given two non-parallel lines, a point, and a third line. To place between the non-parallels a segment which shall subtend a given angle at the given point, and be parallel to the third line. Let L and M be the non- parallel lines, and let N be the third line, and O be the given point. We are to place a segment between L and M, so as to subtend a given angle at O and be || to N. On L take any three points A, B, C, and join OA, OB, OC. Draw A«, B/5, Qc all H to N, and draw Oa\ Ob', Oc' so as to make the angles AO^', B0<^', COc' each equal to the given angle. Now, if with this construction a coincided with <7;', or b with //, or c with c', the problem would be solved. But, if we take a fourth point D, we have OJABCD} = {K^CT^')={abcd) = {a!b'dd']. .'. abed and a' b'c'd' are two homographic systems upon the same axis. Hence the double points of the system give the solutions required. Ex. 2. Within a given A to inscribe a A whose sides shall be parallel to three given lines. Ex. 3. Within a given A to inscribe a A whose sides may pass through three given points. Ex. 4. To describe a A such that its sides shall pass through three given points and its vertices lie upon three given lines. 288 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. SYSTEMS IN INVOLUTION. 332°. If A, A', B, B' are four points on a common axis, whereof A and A', as also B and B', are correspondents, a point O can always be found upon the axis such that OA.OA' = OB.OB'. This point O is evidently the centre of the circle to which A and A', and also B and B', are pairs of inverse points, and is consequently found by 257°. "Jp^Vb^ Now, let P, P' be a pair of variable conjugate points which so move as to preserve the relation OP.OP' = OA.OA' = OB.OB'. Then P and P' by their varying positions on the axis deter- mine a double system of points C, C, D, D', E, E', etc., conjugates in pairs, so that OA . OA'=OC. OC'-OD . OD' = OE . OE' = etc. Such a system of points is said to be in invohition^ and O is called the centre of the involution. When both constituents of any one conjugate pair lie upon the same side of the centre, the two constituents of every conjugate pair lie upon the same side of the centre, since the product must have the same sign in every case. With such a disposition of the points the circle to which conjugatesare inverse points is real and cuts the axis in two _< , , I , , , points F and F'. able conjugates meet and become coincident Hence the points F. F' are the double points or foci of the system. From Art. 311°, i, FF' is divided harmonically by every pair of conjugate points, so that FAF'A', FBF'B', etc., are all harmonic ranges. When the constituents of any pair of conjugate points lie upon opposite sides of the centre, the foci are imaginary. HOMOGRAPHY AND INVOLUTION. 289 333°. Let A, A', B, B', C, C be six points in involution, and let O be the centre. Draw any line OPQ through O, and take P and O so that OPrOQ=OA.OA', and join PA, PB, PC, and PC, and also QA', OB', QC, and QC. Then, •.• OA. OA' = OP. 0(), o .-. A, P, Q,A' are coney clic. .'. i.OPA = ^OA'Q. Similarly, B, P, (2, B' are concycUc, and ^OPB = ^OB'0, etc. z.APB = /.A'OB'. Similarly, ^BPC = ^B'QC', ^CPC' = z.C'OC, etc Hence the pencils P(ABCC') and (^(A'B'C'C) are equianhar- monic, or {ABCC} = {A'B'G'C[. Hence also {ABB'C} = {A'B'BC'J , {AA'BCj = {A'AB'C'J. And any one of these relations expresses the condition that the six points symbolized may be in involution. 334°. As involution is only a species of homography, the relations constantly existing between homographic ranges and their corresponding pencils, hold also for ranges and pencils in involution. Hence 1. Every range in involution determines a pencil in involu- tion at every vertex, and conversely. 2. If a range in involution be projected rectilinearly through any point on a circle it determines a system in involution on the circle, and conversely. Ex. The three pairs of opposite connectors of any four points cut any line in a six-point involution. A, B, C, D are the four points, v. p d c and P, F the line cut by the six connectors CD, DA, AC, CB, BD, and AB. Then D{PQRR'} = D{CARB} = B{CARD} = B{0'P'RR'} = {P'Q'R'R}, T (302°) 290 SYNTHETIC GKOxMETRY. {P()RR'} = {P'0'R'R}, and the six points are in involution. Cor. I. The centre O of the involution is the radical centre of any three circles through PP', QQ', and RR'; and the three circles on the three segments PP', OQ', and RR' as diameters are co-axal. When the order of PQR is opposite that of P'Q'R' as in the figure, and the centre O lies outside the points, the co-axal circles are of the /./.-species, and when the two triads of points have the same order, the co-axal circles are of the f./.-species. Cor. 2. Considering ABC as a triangle and AD, BD, CD three lines through its vertices at D, we have — The three sides of any triangle and three concurrent lines through the vertices cut any transversal in a six-point involution. Exercises. 1. A circle and an inscribed quadrangle cut any line through them in involution. 2. The circles of a co-axal system cut any line through them in involution. 3. Any three concurrent chords intersect the circle in six points forming a system in involution. 4. The circles of a co-axal system cut any other circle in . involution. 5. Any four circles through a common point have their six radical axes forming a pencil in involution. INDEX OF DEFINITIONS, TERMS, ETC. The Numbers refer to the Articles. Addition Theorem for Sine and Cosine, . Altitude, . Ambiguous Case, Angle, . ,, Acute, . ,, Adjacent internal ,, Basal, . ,, External, ,, Obtuse, ,, Re-entrant, . „ Right, . ,, Straight, ,, Arms of, ,, Bisectors of, . ,, Complement of, ,, Cosine of, ,, Measure of, . 41 ,, Sine of, ,, Supplement of, ,, Tangent of, . ,, Vertex of, Angles, Adjacent, . ,, Alternate, . ,, Interadjacent, - ,, Opposite, . 236 87 66 31 40 49 49 49 40 89 36 36 32 43 40 213 207 213 40 213 32 35 11 73 39 Angles, Vertical, . . 39 , , Sum and Difference of, 35 ,, of the same Affection, 65 Anharmonic Ratio, . 298 Antihomologous, 289 Apothem, 146 Arc, . . . lOI Area, 136 ,, of a Triangle,. 1754 Axiom, . . . . 3 Axis of a Range, 230 ,, Perspective, . 254 ,, Similitude, . 294 ,, Symmetry, . lOI Basal Angles, . 49 Biliteral Notation, . 22 Bisectors of an Angle, 43 Brianchon's Theorem, 320 Brianchon Point, 320 Centre of a Circle, . 92 ,, Inversion, 256 ,, Mean Position, 238 ,, Perspective, 254 ,, Simihtude, . 281 291 292 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Centre-line, • 95 Diameter, • 95 Centre-locus, . . 129 Difference of Segments, . 29 Centroid, • 85 Dimension, • 27 Circle, . 92 Double Point, . 109, 328 Circle of Antisimilitude, . 290 ,, Inversion, . . 256 Eidograph, . 211^ ,, Similitude, . 288 End-points, 22 Circumangle, . . 36 Envelope, . 223 Circumcentre, . 86, 97 Equal, . 27, 136 Circumcircle, . . 97 Equilateral Triangle • 53 Circumference, . 92 Excircle, . . 131 Circumradius, . • 97 External Angle, . 49 Circumscribed Figure, • 97 Extreme and Mean ] Ratio, 183 Chord, . 95 Extremes, • 193 Chord of Contact, . 114 Co-axal Circles, 273 Finite Line, 21 Collinear Points, . 13 I, 247 Finite Point, . 21 Commensurable, . 150 Complement of an Angle, 40 Generating Point, . 69 Concentric Circles, . • 93 Geometric Mean, . 169 Conclusion, 4 Given Point and Lin e, . 20 Concurrent Lines, . S 5, 247 Congruent, 51 Harmonic Division, . 208 Concyclic, 97 Harmonic Ratio, • 299 Conjugate Points, etc.. 267 Harmonic Systems, . 313, 314 Contact of Circles, . 291 Homogeneity, . . 160 Continuity, Principle of, 104 nomographic Syster IS, . 327 Corollary, 8 Homologous Sides, . . 196 C.-P. Circles, . 274 Homologous Lines and Cosine of an Angle, 213 Points, . 196 Constructive Geometry, 117 Hypothenuse, . 88, 168 Curve, . 15 Hypothesis, 4 Datum Line, . 20 Incircle of a Triangle, . 131 Degree, . 41 Incommensurable, . . 150 Desargue's Theorem, 253 Infinity, . 21, 220 Diagonal, . . 8 0, 247 Initial Line, . 20 Diagonal Scale, 211^ Inscribed Figure, • 97 INDEX OF DEFINITIONS, TERMS, ETC. 293 Interadjacent Angles, Inverse Points, . i79> Inverse Figures, Involution, Isosceles Triangle, . Join, Limit, Limiting Points, Line, Line in Opposite Senses, Line-segment, . Locus, L.-P. Circles, . Magnitude, Major and Minor, . Maximum, Mean Centre, . Mean Proportional, . Means, . Measure, Median, . Median Section, Metrical Geometry, Minimum, 73 256 260 332 i 53 I 167 148 274 12 156 21 69 274 190 102 175 238 169 193 150 55 183 150 175 Orthogonal Projection, 167, 229 ril6, Ex. 6 Nine-points Circle, I265, Ex. 2 Normal Quadrangle, . 89 Obtuse Angle, . Opposite Angles, Opposite Internal Angles, Origin, . . . . Orthocentre, . Orthogonally, . 40 39 49 20 88 115 Pantagraph, . Parallel Lines, Parallelogram, Pascal's Hexagram Pascal Line, . Peaucellier's Cell, Pencil, Perigon, . Perimeter, Perspective, Perspective, Axis of, ,, Centre of. Perpendicular, . Physical line, . Plane, . • • 10, Plane Geometric Figure Plane Geometry, Point, Point of Bisection, ,, Contact, Point, Double, . 109 Pole, Polar, Polar Reciprocal Polar Circle, Centre, etc. Polygon, . Prime Vector, . Projection, Proportion, Proportional Compasses Protractor, 70 80 319 319 211 203 36 146 254 254 254 40 12 7 10 II 13 30 109 328 266 266 268 266 132 20 167 192 2Ili 123 —r Quadrangle, ^ Quadrilateral, j Quadrilateral, complete, 80, 89 . 247 !94 SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY. Uadian, . Radical Axis, . Radical Centre. Radius, . Radius Vector, Range, . Ratio, Reciprocation, Reciprocal Segments Rectangle, Rectilinear Figure, Rediidio ad abstu-dtuii , Re-entrant Angle, Rhombus, Right Angle, . Right Bisector, Rotation of a Line, Rule, Rule of Identity, Scalene Triangle Secant, . Sector, . Segment, Semicircle, Self-conjugate Self-reciprocal Sense of a Line, Sense of a RectangI Similar Figures, Similar Triangles, Sine of an Angle, Spatial Figure, "'1 alj Square, 78, 207 273 276 92 32 230 188 321 184 82 14 54 89 82 36 42 2, 222 16 7 57 95 211^ 21 102 268 156 161 206 n. 196 213 19 82, 121 Straight Angle, . . 36 „ Line, . . .14 Edge, . . 16 Sum of Line-segments, . 28 Sum of Angles, . . 35 Superposition, ... 26 Supplement of an Angle, 40 Surface, .... 9 Tangent, . . . 109 Tangent of an Angle, . 213 Tensor, . . . .189 Tetragram, — . . . 247 Theorem, ... 2 Trammel, . . .107 'Transversal, • • • 73 Trapezoid, ... 84 Triangle, ... 48 ,, Acute-angled, etc., 77 ,, Base of, . . 49 ,, Equilateral, . 53 ,, Isosceles,. . 53 ,, Obtuse-angled, TJ Scalene, . . 57 ,, Right- Angled, . 77 Uniliteral Notation, . li Unit-area, \ ^ Unit-length, / Versed Sine of an Arc, . 176 Vertex of an Angle, . . 32 Vertex of a Triangle, . 49 Vertical Angles, . . 39 PRINTED BY ROBERT MACLEHOSE, UNIVERSITY PRESS, GLASGOW. May 189: A Catalogue OF Educational Books PUBLISHED BY Macmillan & Co. BEDFORD STREET, STRAND, LONDON CONTENTS Classics- Elementary Classics . Classical Series , . . . Classical Library ; Texts, Com- mentaries, Translations • Grammar, Composition, and Phi- lology Antiquities, Ancient History, AND Philosophy MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE — English French German Modern Greek . , . . Italian Spanish Mathematics- Arithmetic Book-Keepinq . . . . Algebra Euclid and Pure Geometry Geometrical Drawing Mensuration . . . . Trigonometry . . . , Analytical Geometry Problems and Questions in Ma- thematics Higher Pure Mathematics Mechanics page 2 4 12 Physics . Astronomy Historical 32 NATURAL Sciences- Chemistry . . • , . .83 Physical Geography, Geology, AND Mineralogy ... 85 Biology 36 Medicine 38 HUMAN sciences- Mental AND Moral Philosophv 39 Political Economy ... 41 Law and Politics ... 42 Anthropology .... 48 Education 48 Technical Knowledge- civil AND Mechanical Engineer- ing Military and Naval Science Agriculture Domestic Economy Book-Keeping Geography HISTORY . Art . divinity CLASSICS. Elementary Classics ; Classical Series ; Classical Library, (1) Texts, (2) Trans- lations; Grammar, Composition, and PMlology; Antiquities, Ancient History, and Philosophy. ^ELEMENTARY CLASSICS. 18mo, Eighteenpence each. The following contain Introductions, Notes, and Vocabularies, and in some cases Exercises. ACCIDENCE, LATIN, AND EXERCISES ARRANGED FOR BEGINNERS.— By W. Welch, M.A., and C. G. Duffield, M.A. AESCHYLUS.— PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. By Rev. H. M. Stephenson, M.A. ARRIAN.— SELECTIONS. With Exercises. By Rev. John Bond, M.A., and Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. AULUS GELLIUS, STORIES FROM.— Adapted for Beginners. With Exercises. By Rev. G. H. Nall, M.A., Assistant Master at Westminster. CiESAR.— THE HELVETIAN WAR. Being Selections from Book L of The Gallic War. Adapted for Beginners. With Exercises. By W. Welch, M.A., and 0. G. Duffield, M.A. THE INVASION OF BRITAIN. Being Selections from Books IV. and V. of The Gallic War. Adapted for Beginners. With Exercises. By W. Welch, M.A., and C. G. Duffield, M.A. SCENES FROM BOOKS V. and VI. By 0. Colbeck, M.A. THE GALLIC WAR. BOOK I. By Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. BOOKS II. AND IIL By the Rev. W. G. Rutherford, M.A., LL.D. BOOK IV. By Clement Bryans, M.A., Assistant Master at Dulwich College. BOOK V. By C. Colbeck, M.A., Assistant Master at Harrow. BOOK VI. By the same Editor. BOOK VIL By Rev. J. Bond, M.A., and Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. THE CIVIL WAR. BOOK L By M. Montgomery, M.A. [In preparation. CICERO.— DE SENECTUTE. By E. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. DE AMICITIA. By the same Editor. STORIES OF ROMAN HISTORY. Adapted for Beginners. With Exercises. By Rev. G. B. Jeans, M.A., and A. V. Jones, M.A. EURIPIDES.— ALCESTIS. By Rev. M. A. Bayfield, M.A. MEDEA. By A. W. Verrall, Litt.D., and Rev. M. A. Bayfield, M.A. [In the Press. HECUBA. By Rev. J. Bond, M.A,, and Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. EUTROPIUS.— Adapted for Beginners. With Exercises. By W. Welch, M.A., and C. G. Duffield, M.A. HERODOTUS. TALES FROM HERODOTUS. Atticised by G. S. Farnell, M.A. [In the Press. HOMER.— ILIAD. BOOK I. By Rev. J. Bond, M. A., and Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. BOOK XVIII. By S. R. James, M.A., Assistant Master at Eton. ODYSSEY. BOOK I. By Rev. J. Bond, M.A., and Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. ELEMENTARY CLASSICS 8 HORACE.— ODES. BOOKS I. -IV. By T. E. Page, M.A., Assistant Master at the Charterhouse. Each Is. 6d. LIVY.— BOOK I. By H. M. Stephenson, M.A. BOOK XXI. Adapted from Mr. Capes's Edition. By J. E. Melhuish, M.A. BOOK XXII. By the same. THE HANNIBALIAN WAR. Being part of the XXI. and XXII. BOOKS OF LIVY adapted for Beginners. By G. C. Macaxjlay, M.A. THE SIEGE OF SYRACUSE. Being part of the XXIV. and XXV. BOOKS OF LIVY, adapted for Beginners. With Exercises. By G. Richards, M.A., and Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. LEGENDS OF ANCIENT ROME. Adapted for Beginners. With Exercises. By H. Wilkinson, M.A. LUCIAN.— EXTRACTS FROM LUCIAN. With Exercises. By Rev. J. Bond, M.A., and Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. NEPOS.— SELECTIONS ILLUSTRATIVE OF GREEK AND ROMAN HISTORY. With Exercises. By G. S. Farnell, M.A. OVID.— SELECTIONS. By E. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. EASY SELECTIONS FROM OVID IN ELEGIAC VERSE. With Exercises. By H. Wilkinson, M.A. STORIES FROM THE METAMORPHOSES. With Exercises. By Rev. J. Bond, M.A., and Rev. A. S. Walpole,iM.A. PH.ffiDRUS. — SELECT FABLES. ' Adapted for Beginners. With BxercLses. By Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. THUCYDIDES.— THE RISE OF THE ATHENIAN EMPIRE. BOOK I. Chs. 89-117 and 228-238. With Exercises. By F. H. Colson, M.A. VIRGIL.— SELECTIONS. By E. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. BUCOLICS. By T. E. Page, M.A. GEORGICS. BOOK L By the same Editor. BOOK II. By Rev. J. H. Skeine, M.A. iENEID. BOOK I. By Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. BOOK II. By T. E. Page, M.A. BOOK III. By the same Editor. BOOK IV. By Rev. H. M. Stephenson, M.A. BOOK V. By Rev. A. Calvert, M.A. BOOK VI. By T. E. Page, M.A. BOOK VII. By Rev. A. Calvert, M.A. BOOK VIIL By the same Editor. BOOK IX. By Rev. H. M. Stephenson, M.A. BOOK X. By S. G. Owen, M.A. XENOPHON.— ANABASIS. Selections, adapted for Beginners. With Exercises. By W. Welch, M.A., and 0. G. Duffield, M.A. BOOK I. With Exercises. By E. A. Wells, M.A. BOOK L By Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. BOOK II. By the same Editor. BOOK III. By Rev. G. H. Nall, M.A. BOOK IV. By Rev. E. D. Stone, M.A. SELECTIONS FROM BOOK IV. With Exercises. By the same Editor. SELECTIONS FROM THE CYROPiEDIA. With Exercises. By A. H. Cooke, M.A., Fellow and Lecturer of King's College, Cambridge. The following contain Introductions and Notes, but no Vocabu- lary :— CICERO.— SELECT LETTERS. By Rev. G. E. Jeans, M.A. HERODOTUS.— SELECTIONS FROM BOOKS VIL and VIII. THE EXPEDI- TION OF XERXES. By A. H. Cooke, M.A. HORACE.— SELECTIONS FROM THE SATIRES AND EPISTLES. By Rev. W. J. V. Baker, M.A. SELECT EPODBS AND ARS POETICA. By H. A. Dalton, M.A., Assistant Master at Winchester. 4 CLASSICS PLATO.— EUTHYPHRO AND MENEXENUS. By C. E. Graves, M.A. TERENCE. —SCENES FROM THE ANDRIA, By F. W. Cornish, M. A. , Assistant Master at Eton. THE GREEK ELEGIAC POETS.— FROM CALLINUS TO CALLIMACHUS. Selected by Rev. Herbert Kynaston, D.D. THUCTDroES.— BOOK IV. Chs. 1-41. THE CAPTURE OF SPHACTERIA. By C. E. Graves, M.A. CLASSICAL SERIES FOR COLLEGES AND SCHOOLS. Fcap. 8vo. .SSCHINES.- IN CTESIPHONTA. By Rev. T. Gwatkin, M.A., and E. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. 5s. iESCHYLUS.— PERSiE. By A. O. Prickard, M.A,, FeUow and Tutor of New College, Oxford. With Map. 2s. 6d. SEVEN AGAINST THEBES. SCHOOL EDITION. By A. W. Verrall, Litt.D., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, and M. A. Bayfield, M.A., Head- master of Christ's College, Brecon. 2s. 6d. ANDOCIDES.— DE MYSTERIIS. By W. J. Hickib, M.A. 2s. 6d. ATTIC ORATORS.— Selections from ANTIPHON, ANDOCIDES, LYSIAS, ISO- CRATES, and ISAEUS. By R. C. Jebb, Litt.D., Regius Professor of Greek in the University of Cambridge. 5s. *CJESAR.— THE GALLIC WAR. By Rev. John Bond, M.A., and Rev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. With Maps. 4s. 6d. CATULLUS.- SELECT POEMS. Edited by F. P. Simpson, B.A. 3s. 6d. The Text of this Edition is carefully expurgated for School use. *CICERO.— THE CATILINE ORATIONS. By A. S. Wilkins, Litt.D., Professor of Latin in the Owens College, Victoria University, Manchester. 2s. 6d. PRO LEGE MANILIA. By Prof. A. S. Wilkins, Litt.D. 2s. 6d. THE SECOND PHILIPPIC ORATION. By John E. B. Mayor, M.A. , Professor of Latin in the University of Cambridge. 3s. 6d. PRO ROSCIO AMERINO. By E. H. Donkin, M.A. 2s. 6d. PRO P. SESTIO. By Rev. H. A. Holden, Litt.D. 3s. 6d. SELECT LETTERS. Edited by R. Y. Tyrrell, M.A. [In the Press. DEMOSTHENES.— DE CORONA. By B. Drake, M.A. 7th Edition, revised by E. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. 3s. 6d. AD VERSUS LBPTINEM. By Rev. J. R. Kino, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Oriel College, Oxford. 2s. 6d. THE FIRST PHILIPPIC. By Rev. T. Gwatkin, M.A. 2s. 6d. IN MIDIAM. By Prof. A. S. Wilkins, Litt.D., and Herman Hager, Ph.D., of the Owens College, Victoria University, Manchester. [In preparation. EURIPIDES.— HIPPOLYTUS. By Rev. J. P. Mahaffy, D.D., Fellow of Ti'inity College, and Professor of Ancient History in the University of Dublin, and J. B. Bury, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin. 2s. 6d. MEDEA. By A. W. Verrall, Litt.D., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge 2s. 6d. IPHIGENIA IN TAURIS. By E. B. England, M.A. 8s. ION. By M. A. Bayfield, M.A., Headmaster of Christ's College, Brecon. 2s. 6d. BACCHAE. By R. Y. Tyrrell, M.A., Regius Professor of Greek in the University of Dublin. [In preparation. HERODOTUS.— BOOK III. By G. C. Macaulay, M.A. 2s. 6d. BOOK V. By J. Strachan, M.A., Professor of Greek in the Owens College, Victoria University, Manchester. [In preparation, BOOK VI. By the same. 3s. 6d. BOOK VII. By Mrs. A. F. Butler. 3s. 6d. HESIOD.— THE WORKS AND DAYS. By W. T. Lendrum, M.A., Assistant Master at Dulwich College. [In preparation. CLASSICAL SERIES 5 HOMER.— ILIAD. BOOKS I., IX., XL, XVL-XXIV. THE STORY OF ACHILLES. By the late J. H. Fkatt, M.A., and Walter Leaf, LittD,, Fellows of Trinity College, Cambridge. 5s. ODYSSEY. BOOK IX. By Prof. John B. B. Mayor. 2s. 6d. ODYSSEY. BOOKS XXI.-XXIV. THE TRIUMPH OF ODYSSEUS. By S. G. Hamilton, B.A., Fellow of Hertford College, Oxford. 2s. 6d. HORACE.— *THE ODES. By T. E. Page, M.A., Assistant Master at the Charter- house. 5s. (BOOKS L, IL, III., and IV. separately, 2s. each.) THE SATIRES. By Arthur Palmer, M. A., Professor of Latin in the University of Dublin. 5s. THE EPISTLES AND ARS POETICA. By A. S. Wilkins, Litt.D., Professor of Latin in the Owens College, Victoria University, Manchester. 5s. ISAEOS.— THE ORATIONS. By William Ridqeway, M.A., Professor of Greek in Queen's College, Cork. [In preparation. JUVENAL.— ^THIRTEEN SATIRES. By B. G. Hardy, M.A. 5s. The Text is carefully expurgated for School use. SELECT SATIRES. By Prof. John E. B. Mayor. X. and XI. 3s. 6d. XII.-XVL 4s. 6d. LIVY.— *BOOKS IL and III. By Rev. H. M. Stephenson, M.A. 3s. 6d. *BOOKS XXL and XXIL By Rev. W. W. Capes, M.A. With Maps. 4s. 6d. *BOOKS XXIIL and XXIV. By G. C. Macaulay, M.A. With Maps. 3s. 6d. *THE LAST TWO KINGS OF MACEDON. EXTRACTS FROM THE FOURTH AND FIFTH DECADES OP LIVY. By F. H. Rawlins, M.A., Assistant Master at Eton. With Maps. 2s. 6d. THE SUBJUGATION OF ITALY. SELECTIONS FROM THE FIRST DECADE. By G. E. Marindin, M.A. [In preparation. LUCRETIUS.— BOOKS I.-III. By J. H. Warburton Lee, M.A., Assistant Master at Rossall. 3s. 6d. LYSIAS.— SELECT ORATIONS. By E. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. 5s. MARTIAL.— SELECT EPIGRAMS. By Rev. H. M. Stephenson, M.A. 5s. *OVID.— FASTI. By G. H. Hallam, M.A., Assistant Master at Harrow. With Maps. 3s. 6d. *HEROIDUM EPISTUL^ XIIL By B. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. 3s. 6d. METAMORPHOSES. BOOKS L-IIL By C. Simmons, M.A. [In preparation. BOOKS XIIL and XIV. By the same Editor. 3s. 6d. PLATO.— LACHES. By M. T. Tatham, M.A. 2s. 6d. THE REPUBLIC. BOOKS I.-V. By T. H. Warren, M.A., President of Magdalen College, Oxford. 5s, PLAUTUS.— MILES GLORIOSUS. By R. Y. Tyrrell, M.A., Regius Professor of Greek in the University of Dublin. 2d Ed., revised. 3s. 6d. *AMPHITRU0. By Arthur Palmer, M. A., Professor of Latin in the University of Dublin. 3s. 6d. CAPTIVI. By A. Rhys-Smith, M.A. [In the Press. PLINY.— LETTERS. BOOKS I. and IL By J. Cowan, M.A., Assistant Master at the Manchester Grammar School. 3s. LETTERS. BOOK IIL By Prof. John E. B. Mayor. With Life of Pliny by G. H. Rendall, M.A. 3s. 6d. PLUTARCH.— LIFE OF THEMISTOKLES. By Rev. H. A. Holden, Litt.D. 3s.6d. LIVES OF 6ALBA AND OTHO. By E. G. Hardy, M.A. 5s. POLYBIUS.— THE HISTORY OF THE ACH^AN LEAGUE AS CONTAINED IN THE REMAINS OP POLYBIUS. By W. W. Capes, M.A. 5s. PROPERTIUS.— SELECT POEMS. By Prof. J. P. Postgate, Litt.D., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 2d Ed., revised. 5s. SALLUST.— *CATILINA and JUGURTHA By C. Mebivale, D.D., Dean of Ely. 8s. 6d. Or separately, 2s. each. *BELLUM CATULINiE. By A. M. Cook, M.A., Assistant Master at St. Paul's School. 2s. 6d. JUGURTHA. By the same Editor. [In preparation. 6 CLASSICS TACITUS.— THE ANNALS. BOOKS I. and II. By J. S. Reid, Litt.D. [In prep. THE ANNALS. BOOK VL By A. J. Church, M.A., and W. J. Brodribb, M.A. 2s. THE HISTORIES. BOOKS L and II. By A. D. Godley, M.A., Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford. 3s. 6d. BOOKS III.-V. By the same. 3s. 6d. AGRICOLA and GERMANIA. By A. J. Church, M.A., and W. J. Brodribb, M.A. 3s. 6d. Or separately, 2s. each. TERENCE.— HAUTON TIMOR OMENOS. By E. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. 2s. 6d. With Translation. 3s. 6d. PHORMIO. ByRev. JohnBond, M.A.,andRev. A. S. Walpole, M.A. 2s. 6d. THUCYDIDES.— BOOK L By C. Bryans, M.A. [In preparation. BOOK II. By E. C. Marchant, M.A., Assistant Master at St. Paul's. BOOK III. By C. Bryans, M.A. [In preparation. BOOK IV. By C. E. Graves, M.A., Classical Lecturer at St. John's College, Cambridge. 3s. 6d. BOOK V. By the same Editor. [In the Press. BOOKS VI. and VII. THE SICILIAN EXPEDITION. By Rev. Percival Frost, M.A. With Map. 8s. 6d. BOOK VIII. By Prof. T. G. Tucker, M.A. [In preparation. TIBULLUS.— SELECT POEMS. By Prof. J. P. Postgate, Litt.D. [In preparation. VIRGIL.— ^NEID. BOOKS II. and III. THE NARRATIVE OF ^NEAS. By E. W. HowsoN, M.A., Assistant Master at Harrow. 2s. XENOPHON.— *THE ANABASIS. BOOKS I.-IV. By Profs. W. W. Goodwin and J. W. White. Adapted to Goodwin's Greek Grammar. With Map. 3s. 6d. HELLENICA. BOOKS L and H. By H. Hailstone, B. A. With Map. 2s. 6d. CYROP^DIA. BOOKS VII. and VIIL By A. Goodwin, M.A., Professor of Classics in University College, London. 2s. 6d. MEMORABILIA SOCRATIS. By A. R. Cluer, B.A., Balliol College, Oxford. 5s. HIERO. By Rev. H. A. Holden, Litt.D., LL.D. 2s. 6d. OECONOMICUS. By the same. With Lexicon. 5s. CLASSICAL LIBRARY. Texts, Edited with Introductions and Notes, for the use of Advanced Students ; Commentaries and Translations. iESOHYLUS.— THE SUPPLICES. A Revised Text, with Translation. By T. G. Tucker, M.A., Professor of Classical Philology in the University of Mel- bourne. 8vo. 10s. 6d. THE SEVEN AGAINST THEBES. With Translation. By A. W. Verrall, Litt.D., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 8vo. 7s. 6d. AGAMEMNON. With Translation. By A. W. Verrall, Litt. D. 8vo. 12s. AGAMEMNON, CHOEPHORGB, AND EUMENIDES. By A. 0. Prickard, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of New College, Oxford. Svo. [In preparation. THE EUMENIDES. With Verse Translation. By Bernard Drake, M.A. Svo. 5s. ANTONINUS, MARCUS AURELIUS.— BOOK IV. OF THE MEDITATIONS. With Translation. By Hastings Crossley, M.A. Svo. 6s. ARISTOTLE.— THE METAPHYSICS. BOOK I. Translated by a Cambridge Graduate. Svo. 5s. THE POLITICS. By R. D. Hicks, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 8vo. [In the Press. THE POLITICS. Translated by Rev. J. E. C. Welldon, M.A., Headmaster of Harrow. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. THE RHETORIC. Translated by the same. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. AN INTRODUCTION TO ARISTOTLE'S RHETORIC. With Analysis, Notes, and Appendices. By E. M. Cope, Fellow and late Tutor of Trinity College, Cambridge. Svo. 14s. CLASSICAL LIBRARY 7 THE ETHICS. Translated by Rev. J. E. C. Welldon, M.A. Cr. 8vo. [In prep, THE SOPHISTICI ELENCHI. With Translation. By E. Postb, M.A., Fellow of Oriel College, Oxford. 8vo. 8s. 6d. ON THE CONSTITUTION OP ATHENS. Edited by J. B. Sandys, Litt.D. ARISTOPHANES.— THE BIRDS. Translated into English Verse. By B. H. Kennedy, D.D. Cr. 8vo. 6s. Help Notes to the Same, for the Use of Students. Is. 6d. ATTIC ORATORS.— PROM ANTIPHON TO ISAEOS. By R. C. Jebb, Litt.D., Regius Professor of Greek in the University of Cambridge. 2 vols. 8vo. 25s. BABRIUS.— With Lexicon. By Rev. W. G. Ruthekford, M.A., LL.D., Head- master of Westminster. 8vo. 12s. 6d. OIOERO.— THE ACADEMICA. By J. S. Reid, LittD., Fellow of Caius College, Cambridge. 8vo. 15s. THE ACADEMICS. Translated by the same. 8vo. 5s. 6d, SELECT LETTERS. After the Edition of Albert Watson, M.A. Translated by G. E. Jeans, M.A., Fellow of Hertford College, Oxford. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. EURIPIDES.— MEDEA. Edited by A. W. Verrall, Litt.D. 8vo. 7s. 6d. IPHIGENEIA IN AULIS. Edited by E. B. England, M.A. 8vo. [In the Press. *INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF EURIPIDES. By Professor J. P. Mahaffy. Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d. (Classical Writers.) HERODOTUS.— BOOKS I.-IIL THE ANCIENT EMPIRES OF THE EAST. Edited by A. H. Sayce, Deputy-Professor of Comparative Philology, Oxford. 8vo. 16s. BOOKS IV.-IX. Edited by R. W. Macan, M.A., Reader in Ancient History in the University of Oxford. 8vo. [In preparation. THE HISTORY. Translated by G. C. Macaxjlay, M.A. 2 vols. Cr. 8vo. 18s. HOMER.— THE ILIAD. By Walter Leaf, LittD. 8vo. Books I.-XII. 14s. Books XIIL-XXIV. 14s. THE ILIAD. Translated into English Prose by Andrew Lang, M.A., Walter Leaf, Litt.D., and Ernest Myers, M.A. Cr. 8vo. 12s. 6d. THE ODYSSEY. Done into English by S. H. Butcher, M.A., Professor of Greek in the University of Edinburgh, and Andrew Lang, M.A. Cr. 8vo. 6s. ♦INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF HOMER. By the Right Hon. W. E. Gladstone. 18mo. Is. {Literature Primers.) HOMERIC DICTIONARY. Translated from the German of Dr. G. Autenrieth by R. P. Keep, Ph.D. Illustrated. Cr. 8vo. 6s. HORACE.- Translated by J. Lonsdale, M.A., and S. Lee, M.A. Gl. 8vo. 3s. 6d. STUDIES, LITERARY AND HISTORICAL, IN THE ODES OF HORACE. By A. W. Verrall, LittD. 8vo. 8s. 6d. JUVENAL.— THIRTEEN SATIRES OF JUVENAL. By John E. B. Mayor, M.A., Professor of Latin in the University of Cambridge. Cr. 8vo. 2 vols. 10s. 6d. each. Vol. I. 10s. 6d. Vol. II. 10s. 6d. THIRTEEN SATIRES. Translated by Alex. Leeper, M.A., LL.D., Warden of Trinity College, Melbourne. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. KTESIAS.— THE FRAGMENTS OF THE PERSIKA OF KTESIAS. By John GiLMOKE, M.A. 8vo. 8s. 6d. LIVY.— BOOKS I.-IV. Translated by Rev. H. M. Stephenson, M.A. [In prep. BOOKS XXI.-XXV. Translated by A. J. Church, M.A., and W. J. Brodribb, M.A. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. *INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF LIVY. By Rev. W. W. Capes, M.A. Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d. (Classical Writers.) LONGINUS.— ON THE SUBLIME. Translated by H. L. Havell, B.A. With Introduction by Andrew Lang. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. MARTIAL.— BOOKS I. and II. OP THE EPIGRAMS. By Prof. John E. B. Mayor, M.A. 8vo. [In the Press. MELEAGER.— FIFTY POEMS OF MELEAGER. Translated by Walter Head- lam. Fcap. 4to. 7s. 6d. 8 CLASSICS PAUSANIAS.— DESCRIPTION OF GREECE. Translated with Commentary by J. G. Fkazer, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. [In prep. PHRYNICHUS.— THE NEW PHRYNICHUS ; being a Revised Text of the Ecloga of the Grammarian Phrynichus. With Introduction and Commentary by Rev. W. G, Rutherford, M.A., LL.D., Headmaster of Westminster. 8vo. ISs. PINDAR.— THE EXTANT ODES OF PINDAR. Translated by Ernest Myers, M.A. Cr. 8vo, 5s. THE OLYMPIAN AND PYTHIAN ODES. Edited, with an Introductory Essay, by Basil Gildersleeve, Professor of Greek in the Johns Hopkins University, U.S.A. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. THE NEMEAN ODES. By J. B. Bury, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin. 8vo. 12s. PLATO.— PH^DO. By R. D. Archer-Hind, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Svo. 8s. 6d. PHiEDO. By W. D. Geddes, LL.D., Principal of the University of Aberdeen. Svo. 8s. 6d. TIMAEUS. With Translation. By R. D. Archer-Hind, M.A. Svo. 16s. THE REPUBLIC OF PLATO. Translated by J. Ll. Davies, M.A., and D. J. Vaughan, M.A. 18mo. 4s. 6d. EUTHYPHRO, APOLOGY, CRITO, AND PHiEDO. Translated by F. J. Church. ISmo. 4s. 6d. PH^DRUS, LYSIS, AND PROTAGORAS. Translated by J. Wright, M.A. 18mo. 4s. 6d. PLAUTUS.— THE MOSTELLARIA. By William Ramsay, M.A. Edited by G. G. Ramsay, M.A., Professor of Humanity in the University of Glasgow. Svo. 14s. PLINY.— CORRESPONDENCE WITH TRAJAN. C. Plinii Caecilii Secundl Epistulae ad Traianum Imperatorem cum Eiusdem Responsis. By E. G. Hardy, M.A. Svo. 10s. 6d. POLYBIUS.— THE HISTORIES OF POLYBIUS. Translated by B. S. Shuck- burgh, M.A. 2 vols, Cr. Svo. 24s. SALLUST.— CATILINE AND JUGURTHA. Translated by A. W. Pollard, B.A. Cr. Svo. 6s. THE CATILINE (separately). 3s. SOPHOOLES.— CEDIPUS THE KING. Translated into English Verse by B. D. A. Morshead, M.A., Assistant Master at Winchester. Fcap. Svo. 3s. 6d. TACITUS.— THE ANNALS. By G. O. Holbrooke, M.A., Professor of Latin in Trinity College, Hartford, U.S.A. With Maps. Svo. 16s. THE ANNALS. Translated by A. J. Church, M.A., and W. J. Brodribb, M.A. With Maps. Cr. Svo. 7s, Gd. THE HISTORIES. By Rev. W. A. Spooner, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of New College, Oxford. Svo. 16s. THE HISTORY. Translated by A. J. Church, M.A., and W. J. Brodribb, M.A. With Map. Cr. 8vo. 6s. THE AGRICOLA AND GERMANY, WITH THE DIALOGUE ON ORATORY. Translated by A. J. Church, M,A,, and W. J. Brodribb, M.A. W^ith Maps. Cr. Svo. 4s. 6d. ♦INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF TACITUS. By A. J. Church, M.A., and W. J. Brodribb, M.A. Fcap. Svo. Is. 6d. (Classical Writers.) THEOCRITUS, BION, AND MOSOHUS. Translated by A. Lang, M.A. ISmo. 4s. 6d. Also an Edition on Large Paper. Cr. Svo. 9s. THUOYDIDES.— BOOK IV. A Revision of the Text, Illustrating the Principal Causes of Corruption in the Manuscripts of this Author. By Rev. W. G. Rutherford, M.A., LL.D., Headmaster of Westminster. Svo. 7s. 6d. BOOK VIII. By H. C. Goodhart, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. [In the Press. VIRGIL.— Translated by J, Lonsdale, M.A., and S. Lee, M.A. Gl. Svo. 3s. 6d. THE iENEID. Translated by J. W. Mackail, M,A,, Fellow of Balliol College, Oxford. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. GRAMMAR, COMPOSITION, AND PHILOLOGY 9 XENOPHON.— Translated by H. G. Dakyns, M.A. In four vols. Cr. 8vo, Vol. I., containing " The Anabasis " and Books I. and II. of "The Hellenica." 10s. 6cl. Vol. II. "Hellenica" III. -VII., and the two Polities— " Athenian " and "Laconian," the "Agesilaus," and the tract on "Revenues." With Maps and Plans. [In the Press. GRAMMAR, COMPOSITION, & PHILOLOGY. *BELOHER.— SHORT EXERCISES IN LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION AND EXAMINATION PAPERS IN LATIN GRAMMAR. Part I. By Rev. H. Belcher, LL.D., Rector of the High School, Dunedin, N.Z. 18mo. Is. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 18mo. 3s. 6d. *Part II., On the Syntax of Sentences, with an Appendix, including EXERCISES IN LATIN IDIOMS, etc. ISmo. 2s. KEY, for Teachers only. ISmo. 3s. BLACKIE.— GREEK AND ENGLISH DIALOGUES FOR USE IN SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. By John Stuart Blackie, Emeritus Professor of Greek in the University of Edinburgh. New Edition. Fcap, 8vo. 2s. 6d. A GREEK PRIMER, COLLOQUIAL AND CONSTRUCTIVE. Globe 8vo. *BRYANS.— LATIN PROSE EXERCISES BASED UPON CESAR'S GALLIC WAR. With a Classification of Csesar's Chief Phrases and Grammatical Notes on Caesar's Usages. By Clement Br vans, M.A., Assistant Master at Dulwich College. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 4s, 6d. GREEK PROSE EXERCISES based upon Thucydides. By the same. [In preparation. COOKSON.— A LATIN SYNTAX. By Christopher Cookson, M.A., Assistant Master at St. Paul's School. 8vo. [In preparation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY STUDIES IN CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY. Edited by 1. FLAGa, W. G. Hale, and B. I. Wheeler. I. The CC/M-Constructions : their History and Functions. By W. G. Hale. Part 1. Critical. Is, 8d. net. Part 2. Constructive. 3s. 4d. net. II. Analogy and the Scope of its Application in Language. By B. I. Wheeler. Is. 3d. net. *EIOKE.— FIRST LESSONS IN LATIN. By K. M. Eicke, B.A., Assistant Master at Oundle School. Gl. 8vo. 2s. 6d. ^ENGLAND.— EXERCISES ON LATIN SYNTAX AND IDIOM. ARRANGED WITH REFERENCE TO ROBY'S SCHOOL LATIN GRAMMAR. By E. B. England, Assistant Lecturer at the Owens College, Victoria University, Manchester. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 2s. 6d. GILES.— A SHORT MANUAL OF PHILOLOGY FOR CLASSICAL STUDENTS. By P. Giles, M.A., Fellow of Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. Cr. 8vo. [In the Press. GOODWIN.— Works by W. W. Goodwin, LL.D., D.C.L., Professor of Greek in Harvard University, U.S.A. SYNTAX OF THE MOODS AND TENSES OF THE GREEK VERB. New Ed., revised and enlarged. 8vo. 14s. *A GREEK GRAMMAR. Cr. 8vo. 6s. *A GREEK GRAMMAR FOR SCHOOLS. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. GREENWOOD.— THE ELEMENTS OF GREEK GRAMMAR. Adapted to the System of Crude Forms. By J. G. Greenwood, sometime Principal of the Owens College, Manchester. Cr. 8vo. 5s. 6d. HADLEY.— ESSAYS, PHILOLOGICAL AND CRITICAL. By James Hadley, late Professor in Yale College. 8vo. 16s. HADLEY AND ALLEN.— A GREEK GRAMMAR FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. By James Hadley, late Professor in Yale College. Revised and in part rewritten by F. de F. Allen, Professor in Harvard College. Cr. 8vo. 6s. HODGSON.— MYTHOLOGY FOR LATIN VERSIFICATION. A brief sketch of the Fables of the Anciejits, prepared to be rendered into Latin Verse for Schools. By F. Hodgson, B.D., late Provost of Eton. New Ed., revised by F. C. Hodgson, M.A- 18mo. 3s. *JA0KSON.— FIRST STEPS TO GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION. By Blomfield Jackson, M.A., Assistant Master at King's College School. 18mo. Is. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 18mo. 3s. 6d. 10 CLASSICS *SBCOND STEPS TO GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION, with Miscellaneous Idioms, Aids to Accentuation, and Examination Papers in Greek Scholarship. By the same. 18mo. 2s, 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 18mo. 8s. 6d. KYNASTON.— EXERCISES IN THE COMPOSITION OF GREEK IAMBIC VERSE by Translations from English Dramatists. By Rev. H, Kynaston, D.D., Professor of Classics in the University of Durham. With Vocabulary. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 5s. KEY, for Teachers only. Ex. fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. LUPTON.— *AN INTRODUCTION TO LATIN ELEGIAC VERSE COMPOSI- TION. By J. H. LuPTON, Sur-Master of St. Paul's School. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. KEY TO PART II. (XXV. -C.) Gl. Svo. 3s. 6d. *AN INTRODUCTION TO LATIN LYRIC VERSE COMPOSITION. By the same. Gl. Svo. 3s. KEY, for Teachers only. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. MAOKIE.— PARALLEL PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION INTO GREEK AND ENGLISH. "With Indexes. By Rev. Ellis C. Mackie, M.A., Classical Master at Heversham Grammar School. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. *MAOMILLAN.— FIRST LATIN GRAMMAR. By M. C. Maomillan, M.A Fcap. Svo. Is. 6d. MACMILLAN'S GREEK COURSE.— Edited by Rev. W. G. Rutherford, M.A., LL.D., Headmaster of Westminster. Gl. Svo. *FIRST GREEK GRAMMAR— ACCIDENCE. By the Editor. 23. *FIRST GREEK GRAMMAR— SYNTAX. By the same. 2s. ACCIDENCE AND SYNTAX. In one volume. 8s. 6d. *EASY EXERCISES IN GREEK ACCIDENCE. By H. G. Underbill, M.A., Assistant Master at St. Paul's Preparatory School. 2s. *A SECOND GREEK EXERCISE BOOK. By Rev. W. A. Heard, M.A., Headmaster of Fettes College, Edinburgh. 2s. 6d. EASY EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. By Rev. G. H. Nall, M.A., Assistant Master at Westminster School. [In preparation. MANUAL OF GREEK ACCIDENCE. By the Editor. [In preparation. MANUAL OF GREEK SYNTAX. By the Editor. [In preparation. ELEMENTARY GREEK COMPOSITION. By the Editor. [In preparation. '^MACMILLAN'S GREEK READER.— STORIES AND LEGENDS. A First Greek Reader, with Notes, Vocabulary, and Exercises. By F. H. Colson, M.A., Headmaster of Plymouth College. Gl. Svo. 3s. IVLACMILLAN'S LATIN COURSE.— By A. M. Cook, M.A., Assistant Master at St. Paul's School. *FIRST PART. Gl. Svo. 3s. 6d. ♦SECOND PART. 2s. 6d. [Third Part in preparation. *MAOMILLAN'S SHORTER LATIN COURSE.— By A. M. Cook, M.A. Being an abridgment of "Macmillan's Latin Course," First Part. Gl. Svo. Is. 6d. *MAC]yiILLAN'S LATIN READER.— A LATIN READER FOR THE LOWER FORMS IN SCHOOLS. By H. J. Hardy, M.A., Assistant Master at Win- chester. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d, *MARSHALL.— ATABLE OF IRREGULAR GREEK VERBS, classified according to the arrangement of Curtius's Greek Grammar. By J. M. Marshall, M.A., Headmaster of the Grammar School, Durham. Svo. Is. MAYOR.— FIRST GREEK READER. By Prof. John E. B. Mayor, M.A., Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. Fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. MAYOR.— GREEK FOR BEGINNERS. By Rev. J. B. Mayor, M.A., late Professor of Classical Literature in King's College, London. Part I., with Vocabulary, Is. 6d. Parts II. and III., with Vocabulary and Index. Fcap. Svo. 3s. 6d. Complete in one Vol. 4s. 6d. NIXON.— PARALLEL EXTRACTS, Arranged for Translation into English and Latin, with Notes on Idioms. By J. E. Nixon, M.A., Fellow and Classical Lecturer, King's College, Cambridge. Part I.— Historical and Epistolary, Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. GRAMMAR, COMPOSITION, AND PHILOLOGY 11 PROSE EXTRACTS, Arranged for Translation into English and Latin, with General and Special Prefaces on Style and Idiom. By the same. I, Oratorical. II. Historical. III. Philosophical. IV. Anecdotes and Letters. 2d Ed., enlarged to 280 pp. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. SELECTIONS FROM THE SAME. 3s. Translations of about 70 Extracts can be supplied to Schoolmasters (2s. 6d.), on application to the Author : and about 40 similarly of "Parallel Extracts," Is. ()d. post free. *PANTIN.— A FIRST LATIN VERSE BOOK. By W. B. P. Pantin, M.A., Assistant Master at St. Paul's School. Gl. Svo. Is. 6d. *PEILE.— A PRIMER OP PHILOLOGY. By J. Peile, Litt.D., Master of Christ's College, Cambridge. ISmo. Is. *POSTGATE.— SERMO LATINUS. A short Guide to Latin Prose Composition. By Prof. J. P. PosTGATE, Litt.D., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. KEY to " Selected Passages." Gl. Svo. 3s. 6d. POSTGATE and VINCE.— A DICTIONARY OF LATIN ETYMOLOGY. By J. P. PosTQATE and C. A. Vince. [In preparation. POTTS.— *HINTS TOWARDS LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. By A. W. Potts, M.A., LL.D., late Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. Ex. fcap. Svo. 3s. *PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION INTO LATIN PROSE. Edited with Notes and References to the above. Ex. fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 2s. 6d. *PRESTON.— EXERCISES IN LATIN VERSE OF VARIOUS KINDS. By Rev. G. Preston. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. Gl. Svo. 5s. REID.— A GRAMMAR OF TACITUS. By J. S. Reid, Litt.D., Fellow of Caius College, Cambridge. [In the Press. A GRAMMAR OF VIRGIL. By the same. [In preparation. ROBY. — Works by H. J. Roby, M.A., late Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. A GRAMMAR OF THE LATIN LANGUAGE, from Plautus to Suetonius. Part I. Sounds, Inflexions, Word -formation, Appendices. Cr. Svo. 9s. Part II. Syntax, Prepositions, etc. 10s. 6d. *SCHOOL LATIN GRAMMAR. Cr. Svo. 5s. AN ELEMENTARY LATIN GRAMMAR. [In the Press. *RUSH.— SYNTHETIC LATIN DELECTUS. With Notes and Vocabulary. By E. Rush, B.A. Ex. fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. *RUST.— FIRST STEPS TO LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. By Rev. G. Rust, M.A. ISmo. Is. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. ByW. M.Yates. ISmo. Ss. 6d. RUTHERFORD.— Works by the Rev. W. G. Rutherford, M.A., LL.D., Head- master of Westminster. REX LEX. A Short Digest of the principal Relations between the Latin, Greek, and Anglo-Saxon Sounds. Svo. [In preparation. THE NEW PHRYNICHUS ; being a Revised Text of the Ecloga of the Gram- marian Phrynichus. With Introduction and Comnientary. Svo. 18s. (See also Macmillan's Greek Course.) SHUCKBURGH.— PASSAGES FROM LATIN AUTHORS FOR TRANSLATION INTO ENGLISH. Selected with a view to the needs of Candidates for the Cambridge Local, and Public Schools' Examinations. By E. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. Cr. Svo. 2s. *SIMPSON. — LATIN PROSE AFTER THE BEST AUTHORS : Caesarian Prose. By F. P. Simpson, B.A. Ex. fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d, KEY, for Teachers only. Ex. fcap. Svo. 5s. STRACHAN and "WTLKINS.- ANALECTA. Selected Passages for Translation. By J. S. Strachan, M.A., Pi'ofessor of Greek, and A. S. Wilkins, Litt.D., Professor of Latin in the Owens CoUege, Manchester. Cr. Svo. 5s. KEY to Latin Passages. Cr. Svo. 6d. THRING. — Works by the Rev. E. Thrino, M.A., late Headmaster of Uppingham. A LATIN GRADUAL. A First Latin Construing Book for Beginners. With Coloured Sentence Maps. Fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. A MANUAL OF MOOD CONSTRUCTIONS. Fcap. Svo. Is. 6d. "WELCH and DUFPIELD. — LATIN ACCIDENCE AND EXERCISES AR- RANGED FOR BEGINNERS. By W. Welch and C. G. Duffield, Assistant Masters at Crauleigh School. ISmo. Is. 6d. 12 CLASSICS WHITE.— FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. Adapted to Goodwin's Greek Gram- mar, and designed as an introduction to the Anabasis of Xenophon. By John Williams White, Assistant Professor of Greek in Harvard University, U.S.A. Or. 8vo. 3s. 6d. WEIGHT.— Works by J. Wright, M.A, late Headmaster of Sutton Coldfield School. A HELP TO LATIN GRAMMAR ; or, the Form and Use of Words in Latin, with Progressive Exercises. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. THE SEVEN KINGS OF ROME. An Easy Narrative, abridged from the First Book of Livy by the omission of Difficult Passages ; being a First Latin Read- ing Book, with Grammatical Notes and Vocabulary. Fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. FIRST LATIN STEPS; or, AN INTRODUCTION BY A SERIES OF EXAMPLES TO THE STUDY OF THE LATIN LANGUAGE. Or. 8vo. 3s. ATTIC PRIMER. Arranged for the Use of Beginners. Ex. fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. A COMPLETE LATIN COURSE, comprising Rules with Examples, Exercises, both Latin and English, on each Rule, and Vocabularies. Cr. Svo. 2s. 6d. ANTIQUITIES, ANCIENT HISTOBY, AND PHILOSOPHY. ARNOLD.— A HANDBOOK OF LATIN EPIGRAPHY. By W. T. Arnold, M.A. [771 preparation. THE ROMAN SYSTEM OF PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION TO THE ACCESSION OF CONSTANTINE THE GREAT. By the same. Cr. Svo. 6s. ARNOLD.— THE SECOND PUNIC WAR. Being Chapters from THE HISTORY OF ROME by the late Thomas Arnold, D.D., Headmaster of Rugby. Edited, with Notes, by W. T. Arnold, M.A. With 8 Maps. Cr. Svo. 5s. *BEESLY.— STORIES FROM THE HISTORY OF ROME. By Mrs. Beeslt. Fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. BLACKIE.— HOR.E HELLENICS. By John Stuart Blackie, Emeritus Pro- fessor of Greek in the University of Edinburgh. Svo. 12s. BURN.— ROMAN LITERATURE IN RELATION TO ROMAN ART. By Rev. Robert Burn, M.A., late Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Illustrated. Ex. cr. Svo. 14s. BURY.— A HISTORY OF THE LATER ROMAN EMPIRE FROM ARCADIUS TO IRENE, A.D. 395-800. By J. B. Bury, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin. 2 vols. Svo. 32s. *OLASSICAL WRITERS.— Edited by John Richard Green, M.A., LL.D. Fcap. Svo. Is. 6d. each. SOPHOCLES. By Prof. L. Campbell, M.A. EURIPIDES. By Prof. Mahaffy, D.D. DEMOSTHENES. By Prof. S. H. Butcher, M.A. VIRGIL. By Prof. Nettleship, M.A. LIVY By Rev. W. W. Capes, M.A. TACITUS. By Prof. A. J. Church, M.A., and W. J. Brodribb, M.A. MILTON. By Rev. Stopford A Brooke, M.A. FREEMAN.— Works by Edward A. Freeman, D.C.L., LL.D., Regius Professor of Modern History in the University of Oxford. HISTORY OF ROME. (Historical Course for Schools.) 18mo. [In i^reparation. HISTORY OF GREECE. (Historical Course for Schools.) 18mo. [In preparation. A SCHOOL HISTORY OF ROME. Cr. Svo. [In preparation. HISTORICAL ESSAYS. Second Series. [Greek and Roman History.] Svo. 10s. 6d. FYFPE.— A SCHOOL HISTORY OF GREECE. By C. A. Fyffe, M.A Cr. Svo. [In preparation. GARDNER.— SAMOS AND SAMIAN COINS. An Essay. By Percy Gardner, Litt.D., Professor of Archaeology in the University of Oxford. With Illustra- tions. Svo. 7s. 6d. ANCIENT HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY 13 G-EDDES.— THE PROBLEM OF THE HOMERIC POEMS. By W. D. Geddks, Principal of the University of Aberdeen. 8vo. 14s. GLADSTONE.— Works by the Rt. Hon. W. E. Gladstone, M.P. THE TIME AND PLACE OF HOMER. Cr. 8vo. 6s. 6d. LANDMARKS OF HOMERIC STUDY. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. »A PRIMER OF HOMER. ISmo. Is. GOW.— A COMPANION TO SCHOOL CLASSICS. By James Gow, Litt.D., Master of the High School, Nottingham. With Illustrations. 2d Ed., revised. Cr. 8vo. 6s. HARRISON and VERRALL.— MYTHOLOGY AND MONUMENTS OF ANCIENT ATHENS. Translation of a portion of the "Attica" of Pausanias. By Margaret de G. Verrall. With Introductory Essay and Archaeological Commentary by Jane E. Harrison. With Illustrations and Plans. Cr. 8vo. 16s. JEBB. — Works by R. C. Jebb, Litt.D., Professor of Greek in the University of Cambridge. THE ATTIC ORATORS FROM ANTIPHON TO ISAEOS. 2 vols. Svo. 25s. *A PRIMER OF GREEK LITERATURE. ISmo. Is. (See also Classical Series.) KIEPERT.— MANUAL OF ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY. By Dr. H. Kiepert. Cr. Svo. 5s. LANCIANI.— ANCIENT ROME IN THE LIGHT OF RECENT DISCOVERIES. By RoDOLFO Lanciani, Professor of Archaeology in the University of Rome. Illustrated. 4to. 24s. MAHAFFY.— Works by J. P. Mahaffy, D.D., Fellow of Trinity CoUege, Dublin, and Professor of Ancient History in the University of Dublin. SOCIAL LIFE IN GREECE ; from Homer to Menauder. Cr. Svo. 9s. GREEK LIFE AND THOUGHT ; from the Age of Alexander to the Roman Conquest. Cr. Svo. 12s. 6d. THE GREEK WORLD UNDER ROMAN SWAY. From Plutarch to Polybius. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. RAMBLES AND STUDIES IN GREECE. With Illustrations. With Map. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. A HISTORY OP CLASSICAL GREEK LITERATURE. Cr. Svo. Vol. I. The Poets, with an Appendix on Homer by Prof. Sayce, In two parts. Vol. II. The Prose Writers. In two parts. Part I. Herodotus to Plato. Part II. Isocrates to Aristotle. 4s. 6d. each. *A PRIMER OF GREEK ANTIQUITIES. With Illustrations. 18mo. Is. *BURIPIDBS. ISmo. Is. 6d. (Classical Writers.) MAYOR.— BIBLIOGRAPHICAL CLUB TO LATIN LITERATURE. Edited after HUbner. By Prof. John E. B. Mayor. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. NEWTON.— ESSAYS ON ART AND ARCHEOLOGY. By Sir Charles Nbwton, K.C.B., D.C.L. Svo. 12s. 6d. PHILOLOGY.-THE JOURNAL OF PHILOLOGY. Edited by W. A. Wright, M.A., J. Bywater, M.A., and H. Jackson, Litt.D. 4s. 6d. each (half- yearly). RENDALL. -THE CRADLE OF THE ARYANS. By Prof. G. H. Rendall. Svo. 3s. SAYOE.— THE ANCIENT EMPIRES OF THE EAST. By A. H. Sayce, M.A., Deputy-Professor of Comparative Philology, Oxford. Cr. Svo. 6s. SCHMIDT and WHITE. AN INTRODUCTION TO THE RHYTHMIC AND METRIC OF THE CLASSICAL LANGUAGES. By Dr. J. H. Heinrich Schmidt. Translated by John) Williams White, Ph.D. Svo. 10s. 6d. SHUOHHARDT.— DR. SCHLIEMANN'S EXCAVATIONS AT TROY, TIRYNS, MYCENiE, ORCHOMENOS, ITHACA, presented in the light of recent know- ledge. By Dr. Carl Shuchhardt. Translated by Eugenie Sellers. Intro- duction by Walter Leaf, Litt. D. Illustrated. Svo. [In the Press. SHUCKBURGH.— A SCHOOL HISTORY OF ROME. By E. S. Shuckburgh, M.A. Cr. Svo. [In preparation. 14 MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE *STEWART.— THE TALE OF TROY. Done into English by Aubrey Stewart Gl. 8vo. 3s. 6d. *TOZER.— A PRIMER OF CLASSICAL GEOGRAPHY. By H. F. Tozer, M.A. 18mo. Is. WALDSTEm.— CATALOGUE OF CASTS IN THE MUSEUM OF CLASSICAL ARCHiEOLOGY, CAMBRIDGE. By Charles Waldstein, University Reader in Classical Archseology, Cr. 8vo. Is. 6d. *^* Also an Edition on Large Paper, small 4to. 5s. WILKINS.— Works by Prof. Wilkins, Litt.D., LL.D. *A PRIMER OF ROMAN ANTIQUITIES. Illustrated. ISnio. Is. *A PRIMER OF ROMAN LITERATURE. ISmo. Is. WILKINS and ARNOLD. —A MANUAL OF ROMAN ANTIQUITIES. By Prof. A. S. Wilkins, Litt.D., and W. T. Arnold, M.A. Cr. Svo. Illustrated. [In preparation. MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE. Englisli ; French ; German ; Modem Greek ; Italian ; Spanish, ENGLISH. *ABBOTT.— A SHAKESPEARIAN GRAMMAR. An Attempt to Illustrate some of the Differences between Elizabethan and Modern English. By the Rev. E. A. Abbott, D.D., formerly Headmaster of the City of London School. Ex. fcap. Svo. 6s. *BACON.— ESSAYS. With Introduction and Notes, by P. G. Selby, M.A., Profes- sor of Logic and Moral Philosophy, Deccan College, Poona. Gl. Svo. 8s. ; sewed, 2s. 6d. *BURKE.— REFLECTIONS ON THE FRENCH REVOLUTION. By the same. Gl. Svo. 5s. BROOKE.— *PRIMER OF ENGLISH LITERATURE. By Rev. Stopford A. Brooke, M.A. ISmo. Is. EARLY ENGLISH LITERATURE. By the same. 2 vols. Svo. [Vol.1, hi the Press. BUTLER.— HUDIBRAS. With Introduction and Notes, by Alfred Milnes, M.A. Ex. fcap. Svo. Part I. 3s. 6d. Parts II. and III. 4s. 6d. CAMPBELL.— SELECTIONS. With Introduction and Notes, by Cecil M. Barrow, M. A., Prhicipal of Victoria College, Palghat. Gl. Svo. [In preparation. COWPER.— *THE TASK : an Epistle to Joseph Hill, Esq. ; Tirocinium, or a Re- view of the Schools ; and The History of John Gilpin. Edited, with Notes, by W. Benham, B.D. Gl. Svo. Is. (Globe Readings from Standard Authors.) THE TASK. With Introduction and Notes, by F. J. Rowe, M.A., and W. T. Webb, M.A., Professors of English Literature, Presidency College, Calcutta. [In preparation. *DOWDEN.— SHAKESPERE. By Prof. Dowden. ISmo. Is. DRYDEN.— SELECT PROSE WORKS. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by Prof. C. D. YoNGE. Fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d, *GLOBE READERS. For Standards L -VI. Edited by A. F. Murison. Illustrated. Gl. Svo. Primer I. (48 pp.) 3d. Primer II. (48 pp.) 3d. Book I. (132 pp.) 6d. Book II. (136 pp.) 9d. Book IIL (232 pp.) Is. 3d. Book IV. (328 pp.) Is. 9d. Book V. (408 pp.) 2s. Book VL (436 pp.) 2s. 6d. •^THE SHORTER GLOBE READERS.— Illustrated. Gl. Svo. Primer I. (4S pp.) 3d. Primer II. (48 pp.) 3d. Standard I. (90 pp.) 6d. Standard II. (124 pp.) 9d. Standard III. (178 pp.) Is. Standard IV. (182 pp.) Is. Standard V. (216 pp.) Is. 3d. Standard VI. (228 pp.) Is. 6d. i^GOLDSMITH.- THE TRAVELLER, or a Prospect of Society ; and the Deserted Village. With Notes, Philological and Explanatory, by J. W. Hales, M.A. Cr. Svo. 6d. ENGLISH 15 *THB TRAVELLER AND THE DESERTED VILLAGE. With Introduction and Notes, by A. Barrett, B.A., Professor of English Literature, Elphinstone College, Bombay. Gl. 8vo. Is. 9d. ; sewed. Is. 6d. The Traveller (separately). To S6W6d. THE VICAR OF WAKEFIELD. With Introduction and Notes, by H. Little- dale, B.A., Professor of History and English Literature, Baroda College. Gl. 8vo. [In preparation. *THE VICAR OF WAKEFIELD. With a Memoir of Goldsmith, by Prof. Masson. Gl. 8vo. Is. (Globe Readings from Standard Authors.) SELECT ESSAYS. With Introduction and Notes, by Prof. C. D. Yonge. Fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. GOSSE.— A HISTORY OF EIGHTEENTH CENTURY LITERATURE (1660-1780). By Edmund Gosse, M.A. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. GRAY.— POEMS. With Introduction and Notes, by John Bradshaw, LL.l). Gl. 8vo. [In the Press. *HALES.— LONGER ENGLISH POEMS. With Notes, Philological and Explana- tory, and an Introduction on the Teaching of English, by J. W. Hales, M.A., Professor of English Literature at King's College, London. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 4s. 6d. ♦HELPS.— ESSAYS WRITTEN IN THE INTERVALS OF BUSINESS. With Introduction and Notes, by P. J. Rowe, M.A., and W. T. Webb, M.A. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed, Is. 6d. *JOHNSON.— LIVES OF THE POETS. The Six Chief Lives (Milton, Dryden, Swift, Addison, Pope, Gray), with Macaulay's " Life of Johnson." With Pre- face and Notes by Matthew Arnold. Cr. Svo. 4s. 6d. *LAMB.— TALES FROM SHAKSPEARE. With Preface by the Rev. Canon AiNGER, M.A., LL.D. Gl. Svo. 2s. (Globe Readings from Standard Authors.) "LITERATURE PRIMERS.— Edited by John Richard Green, LL.D. ISmo. Is. each. ENGLISH GRAMMAR. By Rev. R. Morris, LL.D. ENGLISH GRAMMAR EXERCISES. By R. Morris, LL.D., and H. C. Bo WEN, M.A. EXERCISES ON MORRIS'S PRIMER OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. By J. Wetherell, M.A. ENGLISH COMPOSITION. By Professor Nichol. QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES ON ENGLISH COMPOSITION. By Prof. Nichol and W. S. M'Cormick. ENGLISH LITERATURE. By Stopford Brooke, M.A. SHAKSPERE. By Professor Dowden. THE CHILDREN'S TREASURY OF LYRICAL POETRY. Selected and arranged with Notes by Francis Turner Palqrave. In Two Parts. Is. each. PHILOLOGY. By J. Peile, Litt.D. ROMAN LITERATURE. By Prof. A. S. Wilkins, Litt.D. GREEK LITERATURE. By Prof. Jebb, Litt.D. HOMER. By the Rt. Hon. W. E, Gladstone, M.P. A HISTORY OF ENGLISH LITERATURE IN FOUR VOLUMES. Cr. Svo. EARLY ENGLISH LITERATURE. By Stopford Brooke, M.A. [In preparation. ELIZABETHAN LITERATURE. (1560-1665.) By George Saintsbury. 7s. C.d. EIGHTEENTH CENTURY LITERATURE. (166O-17S0.) By Edmund Gosse M.A. 7s. 6d. THE MODERN PERIOD. By Prof. Dowden. [In preparation. *MACMILLAN'S READING BOOKS. PRIMER. ISmo. 48 pp. 2d. BOOK I. for Standard L 96 pp. 4d. BOOK II. for Standard II. 144 pp. 5d. BOOK III. for Standard III. 160 pp. Od. BOOK IV. for Standard IV. 176 pp. 8d. BOOK V. for Standard V. 380 pp. Is. BOOK VI. for Standard VI. Cr. Svo. 430 pp. 2s. Book VI. is fitted for Higher Classes, and as au Introduction to English Literature 16 MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE *MAOMILLAN'S COPY BOOKS.— 1. Large Post 4to. Price 4d. each. 2. Post Oblong. Price 2d. each. 1. Initiatory Exercises and Short Letters. 2. Words consisting of Short Letters. 3. Long Letters. With Words containing Long Letters— Figures. 4. Words containing Long Letters. 4a. Practising and Revising Copy-Book. For Nos. 1 to 4. 5. Capitals and Short Half-Text. Words beginning with a Capital. 6. Half-Text Words beginning with Capitals— Figures. 7. Small-Hand and Half-Text. With Capitals and Figures. 8. Small-Hand and Half-Text. With Capitals and Figures. 8a. Practising and Revising Copy-Book. For Nos. 5 to 8. 9. Small-Hand Single Headlines— Figures. 10. Small-Hand Single Headlines — Figures. 11. Small-Hand Double Headlines — Figures. 12. Commercial and Arithmetical Examples, &c. 12a. Practising and Revising Copy-Book. For Nos. 8 to 12. Nos. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 may he had with Goodman's Patent Sliding Copies. Large Post 4to. Price 6d. each. MARTIN.— *THB POET'S HOUR : Poetry selected and arranged for Children. By Frances Martin. 18mo. 2s. 6d. *SPRING-TIME WITH THE POETS. By the same. 18mo. 3s. 6d. *MILTON.— -PARADISE LOST. Books I. and II. With Introduction and Notes, by Michael Macmillan, B.A., Professor of Logic and Moral Philosophy, Elphinstone College, Bombay. Gl. 8vo. Is. 9d. ; sewed. Is. 6d. Or separately, Is. 3d. ; sewed. Is. each. *L' ALLEGRO, IL PENSEROSO, LYCIDAS, ARCADES, SONNETS, &c. With Introduction and Notes, by W. Bell, M.A., Professor of Philosophy and Logic, Government College, Lahore. Gl. 8vo. Is. 9d. ; sewed, Is. 6d. *COMUS. By the same. Gl. Svo. Is. 3d. ; sewed, Is. *SAMSON AGONISTES. By H. M. Percival, M.A., Professor of English Liter- ature, Presidency College, Calcutta. Gl, 8vo. 2s. ; sewed. Is. 9d. ^INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF MILTON. By Stopford Brooke. M.A. Fcap. Svo. Is. 6d. (Classical Writers.) MORRIS.— Works by the Rev. R. Morris, LL.D. *PRIMER OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 18mo. Is. ^ELEMENTARY LESSONS IN HISTORICAL ENGLISH GRAMMAR, con- taining Accidence and Word-Formation. 18mo. 2s. 6d. ♦HISTORICAL OUTLINES OF ENGLISH ACCIDENCE, comprising Chapters on the History and Development of the Language, and on Word- Formation. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 6s. MORRIS and KELLNER.— HISTORICAL OUTLINES OF ENGLISH SYNTAX. By Rev. R. Morris and Dr. L. Kellner. [In preparation. NIOHOL.— A SHORT HISTORY OF ENGLISH LITERATURE. By Prof. John Nichol. Gl. 8vo. [In preparation. OLIPHANT.— THE OLD AND MIDDLE ENGLISH. By T. L. Kington Oliphant. New Ed., revised and enlarged, of "The Sources of Standard English." New Ed. Gl. Svo. [In the Press. THE NEW ENGLISH. By the same. 2 vols. Cr. Svo. 21s. *PALGRAVE. — THE CHILDREN'S TREASURY OF LYRICAL POETRY. Selected and arranged, with Notes, by Francis T. Palgrave. 18mo. 2s. 6d. Also in Two Parts. Is. each. PATMORE. — THE CHILDREN'S GARLAND FROM THE BEST POETS. Selected and arranged by Coventry Patmore. Gl. Svo. 2s. (Globe Readings from Standard Authors.) ENGLISH 17 PLUTARCH.— Being a Selection from the Lives which illustrate Shakespeare. North's Translation. Edited, with Introductions, Notes, Index of Names, and Glossarial Index, by Prof. W. W. Skeat, Litt.D. Cr. 8vo. 6s. *RANSOME.— SHORT STUDIES OF SHAKESPEARE'S PLOTS. By Cyril Ransome, Professor of Modern History and Literature, Yorkshire College, Leeds. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. *RYLAND.— CHRONOLOGICAL OUTLINES OP ENGLISH LITERATURE. By F. Ryland, M.A. Cr. 8vo. 6s. SAINTSBURY.— A HISTORY OF ELIZABETHAN LITERATURE. 1560-1665. By George Saintsbury. Cr. Svo. 7s, 6d. SCOTT.— *LAY OP THE LAST MINSTREL, and THE LADY OF THE LAKE. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by Frakcis Turner Palgrave. G1. Svo. Is. (Globe Readings from Standard Authors.) *THE LAY OF THE LAST MINSTREL. With Introduction and Notes, by G. H. Stuart, M.A., and E. H. Elliot, B.A. G1. Svo. Introduction and Canto I. 9d. sewed. Cantos I. to III. Is. 3d. ; sewed, Is. Cantos IV. to VI. Ts Sd. * SGWG(i Ts *MARMi6n, and' the LORD OP THE ISLES. By F. T. Palgrave. G1. Svo. Is. (Globe Readings from Standard Authors.) *MARMI0N. With Introduction and Notes, by Michael Macmillan, B.A. Gl. Svo. 3s. ; sewed, 2s. 6d. *THE LADY OF THE LAKE. By G. H. Stuart, M.A. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. ; sewed, 2s. *ROKEBY. With Introduction and Notes, by Michael Macmillan, B.A. Gl Svo 3s ' s6WGcl 2s 6d, Shakespeare!— *A Shakespearian grammar. By Rev. e. a. abbott, D.D. Gl. Svo. 6s. A SHAKESPEARE MANUAL. By F. G. Pleat, M.A. 2d Ed. Ex. fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. *PRIMER OF SHAKESPERE. By Prof. Dowden. ISmo. Is. *SHORT STUDIES OF SHAKESPEARE'S PLOTS. By Cyril Ransome, M.A. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. *THB TEMPEST. With Introduction and Notes, by K. Deighton, late Principal of Agra College. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed. Is. 6d. *MUCH ADO ABOUT NOTHING. By the same. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed, Is. 6d. *A MIDSUMMER NIGHT'S DREAM. By the same. G1.8vo. Is. 9d.; sewed,ls. 6d. *THE MERCHANT OF VENICE. By the same. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed, Is. 6d. AS YOU LIKE IT. By the same. Gl. Svo. ♦TWELFTH NIGHT. By the same. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed, Is. 6d. *THE WINTER'S TALE. By the same. Gl. Svo. 2s. ; sewed. Is. 9d. ♦RICHARD II. By the same. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed. Is. 6d. *KING JOHN. By the same. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed, Is. 6d. *HENRY V. By the same. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed. Is. 6d. ♦RICHARD III. By C. H. Tawney, M.A., Principal and Professor of English Literature, Presidency College, Calcutta. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. ; sewed, 2s. ♦CORIOLANUS. By K. Deighton. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. ; sewed, 2s.. ♦JULIUS CiESAR. By the same. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed. Is. 6d. ♦MACBETH. By the same. Gl. Svo. Is. 9d. ; sewed, Is. 6d. ♦HAMLET. By the same. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. ; sewed, 2s. KING LEAR. By the same. Gl. Svo. ♦OTHELLO. By the same. Gl. Svo. 2s. ; sewed. Is. 9d. ANTONY AND CLEOPATRA. By the same. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. ; sewed, 28. ♦CYMBELINE. By the same. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. ; sewed, 2s. ♦SONNENSCHEIN and MEIKLE JOHN. — THE ENGLISH METHOD OP TEACHING TO READ. By A. Sonnenschein and J. M. D. Meiklejohn, M.A. Fcap. Svo. THE NURSERY BOOK, containing all the Two -Letter Words in the Lan- guage. Id. (Also in Large Type on Sheets for School Walls. 53.) B 18 MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE THE FIRST COURSE, consisting of Short Vowels with Single Consonants. 7d. THE SECOND COURSE, with Combinations and Bridges, consisting of Short Vowels with Double Consonants. 7d. THE THIRD AND FOURTH COURSES, consisting of Long Vowels, and all the Double Vowels in the Language. 7d. *SOUTHEY.— LIFE OF NELSON. With Introduction and Notes, by Michael Macmillan, B.A. G1. 8vo. 3s. ; sewed, 2s. 6d, TAYLOR.— WORDS AND PLACES ; or, Etymological Illustrations of History, Ethnology, and Geography. By Rev. Isaac Taylor, Litt.D. With Maps. Gl. 8vo. 6s. TENNYSON.— THE COLLECTED WORKS OP LORD TENNYSON. An Edition for Schools. In Four Parts. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. each. TENNYSON FOR THE YOUNG. Edited, with Notes for the Use of Schools, by the Rev. Alfred Ainger, LL.D., Canon of Bristol. ISmo. Is. net. [In preparation. ♦SELECTIONS FROM TENNYSON. With Introduction and Notes, by F. J. RowE, M.A., and W. T. Webb, M.A. Gl. 8vo. 3s. 6d. This selection contains :— Recollections of the Arabian Nights, The Lady of Shalott, CEnone, The Lotos Eaters, Ulysses, Tithonus, Morte d' Arthur, Sir Galahad, Dora, Ode on the Death of tlie Duke of Wellington, and The Revenge. ENOCH ARDBN. By W. T. Webb, M.A. GI. 8vo. [In the Press. *THE COMING OF ARTHUR, AND THE PASSING OF ARTHUR. By F. J. RowE, M.A. Gl. Svo. 2s. THE PRINCESS. By P. M. Wallace, B.A. [In the Press. THRING.— THE ELEMENTS OF GRAMMAR TAUGHT IN ENGLISH. By Edward Thring, M.A. With Questions. 4th Ed. 18mo. 2s. *VAUGHAN.— WORDS FROM THE POETS. By C. M. Vaughan. 18mo. Is. WARD.— THE ENGLISH POETS. Selections, with Critical Introductions by various Writers and a General Introduction by Matthew Arnold. Edited by T. H. Ward, M.A. 4 Vols. Vol. I. Chaucer to Donne.— Vol. II. Ben JoNsoN TO Dryden.— Vol. III. Addison to Blake.— Vol. IV. Wordsworth TO Rossetti. 2d Ed. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. each. "WETHERELL.— EXERCISES ON MORRIS'S PRIMER OP ENGLISH GRAM- MAR. By John Wetherell, M.A., Headmaster of Towcester Grammar School. 18mo. Is. WOODS.— *A FIRST POETRY BOOK. By M. A. Woods, Head Mistress of the Clifton High School for Girls. Fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. *A SECOND POETRY BOOK. By the same. In Two Parts. 2s. 6d. each. *A THIRD POETRY BOOK. By the same. 4s. 6d. HYMNS FOR SCHOOL WORSHIP. By the same. 18mo. Is. 6d. WORDSWORTH.— SELECTIONS. With Introduction and Notes, by F. J. Rowe, M.A,, and W. T. Webb, M.A. Gl. 8vo. [In •preparation. YONGE.—*A BOOK OF GOLDEN DEEDS. By Charlotte M. Yonge. G1.8vo 2s. *THB ABRIDGED BOOK OP GOLDEN DEEDS. 18mo. Is. FRENCH. BEAUMARCHAIS.— LE BARRIER DE SEVILLE. With Introduction ana Notes. By L. P. Blouet. Fcap. Svo. 3s. 6d. *BOWEN. -FIRST LESSONS IN FRENCH. By H. Courthope Bowen, M.A. Ex. fcap. Svo. Is. BREYMANN.— Works by Hermann Breymann, Ph.D., Professor of Philology in the University of Munich. A FRENCH GRAMMAR BASED ON PHILOLOGICAL PRINCIPLES. Ex. fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. FIRST FRENCH EXERCISE BOOK. Ex. fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. SECOND FRENCH EXERCISE BOOK. Ex. fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. FASNACHT.— Works by G. E. Fasnacht, late Assistant Master at Westminster. THE ORGANIC METHOD OP STUDYING LANGUAGES. Ex. fcap. Svo. I. French. 3s. 6d. FRENCH 19 A SYNTHETIC FRENCH GRAMMAE FOR SCHOOLS. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. GRAMMAR AND GLOSSARY OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE OF THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY. Cr. 8vo. [In preparation. MACMHiLAN'S PRIMARY SERIES OF FRENCH READING BOOKS.— Edited by G. E. Fasnacut. With Illustrations, Notes, Vocabularies, and Exercises. Gl. 8vo. FRENCH READINGS FOR CHILDREN. By G. B. Fasnacht. [May 1891. *CORNAZ— NOS ENFANTS ET LEURS AMIS. By Edith Harvey. Is. 6d. *DE MAISTRE— LA JEUNE SIB^RIENNE ET LE LEPREUX DE LA CIT:& D'AOSTE. By Stephanb Barlet, B.Sc. etc. Is. 6d. *FLORIAN— FABLES. By Rev. Charles Yeld, M. A. , Headmaster of University School, Nottingham. Is. 6d. *LA FONTAINE-A SELECTION OF FABLES. By L. M. Moriarty, B.A., Assistant Master at Harrow. 2s. 6d. LAMARTINE— JEANNE D'ARC. By M. de G. Verrall. [In the Press. *MOLESWORTH— FRENCH LIFE IN LETTERS. By Mrs. Molesworth. Is. 6d. *PERRAULT— CONTES DB FEES. By G. B. Fasnacht. Is. 6d. MACMILLAN'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH COURSE.— By G. E. Fasnacht. Ex. fcap. Bvo. *FiRST Year, containing Easy Lessons on the Regular Accidence. Is. *Second Year, containing an Elementary Grammar with copious Exercises, Notes, and Vocabularies. 2s, *Third Yeajr, containing a Systematic Syntax, and Lessons in Composition. 2s. 6d. THE TEACHER'S COMPANION TO MACMILLAN'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH COURSE. With Copious Notes, Hints for Different Renderings, Synonyms, Philological Remarks, etc. By G. E. Fasnacht. Ex. fcap. 8vo. Bach Year 4s. 6d. *MAOMILLAN'S FRENCH COMPOSITION.— By G. E. Fasnacht. Ex. fcap. 8vo. Part I. Elementary. 2s. 6d. Part II. Advanced. [In the Press. THE TEACHER'S COMPANION TO MACMILLAN'S COURSE OF FRENCH COMPOSITION. By G. E. Fasnacht. Part I. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 4s. 6d. MACMILLAN'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH READERS. By G. E. Fasnacht. Ex. fcap. 8vo. *FiRST Year, containing Tales, Historical Extracts, Letters, Dialogues, Ballads, Nursery Songs, etc., with Two Vocabularies : (1) in the order of subjects ; (2) in alphabetical order. With Imitative Exercises. 2s. 6d. *Second Year, containing Fiction in Prose and Verse, Historical and Descriptive Extracts, Essays, Letters, Dialogues, etc. With Imitative Exercises. 2s. 6d. MACMILLAN'S FOREIGN SCHOOL CLASSICS. Edited by G. B. Fasnacht. 18mo. *CORNBILLB— LB CID. By G. B. Fasnacht. Is. *DUMAS— LBS DEMOISELLES DE ST. CYR. By Victor Oger, Lecturer at University College, Liverpool. Is. 6d. LA FONTAINE'S FABLES. Books L-VI. By L. M. Moriarty, B.A., Assistant Master at Harrow. [In preparation. *M0LI6RE— L'AVARE. By the same. Is. *M0LI6RB-LE bourgeois GENTILHOMME. By the same. Is. 6d. *MOLIERE— LBS FEMMBS SAVANTES. By G. B. Fasnacht. Is. *M0LI6RB— LB MISANTHROPE. By the same. Is. *MOLI^RE— LB M^DECIN MALGRE LUI. By the same. Is. MOLIl^RE— LBS PRECIEUSBS RIDICULES. By the same. [In the Press. * RACINE— BRITANNICUS. By B. Pellissier, M.A. 2s. »FRBNCH READINGS FROM ROMAN HISTORY. Selected from various Authors, by C. Colbeck, M.A., Assistant Master at Harrow. 4s. Cd. »SAND, GEORGE— LA MARE AU DIABLB. By W. E. Russell, M.A., Assistant Master at Haileybury. Is. 20 MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE *SANDEAU, JULES— MADEMOISELLE DE LA SEIGLI^RE. By H. C. Steel, Assistant Master at Winchester. Is. 6d. THIBRS'S HISTORY OP THE EGYPTIAN EXPEDITION. By Rev. H. A. Bull, M. A., formerly Assistant Master at Wellington. [In preparation. *VOLTAIRE— CHARLES XII. By G. E. Fasnacht. 8s. 6d. *MASSON.— A COMPENDIOUS DICTIONARY OP THE PRENCH LANGUAGE. Adapted from tlie Dictionaries of Professor A. Elwall, By Gustave Masson. Cr. 8vo. 6s. MOLIERE.— LE MALADE IMAGINAIRE. With Introduction and Notes, by P. Tabver, M.A., Assistant Master at Eton. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. *PELLISSIER.— FRENCH ROOTS AND THEIR FAMILIES. A Synthetic Vocabulary, based upon Derivations. By E. Pellissieb, M.A., Assistant Master at Clifton College. Gl. 8vo. 6s. GERMAN. BEHAGEL.— THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. By Dr. Otto Behagel. Translated by Emil Tbechmann, B.A., Ph.D., Lecturer in Modern Literature in the University of Sydney, N.S. W. Gl. Svo. [In the Press. HUSS.— A SYSTEM OF ORAL INSTRUCTION IN GERMAN, by means of Progressive Illustrations and Applications of the leading Rules of Grammar. By H. C. O. Huss, Ph.D. Cr. Svo. 5s. MAOMILLAN'S PROGRESSIVE GERMAN COURSE. By G. E. Pasnacht. Ex. fcap. Svo. *FiBST Yeab. Easy lessons and Rules on the Regular Accidence. Is. 6d. *Second Yeab. Conversational Lessons in Systematic Accidence and Elementary Syntax. With Philological Illustrations and Etymological Vocabulary. 33. 6d. Thtbd 1''eab. [In the Press. TEACHER'S COMPANION TO MACMILLAN'S PROGRESSIVE GERMAN COURSE. With copious Notes, Hints for Different Renderings, Synonyms, Philological Remarks, etc. ByG. E. Faskacht. Ex. fcap. Svo. Fibst Y'ear. 4s. 6d. Second Yeab. 4s. 6d. MACMILLAN'S GERMAN COMPOSITION. By G. E. Pasnacht. Ex. fcap. Svo. *I. FIRST COURSE. Parallel German-English Extracts and Parallel English- German Syntax. 2s. 6d. TEACHER'S COMPANION TO MACMILLAN'S GERMAN COMPOSITION. By G. E. Pasnacht. Fibst Course. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. MACMILLAN'S PROGRESSIVE GERMAN READERS. ByG. E. Pasnacht. Ex. fcap. Svo. *Fibst Yeab, containing an Introduction to the German order of Words, with Copious Examples, extracts from German Authors in Prose and Poetry; Notes, and Vocabularies. 2s. Qd. MACMILLAN'S PRIMARY SERIES OF GERMAN READING BOOKS. Edited by G. E. Pasnacht. With Notes, Vocabularies, and Exercises. Gl. Svo. *GRIMM— KINDER UND HAUSMARCHEN. By G. E. Pasnacht. 2s. 6d. *HAUFF— DIE KARA VANE. By Hebman Hageb, Ph.D., Lecturer in the Owens College, Manchester. 3s. *SCHMID, CHR. von— H. VON EICHENFELS. By G. E. Pasnacht. 2s. 6d. MACMILLAN'S FOREIGN SCHOOL CLASSICS. —Edited by G. E. Pasnacht. ISrao. FREYTAG (G.)-DOKTOR LUTHER. By P. Stobb, M.A., Headmaster of the Modern Side^ Merchant Taylors' School. [In preparation. *GOETHE— GOTZ VON BERLICHINGEN. By H. A. Bull, M.A., Assistant Master at Wellington. 2s. *GOETHE— FAUST. Pabt I., followed by an Appendix on Pabt II. By Jane Lee, Lecturer in German Literature at Newnham College, Cambridge. 4s. 6d. *HEINE— SELECTIONS PROM THE REISEBILDER AND OTHER PROSE WORKS. By C. Colbeck, M.A., Assistant Master at Harrow. 2s. 6d. GERMAN — MODERN GREEK — ITALIAN — SPANISH 21 LESSING— MINNA VON BARNHELM. By James Sime, M. A. [In preparation. *SCHILLER— SELECTIONS FROM SCHILLER'S LYRICAL POEMS. With a Memoir of Schiller. By E. J. Turner, B.A., and B. D. A. Morshead, M.A., Assistant Masters at Winchester. 2s. 6d. ^SCHILLER— DIB JUNGPRAU VON ORLEANS. By Joseph Gostwick. 2s. 6d. *SCHILLBR —MARIA ST U ART. By 0. Sheldon, D. Litt, , of the Royal Academ- ical Institution, Belfast. 2s. 6d. *SCHILLER— WILHELM TELL. By G.* E. Fasnacht. 2s. 6d. *SCHILLBR— WALLBNSTEIN. Part I. DAS LAGER. By H. B. Cotterill, M.A. 2s. *UHLAND— SELECT BALLADS. Adapted as a First Easy Reading Book for Beginners. With Vocabulary. By G. E. Fasnacht. Is. *PYLODET.— NEW GUIDE TO GERMAN CONVERSATION ; containing an Alpha- betical List of nearly 800 Familiar Words ; folloAved by Exercises, Vocabulary of Words in frequent use. Familiar Phrases and Dialogues, a Sketch of German Literature, Idiomatic Expressions, etc. By L. Pylodet. ISmo. 28. 6d. WHITNEY.— A COMPENDIOUS GERMAN GRAMMAR. By W. D. Whitney, Professor of Sanskrit and Instructor in Modem Languages in Yale College. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. A GERMAN READER IN PROSE AND VERSE. By the same. With Notes and Vocabulary. Cr. Svo. 5s. ^WHITNEY and EDGREN.— A COMPENDIOUS GERMAN AND ENGLISH DICTIONARY, with Notation of Correspondences and Brief Etymologies. By Prof. W. D. Whitney, assisted by A. H. Edgren. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. THE GBRMAN-ENGLISH PART, separately, 5s. MODERN GREEK. VINCENT and DICKSON.— HANDBOOK TO MODERN GREEK. By Sir Edoar Vincent, K.C.M.G., and T. G. Dickson, M.A. With Appendix on the relation of Modern and Classical Greek by Prof. Jebb. Cr. Svo. 6s. ITALIAN. DANTE.— THE PURGATORY OF DANTE. With Translation and Notes, by A. J. Butler, M.A. Cr: Svo. 12s. 6d. THE. PARADISO OP DANTE. With Translation and Notes, by the same. 2d. Ed. Cr. Svo. 12s. 6d. READINGS ON THE PURGATORIO OP DANTE. Chiefly based on the Com- mentary of Benvenuto Da Imola. By the Hon. W. Warren Vernon, M.A. With an Introduction by the Very Rev. the Dean of St. Paul's. 2 vols. Cr. Svo. 24s. SPANISH. OALDERON.— POUR PLAYS OP CALDERON. With Introduction and Notes. By Norman MacColl, M.A. Cr. Svo. 14s. The four plays here given are El Principe Constante, La Vicla es Sueno, El Alcaldr. de Zalamea, and El Escondido y La Tapada, 22 MATHEMATICS MATHEMATICS. Arithmetic, Book-keeping, Algebra, Euclid and Pure Geometry, Geometrical Drawing, Mensuration, Trigonometry, Analytical Geometry (Plane and Solid), Problems and Question* in Mathematics, Higher Pure Mathe- matics, Mechanics (Statics, Dynamics, Hydrostatics, Hydrodynamics : see also Physics), Physics (Sound, Light, Heat, Electricity, Elasticity, Attrac- tions, &c.), Astronomy, Historical. ARITHMETIC. *ALDIS.— THE GREAT GIANT ARITHMOS. A most Elementary Arithmetic for Children. By Mary Steadman Alms. Illustrated. Gl. 8vo. 2s. 6d. ARMY PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION, SPECIMENS OF PAPERS SET AT THE, 1882-89.— With Answers to the Mathematical Questions. Subjects: Arithmetic, Algebra, Euclid, Geometrical Drawing, Geography, French, English Dictation. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. *BRADSHAW.— A COURSE OF EASY ARITHMETICAL EXAMPLES FOR BEGINNERS. By J. G. Bradshaw, B.A., Assistant Master at Clifton College. Gl. 8vo. 2s. With Answers, 2s. 6d. *BROOKSMITH.— ARITHMETIC IN THEORY AND PRACTICE. By J. Brook- SMITH, M.A. Cr. Svo. 4s. 6d. KEY. Crown Svo, 10s. 6d. *BROOKSMITH.— ARITHMETIC FOR BEGINNERS. By J. and E. J. Bbook- SMITH. Gl. Svo. Is. 6d. CANDLER.— HELP TO ARITHMETIC. Designed for the use of Schools. By H. Candler, Mathematical Master of Uppingham School. 2d Ed. Ex. fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. *DALTON.— RULES AND EXAMPLES IN ARITHMETIC. By the Rev. T. Dal- TON, M.A., Assistant Master at Eton. New Ed., with Answers. ISmo. 2s. 6d. *GOYEN.— HIGHER ARITHMETIC AND ELEMENTARY MENSURATION. By P. GoYEN, Inspector of Schools, Dunedin, New Zealand. Cr. Svo. 5s. *HALL and KNIGHT.— ARITHMETICAL EXERCISES AND EXAMINATION PAPERS. With an Appendix containing Questions in Logarithms and Mensuration. By H. S. Hall, M.A., Master of the Military and Engineering Side, Clifton College, and S. R. Knight, B.A. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. LOCK.— Works by Rev. J. B. Lock, M.A., Senior Fellow and Bursar of Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. ^ARITHMETIC FOR SCHOOLS. With Answers and 1000 additional Examples for Exercise. 3d Ed., revised. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. KEY. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. *ARITHMETIC FOR BEGINNERS. A School Class-Book of Commercial Arith- metic. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. KEY. Cr, Svo. 8s. 6d. *A SHILLING BOOK OF ARITHMETIC, FOR ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS. ISmo. Is. With Answers. Is. 6d. *PEDLEY.— EXERCISES IN ARITHMETIC for the Use of Schools. Containing more than 7000 original Examples. By Samuel Pedley. Cr. 8vo. 5s. Also in Two Parts, 2s. 6d. each. SMITH.— Works by Rev. Barnard Smith, M.A., late Fellow and Senior Bursar of St. Peter's College, Cambridge. ARITHMETIC AND ALGEBRA, in their Principles and Application ; with numerous systematically arranged Examples taken from the Cambridge Exam- ination Papers, with especial reference to the Ordinary Examination for the B.A. Degree. New Ed., carefully revised. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. »ARITHMETIC FOR SCHOOLS. Cr. Svo. 43. 6d. KEY. Cr, Svo. Ss. 6d. BOOK-KEEPING — ALGEBRA 23 EXERCISES IN ARITHMETIC. Cr. 8vo. 2s. With Answers, 2s. 6d. An- swers separately, 6d. SCHOOL GLASS-BOOK OF ARITHMETIC. 18mo. 3s. Or separately, in Three Parts, Is. each. KEYS. Parts L, IL, and IIL, 2s. 6d. each. SHILLING BOOK OP ARITHMETIC. 18mo. Or separately. Part I., 2d. ; Part II., 3d. ; Part III., 7d. Answers, 6d. KEY. 18mo. 4s. 6d. *THE SAME, with Answers. 18mo, cloth. Is. 6d. EXAMINATION PAPERS IN ARITHMETIC. ISmo. Is. 6d. The Same, with Answers. ISmo. 2s. Answers, 6d. KEY. ISrao. 4s. 6d. THE METRIC SYSTEM OF ARITHMETIC, ITS PRINCIPLES AND APPLI- CATIONS, with Numerous Examples. ISmo. 3d. A CHART OF THE METRIC SYSTEM, on a Sheet, size 42 in. by34 in. on RoUer. 3s. 6d. Also a Small Chart on a Card. Price Id. EASY LESSONS IN ARITHMETIC, combining Exercises in Reading, Writing, Spelling, and Dictation. Part I. Cr. Svo. 9d. EXAMINATION CARDS IN ARITHMETIC. With Answers and Hints. Standards I. and II., in box. Is. Standards III., IV., and V., in boxes. Is. each. Standard VI. in Two Parts, in boxes, Is. each, A and B papers, of nearly the same difficulty, are given so as to prevent copying, and the colours of the A and B papers difler in each Standard, and from those of every other Standard, so that a master or mistress can see at a glance whether the children have the proper papers. BOOK-KEEPING-. *THORNTON.— FIRST LESSONS IN BOOK-KEEPING. By J. Thornton. Cr. Svo. 23. 6d. KEY. Oblong 4to. 10s. 6d. *PRIMER OF BOOK-KEEPING. 18mo. Is. KEY. Demy Svo. 2s. 6d. ALG-EBRA. *DALTON.— RULES AND EXAMPLES IN ALGEBRA. By Rev. T. Dalton, Assistant Master at Eton. Part I. ISmo. 2s. KEY. Cr. Svo. 78. 6d. Part II. ISmo, 2s. 6d. HALL and KNIGHT.— Works by H. S. Hall, M.A., Master of the Military and Engineering Side, Clifton College, and S. R. Knight, B.A. *ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA FOR SCHOOLS. 6th Ed., revised and corrected. Gl. Svo, bound in maroon coloured cloth, 3s. 6d. ; with Answers, bound in green coloured cloth, 4s. 6d. KEY. Ss, 6d. ^ALGEBRAICAL EXERCISES AND EXAMINATION PAPERS. To accom- pany ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA. 2d Ed., revised. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. *HIGHER ALGEBRA. 3d Ed. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. KEY. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. *JONES and CHEYNE.— ALGEBRAICAL EXERCISES. Progressively Ar- ranged. By Rev. C. A. Jones and 0. H. Cheyne, M.A., late Mathematical Masters at Westminster School. ISmo. 2s. 6d. KEY. By Rev. W. Failes, M.A., Mathematical Master at Westminster School. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. SMITH.— ARITHMETIC AND ALGEBRA, in their Principles and Application ; with numerous systematically arranged Examples taken from the Cambridge Examination Papers, with especial reference to the Ordinary Examination for the B.A. Degree. By Rev. Barnard Smith, M.A. New Edition, carefully revised. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. SMITH.— Works by Charles Smith, M.A., Master of Sidney Sussex College, Cambridge. *ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA. 2d Ed., revised. Gl. Svo. 43. 6d. *A TREATISE ON ALGEBRA. 2d Ed. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. KEY, Cr.Svo. 10.s, 6d. TODHUNTER.— Works by Isaac Todhunter, F.R.S. *ALGBBRA FOR BEGINNERS. ISmo. 28. 6d. KEY. Cr. Svo. 6s. 6d. 24 MATHEMATICS *ALQEBRA FOR COLLEGES AND SCHOOLS. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. KEY. Cr. 8vo, 10s. 6d. EUCLID AND PURE GEOMETRY. COOKSHOTT and WALTERS.— A TREATISE ON GEOMETRICAL CONICS. In accordance with the Syllabus of the Association for the Improvement of Geometrical Teaching. By A. Cockshott, M.A., Assistant Master at Eton, and Rev. F-. B. Walters, M.A., Principal of King William's College, Isle of Man. Cr. 8vo. 6s. CONSTABLE.— GEOMETRICAL EXERCISES FOR BEGINNERS. By Samuel Constable. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. OUTHBERTSON.— EUCLIDIAN GEOMETRY. By Francis Cuthbertson, M.A., LL.D. Ex. fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. DAY.— PROPERTIES OF CONIC SECTIONS PROVED GEOMETRICALLY. By Rev. H. G. Day, M.A. Part I. The Ellipse, with an ample collection of Problems. Cr. Svo. 8s. 6d. DEAKIN.— RIDER PAPERS ON EUCLID, BOOKS I. and IL By Rupert Deakin, M.A. ISmo. Is. DODGSON.— Works by Charles L. Dodgson, M.A., Student and late Mathematical Lecturer, Christ Church, Oxford. EUCLID, BOOKS I. and II. 6th Ed., with words substituted for the Alge- braical Symbols used in the 1st Ed. Cr. Svo. 2s. EUCLID AND HIS MODERN RIVALS. 2d Ed. Cr, Svo. 6s. CURIOSA MATHEMATICA. Part I. A New Theory of Parallels. 3d Ed. Cr. Svo. 2s. DREW.— GEOMETRICAL TREATISE ON CONIC SECTIONS. By W. H. Drew, M.A. New Ed., enlarged. Cr. Svo. 5s. DUPUIS.— ELEMENTARY SYNTHETIC GEOMETRY OF THE POINT, LINE AND CIRCLE IN THE PLANE. By N. F. Dupuis, M.A., Professor of Pure Mathematics in the University of Queen's College, Kingston, Canada. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. *HALL and STEVENS,— A TEXT-BOOK OF EUCLID'S ELEMENTS. In- eluding Alternative Proofs, together with additional Theorems and Exercises, classified and arranged. By H. S. Hall, M.A., and F. H. Stevens, M.A., Masters of the Military and Engineering Side, Clifton College. Gl. Svo. Book I., Is.; Books Land IL, Is. 6d.; Books I.-IV., 3s.; Books III.-IV., 2s. ; Books III-VL, 33.; Books V.-VL and XL, 2s. 6d.; Books L-VI. and XL, 4s. 6d.; Book XL, Is. [KEY. In preparation. HALSTED.— THE ELEMENTS OF GEOMETRY. By G. B. Halsted, Professor of Pure and Applied Mathematics in the University of Texas. Svo. 12s. 6d. HAYWARD.— THE ELEMENTS OP SOLID GEOMETRY, By R. B, Hayward, M.A., F.R.S. Gl, Svo, 3s. LOOK,— EUCLID FOR BEGINNERS. Being an Introduction to existing Text- Books. By Rev. J. B, Lock, M.A. [In the Press. MILNE and DAVIS,— GEOMETRICAL CONICS, Part I, The Parabola, By Rev. J. J. Milne, M.A., and R. F. Davis, M.A. Cr. Svo. 2s. RICHARDSON.— THE PROGRESSIVE EUCLID. Books I. and IL With Notes, Exercises, and Deductions. Edited by A. T. Richardson, M.A., Senior Mathe- matical Master at the Isle of Wight College. Gl. Svo, 2s. 6d, SYLLABUS OF PLANE GEOMETRY (corresponding to Euclid, Books I.-VI,)— Prepared by the Association for the Improvement of Geometrical Teaching, Cr, Svo, Sewed, Is. SYLLABUS OF MODERN PLANE GEOMETRY.— Prepared by the Association for the Improvement of Geometrical Teaching, Cr, Svo. Sewed, Is. *TODHUNTER.— THE ELEMENTS OF EUCLID. By I. Todhunter, F.R.S. ISmo, 3s. 6d, Books I, and II, Is. KEY. Cr. Svo. 6s. 6d, WILSON.— Works by Ven. Archdeacon Wilson, M.A., formerly Headmaster of Clifton College. ELEMENTARY GEOMETRY. BOOKS I.-V. Containing the Subjects of Euclid's first Six Books. Following the Syllabus of the Geometrical Associa- tion. Ex. fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. GEOMETRICAL DRAWING — TRIGONOMETRY 25 WILSON. — Works by Ven, Archdeacon "Wilson — contimt^d. SOLID GEOMETRY AND CONIC SECTIONS. With Appendices on Trans- versals and Harmonic Division. Ex. feap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. GEOMETRICAL DRAWING. EAGLES.— CONSTRUCTIVE GEOMETRY OF PLANE CURVES. By T. H. Eagles, M.A., Instructor in Geometrical Drawing and Lecturer in Architecture at the Royal Indian Engineering College, Cooper's Hill. Cr. 8vo. 12s. EDGAR and PRITCHARD. — NOTE - BOOK ON PRACTICAL SOLID OR DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY. Containing Problems with help for Solutions. By J. H. Edgar and G. S. Pritchard. 4th Ed., revised by A. Meeze. G1. 8vo. 4s. 6d. ^KITCHENER.— A GEOMETRICAL NOTE-BOOK. Containing Easy Problems in Geometrical Drawing preparatory to the Study of Geometry. For the Use of Schools. By F. E. Kitchener, M.A., Headmaster of the Newcastle-under- Lyme High School. 4to. 2s. MILLAR.— ELEMENTS OP DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY. By J. B. Millar, Civil Engineer, Lecturer on Engineering in the Victoria University, Manchester. 2d Ed. Cr. 8vo. 6s. PLANT.— PRACTICAL PLANE AND DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY. By E. 0. Plant. Globe 8vo. [In preparation. MENSURATION. STEVENS.— ELEMENTARY MENSURATION. With Exercises on the Mensura- tion of Plane and Solid Figures. By F. H. Stevens, M.A. G1. 8vo. [In pi'eparation. TEBAY.— ELEMENTARY MENSURATION FOR SCHOOLS. By S. Tebay. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. *T0DHUNTER.— MENSURATION FOR BEGINNERS. By Isaac Todhunter, P.R.S. ISmo. 2s. 6d. KEY. By Rev. Fr. L. McCarthy. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. TRIGONOMETRY. BEASLEY.— AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON PLANE TRIGONOMETRY. With Examples. By R. D. Beasley, M.A. 9th Ed., revised and enlarged. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. BOTTOMLEY.— FOUR-FIGURE MATHEMATICAL TABLES. Comprising Log- arithmic and Trigonometrical Tables, and Tables of Squares, Square Roots, and Reciprocals. By J. T. Bottomley, M.A., Lecturer in Natural Philosophy in the University of Glasgow. 8vo. 2s. 6d. HAYWARD.— THE ALGEBRA OF CO-PLANAR VECTORS AND TRIGONO- METRY. By R. B. Hayward, M.A., F.R.S., Assistant Master at Harrow. [In preparation. JOHNSON.— A TREATISE ON TRIGONOMETRY. By W. E. Johnson, M.A., late Scholar and Assistant Mathematical Lecturer at King's College, Cam. bridge. Cr. 8vo. 8s. 6d. LEVETT and DAVISON.— ELEMENTS OF TRIGONOMETRY. By Rawdon Levett and Charles Davison, Assistant Masters at King Edward's School, Birmingham. [In the Press. LOCK. — Works by Rev. J. B. Lock, M.A., Senior Fellow and Bursar of Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. ♦TRIGONOMETRY FOR BEGINNERS, as far as the Solution of Triangles. 3d Ed. Gl. 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY. Cr. 8vo. 6s. 6d. ♦ELEMENTARY TRIGONOMETRY. 6th Ed. (in this edition the chapter on logarithms has been carefully revised). Gl. 8vo. 4s. 6d. KEY. Cr. 8vo. 8s. 6d. HIGHER TRIGONOMETRY. 5th Ed. Gl. 8vo. 43. 6d. Both Parts complete in One Volume. Gl. 8vo. 7s. 6d. THE TRIGONOMETRY OF ONE ANGLE. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. 26 MATHEMATICS M'CLELLAND and PRESTON.— A TREATISE ON SPHERICAL TRIGONO- METRY. With applications to Spherical Geometry and numerous Examples. By W. J. M'Clelland, M.A., Principal of the Incorporated Society's School, Santry, Dublin, and T. Preston, M.A. Cr. 8vo. 8s. 6d., or : Part I. To the End of Solution of Triangles, 4s. 6d. Part II., 5s. MATTHEWS.— MANUAL OF LOGARITHMS. By G. F. Matthews, B.A. 8vo. 5s. net. PALMER.— TEXT -BOOK OF PRACTICAL LOGARITHMS AND TRIGONO- METRY. By J. H. Palmer, Headmaster, R.N., H.M.S. Cambridge, Devon- port. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. SNOWBALL.— THE ELEMENTS OF PLANE AND SPHERICAL TRIGONO- METRY. By J. C. Snowball. 14th Ed. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. TODHUNTER.— Works by Isaac Todhunter, F.R.S. ^TRIGONOMETRY FOR BEGINNERS. ISmo. 2s. 6d. KEY. Cr. Svo. Ss. 6d. PLANE TRIGONOMETRY. Cr. Svo. 6s. KEY. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. [A New Edition, revised by R. W. Hogg, M.A. In the Press. A TREATISE ON SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY. Cr. Svo. 4s. 6d. WOLSTENHOLME.— EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE IN THE USE OF SEVEN- FIGURE LOGARITHMS. By Joseph Wolstenholme, D.Sc, late Professor of Mathematics in the Royal Indian Engineering Coll., Cooper's Hill. Svo. 5s. ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY (Plane and Solid). DYER.-EXERCISES IN ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY. By J. M. Dyer, M.A., Assistant Master at Eton. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 4s. 6d. FERRERS.— AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON TRILINEAR CO-ORDIN- ATES, the Method of Reciprocal Polars, and the Theory of Projectors. By the Rev, N. M. Ferrers, D.D., F.R.S., Master of Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. 4th Ed., revised. Cr, Svo. 6s. 6d. FROST.— Works by Percival Frost, D.Sc, F.R.S., Fellow and Mathematical Lecturer at King's College, Cambridge. AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON CURVE TRACING. Svo. 12s. SOLID GEOMETRY. 3d Ed. Demy Svo. 16s. HINTS FOR THE SOLUTION OF PROBLEMS in the Third Edition of SOLID GEOMETRY. Svo. 8s. 6d. JOHNSON.— CURVE TRACING IN CARTESIAN CO-ORDINATES. By W. Woolsey Johnson, Professor of Mathematics at the U.S. Naval Academy, Annapolis, Maryland. Cr. Svo. 4s. 6d. M'CLELLAND. -THE GEOMETRY OF THE CIRCLE. By W J. M'Clelland, M.A. Cr. Svo. [In the Press. PUCKLE.— AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON CONIC SECTIONS AND AL- GEBRAIC GEOMETRY. With Numerous Examples and Hints for their Solu- tion. By G. H. Puckle, M.A. 5th Ed., revised and enlarged. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. SMITH.— Works by Charles Smith, M.A., Master of Sidney Sussex College, Cambridge. CONIC SECTIONS. 7th Ed. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. SOLUTIONS TO CONIC SECTIONS. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON SOLID GEOMETRY. 2d Ed. Cr. Svo. 9s. 6d. TODHUNTER.— Works by Isaac Todhunter, F.R.S. PLANE CO-ORDINATE GEOMETRY, as applied to the Straight Line and the Conic Sections. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. KEY. By C. W. Bourne, M.A., Headmaster of King's College School. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. EXAMPLES OF ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY OF THREE DIMENSIONS. New Ed., revised. Cr. Svo. 4s. MATHEMATICS 27 PROBLEMS AND QUESTIONS IN MATHEMATICS. ARlVrr PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION, 1882-1889, Specimens of Papers set at the. With Answers to the Mathematical Questions. Subjects : Arithmetic, Algebra, Euclid, Geometrical Drawing, Geography, French, English Dictation. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. CAMBRIDGE SENATE -HOUSE PROBLEMS AND RIDERS, WITH SOLU- TIONS:— 1875— PROBLEMS AND RIDERS. By A. G. Gbeenhill, F.R.S. Cr. 8vo. 8s. 6d. 1878-SOLUTIONS OP SENATE-HOUSE PROBLEMS. By the Mathematical Moderators and Examiners. Edited by J. W. L. Glaisher, F.R.S., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 12s. CHRISTIE.- A COLLECTION OF ELEMENTARY TEST-QUESTIONS IN PURE AND MIXED MATHEMATICS ; with Answers and Appendices on Synthetic Division, and on the Solution of Numerical Equations by Horner's Method. By James R. Christie, F.R.S. Cr. 8vo. 8s. 6d. CLIFFORD. -MATHEMATICAL PAPERS. By W. K. Clifford. Edited by R. Tucker. With an Introduction by H. J. Stephen Smith, M.A. 8vo. 30s. MILNE. — Works by Rev. John J. Milne, Private Tutor. WEEKLY PROBLEM PAPERS. With Notes intended for the use of Students preparing for Mathematical Scholarships, and for Junior Members of the Uni- versities who are reading for Mathematical Honours. Pott 8vo. 4s. 6d. SOLUTIONS TO WEEKLY PROBLEM PAPERS. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. COMPANION TO WEEKLY PROBLEM PAPERS. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. SANDHURST MATHEMATICAL PAPERS, for admission into the Royal Military College, 1881-1889. Edited by E. J. Brooksmith, B.A., Instructor in Mathe- matics at the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich. Cr. 8vo. 33. 6d. WOOLWICH MATHEMATICAL PAPERS, for Admission into the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich, 1880-1888 inclusive. Edited by E. J. Brooksmith, B.A. Cr. 8vo. 6s. WOLSTENHOLME.— Works by Joseph Wolstenholme, D.Sc, late Professor of Mathematics in the Royal Engineering Coll., Cooper's Hill. MATHEMATICAL PROBLEMS, on Subjects Included in the First and Second Divisions of the Schedule of Subjects for the Cambridge Mathematical Tripos Examination. New Ed., greatly enlarged. 8vo. 18s. EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE IN THE USE OF SEVEN -FIGURE LOG- ARITHMS. 8vo. 5s, HIG-HER PURE MATHEMATICS. AIRY.— Works by Sir G. B. Airy, K.C.B., formerly Astronomer-Royal. ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS. With Diagrams. 2d Ed. Cr. 8vo. 5s. 6d. ON THE ALGEBRAICAL AND NUMERICAL THEORY OF ERRORS OF OBSERVATIONS AND THE COMBINATION OF OBSERVATIONS. 2d Ed., revised. Cr. 8vo, 6s. 6d. BOOLE.— THE CALCULUS OP FINITE DIFFERENCES. By G. Boole. 3d Ed., revised by J. F. Moulton, Q.C. Cr. 8vo. lOs. 6d, GARLL.— A TREATISE ON THE CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS. By Lewis B. Oarll. Arranged with the purpose of Introducing, as well as Illustrating, its Principles to the Reader by means of Problems, and Designed to present in all Important Particulars a Complete View of the Present State of the Science. 8vo. 21s. EDWARDS.— THE DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. By Joseph Edwards, M.A. With Applications and numerous Examples. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. FERRERS. -AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON SPHERICAL HARMONICS, AND SUBJECTS CONNECTED WITH THEM. By Rev. N. M. Ferrers, D.D., F.R.S., Master of Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. Cr, 8vo. 78. 6d. 28 MATHEMATICS FORSYTH.— A TREATISE ON DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS. By Andkevv Russell Forsyth, F.R.S., Fellow and Assistant Tutor of Trinity College, Cambridge. 2d Ed. 8vo. 14s. FROST.— AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON CURVE TRACING. By Percival Frost, M.A., D.Sc. 8vo. 12s. GRAHAM.— GEOMETRY OF POSITION. By R. H. Graham. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. GREENHILL.— DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. By A. G. Greenhill, Professor of Mathematics to the Senior Class of Artillery Officers, Woolwich. New Ed. Cr. 8vo, 10s. 6d. APPLICATIONS OF ELLIPTIC FUNCTIONS. By the same. [In the Press. JOHNSON,— Works by William Woolsey Johnson, Professor of Mathematics at the U.S. Naval Academy, Annapolis, Maryland. INTEGRAL CALCULUS, an Elementary Treatise on the. Founded on the Method of Rates or Fluxions. 8vo. 9s. CURVE TRACING IN CARTESIAN CO-ORDINATES. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. A TREATISE ON ORDINARY AND DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS. Ex. cr. 8vo. 15s. KELLAND and TAIT.— INTRODUCTION TO QUATERNIONS, with numerous examples. By P. Kelland and P. G. Tait, Professors in the Department of Mathematics in the University of Edinburgh. 2d Ed. Cr, Svo, 7s, 6d, KEMPE.— HOW TO DRAW A STRAIGHT LINE : a Lecture on Linkages. By A B, Kempe. Illustrated. Cr. Svo, Is. 6d. KNOX.— DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS FOR BEGINNERS. By Alexandrr Knox. Fcap. 8vo, 8s, 6d. MUIR.— THE THEORY OF DETERMINANTS IN THE HISTORICAL ORDER OF ITS DEVELOPMENT. Parti. Determinants in General. Leibnitz (1693) to Cayley (1841). By Thos. Muir, Mathematical Master in the High School of Glasgow, Svo. 10s. 6d. RICE and JOHNSON.— DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS, an Elementary Treatise on the. Founded on the Method of Rates or Fluxions. By J. M. Rice, Professor of Mathematics in the United States Navy, and W. W. Johnson, Professor of Mathematics at the United States Naval Academy, 3d Ed,, revised and cor- rected. Svo. 18s. Abridged Ed. 9s. TODHUNTER.— Works by Isaac Todhunter, F.R.S. AN ELEMENTARr TREATISE ON THE THEORY OF EQUATIONS. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. A TREATISE ON THE DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS, Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. KEY. Cr. Svo, 10s. 6d. A TREATISE ON THE INTEGRAL CALCULUS AND ITS APPLICATIONS. Cr. Svo, 10s. 6d. KEY. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. A HISTORY OF THE MATHEMATICAL THEORY OF PROBABILITY, from the time of Pascal to that of Laplace, Svo, 18s, AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON LAPLACE'S, LAME'S, AND BESSEL'S FUNCTIONS. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d, MECHANICS: Statics, Dynamics, Hydrostatics, Hydrodynamics. (See also Physics.) ALEXANDER and THOMSON.— ELEMENTARY APPLIED MECHANICS, By Prof, T. Alexander and A. W. Thomson. Part II. Transverse Stress. Cr. Svo. lOs. 6d. BALL.— EXPERIMENTAL MECHANICS, A Course of Lectures delivered at the Royal College of Science for Ireland, By Sir R, S, Ball, F.R.S. 2d Ed. Illustrated, Cr. Svo. 6s. CLIFFORD.— THE ELEMENTS OF DYNAMIC. An Introduction to the Study of Motion and Rest in Solid and Fluid Bodies. By W. K, Clifford, Part I. — Kinematic. Cr. Svo. Books I. -Ill, 7s. 6d. ; Book IV. and Appendix, 6s. MECHANICS 29 OOTTERILL.— APPLIED MECHANICS : An Elementary General Introduction to the Theory of Structures and Machines. By J. H. Cotterill, P.R.S., Professor of Applied Mechanics in the Royal Naval College, Greenwich. 8vo. 183. OOTTERILL and SLADE.— LESSONS IN APPLIED MECHANICS. By Prof. J. H. Cotterill and J. H. Slade. Fcap. Svo. 5s. 6d. DYNAMIOS, SYLLABUS OF ELEMENTARY. Part I. Linear Dynamics. With an Appendix on the Meanings of the Symbols in Physical Equations. Prepared by the Association for the Improvement of Geometrical Teaching. 4to. Is. GANGUILLET and KUTTER.— A GENERAL FORMULA FOR THE UNIFORM FLOW OF WATER IN RIVERS AND OTHER CHANNELS. By E. Gan- auiLLET and W. R. Kutter, Engineers in Berne, Switzerland. Translated from the German, with numerous Additions, including Tables and Diagrams, and the Elements of over 1200 Gaugings of Rivers, Small Channels, and Pipes in English Measure, by Rudolph Hering, Assoc. Am. Soc. C.E., M. Inst. O.E,, and John C. Trautwine Jun., Assoc. Am. Soc. C.E., Assoc. Inst. C.B. Svo. 17s. GRAHAM. — GEOMETRY OF POSITION. By R. H. Graham. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. GREAVES.— Works by John Greaves, M.A., Fellow and Mathematical Lecturer at Christ's College, Cambridge. *STATICS FOR BEGINNERS. Gl. Svo. 3s. 6d. A TREATISE ON ELEMENTARY STATICS. 2d Ed. Cr. Svo. 6s. 6d. GREENHILL.— HYDROSTATICS. By A. G. Greenhill, Professor of Mathematics to the Senior Class of Artillery Officers, Woolwich. Cr. Svo. [In preparation. *HIOKS. -ELEMENTARY DYNAMICS OP PARTICLES AND SOLIDS. By W. M. Hicks, Principal and Professor of Mathematics and Physics, Firth Col- lege, Sheffield. Cr. Svo. 6s. 6d. JELLETT.— A TREATISE ON THE THEORY OF FRICTION. By John H. Jellktt, B.D., late Provost of Trinity College, Dublin. Svo. 8s. 6d. KENNEDY.— THE MECHANICS OF MACHINERY. By A. B. W. Kennedy, F.R.S. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 12s. 6d. LOOK.— Works by Rev. J. B. Lock, M.A. *BLEMENTARY STATICS. 2d Ed. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. ♦ELEMENTARY DYNAMICS. 3d Ed. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. MECHANICS FOR BEGINNERS. Gl. Svo. [In the Press. MACGREGOR.— KINEMATICS AND DYNAMICS. An Elementary Treatise. By J. G. MacGregor, D.Sc, Munro Professor of Physics in Dalhousie College, Halifax, Nova Scotia. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. IDs. 6d, PARKINSON.— AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON MECHANICS. By S. Parkinson, D.D., F.R.S., late Tutor and Prselector of St. John's College, Cambridge. 6th Ed., revised. Cr. Svo. 9s. 6d. PIRIE.— LESSONS ON RIGID DYNAMICS. By Rev. G. Pirie, M.A., Professor of Mathematics in the University of Aberdeen. Cr. Svo. 6s. ROUTE.— Works by Edward John Routh, D.Sc, LL.D., F.R.S., Hon. Fellow of St. Peter's College, Cambridge. A TREATISE ON THE DYNAMICS OF THE SYSTEM OF RIGID BODIES. With numerous Examples. Two Vols. Svo. Vol. I.— Elementary Parts. 5th Ed. 14s. Vol. IL— The Advanced Parts. 4th Ed. 14s. STABILITY OF A GIVEN STATE OP MOTION, PARTICULARLY STEADY MOTION. Adams Prize Essay for 1S77. Svo. Ss. 6d. ♦SANDERSON.- HYDROSTATICS FOR BEGINNERS. By P. W. Sanderson, M.A., Assistant Master at Dulwich College. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. TAIT and STEELE.— A TREATISE ON DYNAMICS OF A PARTICLE. By Professor Tait, M.A, and W. J. Steele, B.A 6th Ed., revised. Cr. Svo. 12s. TODHUNTER.— Works by Isaac Todhunter, F.R.S. ^MECHANICS FOR BEGINNERS. ISmo. 4s. 6d. KEY. Cr. Svo. 6s. 6d. A TREATISE ON ANALYTICAL STATICS. 5th Ed. Edited by Prof. J. D. Everett, F.R.S. Cr. Svo. 10s. Gd. 30 MATHEMATICS PHYSIOS : Sound, Light, Heat, Electricity, Elasticity, Attractions, etc. (See also Mechanics.) AIRY.— Works by Sir G. B. Aihy, K.C.B., formerly Astronomer-Royal. ON SOUND AND ATMOSPHERIC VIBRATIONS. With the Mathematical Elements of Music. 2d Ed., revised and enlarged. Or. 8vo. 9s. GRAVITATION : An Elementary Explanation of the Principal Perturbations in the Solar System. 2d Ed. Or. 8vo. 7s. 6d. CLAUSIUS.— MECHANICAL THEORY OP HEAT. By R. Clausius. Trans- lated by W. R. Bkowne, M.A. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. CmvnVTTNG.— AN INTRODUCTION TO THE THEORY OF ELECTRICITY. By LiNNiEUS CuMMiNO, M.A. , Assistant Master at Rugby. Illustrated. Or. Svo. 8s. 6d. DANIELL.— A TEXT-BOOK OF THE PRINCIPLES OF PHYSICS. By Alfred DAi^iELL, D.Sc. Illustrated. 2d Ed., revised and enlarged. 8vo. 21s. DAY.— ELECTRIC LIGHT ARITHMETIC. By R. E. Day, Evening Lecturer in Experimental Physics at King's College, London. Pott Svo. 2s. EVERETT.— UNITS AND PHYSICAL CONSTANTS. By J. D. Everett, P.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy, Queen's College, Belfast. 2d Ed. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 5s. FERRERS.— AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON SPHERICAL HARMONICS, and Subjects connected with them. By Rev. N. M. Ferrers, D.D., F.R.S., Master of Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. FESSENDEN. — PHYSICS FOR PUBLIC SCHOOLS. By C. Fessenden. Illustrated. Fcap. 8vo. [In the Press. GRAY.— THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF ABSOLUTE MEASUREMENTS IN ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM. By A. Gray, F.R.S.E., Professor of Physics in the University College of North Wales. Two Vols. Cr. Svo. Vol. I. 12s. 6d. [Vol. IL In the Press. ABSOLUTE MEASUREMENTS IN ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM. 2d Ed., revised and greatly enlarged. Fcap. Svo. 5s. 6d. IBBETSON.— THE MATHEMATICAL THEORY OP PERFECTLY ELASTIC SOLIDS, with a Short Account of Viscous Fluids. By W. J. Ibbetson, late Senior Scholar of Clare College, Cambridge. Svo. 21s. *JONES.— EXAMPLES IN PHYSICS. Containing over 1000 Problems with Answers and numerous solved Examples. Suitable for candidates preparing for the Intermediate, Science, Preliminary, Scientific, and other Examinations of the University of London. By D. E. Jones, B.Sc, Professor of Physics in the University College of Wales, Aberystwyth. Fcap. Svo. 3s. 6d. *ELEMENTARY LESSONS IN HEAT, LIGHT, AND SOUND. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d LOOKYER.— CONTRIBUTIONS TO SOLAR PHYSICS. By J. Norman Lockyer F.R.S. With Illustrations. Royal Svo. 31s. 6d. LODGE.— MODERN VIEWS OF ELECTRICITY. By Oliver J. Lodge, F.R.S. . Professor of Experimental Physics in University College, Liverpool. lUus' trated. Cr. Svo. 6s. 6d. LOEWY.— *QUESTIONS AND EXAMPLES ON EXPERIMENTAL PHYSICS Sound, Light, Heat, Electricity, and Magnetism. By B. Loewy, Examiner in Experimental Physics to the College of Preceptors. Fcap. Svo. 2s. *A GRADUATED COURSE OF NATURAL SCIENCE FOR ELEMENTARY AND TECHNICAL SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. By the same. In Three Parts. Part I. First Year's Course. Gl. Svo. 2s. LUPTON.— NUMERICAL TABLES AND CONSTANTS IN ELEMENTARY SCIENCE. By S. Lupton, M.A., late Assistant Master at Harrow. Ex. fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. MACFARLANE.— PHYSICAL ARITHMETIC. By A. Macfarlane, D.Sc, late Examiner in Mathematics at the University of Edinburgh. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. PHYSICS 81 *MAYER.— SOUND : A Series of Simple, Entertaining, and Inexpensive Experi- ments in the Phenomena of Sound. By A. M. Mayer, Professor of Physics in the Stevens Institute of Technology. Illustrated. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. *MAYER and BARNARD.— LIGHT : A Series of Simple, Entertaining, and In- expensive Experiments in the Phenomena of Light. By A. M. Mayer and 0. Barnard. Illustrated. Cr, 8vo, 2s. 6d. MOLLOY.— GLEANINGS IN SCIENCE : Popular Lectures on Scientific Subjects. By the Rev. Gerald Molloy, D.Sc, Rector of the Catholic University of Ireland. 8vo. 7s. 6d. NEWTON.— PRINCIPI A. Edited by Prof. Sir W. Thomson, P.R.S., and Prof. Blackburnb. 4to. 31s. 6d. THE FIRST THREE SECTIONS OF NEWTON'S PRINCIPIA. With Notes and Illustrations. Also a Collection of Problems, principally intended as Examples of Newton's Methods. By P. Frost, M.A., D.Sc. 3d Ed. Svo. 12s. PARKINSON.— A TREATISE ON OPTICS. By S. Parkinson, D.D., F.R.S., late Tutor and Prselector of St. John's College, Cambridge. 4th Ed., revised and enlarged. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. PEABODY.- THERMODYNAMICS OP THE STEAM-ENGINE AND OTHER HEAT-ENGINES. By Cecil H. Peabody, Associate Professor of Steam Engineering, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Svo. 21s. PERRY, — STEAM : An Elementary Treatise. By John Perry, Professor of Mechanical Engineering and Applied Mechanics at the Technical College, Finsbury. ISmo. 4s. 6d, PICKERING.— ELEMENTS OF PHYSICAL MANIPULATION. By Prof. Ed- ward C. Pickering. Medium Svo. Part I., 12s. 6d. Part II., 14s. PRESTON.— THE THIiPRY OF LIGHT, By Thomas Prkston, M.A, Illus- trated. Svo. 12s, 6d. THE THEORY OF HEAT, By the same Author. Svo, [In preparation. RAYLEIGH,— THE THEORY OF SOUND, By Lord Rayleigh, F.R.S. Svo. Vol. I., 12s. 6d. Vol. II., 12s. 6d. [Vol. III. In the Press. SHANN.— AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON HEAT, IN RELATION TO STEAM AND THE STEAM-ENGINE, By G, Shann, M.A, Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 4s. 6d, SPOTTISWOODE.— POLARISATION OF LIGHT, By the late W. Spottiswoode, F.R.S. Illustrated. Cr, Svo. 3s. 6d, STEWART,— Works by Balfour Stewart, F.R.S., late Langworthy Professor of Physics in the Owens College, Victoria University, Manchester. *PRIMER OF PHYSICS. Illustrated. With Questions. ISmo. Is, *LESSONS IN ELEMENTARY PHYSICS. Illustrated. Fcap, Svo, 4s, 6d, *QUESTIONS. By Prof. T, H, Core, Fcap. Svo. 2s. STEWART and GEE,— LESSONS IN ELEMENTARY PRACTICAL PHYSICS. By Balfour Stewart, F.R.S., and W, W, Haldane Gee, B.Sc. Cr. Svo. Vol, I, General Physical Processes, 6s. Vol, II. Electricity and Magnetism. 7s. 6d, [Vol. III. Optics, Heat, and Sound. In the Press. ^PRACTICAL PHYSICS FOR SCHOOLS AND THE JUNIOR STUDENTS OF COLLEGES. Gl, Svo. Vol. I, Electricity and Magnetism. 2s. 6d. [Vol. II, Optics, Heat, and Sound. In the Press. STOKES.— ON LIGHT. Burnett Lectures, delivered in Aberdeen in 1883-4-5. By Sir G. G. Stokes, F.R.S., Lucasian Professor of Mathematics in the University of Cambridge. First Course : On the Nature of Light, Second Course : On Light as a Means of Investigation, Third Course : On the Beneficial Effects of Light, Cr. Svo, 7s. 6d. \* The 2d and 3d Courses may be had separately, Cr, Svo, 2s, 6d, each, STONE,— AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON SOUND. By W. H. Stone, Illustrated, Fcap. Svo. 3s. 6d. TAIT.— HEAT, By P. G, Tait, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the University of Edinburgh. Cr. Svo. 6s. LECTURES ON SOME RECENT ADVANCES IN PHYSICAL SCIENCE. By the same. 3d Edition, Crown Svo, 9s. 82 MATHEMATICS TAYLOR.— SOUND AND MUSIC. An Blemeutaiy Treatise on the Physical Con- stitution of Musical Sounds and Harmony, including the Chief Acoustical Discoveries of Professor Helmholtz, By Sedley Taylob, M.A. Illustrated. 2d Ed. Ex. cr. 8vo. 8s. 6d. *THOMPSON. — ELEMENTARY LESSONS IN ELECTRICITY AND MAGNET- ISM. By SiLVANUS P. Thompson, Principal and Professor of Physics in the Technical College, Finsbury. Illustrated. New Ed., revised. Fcap. 8vo. 4s. 6d. THOMSON.— Works by J. J. Thomson, Professor of Experimental Physics in the University of Cambridge. A TREATISE ON THE MOTION OF VORTEX RINGS. Adams Prize Essay, 1882. 8vo. 6s. APPLICATIONS OF DYNAMICS TO PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. THOMSON.— Works by Sir W. Thomson, P.R.S., Professor of Natural Philosophy in the University of Glasgow. ELECTROSTATICS AND MAGNETISM, REPRINTS OF PAPERS ON. 2d Ed. 8vo. 18s. POPULAR LECTURES AND ADDRESSES. 3 Vols. lUustrated. Cr. Svo. Vol. I. Constitution of Matter. 6s. Vol. III. Navigation. [In the Press. TODHUNTER.— Works by Isaac Todhunter, F.R.S. AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON LAPLACE'S, LAME'S, AND BESSBL'S - FUNCTIONS. Crown Svo. 10s. 6d. A HISTORY OF THE MATHEMATICAL THEORIES OF ATTRACTION, AND THE FIGURE OF THE EARTH, from the time of Newton to that of Laplace. 2 vols. Svo. 24s. TURNER.— A COLLECTION OF EXAMPLES ON HEAT AND ELECTRICITY. By H. H. Turner, Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Cr. Svo. 2s. 6d. WRIGHT.— LIGHT : A Course of Experimental Optics, chiefly with the Lantern. By Lewis Wright. Illustrated. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. ASTRONOMY. AIRY.— Works by Sir G. B. Airy, K.C.B., formerly Astronomer-Royal. *POPULAR ASTRONOMY. 18mo. 4s. 6d. GRAVITATION : An Elementary Explanation of the Principal Perturbations in the Solar System. 2d Ed. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. OHEYNE.— AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON THE PLANETARY THEORY. By C. H. H. Cheyne. With Problems. 3d Ed. Edited by Rev. A. Freeman, M.A, F.R.AS. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. CLARK and SADLER.^THE STAR GUIDE. By L. Clark and H. Sadleb. Roy. Svo. 5s. CROSSLEY, GLEDHILL, and WILSON.— A HANDBOOK OF DOUBLE STARS. By E. Crossley, J. Gledhill, and J. M. Wilson. Svo. 21s. CORRECTIONS TO THE HANDBOOK OF DOUBLE STARS. Svo. Is. FORBES.- TRANSIT OF VENUS. By G. Forbes, Professor of Natural Philo- sophy in the Andersonian University, Glasgow. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. (K)DFRAY. — Works by Hugh Godfray, M. A., Mathematical Lecturer at Pembroke College, Cambridge. A TREATISE ON ASTRONOMY. 4th Ed. Svo. 12s. 6d. AN ELEMENTARY TREATISE ON THE LUNAR THEORY, with a brief Sketch of the Problem up to the time of Newton. 2d Ed., revised. Cr. Svo. 5s. 6d. LOOKYER.— Works by J. Norman Lockyer, F.R.S. *PRIMER OF ASTRONOMY. Illustrated. ISrao. Is. *ELEMENTARY LESSONS IN ASTRONOMY. With Spectra of the Sun, Stars, and Nebulae, and numerous Illustrations. 36th Thousand. Revised through- out. Fcap. Svo. 5s. 6d. •QUESTIONS ON LOCKYER'S ELEMENTARY LESSONS IN ASTRONOMY. By J. Forbes Robertson. ISmo, Is. 6d. ASTRONOMY — HISTORICAL 33 THE CHEMISTRY OF THE SUN. lUustrated. 8vo. 14s. THE METEORITIO HYPOTHESIS OP THE ORIGIN OF COSMICAL SYSTEMS. Illustrated. 8vo. 17s. net. THE EVOLUTION OF THE HEAVENS AND THE EARTH. Cr. 8vo. Illus- trated. [In the Press. LOCKYER and SEABROKE.— STAR-GAZING PAST AND PRESENT. By J. Norman Lockyer, F.R.S. Expanded from Shorthand Notes with the assistance of G. M. Seabroke, F.R.A.S. Royal Svo. 21s. NEWCOMB.— POPULAR ASTRONOMY. By S. Newcomb, LL.D., Professor U.S. Naval Observatory. Illustrated. 2d Ed., revised. Svo. 18s. HISTOBICAL. BALL.— A SHORT ACCOUNT OF THE HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS. By W. W. R. Ball, M.A. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. TODHUNTER.— Works by Isaac Todhttnter, F.R.S. A HISTORY OF THE MATHEMATICAL THEORY OP PROBABILITY, from the time of Pascal to that of Laplace. 8vo. 18s. A HISTORY OF THE MATHEMATICAL THEORIES OF ATTRACTION, AND THE FIGURE OF THE EARTH, from the time of Newton to that of Laplace. 2 vols. Svo. 24s. NATURAL SCIENCES. Chemistry ; Physical Greography, Geology, and Mineralogy ; Biology ; Medicine. (For MECHANICS, PHYSICS, and ASTRONOMY, see MATHEMATICS.) CHEMISTRY. ARMSTRONG.— A MANUAL OF INORGANIC CHEMISTRY. By Henry Arm- strong, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the City and Guilds of London Tech- nical Institute. Cr. Svo. [In preparation. »COHEN.— THE OWENS COLLEGE COURSE OF PRACTICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. By Julius B. Cohen, Ph.D., Assistant Lecturer on Chemistry in the Owens College, Manchester. With a Preface by Sir Henry Roscoe, F.R.S., and C. Schorlemmer, F.R.S. Fcap. Svo. 2s. Od. COOKE.— ELEMENTS OF CHEMICAL PHYSICS. By Josiah P. Cooke, Jun., Erving Professor of Chemistry and Mineralogy in Harvard University. 4th Ed. Svo. 21s. FLEISCHER.— A SYSTEM OF VOLUMETRIC ANALYSIS. By Emil Fleischer. Translated, with Notes and Additions, by M. M. P. MuiR, F.R.S.E. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. Ts. 6d. FRANKLAND.— A HANDBOOK OF AGRICULTURAL CHEMICAL ANALYSIS. By P. F. Frank LAND, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in University College, Dundee. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. HARTLEY.— A COURSE OF QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS FOR STUDENTS. By W. Noel Hartley, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry and of Applied Chemis- try, Science and Art Department, Royal College of Science, Dublin. Gl. Svo. 5s. mORNS.— PRACTICAL METALLURGY AND ASSAYING. A Text -Book for the use of Teachers, Students, and Assayers. By Arthur H. Hiorns, Prin- cipal of the School of Metallurgy, Birmingham and Midland Institute. Illus- trated. Gl. Svo. 6s. 84 NATURAL SCIENCES A TEXT-BOOK OF ELEMENTARY METALLURGY FOR THE USE OF STUDENTS. To which is added an Appendix of Examination Questions, em- bracing the whole of the Questions set in the three stages of the subject by the Science and Art Department for the past twenty years. By the same. Gl. 8vo. 4s. IRON AND STEEL MANUFACTURE. A Text-Book for Beginners. By the same. Illustrated. Gl. 8vo. 3s. 6d. MIXED METALS OR METALLIC ALLOYS. By the same. Gl. 8vo. 6s. JONES.— *THE OWENS COLLEGE JUNIOR COURSE OF PRACTICAL CHEM- ISTRY. By Francis Jones, F.R.S.E., Chemical Master at the Grammar School, Manchester. With Preface by Sir Henry Roscoe, F.R.S. Illustrated. Fcap. Bvo. 2s. 6d. ♦QUESTIONS ON CHEMISTRY. A Series of Problems and Exercises in Inorganic and Organic Chemistry. By the same. Fcap. Svo. 3s. ^ LAin)AUER.-:^BLOWPIPE ANALYSIS. By J. Landauer. Authorised English Edition by J. Taylor and W. E. Kay, of Owens College, Manchester. [New Edition in preparation. LOOKYER.— THE CHEMISTRY OP THE SUN. By J. Norman Lockyer, F,R.S. Illustrated. Svo. 14s. LUPTON.— CHEMICAL ARITHMETIC. With 1200 Problems. By S. Lupton, M.A. 2d Ed., revised and abridged. Fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. MANSFIELD.— A THEORY OF SALTS. By C. B. Mansfield. Crown Svo. 143. MELDOLA.— THE CHEMISTRY OF PHOTOGRAPHY. By Raphael Meldola, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the Technical College, Finsbury. Cr. Svo. 6s. MEYER. HISTORY OF CHEMISTRY. By Ernst von Meyer. Translated by George MoGowan, Ph.D. Svo. 14s. net. MIXTER.— AN ELEMENTARY TEXT-BOOK OF CHEMISTRY. By William G. MixTER, Professor of Chemistry in the ShefBeld Scientific School of Yale College. 2d and revised Ed. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. MUIR.— PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS. Specially ar- ranged for the first M.B. Course. By M. M. P. Muir, F.R.S.E., Fellow and Prae- lector in Chemistry at Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. Fcap. Svo. Is. 6d MUIR and WILSON.— THE ELEMENTS OF THERMAL CHEMISTRY. By M. M. P. Muir, F.R.S.E. ; assisted by D. M. Wilson. Svo. 12s. 6d. OSTWALD.— OUTLINES OF GENERAL CHEMISTRY (PHYSICAL AND THEORETICAL). By Prof. W. Ostwald. Translated by James Walker, D.Sc, Ph.D. Svo. 10s. net. RAMSAY.— EXPERIMENTAL PROOFS OF CHEMICAL THEORY FOR BE- GINNERS. By William Ramsay, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in Univer- sity College, London. Pott Svo. 2s. 6d. REMSEN.— Works by Ira Remsen, Professor of Chemistry in the Johns Hopkins University, U.S.A. COMPOUNDS OP CARBON : or, Organic Chemistry, an Introduction to the Study of. Cr. Svo. 6s. 6d. AN INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OP CHEMISTRY (INORGANIC CHEMISTRY). Cr. Svo. 6s. 6d. *THE ELEMENTS OF CHEMISTRY. A Text-Book for Beginners. Fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. A TEXT-BOOK OF INORGANIC CHEMISTRY. Svo. 16s. ROSCOE.— Works by Sir Henry E. Roscoe, F.R.S., formerly Professor of Chemistry in the Owens College, Victoria University, Manchester. *PRIMER OF CHEMISTRY. Illustrated. With Questions. ISmo. Is. ♦LESSONS IN ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY, INORGANIC AND ORGANIC. With Illustrations and Chromolitho of the Solar Spectrum, and of the Alkalies and Alkaline Earths. Fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d, ROSCOE and SCHORLEMMER.— INORGANIC AND ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. A Complete Treatise on Inorganic and Organic Chemistry. By Sir Henry E. Roscoe, F.R.S., and Prof. C. Sghorlemmer, F.R.S. Illustrated. Svo. Vols. I. and II. INORGANIC CHEMISTRY. Vol, I.— The Non-Metallic Ele- 2d Ed. 21s. Vol. II. Part I.— Metals. 18s. Part II.— Metals. ISs. PHYSICAL GEOGKAPHY — GEOLOGY 85 Vol. III.— ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. THE CHEMISTRY OP THE HYDRO- CARBONS and their Derivatives. Five Parts. Parts I., II., and IV. 21s. Parts III. and V. 18s. each. ROSGOE and SCHUSTER.— SPECTRUM ANALYSIS. Lectures delivered in 1868. By Sir Henry Roscoe, F.R.S. 4th Ed., revised and considerably en- larged by the Author and by A. Schuster, F.R.S., Ph.D., Professor of Applied Mathematics in the Owens College, Victoria University. With Appendices, Illustrations, and Plates. 8vo. 21s. *THORPE.— A SERIES OF CHEMICAL PROBLEMS. With Key. For use in Colleges and Schools. By T. E. LThorpe, B.Sc. (Vic), Ph.D., F.R.S. ReAised and Enlarged by W. Tate, Assoc.N.S.S. With Preface by Sir H. E. Roscoe, F.R.S. New Ed. Fcap. 8vo. 23. THORPE and RUGKER.— A TREATISE ON CHEMICAL PHYSICS. By Prof. T. B. Thorpe, F.R.S,, and Prof. A. W. RWcker, F.R.S. Illustrated. Svo. [In preparation. WILLIAMS. — ELEMENTS OF CRYSTALLOGRAPHY FOR STUDENTS OF CHEMISTRY, PHYSICS, AND MINERALOGY. By G. H. Williams, Ph.D. Cr. 8vo. WURTZ.— A HISTORY OF CHEMICAL THEORY. By Ad. Wurtz. Translated by Henry Watts, F.R,S. Crown 8vo. 63. PHYSICAL aEOQRAPHY, aEOLOGY, AND MINERALOGY. BLANFORD.— THE RUDIMENTS OP PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY FOR THE USE OF INDIAN SCHOOLS ; with a Glossary of Technical Terms employed. By H. P. Blanford, F.G.S. Illustrated. Cr. 8vo. 2s, 6d. FERREL,— A POPULAR TREATISE ON THE WINDS. Comprising the General Motions of the Atmosphere, Monsoons, Cyclones, Tornadoes, Waterspouts, Hailstorms, etc. By William Ferrel, M,A., Member of the American National Academy of Sciences. Svo. 18s. FISHER.— PHYSICS OP THE EARTH'S CRUST. By the Rev. Osmond Fisher, M.A., P.G.S., Hon. Fellow of King's College, London. 2d Ed., altered and en- larged. 8vo. 12s. GEIKIE. — Works by Archibald Geikie, LL.D,, P.R,S., Director-General of the Geological Survey of Great Britain and Ireland. *PRIMER OF PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. Illustrated. With Questions. 18mo. Is. ♦ELEMENTARY LESSONS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. Illustrated. Fcap, Svo, 4s, 6d. *QUESTIONS ON THE SAME. Is. 6d. *PRIMER OF GEOLOGY. Illustrated. ISmo. Is. *CLASS-BOOK OF GEOLOGY. Illustrated. New and Cheaper Ed. Cr. Svo. 48, 6d. TEXT-BOOK OF GEOLOGY. Illustrated. 2d Ed., 7th Thousand, revised and enlarged. Svo. 28s. OUTLINES OP FIELD GEOLOGY. Illustrated. Ex. fcap. Svo. 3s, 6d. THE SCENERY AND GEOLOGY OF SCOTLAND, VIEWED IN CONNEXION WITH ITS PHYSICAL GEOLOGY. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 12s. 6d. HUXLEY.— PHYSIOGRAPHY. An Introduction to the Study of Nature. By T. H. Huxley, F.R.S. Illustrated. New and Cheaper Edition. Cr. Svo. 6s. LOGKYER.— OUTLINES OF PHYSIOGRAPHY— THE MOVEMENTS OF THE EARTH. By J. Norman Lockyer, F.R.S,, Examiner in Physiography for the Science and Art Department. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. Sewed, Is, 6d. PHILLIPS. A TREATISE ON ORE DEPOSITS. By J. Arthur Phillips, F.R.S. Illustrated. Svo. 25s. ROSENBUSCH and IDDINGS,— MICROSCOPICAL PHYSIOGRAPHY OP THE ROCK-MAKING MINERALS: AN AID TO THE MICROSCOPICAL STUDY OF ROCKS. By H. Rosenbusch. Translated and Abridged by J. P. Iddings. Illustrated. Svo. 24s. NATURAL SCIENCES BIOLOO-Y. ALLEN.— ON THE COLOURS OP FLOWERS, as lUustrated in the Britisli Flora. By Grant Allen. Illustrated. Or. 8vo. 3s. 6d. BALFOUR.— A TREATISE ON COMPARATIVE EMBRYOLOGY. By F. M. Balfour, P.R.S., Fellow and Lecturer of Trinity College, Cambridge. Illus- trated. 2d Ed., reprinted without alteration from the 1st Ed. 2 vols. 8vo. Vol. L 18s. Vol. IL 21s. BALFOUR and WARD.— A GENERAL TEXT-BOOK OF BOTANY. By Isaac Bayley Balfour, F.R.S., Professorof Botany in the University of Edinburgh, and H. Marshall Ward, F.R.S., Professor of Botany in the Royal Indian Engineering College, Cooper's HiU. 8vo. [In preparation *BETTANY.-FIRST LESSONS IN PRACTICAL BOTANY. By G. T. Bettanf. 18mo. Is. *BOWER.— A COURSE OF PRACTICAL INSTRUCTION IN BOTANY. By P. O. Bower, D.Sc, Regius Professor of Botany in the University of Glasgow. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. BUOKTON. —monograph OP THE BRITISH CICADA, OR TETTIGID.®. By G. B. BucKTON. In 8 parts, Quarterly. Part I. January, 1890. 8vo. Parts I.-V. ready. 8s. each, net. Vol I. 33s. 6d. net. CHURCH and SCOTT. — MANUAL OF VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY. By Professor A. H. Church, and D. H. Scott, D.Sc, Lecturer in the Normal School of Science. Illustrated. Cr. 8vo. [In preparation. COPE.— THE ORIGIN OF THE FITTEST. Essays on Evolution. By E. D. Cope, M.A., Ph.D. 8vo. 12s. 6d. COUES.— HANDBOOK OF FIELD AND GENERAL ORNITHOLOGY. By Prof. Elliott Coues, M.A. Illustrated. 8vo. 10s. net. DARWIN.— MEMORIAL NOTICES OF CHARLES DARWIN, F.R.S., etc. By T. H. Huxley, F.R.S., G. J. Romanes, F.R.S., Archibald Geikie, F.R.S., and W. Thiselton Dyer, F.R.S. Reprinted from Nature. With a Por- trait. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. EIMER.— ORGANIC EVOLUTION AS THE RESULT OF THE INHERITANCE OF ACQUIRED CHARACTERS ACCORDING TO THE LAWS OF OR- GANIC GROWTH. By Dr. G. H. Theodor Eimer. Translated by J. T. Cunningham, F.R.S.E., late Fellow of University College, Oxford. 8vo. 12s. 6d. FEARNLEY.— A MANUAL OF ELEMENTARY PRACTICAL HISTOLOGY. By William Fearnley. Illustrated. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. FLOWER and GADOW.— AN INTRODUCTION TO THE OSTEOLOGY OF THE MAMMALIA. By W. H. Flower, F.R.S., Director of the Natural His- tory Departments of the British Museum. Illustrated. 8d Ed. Revised with the assistance of Hans Gadow, Ph.D., Lecturer on the Advanced Morphology of Vertebrates in the University of Cambridge. Cr, 8vo. 10s. 6d. FOSTER.— Works by Michael Foster, M.D., Professor of Physiology in the Uni- versity of Cambridge. *PRIMER OF PHYSIOLOGY. lUustrated. 18mo. Is. A TEXT-BOOK OF PHYSIOLOGY. Hlustrated. 6th Ed., largely revised. 8vo. Part I., comprising Book I. Blood— The Tissues of Movement, The Vascular Mechanism. 10s. 6d. Part IL, comprising Book II. The Tissues of Chemical Action, with their Respective Mechanisms— Nutrition. 10s. 6d. Part III. The Central Nervous System. 7s. 6d. OSTER and BALFOUR. — THE ELEMENTS OF EMBRYOLOGY. By Prof. Michael Foster, M.D., and the late F. M. Balfour, F.R.S., Professor of Animal Morphology in the University of Cambridge. 2d Ed., revised. Edited by A. Sedgwick, M.A., Fellow and Assistant Lecturer of Trinity CoUege, Cambridge, and W. Heape, M.A., late Demonstrator in the Morphological Laboratory of the University of Cambridge. Illustrated. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. FOSTER and LANGLEY.— A COURSE OF ELEMENTARY PRACTICAL PHYSIOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY. By Prof. Michael Foster, M.D., and J. N. Langley, F.R.S., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 6th Ed. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. BIOLOGY 37 GAMGEE.— A TEXT -BOOK OF THE PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY OF THE ANIMAL BODY. Including an Account of the Chemical Changes occurring in Disease. By A. Gamgee, M.D., F.R.S. Illustrated. 8vo. Vol. L 18s. GOODALE.— PHYSIOLOGICAL BOTANY. I. Outlines of the Histology of Phsenoganious Plants. II. Vegetable Physiology. By George Lincoln GooDALE, M.A., M.D., Professor of Botany in Harvard University. Svo. ,10s. 6d. GRAY.— STRUCTURAL BOTANY, OR ORGANOGRAPHY ON THE BASIS OP MORPHOLOGY. To which are added the Principles of Taxonomy and Phytogi'aphy, and a Glossary of Botanical Terms. By Prof. Asa Gray, LL.D. Svo. 10s. 6d. THE SCIENTIFIC PAPERS OF ASA GRAY. Selected by C. Sprague Sar- gent. 2 vols. Vol. I. Reviews of Works on Botany and Related Subjects, 1834-1887. Vol. IL Essays, Biographical Sketches, 1841-1886. Svo. 21s. HAMILTON.— A SYSTEMATIC AND PRACTICAL TEXT-BOOK OF PATHO- LOGY. By D. J. Hamilton, F.R.S.B., Professor of Pathological Anatomy in the University of Aberdeen. Illustrated. Svo. Vol. I. 25s. HARTIG.— TEXT -BOOK OF THE DISEASES OF TREES. By Dr. Robert Hartio. Translated by Wm. Somerville, B.Sc, D.CE., Lecturer on Forestry in the University of Edinburgh. Edited, with Introduction, by Prof. H. Marshall Ward. Svo. [In preparation. HGOKIiR.- Works by Sir Joseph Hooker, F.R.S., &c. *PRIMER OF BOTANY. Illustrated. ISmo. Is. THE STUDENT'S FLORA OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS. 3d Ed., revised. GI. Svo. 10s. 6d. HOWES.— AN ATLAS OF PRACTICAL ELEMENTARY BIOLOGY. By G. B. Howes, Assistant Professor of Zoology, Normal School of Science and Royal School of Mines. With a Preface by Prof. T. H. Huxley, F.R.S. 4to. 14s. HUXLEY.— Works by Prof. T. H. Huxley, F.R.S. ^INTRODUCTORY PRIMER OF SCIENCE. ISmo. Is. ^LESSONS IN ELEMENTARY PHYSIOLOGY. Illustrated. Fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. *QUESTIONS ON HUXLEY'S PHYSIOLOGY. By T. Alcock, M.D. ISmo. Is. 6d. HUXLEY and MARTIN.— A COURSE OF PRACTICAL INSTRUCTION IN ELEMENTARY BIOLOGY. By Prof. T. H. Huxley, F.R.S., assisted by H. N. Martin, F.R.S., Professor of Biology in the Johns Hopkins University, U.S.A. New Ed., revised and extended by G. B. Howes and D. H. Scott, Ph.D., Assistant Professors, Normal School of Science and Royal School of Mines, With a Preface by T. H. Huxley, F.R.S. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. KLEIN.— Works by E. Klein, F.R.S., Lecturer on General Anatomy and Physio- logy in the Medical School of St. Bartholomew's Hospital, Professor of Bacteriology at the College of State Medicine, London. MICRO-ORGANISMS AND DISEASE. An Introduction into the Study of Specific Micro-Organisms. Illustrated. 3d Ed., revised. Cr. Svo. 6s. THE BACTERIA IN ASIATIC CHOLERA. Cr. Svo. 6s. LANG.— TEXT-BOOK OF COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. By Dr. Arnold Lang, Professor of Zoology in the University of Zurich. Translated by H. M. Bernard, M.A., and M. Bernard. Introduction by Prof. E. Haeckel. 2 vols. Illus- trated. Svo. [In the Press. LANKESTER.— Works by E. Ray Lankester, F.R.S., Linacre Professor of Human and Comparative Anatomy in the University of Oxford. A TEXT-BOOK OP ZOOLOGY. Svo. [In preparation. THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE. Occasional Essays and Addresses. Svo. 10s. 6d. LUBBOCK.— Works by the Right Hon. Sir John Lubbock, F.R.S,, D.O.L. THE ORIGIN AND METAMORPHOSES OF INSECTS. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 33. 6d. 38 NATURAL SCIENCES ON BRITISH WILD FLOWERS CONSIDERED IN RELATION TO IN- SECTS. Illustrated. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. FLOWERS, FRUITS, AND LEAVES. Illustrated. 2d Ed. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. SCIENTIFIC LECTURES. 2d Ed. 8vo. 8s. 6d. FIFTY YEARS OF SCIENCE. Being the Address delivered at York to the British Association, August 1881. 5th Ed. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. MARTIN and MOALE.-ON THE DISSECTION OF VERTEBRATE ANIMALS. By Prof. H. N. Maetin and W. A. Moale. Cr. 8vo. [In preparation. MIVART.— LESSONS IN ELEMENTARY ANATOMY. By St. George Mivart F.R.S., Lecturer on Comparative Anatomy at St. Mary's Hospital. Illustrated, Fcap. 8vo. 6s. 6d. MtfLLER.— THE FERTILISATION OF FLOWERS. By Hermann Miller, Translated and Edited by D'Arcy W. Thompson, B.A., Professor of Biology in University College, Dundee. With a Preface by C. Darwin, F.R.S. Illus trated. 8vo. 21s. OLIVER.— Works by Daniel Oliver, F.R.S., late Professor of Botany in Uni versity College, London. *LESSONS IN ELEMENTARY BOTANY. Illustrated. Fcap. 8vo. 4s. 6d. FIRST BOOK OF INDIAN BOTANY. Illustrated. Ex. fcap. Svo. 6s. 6d. PARKER.— Works by T. Jeffery Parker, F.R.S., Professor of Biology in the University of Otago, New Zealand. A COURSE OP INSTRUCTION IN ZOOTOMY (VERTEBRATA). Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 8s. 6d. LESSONS IN ELEMENTARY BIOLOGY. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. [In tU Press. PARKER and BETTANY.— THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE SKULL. By Prof. W. K. Parker, F.R.S., and G. T. Bettany. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. ROMANES.— THE SCIENTIFIC EVIDENCES OF ORGANIC EVOLUTION. By George J. Romanes, F.R.S., Zoological Secretary of the Linnean Society. Cr. Svo. 2s. 6d. SEDGWICK.- A SUPPLEMENT TO F. M. BALFOUR'S TREATISE ON EM- BRYOLOGY. By Adam Sedgwick, F.R.S., Fellow and Lecturer of Trinity College, Cambridge. Illustrated. Svo. [In preparation. SHUFELDT.— THE MYOLOGY OF THE RAVEN {Corvus corax smuatus). A Guide to the Study of the Muscular System in Birds. By R. W. Shtjfeldt. Illustrated. Svo. 13s. net. SMITH.— DISEASES OF FIELD AND GARDEN CROPS, CHIEFLY SUCH AS ARE CAUSED BY FUNGI. By W. G. Smith, F.L.S. Illustrated. Fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. STEWART and CORRY.— A FLORA OF THE NORTH-EAST OF IRELAND. Including the Phanerogamia, the Cryptogamia Vascularia, and the Muscinese. By S. A. Stewart, Curator of the Collections in the Belfast Museum, and the late T. H. Corry, M.A., Lecturer on Botany in the University Medical and Science Schools, Cambridge. Cr. Svo. 5s. 6d. WALLACE.— DARWINISM : An Exposition of the Theory of Natural Selection, with some of its Applications. By Alfred Russel Wallace, LL.D., F.R.S. 3d Ed. Cr. Svo. 9s. WARD.— TIMBER AND SOME OF ITS DISEASES. By H. Marshall Ward, F.R.S., Professor of Botany in the Royal Indian Engineering College, Cooper's Hill. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 6s. WIEDERSHEIM.— ELEMENTS OP THE COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF VERTEBRATES. By Prof. R. Wiedersheim. Adapted by W. Newton Parker, Professor of Biology in the University College of South Wales and Monmouthshire. With Additions. Illustrated. 8vo. 12s. 6d. MEDICINE. BLYTH.— A MANUAL OF PUBLIC HEALTH. By A. Wynter Blyth, M.R.C.S. Svo. 17s. net. MEDICINE 39 BRUNTON.— Works by T. Lauder Brunton, M.D., F.R.S., Examiner in Materia Medica in the University of London, in tlie Victoria University, and in the Royal College of Physicians, London, A TEXT-BOOK OF PHARMACOLOGY, THERAPEUTICS, AND MATERIA MEDICA. Adapted to the United States Pharmacopoeia by F. H. "Williams, M.D., Boston, Mass. 3d Ed. Adapted to the New British Pharmacopoeia, 1885. 8vo. 21s. TABLES OF MATERIA MEDICA: A Companion to the Materia Medica Museum. Illustrated. Cheaper Issue. Svo, 5s. ON THE CONNECTION BETWEEN CHEMICAL CONSTITUTION AND PHYSIOLOGICAL ACTION, BEING AN INTRODUCTION TO MODERN THERAPEUTICS. Croonian Lectures. Svo. [In the Press. GRIFFITHS.— LESSONS ON PRESCRIPTIONS AND THE ART OF PRE- SCRIBING. By W. Handsel Griffiths. Adapted to the Pharmacopoeia, 1885. 18mo. 3s. 6d. HAMILTON.— A TEXT-BOOK OF PATHOLOGY, SYSTEMATIC AND PRAC- TICAL. ByD. J. Hamilton, F.R.S.E., Professor of Pathological Anatomy, University of Aberdeen. Illustrated. Vol. I. 8vo. 25s. KLEIN. — Works by E. Klein, F.R.S., Lecturer on General Anatomy and Physio- logy in the Medical School of St. Bartholomew's Hospital, London. MICRO-ORGANISMS AND DISEASE. An Introduction into the Study of Specific Micro-Organisms. Illustrated. 3d Ed., revised. Cr. Svo. 6s. THE BACTERIA IN ASIATIC CHOLERA. Cr. Svo. 5s. WHITE.— A TEXT -BOOK OF GENERAL THERAPEUTICS. By W. Halr White, M.D., Senior Assistant Physician to and Lecturer in Materia Medica at Guy's Hospital. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 8s. 6d. %* Contents : General Medical Climatology— Classification of Climates- Treatment of Disease by Climate — Treatment by Compressed Air— Oertel's Method of Treatment for Chronic Cardiac Disease— Diet— Diet in Different Diseases— On the Drinking of Water— Baths and other external applications of Water— Cold Water as an Antipyretic— Artificial Baths— On Lavage, or washing out the Stomach— Massage — The Weir Mitchell Method— Venesection — Electricity, Physical and Physiological Facts of Importance in Medicine— Electrodiagnosis— Electrotherapeutics— Hypnotism, its Mode of Production, Phenomena, and Subdivisions — The Therapeutic Applications of Hypnotism— Metallo-Therapy— Treatment of Diseases of the Spinal Cord by Suspension- General Treatment of Acute Diseases, Convalescence and Insomnia— Index. ZIEGLER—MACALISTER.— TEXT -BOOK OF PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY AND PATHOGENESIS. By Prof. E. Ziegler. Translated and Edited by Donald Macalister, M.A., M.D., Fellow and Medical Lecturer of St. John's College, Cambridge. Illustrated. Svo. Part I.— GENERAL PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. 2d Ed. 12s. 6d. Part II.— SPECIAL PATHOLOGICAL ANATOMY. Sections I.-VIII. 2d Ed. 12s. 6d. Sections IX.-XII. 12s. 6d. HUMAN SCIENCES. Mental and Moral Philosophy ; Political Economy ; Law and Politics ; Anthropology; Education. MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. BALDWIN.— HANDBOOK OF PSYCHOLOGY: SENSES AND INTELLECT. By Prof. J. M. Baldwin, M.A., LL.D. 2d Ed., revised. Svo. 123. 6d. BOOLE.— THE MATHEMATICAL ANALYSIS OF LOGIC. Being an Essay towards a Calculus of Deductive Reasoning. By George Boole. Svo. 6s. OALDERWOOD.— HANDBOOK OF MORAL PHILOSOPHY. By Rev. Henry Calderwood, LL.D., Professor of Moral Philosophy in the University of Edinburgh. 14th Ed., largely rewritten. Or. Svo. 6s. 40 HUMAN SCIENCES CLIFFORD.— SEEING AND THINKING. By the late Prof. W. K. Clifford, F.R.S. With Diagrams. Or. 8vo. 33. 6d. HOFFDING.— OUTLINES OF PSYCHOLOGY. By Prof. H. Hoffding. Trans- lated by M. E. Lowndes. Cr. 8vo. 6s. JAMES.— THE PRINCIPLES OF PSYCHOLOGY. By Wm. James, Professor of Psychology in Harvard University. 2 vols. 8vo. 25s. net. JARDINE.— THE ELEMENTS OF THE PSYCHOLOGY OF COGNITION. By Rev. Robert Jardine, D.Sc. 3d Ed., revised. Cr. 8vo. 6s. 6d. JEVONS.— Works by W. Stanley Jevons, F.R.S. *PRIMER OF LOGIC. 18mo. Is. *ELEMENTARY LESSONS IN LOGIC, Deductive and Inductive, with Copious Questions and Examples, and a Vocabulary of Logical Terms. Fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. THE PRINCIPLES OF SCIENCE. A Treatise on Logic and Scientific Method. New and revised Ed. Cr. 8vo. 12s. 6d. STUDIES IN DEDUCTIVE LOGIC. 2d Ed. Cr. 8vo. 6s. PURE LOGIC: AND OTHER MINOR WORKS. Edited by R. Adamson, M.A., LL.D., Professor of Logic at Owens College, Manchester, and Harriet A. Jevons. With a Preface by Prof. Adamson. Svo. 10s. 6d. KANT— MAX MtJLLER.- CRITIQUE OF PURE REASON. By Immanuel E[ant. 2 vols. Svo. 16s. each. Vol. I. HISTORICAL INTRODUCTION, by Ldd- wiG NoiRt ; Vol. II. CRITIQUE OF PURE REASON, translated by F. Max MIJLLER. KANT— MAHAFFY and BERNARD.— KANT'S CRITICAL PHILOSOPHY FOR ENGLISH READERS. By J. P. Mahaffy, D.D. , Professor of Ancient History in the University of Dublin, and John H. Bernard, B.D., Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin. A new and complete Edition in 2 vols. Cr. Svo. Vol. I. The Kritik of Pure Reason explained and defended. 7s. 6d. Vol. II. The Prolegomena. Translated with Notes and Appendices. 6s. KEYNES.— FORMAL LOGIC, Studies and Exercises in. Including a Generalisation of Logical Processes in their application to Complex Inferences. By John Neville Keynes, M.A. 2d Ed., revised and enlarged. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. McGOSH. — Works by James McCosh, D.D., President of Princeton College, PSYCHOLOGY. Cr. Svo. L THE COGNITIVE POWERS. 6s. 6d. II. THE MOTIVE POWERS. 6s. 6d. FIRST AND FUNDAMENTAL TRUTHS : being a Treatise on Metaphysics. Ex. cr. Svo. 9s. THE PREVAILING TYPES OF PHILOSOPHY. CAN THEY LOGICALLY REACH REALITY ? Svo. 3s. 6d. MAURICE.- MORAL AND METAPHYSICAL PHILOSOPHY. By P. D. Maurice, M.A., late Professor of Moral Philosophy in the University of Cam- bridge. Vol. I. — Ancient Philosophy and the First to the Thirteenth Centuries. Vol. II.— Fourteenth Century and the French Revolution, with a glimpse into the Nineteenth Century. 4th Ed. 2 a'oIs. Svo. 16s. *RAY. -A TEXT-BOOK OF DEDUCTIVE LOGIC FOR THE USE OF STUDENTS. By P. K. Ray, D.Sc, Professor of Logic and Philosophy, Presidency College, Calcutta. 4th Ed. Globe Svo. 4s. 6d. SIDGWICK.— Works by Henry Sidqwick, LL.D., D.C.L., Knightbridge Professor of Moral Philosophy in the University of Cambridge. THE METHODS OF ETHICS. 4th Ed. Svo. 14s. A Supplement to the 2d Ed., containing all the important Additions and Alterations in the 3d Ed. Svo. 6s. OUTLINES OF THE HISTORY OF ETHICS, for English Readers. 2d Ed., revised. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. VENN.— Works by John Venn, F.R.S., Examiner in Moral Philosophy in the University of London. THE LOGIC OF CHANCE. An Essay on the Foundations and Province of the Theory of Probability, with special Reference to its Logical Bearings and its Application to Moral and Social Science. 8d Ed., rewritten and greatly en- larged. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. POLITICAL ECONOMY 41 VENN. — Works by John Venn, F.'R.S.— continued. SYMBOLIC LOGIC. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. THE PEINCIPLBS OF EMPIRICAL OR INDUCTIVE LOGIC. 8vo. 18s. POLITICAL ECONOMY. BOHM-BAWERK.— CAPITAL AND INTEREST. Translated by William Smart, M.A. 8vo. 14s. THE POSITIVE THEORY OF CAPITAL. By the same Author and Ti-anslator. 8vo. [In the Press. CAIRNES.-THE CHARACTER AND LOGICAL METHOD OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. By J. E, Cairnes. Cr. 8vo. 6s. SOME LEADING PRINCIPLES OF POLITICAL ECONOMY NEWLY EX- POUNDED. By the same. 8vo. 14s. COSSA.— GUIDE TO THE STUDY OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. By Dr. L. CossA. Translated. With a Preface by W. S. Jevons, F.R.S. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. *FAWCETT.— POLITICAL ECONOMY FOR BEGINNERS, WITH QUESTIONS. By Mrs. Henry Fawcett. 7th Ed. 18mo. 2s. 6d. FAWCETT.— A MANUAL OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. By the Right Hon.lHENRY Fawcett, F.R.S. 7th Ed., revised. With a Chapter on " State Socialism and the Nationalisation of the Land," and an Index. Cr. 8vo. 12s. 6d. AN EXPLANATORY DIGEST of the above. By C. A. Waters, B.A. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. GILMAN.— PROFIT-SHARING BETWEEN EMPLOYER AND EMPLOYEE. A Study in the Evolution of the Wages System. By N. P. Gilman. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. GUNTON.— WEALTH AND PROGRESS : A Critical Examination of the Wages Question and its Economic Relation to Social Reform. By George Gunton. Cr. 8vo. 6s. HOWELL.— THE CONFLICTS OF CAPITAL AND LABOUR HISTORICALLY AND ECONOMICALLY CONSIDERED. Being a History and Review of the Trade Unions of Great Britain, showing their Origin, Progress, Constitution, and Objects, in their varied Political, Social, Economical, and Industrial Aspects. By George Howell, M.P. 2d Ed., revised. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. JEVONS.— Works by W. Stanley Jevons, F.R.S. *PRIMER OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. 18mo. Is. THE THEORY OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. 3d Ed., revised. 8vo. 10s. 6d. KEYNES.— THE SCOPE AND METHOD OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. By MARSHALL.— THE ECONOMICS OF INDUSTRY. By A. Marshall, M.A., Professor of Political Economy in the University of Cambridge, and Mary P. Marshall. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. MARSHALL. -PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS. By Alfred Marshall, M.A. 2 vols. 8vo. Vol. I. 12s. 6d. net. PALGRAVE.— A DICTIONARY OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. By various Writers. Edited by R. H. Inglis Palgrave, P.R.S. 3s. 6d. each, net. [No. I. May 1891. PANTALEONI.— MANUAL OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. By Prof. M. Panta- LEONi. Translated by T. Boston Bruce. [In preparation. SIDGWICK.— THE PRINCIPLES OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. By Henry Sidgwick, LL.D., D.C.L., Knightbridge Professor of Moral Philosophy in the University of Cambridge. 2d Ed., revised. 8vo. 16s. WALKER.— Works by Francis A. Walker, M.A. FIRST LESSONS IN POLITICAL ECONOMY. Cr. 8vo. 53. A BRIEF TEXT-BOOK OF POLITICAL ECONOMY. Cr. 8vo. 6s. 6d. POLITICAL ECONOMY. 2d Ed., revised and enlarged. 8vo. 12s. 6d. THE WAGES QUESTION. 8vo. 14s. *WIOKSTEED.— ALPHABET OF ECONOMIC SCIENCE. By Philip H. Wick- steed, M.A. Part I. Elements of the Theory of Value or Worth. Gl. Svu 28. 6d. 42 HUMAN SCIENCES LATV AND POLITICS. ADAMS and CUNNINGHAM.— THE SWISS CONFEDERATION. By Sir F. O, Adams and C. Cunningham. 8vo. 14s. ANGLO-SAXON LAW, ESSAYS ON.— Contents : Anglo-Saxon Law Courts, Land and Family Law, and Legal Procedure. 8vo. 18s. BALL.— THE STUDENT'S GUIDE TO THE BAR. By Walteb W. R. Ball, M. A., Fellow and Assistant Tutor of Trinity CoUege, Cambridge. 4th Ed., revised. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. BIGELOW.— HISTORY OF PROCEDURE IN ENGLAND FROM THE NORMAN CONQUEST. The Norman Period, 1066-1204. By Melville M. Bigelow, Ph.D., Harvard University. 8vo. 16s. BOUTMY. — STUDIES IN CONSTITUTIONAL LAW. By Emile BouxMy. Translated by Mrs. Dicey, with Preface by Prof. A. V. Dicey. Crown 8vo. [In the Press. THE ENGLISH CONSTITUTION. Translated by Mrs. Eaden, with Introduc- tion by Sir F. Pollock, Bart. Cr. 8vo. 6s. BRYOE.— THE AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH. By James Bryce, M.P. , D.C.L., Regius Professor of Civil Law in the University of Oxford. Two Volumes. Ex. cr. 8vo. 25s. Part I. The National Government. Part II. The State Governments. Part III. The Party System. Part IV. Public Opinion. Part V. Illustrations and Reflections. Part VI. Social Institutions. *BUCKLAND.— OUR NATIONAL INSTITUTIONS. A Short Sketch for Schools. By Anna Buckland. With Glossary. 18mo. Is. CHERRY.— LECTURES ON THE GROWTH OF CRIMINAL LAW IN ANCIENT COMMUNITIES. By R. R. Cherry, LL.D., Reid Professor of Constitutional and Criminal Law in the University of Dublin. Svo. 5s. net. DICEY.— INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF THE LAW OF THE CONSTITU- TION. By A. V. Dicey, B.C.L., Vinerian Professor of English Law in the University of Oxford. 3d Ed. 8vo. 12s. 6d. DILKE.— PROBLEMS OF GREATER BRITAIN. By the Right Hon. Sir Charles Wentworth Dilke. With Maps. 4th Ed. Ex. cr. Svo. 12s. 6d. DONISTHORPE.— INDIVIDUALISM : A System of Politics. By Wordsworth Donisthorpe. Svo. 14s. ENGLISH CITIZEN, THE.— A Series of Short Books on his Rights and Responsi- bilities. Edited by Henry Craik, LL.D. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. each. CENTRAL GOVERNMENT. By H. D. Traill, D.C.L. THE ELECTORATE AND THE LEGISLATURE. By Spencer Walpole. THE POOR LAW. By Rev. T. W. Fowle, M.A. New Ed. With Appendix. THE NATIONAL BUDGET ; THE NATIONAL DEBT ; TAXES AND RATES. By A. J. Wilson. THE STATE IN RELATION TO LABOUR. By W. Stanley Jevons, LL.D. THE STATE AND THE CHURCH. By the Hon. Arthur Elliot. FOREIGN RELATIONS. By Spencer Walpole. THE STATE IN ITS RELATION TO TRADE. By Sir T. H. Farrer, Bart. LOCAL GOVERNMENT. By M. D. Chalmers, M.A. THE STATE IN ITS RELATION TO EDUCATION. By Henry Craik, LL.D. THE LAND LAWS. By Sir F. Pollock, Bart., Professor of Jurisprudence in the University of Oxford. COLONIES AND DEPENDENCIES. Part L INDIA. By J. S. Cotton, M.A. II. THE COLONIES. By E. J. Payne, M.A. JUSTICE AND POLICE. By F. W. Maitland. THE PUNISHMENT AND PRE VENTION OF CRIME. By Colonel Sir Edmund DU Cane, K.C.B., Chairman of Commissioners of Prisons. FISKE.— CIVIL GOVERNMENT IN THE UNITED STATES CONSIDERED WITH SOME REFERENCE TO ITS ORIGINS. By John Fiske, formerly Lecturer on Philosophy at Harvard University. Cr. Svo. 6s. 6d. HOLMES.— THE COMMON LAW. By O. W. Holmes, Jun. Demy Svo. 128. ANTHROPOLOGY^ — EDUCATION 43 MAITLAND.— PLEAS OP THE CROWN FOR THE COUNTY OP GLOUCESTER BEFORE THE ABBOT OP READING AND HIS FELLOW JUSTICES ITINERANT, IN THE FIFTH YEAR OF THE REIGN OP KING HENRY THE THIRD, AND THE YEAR OP GRACE 1221. By P. W. Maitland. 8vo. 7s. 6d. PATERSON.— Works by James Paterson, Barrister-at-Law. COMMENTARIES ON THE LIBERTY OF THE SUBJECT, AND THE LAWS OF ENGLAND RELATING TO THE SECURITY OF THE PERSON. Cheaper Issue. Two Vols. Cr, 8vo. 21s. THE LIBERTY OP THE PRESS, SPEECH, AND PUBLIC WORSHIP. Being Commentaries on the Liberty of the Subject and the Laws of England. Cr. 8vo. 12s. PHILLIMORE.-PRIVATE LAW AMONG THE ROMANS. Prom the Pandects. By J. G. Phillimore, Q.C. Svo. 16s. POLLOCK— ESSAYS IN JURISPRUDENCE AND ETHICS. By Sir Frederick Pollock, Bart., Corpus Christi Professor of Jurisprudence in the University of Oxford. Svo. 10s. 6d. INTRODUCTION TO THE HISTORY OF THE SCIENCE OP POLITICS. By the same. Cr. Svo. 2s. 6d. RICHEY.— THE IRISH LAND LAWS. By Alex. G. Richey, Q.C, Deputy Regius Professor of Feudal English Law in the University of Dublin. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. SIDGWIOK.— THE ELEMENTS OP POLITICS. By Henry Sidgwick, LL.D. Svo. [In the Press. STEPHEN.— Works by Sir J. Pitzjames Stephen, Q.C, K.C.S.L A DIGEST OP THE LAW OF EVIDENCE. 5th Ed., revised and enlarged. Cr. Svo. 6s. A DIGEST OP THE CRIMINAL LAW : CRIMES AND PUNISHMENTS. 4th Ed., revised. Svo. 16s. A DIGEST OF THE LAW OP CRIMINAL PROCEDURE IN INDICTABLE OFFENCES. By Sir J. P. Stephen, K.C.S.L, and H. Stephen, LL.M., of the Inner Temple, Barrister-at-Law. Svo. 12s. 6d. A HISTORY OF THE CRIMINAL LAW OP ENGLAND. Three Vols. Svo. 48s. GENERAL VIEW OF THE CRIMINAL LAW OF ENGLAND. 2d Ed. Svo. 14s. The first edition of this work was published in 1863. The new edition is substantially a new work, intended as a text-book on the Criminal Law for University and other Students, adapted to the present day. ANTHROPOLOGY. DAWKINS.— EARLY MAN IN BRITAIN AND HIS PLACE IN THE TER- TIARY PERIOD. By Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins. Medium Svo. 25s. FRAZER.— THE GOLDEN BOUGH. A Study in Comparative Religion. By J. G. Prazer, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 2 vols. Svo. 28s. M'LENNAN.— THE PATRIARCHAL THEORY. Based on the papers of the late John P. M'Lennan. Edited by Donald M'Lennan, M.A., Barrister-at-Law. Svo. 14s. STUDIES IN ANCIENT HISTORY. Comprising a Reprint of "Primitive Marriage." An inquiry into the origin of the form of capture in Marriage Ceremonies. Svo. 16s. TYLOR.— ANTHROPOLOGY. An Introduction to the Study of Man and Civilisa- tion. By E. B. Tylor, F.R.S. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. WESTERMARGK.— THE HISTORY OF HUMAN MARRIAGE. By Dr Edward Westermarck. [In preparation. EDUCATION. ARNOLD.- REPORTS ON ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS. 1852-1882. By Matthew Arnold, D.C.L. Edited by the Right Hon. Sir Francis Sandford, K.C.B. Cheaper Issue. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. HIGHER SCHOOLS AND UNIVERSITIES IN GERMANY. By the same. Crown Svo. 6s. 44 TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE BALL.— THE STUDENT'S GUIDE TO THE BAR. By Walter W. R. Ball, M.A., Fellow and Assistant Tutor of Trinity College, Cambridge. 4th Ed., revised. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. *BLAKISTON.— THE TEACHER. Hints on School Management. A Handbook for Managers, Teachers' Assistants, and Pupil Teachers. By J. R. Blakiston. Or. 8vo. 2s. 6d. (Recommended by the London, Birmingham, and Leicester School Boards.) CALDERWOOD.— ON TEACHING. By Prof. Henry Calderwood. New Ed. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. FEARON.-SCHOOL INSPECTION. By D. R. Fearon. 6th Ed. Cr. Svo. 2s. 6d. FITCH.— NOTES ON AMERICAN SCHOOLS AND TRAINING COLLEGES. Reprinted from the Report of the English Education Department for 1888-89, with permission of the Controller of H.M.'s Stationery Office. By J. G. Fitch, M.A. G1. Svo. 2s. 6d. GEIKIE.— THE TEACHING OF GEOGRAPHY. A Practical Handbook for the use of Teachers. By Archibald Geikie, F.R.S., Director -General of the Geological Survey of the United Kingdom. Cr. Svo. 2s. GLADSTONE.— SPELLING REFORM FROM A NATIONAL POINT OF VIEW. By J. H. Gladstone. Cr. Sa'o. Is. 6d. HERTEL.— OVERPRESSURE IN HIGH SCHOOLS IN DENMARK. By Dr. Hertel. Translated by C. G. Sorensen. With Introduction by Sir J. Crichton-Browne, F.R.S. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. TODHUNTER.— THE CONFLICT OF STUDIES. By Isaac Todhunter, F.R.S. Svo. 10s. 6d. TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE. (See also MECHANICS, LAW, and MEDICINE.) Civil and Mechanical Engineering; Military and Naval Science; Agriciiltiire ; Domestic Economy ; Book-Keeping. CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. ALEXANDER and THOMSON.— ELEMENTARY APPLIED MECHANICS. By T. Alexander, Professor of Civil Engineering, Trinity College, Dublin, and A. W. Thomson, Professor at College of Science, Poona, India. Part II. Transverse Stress. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. CHALMERS. -GRAPHICAL DETERMINATION OF FORCES IN ENGINEER- ING STRUCTURES. By J. B. Chalmers, C.E. Illustrated. 8vo. 24s. COTTERILL.— APPLIED MECHANICS : An Elementary General Introduction to the Theory of Structures and Machines. By J. H. Cottertll, F.R.S., Pro- fessor of Applied Mechanics in the Royal Naval College, Greenvi^ich. 2d Ed. 8vo. 18s. COTTERILL and SLADE.— LESSONS IN APPLIED MECHANICS. By Prof. J. H. Cotterill and J. H. Slade. Fcap. 8vo. 5s. 6d. GRAHAM. — GEOMETRY OF POSITION. By R. H. Graham. Ct. Svo. 7s. 6d. KENNEDY.— THE MECHANICS OF MACHINERY. By A. B. W. Kennedy, F.R.S. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. 12s. 6d. WHITHAM.— STEAM-ENGINE DESIGN. For the Use of Mechanical Engineers, Students, and Draughtsmen. By J. M. Whitham, Professor of Engineering, Arkansas Industrial University. Illustrated. Svo. 25s. YOUNG.— SIMPLE PRACTICAL METHODS OF CALCULATING STRAINS ON GIRDERS, ARCHES, AND TRUSSES. With a Supplementa,ry Essay on Economy in Suspension Bridges. By B. W. Young, C.E. With Diagrams. Svo. 7s. 6d. MILITARY AND NAVAL SCIENCE. AITKEN.— THE GROWTH OF THE RECRUIT AND YOUNG SOLDIER. With a view to the selection of "Growing Lads" for the Army, and a Regulated System of Training for Recruits. By Sir W. Aitken, F.R.S., Professor of Pathology in the Army Medical School. Cr. Svo. 8s. 6d. MILITARY SCIENCE — AGRICULTURE 45 ARMY PRELEMINARY EXAMINATION, 1882-1889, Specimens of Papers set at the. With Answers to the Mathematical Questions. Subjects : Arithmetic, Algebra, Euclid, Geometrical Drawing, Geography, French, English Dictation. Cr. 8vo. 33. 6d. MATTHEWS.— MANUAL OF LOGARITHMS. By G. F. Matthews, B.A. 8vo. MERCUR.— ELEMENTS OP THE ART OF WAR. Prepared for the use of Cadets of the United States Military Academy. By James Mercur, Professor of Civil Engineering at the United States Academy, West Point, New York, 2d Ed., revised and corrected. 8vo. 17s. PALMER.— TEXT -BOOK OF PRACTICAL LOGARITHMS AND TRIGONO- METRY. By J. H. Palmer, Head Schoolmaster, R.N., H.M.S. Cambridge, Devonport. Gl. Svo. 4s. 6d. ROBINSON.— TREATISE ON MARINE SURVEYING. Prepared for the use of younger Naval Officers. With Questions for Examinations and Exercises principally from the Papers of the Royal Naval College. With the results. By Rev. John L. Robinson, Chaplain and Instructor in the Royal Naval College, Greenwich. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. Vs. 6d. SANDHURST MATHEMATICAL PAPERS, for Admission into the Royal Military College, 1881-1889. Edited by E. J. Brooksmith, B.A., Instructor in Mathe- matics at the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. SHORTLAND.— NAUTICAL SURVEYING. By the late Vice- Admiral Shortland, LL.D. Svo. 2l8. THOMSON.— POPULAR LECTURES AND ADDRESSES. By Sir William Thomson, LL.D., P.R.S. In 8 vols. Illustrated. Cr. Svo. Vol. III. Papers on Navigation. [In the Press. WILELINSON.— THE BRAIN OP AN ARMY. A Popular Account of the German General Staff. By Spenser Wilkinson. Cr. Svo. 2s. 6d. WOLSELEY.— Works by General Viscount Wolseley, G.C.M.G. THE SOLDIER'S POCKET-BOOK FOR FIELD SERVICE. 6th Ed., revised and enlarged. 16mo. Roan. 5s. FIELD POCKET-BOOK FOR THE AUXILIARY FORCES. 16mo. Is. 6d. WOOLWICH MATHEMATICAL PAPERS, for Admission into the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich, 1S80-18SS inclusive. Edited by E. J. Brooksmith, B.A., Instructor in Mathematics at the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich. Cr. Svo. 6s. AGRICULTURE. FRANKLAND.— AGRICULTURAL CHEMICAL ANALYSIS, A Handbook of. By Percy F. Frankland, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry, University College, Dundee. Founded upon Leitfaden fur die Agriculture Chemiche Analyse, von Dr. F. Krooker. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. HARTIG.— TEXT -BOOK OF THE DISEASES OF TREES. By Dr. Robert Hartig. Translated by Wm. Somerville, B.Sc, D.CE., Lecturer on Forestry in the University of Edinburgh. Edited, with Introduction, by Prof. H. Marshall Ward. Svo. [In preparation. LASLETT.— TIMBER AND TIMBER TREES, NATIVE AND FOREIGN. By Thomas Laslett. Cr. Svo. 8s. 6d. SMITH.— DISEASES OF FIELD AND GARDEN CROPS, CHIEFLY SUCH AS ARE CAUSED BY FUNGI. By Worthington G. Smith, F.L.S. Illustrated. Fcap. Svo. 4s. 6d. TANNER.— *ELEMBNTARY LESSONS IN THE SCIENCE OF AGRICULTURAL PRACTICE. By Henry Tanner, F.C.S., M.R.A.C, Examiner in the Prin- ciples of Agriculture under the Government Department of Science. Fcap. Svo. 3s. 6d. *FIRST PRINCIPLES OF AGRICULTURE. By the same. ISmo. Is. THE PRINCIPLES OF AGRICULTURE. By the same. A Series of Reading Books for use in Elementary Schools. Ex. fcap. 8v% *I. The Alphabet of the Principles of Agriculture. 6d. *II. Further Steps in the Principles of .^riculture. Is. *III. Elementary School Readings on the Principles of Agriculture for the third stage. Is. 46 TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE WARD.— TIMBER AND SOME OF ITS DISEASES. By H. Marshall Ward, M.A., F.L.S., P.R.S., Fellow of Christ's College, Cambridge, Professor of Botany at the Royal Indian Engineering College, Cooper's Hill. With Illustra- tions. Cr. 8vo. 6s. DOMESTIC ECONOMY. *BARKER.— FIRST LESSONS IN THE PRINCIPLES OF COOKING. By Lady Barker. 18mo. Is. *BERNERS,— FIRST LESSONS ON HEALTH. By J. Berners. 18mo. Is. »COOKERY BOOK.— THE MIDDLE CLASS COOKERY BOOK. Edited by the Manchester School of Domestic Cookery. Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d. CRAVEN.- A GUIDE TO DISTRICT NURSES. By Mrs. Dacre Craven {nh Florence Sarah Lees), Hon. Associate of the Order of St. John of Jerusalem, etc. Cr..8vo. 2s. 6d. FREDERICK.— HINTS TO HOUSEWIVES ON SEVERAL POINTS, PAR- TICULARLY ON THE PREPARATION OF ECONOMICAL AND TASTEFUL DISHES. By Mrs. Frederick, Cr. 8vo. Is. *GRAND'HOMME.— CUTTING-OUT AND DRESSMAKING. From the French of Mdlle. E. Grand'homme. With Diagrams. 18mo. Is. JEX-BLAKE.— THE CARE OF INFANTS. A Manual for Mothers and Nurses. By Sophia Jex-Blake, M.D., Lecturer on Hygiene at the London School of Medicine for Women. 18mo. Is. RATHBONE.— THE HISTORY AND PROGRESS OP DISTRICT NURSING FROM ITS COMMENCEMENT IN THE YEAR 1859 TO THE PRESENT DATE, including the foundation by the Queen of the Queen Victoria Jubilee Institute for Nursing the Poor in their own Homes. By William Rathbone, M.P. Cr. 8vo. 23. 6d. *TEGETMEIER.— HOUSEHOLD MANAGEMENT AND COOKERY. With an Appendix of Recipes used by the Teachers of the National School of Cookery. By W. B. Tegetmeier, Compiled at the request of the School Board for London. 18mo. Is. »WRIGHT.— THE SCHOOL COOKERY-BOOK. Compiled and Edited by C. B. Guthrie Wright, Hon. Sec. to the Edinburgh School of Cookery. 18mo. Is. BOOK-KEEPING-. *THORNTON.— FIRST LESSONS IN BOOK-KEEPING. By J. Thornton. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY. Oblong 4to. 10s. 6d. *PRIMER OF BOOK-KEEPING. By the same. 18mo. Is. KEY. Svo. ^s. 6d. GEOGRAPHY. (See also PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY.) BARTHOLOMEW.— *THB ELEMENTARY SCHOOL ATLAS. By John Bar- tholomew, F.R.G.S. 4to. Is. *MACMILLAN'S SCHOOL ATLAS, PHYSICAL AND POLITICAL. Consisting of 80 Maps and complete Index. By the same. Prepared for the use of Senior Pupils. Royal 4to. 8s. 6d. Half-morocco. 10s. 6d. THE LIBRARY REFERENCE ATLAS OF THE WORLD. By the same. A Complete Series of 84 Modern Maps. With Geographical Index to 100,000 places. Half- morocco. Gilt edges. Folio. £2: 12: 6 net. Also issued in parts, 5s. each net. Geographical Index, 7s. 6d. net. Part I., April 1891. *CLARKE.— CLASS-BOOK OP GEOGRAPHY. By C. B. Clarke, F.R.S. New Ed., revised 1889, with 18 Maps. Fcap. Svo. 3s. Sewed, 2s. 6d. GEIKIE.— Works by Archibald Geikie, F.R.S., Director-General of the Geological Survey of the United Kingdom. *TnE TEACHING OF GEOGRAPHY. A Practical Handbook for the use of Teachers. Cr. 8vo. 2s. ^GEOGRAPHY OP THE BRITISH ISLES. 18mo. Is. GEOGRAPHY — HISTORY 47 *GREEN.— A SHORT GEOGRAPHY OP THE BRITISH ISLANDS. By John Richard Green and A. S. Green. With Maps, Fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. *GROVE.— A PRIMER OP GEOGRAPHY. By Sir George Grove, D.C.L. Illustrated. ISmo. Is. KIEPERT.— A MANUAL OF ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY. By Dr. H. Kiepert. Or. 8vo. 5s. MAOMILLAN'S GEOGRAPHICAL SERIES. — Edited by Archibald Geikie, P.R.S., Director-General of the Geological Survey of the United Kingdom. *THE TEACHING OP GEOGRAPHY. A Practical Handbook for the Use of Teachers. By Archibald Geikie, F.R.S. Cr. 8vo. 2s. *MAPS AND MAP-DRAWING. By W. A. Elderton. ISmo. Is. *GEOGRAPHY OF THE BRITISH ISLES. By A. Geikie, F.R.S. 18mo. Is. *AN ELEMENTARY CLASS-BOOK OF GENERAL GEOGRAPHY. By H. R. Mill, D.Sc, Lecturer on Physiography and on Commercial Geography in the Heriot-Watt College, Edinburgh. Illustrated. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. ♦GEOGRAPHY OP EUROPE. By J. Sime, M.A. Illustrated. Gl. 8vo. Ss. *BLEMENTARY GEOGRAPHY OF INDIA, BURMA, AND CEYLON. By H. F. Blanford, F.G.S. Gl. 8vo. 2s. 6d. GEOGRAPHY OF NORTH AMERICA. By Prof. N. S. Shaler. [In preparation. GEOGRAPHY OF THE BRITISH COLONIES. By G. M. Dawson and A. Sutherland. [In preparation. *4t* Other volumes will be announced in due course. STRACHEY.— LECTURES ON GEOGRAPHY. By General Richard Strachey, R.E. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. *TOZER.— A PRIMER OF CLASSICAL GEOGRAPHY. By H. P. Tozer, M.A. 18mo. Is. HISTORY. ARNOLD.— THE SECOND PUNIC WAR. Being Chapters from THE HISTORY OF ROME, by the late Thomas Arnold, D.D. , Headmaster of Rugby. Edited, with Notes, by W. T. Arnold, M.A. With 8 Maps. Cr. 8vo. 5s. ARNOLD.— THE ROMAN SYSTEM OP PROVINCIAL ADMINISTRATION TO THE ACCESSION OP CONSTANTINE THE GREAT. By W. T. Arnold, M.A. Cr. 8vo. 6s. *BEESLY.— STORIES FROM THE HISTORY OF ROME. By Mrs. Beeslt. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. BRTOE.— Works by James Bryce, M.P., D.C.L., Regius Professor of Civil Law in the University of Oxford. THE HOLY ROMAN EMPIRE. 9th Ed. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. *^^* Also a Library Edition. Demy Svo. 143. THE AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH. 2 vols. Ex. cr. Svo. 25s. Part I. The National Government. Part II. The State Governments. Part III. The Party System. Part IV. Public Opinion. Part V. Illustrations and Reflections. Part VI. Social Institutions. *BUOKLEY.-A HISTORY OF ENGLAND FOR BEGINNERS. By Arabella B. Buckley. With Maps and Tables. Gl. 8vo. 3s. BURY.— A HISTORY OF THE LATER ROMAN EMPIRE FROM ARCADIUS TO IRENE, A.D. 895-800. By John B. Bury, M.A., Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin. 2 vols. 8vo. S2s. CASSEL.— MANUAL OF JEWISH HISTORY AND LITERATURE. By Dr. D. Cassel. Translated by Mrs. Henry Lucas. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. ENGLISH STATESMEN, TWELVE. Cr. 8vo. 2s. 6d. each. William the Conqueror. By Edward A. Freeman, D.C.L., LL.D. Henry II. By Mrs. J. R. Green. Edward I. By P. York Powell. [In preparation. Henry VII. By James Gairdner. 48 HISTORY Cardinal Wolsey. By Professor M. Creighton. Elizabeth. By B. S. Beesly. [In preparation. Oliver Cromwell. By Frederic Harrison. William III. By H. U. Traill. Walpole. By John Morley, Chatham. By John Morley. [In preparation. Pitt. By John Morley. [hi preparation. Peel. By J. R. Thursfield. FISKE.— Works by John Fiske, formerly Lecturer on Philosophy at Harvard University. THE CRITICAL PERIOD IN AMERICAN HISTORY, 1783-1789. Ex. cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. THE BEGINNINGS OF NEW ENGLAND ; or, The Puritan Theocracy in its Relations to Civil and Religious Liberty. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. FREEMAN.— Works by Edward A. Freeman, D.C.L., Regius Professor of Modem History in the University of Oxford, etc. *OLD ENGLISH HISTORY. With Maps. Ex. fcap. 8vo. 6s. A SCHOOL HISTORY OP ROME. Cr. 8vo. [In preparation. METHODS OF HISTORICAL STUDY. 8vo. 10s. 6d. THE CHIEF PERIODS OF EUROPEAN HISTORY. Six Lectures. With an Essay on Greek Cities under Roman Rule. Svo. 10s. 6d. HISTORICAL ESSAYS. First Series. 4th Ed. 8vo. 10s. 6d. HISTORICAL ESSAYS. Second Series. 3d Ed., with additional Essays. Svo. 10s. 6d. HISTORICAL ESSAYS. Third Series. 8vo. 12s. THE GROWTH OF THE ENGLISH CONSTITUTION FROM THE EARLIEST TIMES. 4th Ed. Cr. Svo. 5s. ^GENERAL SKETCH OF EUROPEAN HISTORY. Enlarged, with Maps, etc. ISmo. 3s. 6d. *PRIMER OF EUROPEAN HISTORY. ISmo. Is. (History Primers.) FRIEDMANN.— ANNE BOLEYN. A Chapter of English History, 1527-1536, By Paul Friedmann. 2 vols. Svo. 2Ss. FYFFE.— A SCHOOL HISTORY OF GREECE. By C. A. Fyffe, M.A., late Fellow of University College, Oxford. Cr. Svo. [In preparation. GIBBINS.— THE HISTORY OF COMMERCE IN EUROPE. By H. de B. GiBBiNS, M.A. With Maps. ISrao. 2s. 6d. GREEN.— Works by John Richard Green, LL.D., late Honorary Fellow of Jesus College, Oxford. *A SHORT HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH PEOPLE. New and Revised Ed. With Maps, Genealogical Tables, and Chronological Annals. Cr. Svo. Ss. 6d. 151st Thousand. *Also the same in Four Parts. With the corresponding portion of Mr. Tait's "Analysis." Crown Svo. 3s. each. Part I. 607-1265. Part IL 1204-1553, Part III. 1540-1689. Part IV. 1660-1873. HISTORY OP THE ENGLISH PEOPLE, In four vols, Svo. 16s. each. Vol, I.— Early England, 449-1071 ; Foreign Kings, 1071-1214 ; The Charter, 1214-1291 ; The Parliament, 1307-1461. With S Maps, Vol, II,— The Monarchy, 1461-1540 ; The Reformation, 1540-1603, Vol. III.— Puritan England, 1603-1660 ; The Revolution, 1660-1688, With four Maps, Vol, IV.— The Revolution, 1688-1760; Modern England, 1760-1815. With Maps and Index, THE MAKING OP ENGLAND, With Maps, Svo, 16s, THE CONQUEST OF ENGLAND, With Maps and Portrait, Svo, ISs. *ANALYSIS OF ENGLISH HISTORY, based on Green's " Short History of the English People." By C. W. A. Tait, M.A., Assistant Master at Clifton College. Revised and Enlarged Ed. Crown Svo. 4s. 6d. ♦READINGS FROM ENGLISH HISTORY. Selected and Edited by John Richard Green. Three Parts. Gl. Svo. Is. 6d, each. I. Hengist to Cressy. II. Cressy to Cromwell. III. Cromwell to Balaklava. HISTORY 49 GUEST.— LECTURES ON THE HISTORY OP ENGLAND. By M. J. Guest. With Maps. Cr. 8vo. 6s. ^HISTORICAL COURSE FOR SCHOOLS.— Edited by E. A. Freeman, D.C.L., Regius Professor of Modern History in the University of Oxford. 18mo. GENERAL SKETCH OF EUROPEAN HISTORY. By E. A. Freeman, D.C.L. New Ed., revised and enlarged. "With Chronological Table, Maps, and Index. 3s. 6d. HISTORY OP ENGLAND. By Edith Thompson. New Ed., revised and enlarged. With Coloured Maps. 2s. 6d. HISTORY OF SCOTLAND. By Margaret Macarthur. 2s. HISTORY OP ITALY. By Rev. W. Hunt, M.A. New Ed. With Coloured Maps. 3s. 6d. HISTORY OF GERMANY. By J. Sime, M.A. New Ed., revised. 3s. HISTORY OF AMERICA. By John A, Doyle. With Maps. 4s. 6d. HISTORY OF EUROPEAN COLONIES. By E. J. Payne, M.A. With Maps. 4s. 6d. HISTORY OF FRANCE. By Charlotte M. Yonge. With Maps. 33. 6d. HISTORY OF GREECE. By Edward A. Freeman, D.C.L. [In preparation. HISTORY OP ROME. By Edward A. Freeman, D.C.L. [In preparation. *HISTORY PRIMERS.— Edited by John Richard Green, LL.D. 18mo. Is. each. ROME. By Bishop Creighton. Maps. GREECE. By C. A. Fyffe, M.A., late Fellow of University College, Oxford. Maps. EUROPE. By E. A. Freeman, D.C.L. Maps. FRANCE. By Charlotte M. Yonge. INDIAN HISTORY : ASIATIC AND EUROPEAN. By J. Talboys Wheeler. GREEK ANTIQUITIES. By Rev. J. P. Mahaffy, D.D. Illustrated. CLASSICAL GEOGRAPHY. By H. F. Tozer, M.A. GEOGRAPHY. By Sir G. Grove, D.C.L. Maps. ROMAN ANTIQUITIES. By Prof. Wilkins, Litt.D. Illustrated. ANALYSIS OF ENGLISH HISTORY. By Prof. T. F. Tout, M.A. HOLE.— A GENEALOGICAL STEMMA OF THE KINGS OF ENGLAND AND FRANCE. By Rev. C. Hole. On Sheet. Is. JENNINGS.— CHRONOLOGICAL TABLES. A synchronistic arrangement of the events of Ancient History (with an Index). By Rev. Arthur C. Jennings. 8vo. 5s. LABBERTON.— NEW HISTORICAL ATLAS AND GENERAL HISTORY. By R. H. Labberton. 4to. New Ed., revised and enlarged. 15s. LETHBRIDGE.— A SHORT MANUAL OP THE HISTORY OF INDIA. With an Account of India as it is. The Soil, Climate, and Productions; the People, their Races, Religions, Public Works, and Industries; the Civil Services, and System of Administration. By Sir Roper Lethbridge, Fellow of the Calcutta University. With Maps. Cr. 8vo. 5s. MAHAFFY.— GREEK LIFE AND THOUGHT FROM THE AGE OF ALEX- ANDER TO THE ROMAN CONQUEST. By Rev. J. P. Mahaffy, D.D., Fellow of Trinity College, Dublin. Cr. 8vo. 12s. 6d. THE GREEK WORLD UNDER ROMAN SWAY. From Plutarch to Polybius. By the same Author. Cr. 8vo. 10s. Cd. MARRIOTT.— THE MAKERS OP MODERN ITALY : Mazzini, Cavour, Gari- baldi. Three Lectures. By J. A. R. Marriott, M.A., Lecturer in Modern History and Political Economy, Oxford. Cr. Svo. Is. 6d. MIOHELET.— A SUMMARY OP MODERN HISTORY. By M. Michelet. Trans- lated by M. C. M. Simpson. G1. Svo. 4s. 6d. NORGATE. —ENGLAND UNDER THE ANGEVIN KINGS. By Kate Norgate. With Maps and Plans. 2 vols. 8vo. 823. OTTfi.— SCANDINAVIAN HISTORY. By E. C. Orrfs. With Maps. Gl. Svo. 6s. D 60 HISTORY — ART SEELEY.— Works by J. R. Seeley, M.A., Regius Professor of Modern History in the University of Cambridge. THE EXPANSION OF ENGLAND. CroAvn 8vo. 4s. 6d. OUR COLONIAL EXPANSION. Extracts from the above. Cr. 8vo. Sewed. Is. *TAIT. — ANALYSIS OP ENGLISH HISTORY, based on Green's "Short History of the English People." By C. W. A. Tait, M.A., Assistant Master at Clifton. Revised and Enlarged Ed. Cr. 8vo. 4s. 6d. WHEELER. — Works by J. Talboys Wheeler. *A PRIMER OP INDIAN HISTORY. Asiatic and European. ISmo. Is. ^COLLEGE HISTORY OF INDIA, ASIATIC AND EUROPEAN. With Maps. Cr. Svo. 3s. ; sewed, 2s. 6d. A SHORT HISTORY OF INDIA AND OF THE FRONTIER STATES OF AFGHANISTAN, NEPAUL, AND BURMA. With Maps. Cr. Svo. 12s. YONGE. — Works by Charlotte M. Yonge. CAMEOS FROM ENGLISH HISTORY. Ex. fcap. Svo. 5s. each. (1) FROM ROLLO TO EDWARD II. (2) THE WARS IN FRANCE. (3) THE WARS OF THE ROSES. (4) REFORMATION TIMES. (5) ENG- LAND AND SPAIN. (6) FORTY YEARS OF STUART RULE (1603-1643). (7) REBELLION AND RESTORATION (1642-167S), EUROPEAN HISTORY. Narrated in a Series of Historical Selections from the Best Authorities. Edited and aiTanged by E. M. Sewell and C. M. Yonge. Cr. Svo. First Series, 1003-1154. 6s. Second Series, 1088-1228. 6s. THE VICTORIAN HALF CENTURY — A JUBILEE BOOK. With a New Portrait of the Queen. Cr. 8vo. Paper covers. Is. Cloth, Is. 6d. ART. *ANDERSON.— LINEAR PERSPECTIVE AND MODEL DRAWING. A School and Art Class Manual, with Questions and Exercises for Examination, and Examples of Examination Papers. By Laurence Anderson. Illustrated. Svo. 2s. COLLIER.— A PRIMER OF ART. By the Hon. John Collier. Illustrated. ISmo. Is. COOK.— THE NATIONAL GALLERY, A POPULAR HANDBOOK TO. By Edward T. Cook, with a preface by John Buskin, LL.D., and Selections from his Writings. 3d Ed. Cr. Svo. Half-morocco, 14s. %* Also an Edition on large paper, limited to 250 copies. 2 vols. Svo. DELAMOTTE.— A BEGINNER'S DRAWING BOOK. By P. H. Delamotte, F.S.A. Progressively aiTanged. New Ed., improved. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. ELLIS.— SKETCHING FROM NATURE. A Handbook for Students and Amateurs. By Tristram J. Ellis. Illustrated by H. Stacy Marks, R.A., and the Author. New Ed., revised and enlarged. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. GROVE.— A DICTIONARY OF MUSIC AND MUSICIANS, a.d. 1450-1889. Edited by Sir George Grove, D.C.L. In four vols. Svo. Price 21s. each. Also in Parts. Parts I.-XIV., Parts XIX.-XXII., 3s. 6d. each. Parbs XV., XVI., 7s. Parts XVII., XVIII., 7s. Parts XXIII.-XXV. (Appendix), 9s. A COMPLETE INDEX TO THE ABOVE. By Mrs. E. Wodehouse. Svo. 7s. 6d. HUNT.— TALKS ABOUT ART. By William Hunt. With a Letter from Sir J. E. MiLLAis, Bart., R.A. Cr. Svo. 3s. 6d. MELDOLA.— THE CHEMISTRY OF PHOTOGRAPHY. By Raphael Meldola, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry in the Technical College, Finsbury. Cr. Svo. 6s. TAYLOR.— A PRIMER OP PIANOFORTE-PLAYING. By Franklin Taylor. Edited by Sir George Grove. ISmo. Is. TAYLOR.— A SYSTEM OF SIGHT-SINGING FROM THE ESTABLISHED MUSICAL NOTATION ; based on the Principle of Tonic Relation, and lUus- trated by Extracts from the Works of the Great Masters. By Sedley Taylor, 8vo. 5s. net. DIVINITY 61 TYRWHITT.— OUR SKETCHING CLUB. Letters and Studies on Landscape Art. By Rev. R. St. John Tyrwhitt. With an authorised Reproduction of the Lessons and Woodcuts in Prof. Ruskin's "Elements of Drawing." 4th Ed. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. DIVINITY. ABBOTT.— BIBLE LESSONS. By Rev. Edwin A. Abbott, D. D. Cr. 8vo. 43. 6d. ABBOTT— RUSHBROOKE.-THE COMMON TRADITION OF THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS, in the Text of the Revised Version. By Rev. Edwin A. Abbott, D.D., and W. G. Rushbrooke, M.L. Cr. 8vo. 3s. 6d. ARNOLD.— Works by Matthew Arnold. A BIBLE-READING FOR SCHOOLS,— THE GREAT PROPHECY OF ISRAEL'S RESTORATION (Isaiah, Chapters xl.-lxvi.) Arranged and Edited for Young Learners. ISmo. Is. ISAIAH XL.-LXVI. With the Shorter Prophecies allied to it. Arranged and Edited, with Notes. Cr. Svo. 5s. ISAIAH OF JERUSALEM, IN THE AUTHORISED ENGLISH VERSION. With Introduction, Corrections and Notes. Cr. Svo. 4s. 6d. BENHAM.— A COMPANION TO THE LECTIONARY. Being a Commentary on the Proper Lessons for Sundays and Holy Days. By Rev. W. Benham, B.D. Cr. Svo. 4s. 6d. CASSEL.— MANUAL OF JEWISH HISTORY AND LITERATURE ; preceded by a BRIEF SUMMARY OF BIBLE HISTORY. By Dr. D. Cassel. Translated by Mrs. H. Lucas. Fcap. Svo. 2s. 6d. CHURCH.— STORIES FROM THE BIBLE. By Rev. A J. Church, M.A. Illus- trated. Cr. Svo. 5s. *CROSS.— BIBLE READINGS SELECTED FROM THE PENTATEUCH AND THE BOOK OF JOSHUA. By Rev. John A. Cross. 2d Ed., enlarged, with Notes. Gl. Svo. 2s. 6d. DRUMMOND.— INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF THEOLOGY. By James Drummond, LL.D., Professor of Theology in Manchester New College, London. Cr. Svo. 5s. FARRAR.— Works by the Venerable Archdeacon P, W. Farrar, D.D., F.R.S., Archdeacon and Canon of Westminster. THE HISTORY OF INTERPRETATION. Being the Bampton Lectures, 1S85. Svo. 16s. THE MESSAGES OF THE BOOKS. Being Discourses and Notes on the Books of the New Testament. Svo. 14s. *GASKOIN.— THE CHILDREN'S TREASURY OF BIBLE STORIES. By Mrs. Herman Gaskoin. Edited with Preface by Rev. G. P. Maclear, D.D. ISmo. Is. each. Part I.— Old Testament History. Part II. — New Testa- ment. Part III.— The Apostles : St. James the Great, St. Paul, and St. John the Divine. GOLDEN TREASURY PSALTER.— Students' Edition. Being an Edition of " The Psalms chronologically arranged, by Four Friends," with briefer Notes. ISmo. 3s. 6d. GREEK TESTAMENT.— Edited, with Introduction and Appendices, by Bishop Westcott and Dr. F. J. A. Hort. Two Vols. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. each. Vol. I. The Text. Vol. II. Introduction and Appendix. SCHOOL EDITION OF TEXT. 12mo. Cloth, 4s. 6d. ; Roan, red edges, 5s. 6d. ISmo. Morocco, gilt edges, 6s. 6d. *GRBEK TESTAMENT, SCHOOL READINGS IN THE. Being the outline of the life of our Lord, as given by St. Mark, with additions from the Text of the other Evangelists. Arranged and Edited, with Notes and Vocabulary, by Rev. A. Calvert, M.A. Fcap. Svo. 28. 6d. 62 DIVINITY *THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO ST. MATTHEW. Being the Greek Text as revised by Bishop Westcott and Dr. Hort. With Introduction and Notes by Rev. A. Sloman, M.A., Headmaster of Birkenhead School. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO ST. MARK. Being the Greek Text as revised by Bishop Westcott and Dr. Hort. With Introduction and Notes by Rev. J. O. F. Murray, M.A., Lecturer at Emmanuel College, Cambridge. Fcap. 8vo. [In preparation. *THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO ST. LUKE. Being the Greek Text as revised by Bishop Westcott and Dr. Hort. With Introduction and Notes by Rev. John Bond, M.A. Fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. *THE ACTS OP THE APOSTLES. Being the Greek Text as revised by Bishop Westcott and Dr. Hort. With Explanatory Notes by T. E. Page, M.A., Assistant Master at the Charterhouse. Fcap. Svo. 3s. 6d. GWATKIN.— CHURCH HISTORY TO THE BEGINNING OF THE MIDDLE AGES. By H. M. Gwatkin, M.A. Svo. [In preparation. HARDWICK.— Works by Archdeacon Hardwick. A HISTORY OF THE CHRISTIAN CHURCH. Middle Age. From Gregory the Great to the Excommunication of Luther. Edited by W. Stubbs, D.D., Bishop of Oxford. With 4 Maps. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. A HISTORY OF THE CHRISTIAN CHURCH DURING THE REFORMA- TION. 9th Ed. Edited by Bishop Stubbs. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. HOOLE.— THE CLASSICAL ELB MENT IN THE NEW TESTAMENT. Considered as a proof of its Genuineness, with an Appendix on the Oldest Authorities used in the Formation of the Canon. By Charles H. Hoole, M.A., Student of Christ Church, Oxford. Svo. 10s. 6d. JENNINGS and LOWE. — THE PSALMS, WITH INTRODUCTIONS AND CRITICAL NOTES. By A. 0. Jennings, M.A. ; assisted in parts by W. H. Lowe, M.A. In 2 vols. 2d Ed., revised. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. each. KIRKPATRIOK.— THE MINOR PROPHETS. Warburtonian Lectures. By Rev. Prof. Kirkpatrick. [In preparation. KUENEN.— PENTATEUCH AND BOOK OF JOSHUA: An Historico - Critical Inquiry into the Origin and Composition of the Hexateuch. By A. Kuenen. Translated by P. H. Wicksteed, M.A. Svo. 143. LIGHTFOOT.— Works by the Right Rev. J. B. Lightfoot, D.D., late Bishop of Durham. ST. PAUL'S EPISTLE TO THE GAIiATIANS. A Revised Text, with Introduc- tion, Notes, and Dissertations. 10th Ed., revised. Svo. 12s. ST. PAUL'S EPISTLE TO THE PHILIPPIANS. A Revised Text, with Intro- duction, Notes, and Dissertations. 9th Ed., revised. Svo. 12s. ST. PAUL'S EPISTLES TO THE COLOSSIANS AND TO PHILEMON. A Revised Text, with Introductions, Notes, and Dissertations. 8th Ed., revised. Svo. 12s. THE APOSTOLIC FATHERS. Part L ST. CLEMENT OF ROME. A Revised Text, with Introductions, Notes, Dissertations, and Translations. 2 vols. Svo. 82s. THE APOSTOLIC FATHERS. Part IL ST. IGNATIUS— ST. POLYCARP. Revised Texts, with Introductions, Notes, Dissertations, and Translations. 2d Ed. 3 vols. Svo. 4Ss. THE APOSTOLIC FATHERS. Abridged Edition. With short Introductions, Greek Text, and English Translation. Svo. [In the Press. ESSAYS ON THE WORK ENTITLED "SUPERNATURAL RELIGION." (Reprinted from the Contemporary Review.) Svo. 10s. 6d. MACLEAR.— Works by the Rev. G. F. Maclear, D.D., Warden of St. Augustine's College, Canterbury. ELEMENTARY THEOLOGICAL CLASS-BOOKS. *A SHILLING BOOK OF OLD TESTAMENT HISTORY. With Map. ISmo. *A SHILLING BOOK OF NEW TESTAMENT HISTORY. With Map. ISmo. These works have been carefully abridged from the Author's large manuals. •A CLASS-BOOK OF OLD TESTAMENT HISTORY. Maps. ISmo. 4s. 6d. DIVINITY 53 MAOLEAR.— Works by Rev. G. F. Maclear, D.D.— continued. *A CLASS-BOOK OF NEW TESTAMENT HISTORY, including the Connection of the Old and New Testaments. With maps. 18mo, 5s. 6d. AN INTRODUCTION TO THE THIRTY-NINE ARTICLES. [In the Press. *AN INTRODUCTION TO THE CREEDS. 18mo. 2s. 6d. *A CLASS-BOOK OP THE CATECHISM OF THE CHURCH OF ENGLAND. 18mo. Is. 6d. *A FIRST CLASS-BOOK OF THE CATECHISM OF THE CHURCH OF ENGLAND. With Scripture Proofs. ISmo. Cd. *A MANUAL OF INSTRUCTION FOR CONFIRMATION AND FIRST COM- MUNION. WITH PRAYERS AND DEVOTIONS. 32mo. 2s. MAURICE.— THE LORD'S PRAYER, THE CREED, AND THE COMMAND- MENTS. To which is added the Order of the Scriptures. By Rev. F. D. Maurice, M.A. ISmo. Is. THE PENTATEUCH AND BOOK OF JOSHUA: An Historico - Critical Inquiry into the Origin and Composition of the Hexateuch. By A. Kuenen, Professor of Theology at Leiden. Translated by P. H. Wicksteed, M.A. Svo. 14s. PROCTER.— A HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF COMMON PRAYER, with a Ration- ale of its Offices. By Rev. F. Procter. 18th Ed. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. ♦PROCTER and MACLEAR.— AN ELEMENTARY INTRODUCTION TO THE BOOK OF COMMON PRAYER. Rearranged and supplemented by an Ex- planation of the Morning and Evening Prayer and the Litany. By Rev. F. Pbocteb and Rev. Dr. Maclear. New Edition, containing the Communion Service and the Confirmation and Baptismal Offices. ISmo. 2s. 6d. THE PSALMS, CHRONOLOGICALLY ARRANGED. By Four. Friends. New Ed. Cr. 8vo. 5s. net. THE PSALMS, WITH INTRODUCTIONS AND CRITICAL NOTES. By A. C. Jennings, M.A., Jesus College, Cambridge ; assisted in parts by W. H. Lowe, M.A., Hebrew Lecturer at Christ's College, Cambridge. In 2 vols. 2d Ed., revised. Cr. Svo. 10s. 6d. each. RYLE.— AN INTRODUCTION TO THE CANON OF THE OLD TESTAMENT. By Rev. H. E. Ryle, Hulsean Professor of Divinity in the University of Cam- bridge. Cr. Svo. [In preparation. SIMPSON.— AN EPITOME OF THE HISTORY OF THE CHRISTIAN CHURCH DURING THE FIRST THREE CENTURIES, AND OF THE REFORMATION IN ENGLAND. By Rev. William Simpson, M. A. 7th Ed. Fcap.Svo. 3s. 6d. ST. JAMES' EPISTLE.— The Greek Text, with Introduction and Notes. By Rev. Joseph Mayor, M.A., Professor of Moral Philosophy in King's College, London, Svo. [In the Press. ST. JOHN'S EPISTLES.— The Greek Text, with Notes and Essays. By Right Rev. B. P. Westcott, D.D., Bishop of Durham. 2d Ed., revised. Svo. 12s. 6d. ST. PAUL'S EPISTLES.— THE EPISTLE TO THE ROMANS. Edited by the Very Rev. C. J. Vaughan, D.D., Dean of Llandaff". 5th Ed. Cr. Svo. 7s. 6d. THE TWO EPISTLES TO THE CORINTHIANS, A COMMENTARY ON. By the late Rev. W. Kay, D.D., Rector of Great Leghs, Essex. Svo. 9s. THE EPISTLE TO THE GALATIANS. Edited by the Right Rev. J. B. LiGHTFOOT, D.D. 10th Ed. Svo. 12s. THE EPISTLE TO THE PHILIPPIANS. By the Same Editor. 9th Ed. Svo. 12s. THE EPISTLE TO THE PHILIPPIANS, with Translation, Paraphrase, and Notes for English Readers. By the Very Rev. C. J. Vatjghan, D.D. Cr. Svo. 5s. THE EPISTLE TO THE COLOSSIANS AND TO PHILEMON. By the Right Rev. J. B. LiGHTFOOT, D.D. 8th Ed. Svo. 12s. THE EPIST^iBS TO THE EPHESIANS, THE COLOSSIANS, AND PHILE- MON ; with Introductions and Notes, and an Essay on the Traces of Foreign Elements in the Theology of these Epistles. By Rev. J. Llewelyn Da vies, M.A. Svo. 7s. 6d. THE EPISTLE TO THE THESSALONIANS, COMMENTARY ON THE GREEK TEXT. By John Eadie, D.D. Edited by Rev. W. Young, M.A., with Preface by Prof. Cairns. Svo. 12s. 64 DIVmiTY THE EPISTLE TO THE HEBREWS.— In Greek and English. With Critical and Explanatory Notes. Edited by Rev. F. Rendall, M.A. Cr. 8vo. 6s. THE ENGLISH TEXT, WITH COMMENTARY. By the same Editor. Cr. 8vo, 7s. 6d. THE GREEK TEXT. With Notes by C. J. Vaughan, D.D., Dean of Llandaflf. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. THE GREEK TEXT. With Notes and Essays by the Right Rev. Bishop Westcott, D.D. 8vo. 14s. VAUGHAN.— THE CHURCH OF THE FIRST DAYS. Comprising the Church of Jerusalem, the Church of the Gentiles, the Church of the World. By C. J. Vaughan, D.D., Dean of Llandaff. New Ed. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. WESTCOTT.— Works by the Right Rev. Brooke Foss Westcott, D.D., Bishop of Durham. A GENERAL SURVEY OF THE HISTORY OF THE CANON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT DURING THE FIRST FOUR CENTURIES. 6th Ed. With Preface on " Supernatural Religion." Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF THE FOUR GOSPELS. 7th Ed. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. THE BIBLE IN THE CHURCH. A Popular Account of the Collection and Reception of the Holy Scriptures in the Christian Churches. ISmo. 4s, 6d. THE EPISTLES OF ST. JOHN. The Greek Text, with Notes and Essays. 2d Ed., revised. 8vo. 12s. 6d. THE EPISTLE TO THE HEBREWS. The Greek Text, with Notes and Essays. 8vo. 14s. SOME THOUGHTS FROM THE ORDINAL. Cr. 8vo, Is. 6d. WESTCOTT and HORT.— THE NEW TESTAMENT IN THE ORIGINAL GREEK. The Text, revised by the Right Rev. Bishop Westcott and Dr. F. J, A. HoRT. 2 vols. Cr. 8vo. 10s. 6d. each. Vol. L Text. Vol. II. Introduction and Appendix. SCHOOL EDITION OF TEXT. 12rao. 4s. 6d,; Roan, red edges, 5s. 6d. ISmo. Morocco, gilt edges, 6s. 6d. WILSON.— THE BIBLE STUDENT'S GUIDE to the more correct understanding of the English Translation of the Old Testament, by reference to the original Hebrew. By William Wilson, D.D., Canon of Winchester. 2d Ed., carefully revised. 4to. 25s. WRIGHT.— THE COMPOSITION OF THE FOUR GOSPELS. A Critical En- quiry. By Rev. Arthur Wright, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Queen's College, Cambridge. Cr. 8vo. 5s. WRIGHT.— THE BIBLE WORD-BOOK: A Glossary of Archaic Words and Phrases in the Authorised Version of the Bible and the Book of Common Prayer. By W. Aldis Wright, M.A., Vice-Master of Trinity College, Cam- bridge. 2d Ed., revised and enlarged. Cr. 8vo. 7s. 6d. *YONGE.— SCRIPTURE READINGS FOR SCHOOLS AND FAMILIES. By Charlotte M. Yonge. In Five Vols. Ex. fcap. Svo. Is. 6d. each. With Comments. 3s. 6d. each. First Series.- Genesis to Deuteronomy. Second Series.- From Joshua to Solomon. Third Series.— The Kings and the Prophets. Fourth Series, —The Gospel Times. Fifth Series.— Apostolic Times. ZEOHARIAH— THE HEBREW STUDENT'S COMMENTARY ON ZECHARIAH, HEBREW AND LXX. With Excursus on Syllable-dividing, Metheg, Initial Dagesh, and Siman Rapheh. By W. H. Lowe, M.A., Hebrew Lecturer at Christ's College, Cambridge. 8vo. IDs. 6d. Printed by R. & R. Clark, Edinburgh. The Times says : ' ' Both artists and writers have done their best to give it a high place in English periodical literature, and the result is a magazine which has no rival in England." The Guardian describes it as : " Full of good matter both in the way of writing and drawing. ... A capital magazine for all tables and all ®It^ (Kngltalr SUttstrat^tr jKagaJtm, 1884. A Handsome Volume, of'jg2 pages, with 428 Illustrations, price *js. 6d. The Volume contains a Complete Series of Descriptive Sketches by the Author of "John Halifax, Gentleman," with Illustrations by C. Napier Hemy ; a Complete Historical Novel by Charlotte M. YoNGE ; and numerous Short Stories and Essays on Popular Subjects by well-known Writers. %\it dngltalj lUustraM Jltagajitt^, 1885. A Handsome Volume, of %^o pages, with nearly 5cx) Illustrations, price %s. The Volume contains a Complete Novel, "A FAMILY AFFAIR," by Hugh Conway, Author of "Called Back," and also Complete Stories and Essays by Bret Harte, the Author of "John Herring," Archibald Forbes, J. Henry Shorthouse, Henry Irving, Mrs. Oliphant, and others, besides numerous interesting miscellaneous Articles by the First Authors of the Day. Vc^t (gttglislj lUustrat^ir Jitagajtm, 1886. A Handsome Volume, of 2>2)2 pages, containing nearly 500 Illustra- tions, price 8j. Among the Chief Contributors to the Volume are the following : — The Author of "John Halifax, Gentleman." D. Christie Murray. Margaret Veley. W. E. NORRIS. Grant Allen. Clementina Black. Mrs. Molesworth. WiLKiE Collins. Mrs. Oliphant. Katharine S. Macquoid. Rev. Canon Ainger, Alfred T. Watson, H. Sutherland Ed- wards, Dr. Morell Mackenzie, A. C. Swinburne, Henry W. Lucy, Edmund Gosse, The Right Rev. The Bishop of Ripon, Ran- dolph Caldecott, Miss L. Alma-Tadema, and "Days with Sir Roger de Coverley," with pictures by Hugh Thomson. MACMILLAN AND CO., LONDON. ^ht (KngUslr Jllustrat^Ir iKaga^m^, 1887. A Handsome Volume^ of 832 pages, and containing nearly 500 Illus- trations, price 8j. The Volume contains the following Complete Stories and Serials : — Marzio's Crucifix. By F. Marion Crawford. A Secret Inheritance. By B. L. Farjeon. Jacquetta. By the Author of "John Herring." Gerald. By Stanley J. Weym AN. An Unknown Country. By the Author of " John Halifax, Gentleman." With Illustrations by F. Noel Paton. A Siege Baby. By J. S. Winter. Miss Falkland. By Clementina Black. %\t (Snjltalj lUustrat^i ittagajtm, 1888. A Handsome Volume, qf^'^ipp., with nearly 500 Illustrations, price 8j. Among the chief Contents of the Volume are the following Complete Stories and Serials : — Coaching Days and Coaching Ways. By W. O. Tristram. With Illustrations by H. Railton and Hugh Thomson. [of " Mehalah." The Story of Jael. By the Author Lil : A Liverpool Child. By Agnes C. Maitland. The Patagonia. By Henry James. [Weyman. Family Portraits. By S. J. The Mediation of Ralph Harde- lot. By Prof. W. Minto. That Girl in Black. By Mrs. Molesworth. Glimpses of Old English Homes. By Elizabeth Balch. Pagodas, Aurioles, and Umbrel- las. By C. F. Gordon Cumming. The Magic Fan. By John Strange Winter. %Mt (Bngltslj JlUtstrat^ir Jltagajm, 1889. A Handsome Volume, of goo pp., with nearly 500 Illustrations , price ^s. Among the chief Contents of the Volume are the following Complete Stories and Serials : — By F. Marion Wolf. By Sant' Ilario. Crawford. The House of the Stanley J. Weyman, Glimpses of Old English Homes. By Elizabeth Balch. One Night— The Better Man. By Arthur Paterson. How the " Crayture " got on the Strength. And other Sketches. By Archibald Forbes. La Belle Americaine. By W. E. NoRRis. [Macquoid. Success. By Katharine S. Jenny Harlowe. By W. Clark Russell. %\it (Bngltalr lUuairat^ir Jtlagajm^, 1890. A Handsome Volume, of goo pp., with nearly 550 Illustrations, price %s. Among the chief Contents of the Volume are the following Complete Stories and Serials : — The Ring of Amasis. By the Earl of Lytton. The Glittering Plain : or, the Land of Living Men. By William Morris. The Old Bro-wia Mare. By W. E. Norris. My Journey to Texas, By Arthur Paterson. A Glimpse of Highclere Castle— A Glimpse of Osterley Park. By Elizabeth Balch. For the Cause. By Stanley J. Weyman. Morised. By the Marchioness of Carmarthen. Overland from India. By Sir Donald Mackenzie Wallace, K.C.I.E. The Doll's House and Alter. By Walter Besant. La Mulette, Anno 1814. By W. Clark Russell. X^ iv.60.5.91. MACMILLAN AND CO., LONDON. THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WIL^ INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. oc AUG 6 \^m NOV 15 1946 }^M 1056 LI J8V12M:ttH Mae 1968- ^/ i,OA.M PEPT. IfpHi'^.z..